Download Section 1 - Emerson Process Management

RS3t
Service Manual
Volume 2
August 1998
U.S. Manual PN: 10P56980202
A-4 Size Manual PN: 10P56980212
10P56986101
10P56986111
E 1987--1999 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Components of the RS3 distributed process control system may be protected by U.S. patent Nos. 4,243,931; 4,370,257; 4,581,734. Other
Patents Pending.
RS3 is a mark of one of the Fisher-Rosemount group of companies. All other marks are property of their respective owners. The contents
of this publication are presented for informational purposes only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their accuracy, they are
not to be construed as warranties or guarantees, express or implied, regarding the products or services described herein or their use or
applicability. We reserve the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of such products without notice.
Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.
8301 Cameron Road
Austin, Texas 78754--3895 U.S.A.
Telephone:
FAX:
(512) 835--2190
(512) 834--7313
Comment Form
RS3t Manuals
Service Manual
10P569802x2
Please give us your feedback to help improve this manual.
Never
Rarely
Sometimes
Usually
Always
D
configuring
making changes or enhancements
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
D
operating the system
______
______
______
______
______
D
troubleshooting
D
other __________________________
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
______
1. Do you actually use this manual when
you are:
D
2. Does this manual answer your questions?
3. What could be changed in this manual to make it more useful?
Errors and Problems: Please note errors or problems in this manual, including chapter and page number,
if applicable; or send a marked-up copy of the affected page(s).
May we contact you about your comments?
j Yes
j No
Name
______________________________________________
Company
______________________________________________
Phone
______________________________________________
Date
______________________________________________
Fisher-Rosemount FAX #: (512) 834--7200
Thank you!
Name
Place
stamp
here
Company
Address
Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.
Technical Documentation
8301 Cameron Road
Austin, Texas 78754--3895
U.S.A.
Seal with tape.
SV: v
RS3t
Service Manual
About This Manual
The Service Manual provides information on service, calibration,
maintenance, and troubleshooting RS3 hardware. The Service Manual
provides a brief idea of the function of each device, along with details of
cabling, LEDs, jumpers, and fuses. Installation planning data is covered
in the Site Preparation and Installation Manual (SP).
Devices are arranged in functional groups but the quickest way to find
specific information is through the index. You can look a device up by
name, part number, or the legend printed on the silkscreen. An abstract
of the service data appears in the Service Quick Reference Guide (SQ),
which is small enough to be readily portable.
Factory Repair Items
Parts of devices that are listed as replacement parts are permitted to be
replaced in the field with the stated replacement part as designated in
the user documentation. Any part of a device that is not listed as a
replacement part is not to be replaced in the field, but must be
returned to the factory for repair.
Changes for This Release
D
D
RS3: Service Manual
Numerous corrections and minor revisions have been made
throughout the manual.
Information on the RS3 Millennium Package (RMP), the System
Power Supply Unit, and the MPC5 Controller Processor with
4 Meg NV Memory has been incorporated into the manual.
Information of the MAI16 and Loop Power Module has also been
incorporated.
About This Manual
SV: vi
Revision Level for This Manual
The Service Manual is independent of the Software Release level. New
equipment is added to the Service Manual with each release and older
material is updated. You should always use the latest version of the
Service Manual.
Refer to This Document:
For This
Software
Version:
All
Title
Service Manual
Date
Part Number
August 1998
10P569802x2
NOTE: The “x” in the part number is 0 for US size (8--1/2 x 11 inches)
or 1 for A--4 size.
References to Other Manuals
References to other RS3 user manuals list the manual, chapter, and
sometimes the section as shown below.
Sample Entries:
For ..., see CC: 3.
Manual Title
Chapter
For ..., see CC: 1-1.
Manual Title
Chapter-Section
Abbreviations of Manual Titles
AL = Alarm Messages
BA= ABC Batch
CB= ControlBlock Configuration
CC= Console Configuration
DT = Disk and Tape Functions
IO = I/O Block Configuration
OP= Operator’s Guide
OV= System Overview and Glossary
PW= PeerWay Interfaces
RB= Rosemount Basic Language
RI = RNI Installation Guide
RR= RNI Release Notes
RP = RNI Programmer’s Reference Manual
SP = Site Preparation and Installation
SV = Service
RS3: Service Manual
About This Manual
SV: vii
Reference Documents
Prerequisite Documents
You should be familiar with the information in the following documents
before using this manual:
NOTE: The “x” in the part number is 0 for US size (8--1/2 x 11 inches)
and 1 to 9 for A--4 size.
System Overview Manual and Glossary
Software Release Notes, Performance Series 1
1984-2640-21x0
10P56870106
Related Documents
You may find the following documents helpful when using this manual:
ABC Batch Software Manual
1984-2654-21x0
Alarm Messages Manual
1984-2657-19x1
ABC Batch Quick Reference Guide
1984-2818-1103
Configuration Quick Reference Guide
1984-2812-0808
Console Configuration Manual
1984-2643-21x0
ControlBlock Configuration Manual
1984-2646-21x0
I/O Block Configuration Manual
1984-2645-21x0
Operator’s Guide
1984-2647-19x1
PeerWay Interfaces Manual
1984-2650-21x0
Rosemount Basic Language Manual
1984-2653-21x0
RNI Programmer’s Reference Manual
1984-3356-03x1
RNI Installation Guide
1984-3357-02x5
RNI Release Notes
10P574830x1
Site Preparation and Installation Manual
10P569902x1
Service Quick Reference Guide
10P57000201
Software Discrepancies for Performance Series 1
10P56870304
User Manual Master Index
RS3: Service Manual
1984-2641-21x0
About This Manual
SV: viii
RS3: Service Manual
About This Manual
Contents of Volume 1
Chapter 1:
Power
Section 1:
AC Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1
AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1
1-1-3
1-1-4
1-1-5
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) LEDs and Controls . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (With Battery Backup) Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Charger Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Charger Card Jumpers and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Charger Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Measuring Output Current .
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Power Supply (Without Battery Backup) LEDs and Fuses . . . . . . . . .
MTCC Remote Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTCC Remote Power Supply Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTCC Remote Power Supply Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Remote Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Remote Power Supply Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC/DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC/DC Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 for I/O Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output . . . . . . .
10P5503 Remote Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Operator Interface Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5409 for Operator Interface Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Connector Pin-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2
1-2-6
1-2-7
1-2-8
1-2-9
1-2-11
1-2-12
1-2-12
1-2-13
1-2-15
1-2-16
1-2-16
1-2-18
1-2-18
1-2-19
1-2-20
1-2-22
1-2-23
1-2-25
1-2-26
1-2-27
1-2-28
1-2-30
1-2-31
1-2-31
1-2-31
1-2-31
1-2-32
1-2-33
1-2-34
Section 2:
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: x
10P5409 Remote Power Supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Checking and Adjusting Output . . . . . . .
10P5409 Remote Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5701 for Operator Interface Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P5756 for Operator Interface Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distribution Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distribution Block Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-34
1-2-34
1-2-34
1-2-35
1-2-36
1-2-37
1-2-37
System Power Supply Units
..............................
1-3-1
Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabinet and AC Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Cabinet DC Power Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Housing in a Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Power Supply in a Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Auxiliary AC Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing a Power Supply Housing from a System Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Housing in a Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a Power Supply in a Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing a Power Supply from a Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1
1-3-3
1-3-5
1-3-6
1-3-7
1-3-7
1-3-8
1-3-11
1-3-12
1-3-13
1-3-13
1-3-13
1-3-14
1-3-15
1-3-16
1-3-16
1-3-16
1-3-18
1-3-18
1-3-19
1-3-20
1-3-21
1-3-21
DC Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-1
DC Power Distribution Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Output Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Output Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard DC Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant DC Power Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Distribution System Color Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-3
1-4-5
1-4-6
1-4-7
1-4-7
1-4-8
1-4-10
Section 5:
Redundant Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-1
Chapter 2:
PeerWay
Section 1:
Electrical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1
Twinax PeerWay Tap Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-3
Section 3:
Section 4:
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xi
Section 2:
Section 3:
Chapter 3:
PeerWay Tap Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Tap Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding an Electrical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Twinax PeerWay Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Twinax PeerWay Cable Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Twinaxial Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-6
2-1-6
2-1-7
2-1-9
2-1-11
2-1-12
Optical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1
Optical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting Cables to an Optical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Tap Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Repeater/Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Repeater/Attenuator Jumpers and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Star Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding an Optical PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic Cable and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Fiber Optic Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3
2-2-5
2-2-6
2-2-8
2-2-8
2-2-9
2-2-10
2-2-13
2-2-13
Hybrid PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1
PeerWay Extender (PX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PX System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Twinax Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drop Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding the PX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PX LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PX Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal/Test Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PX Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2
2-3-5
2-3-6
2-3-6
2-3-6
2-3-7
2-3-7
2-3-7
2-3-8
2-3-8
2-3-8
2-3-9
Consoles
Section 1:
Multitube and Hardened Command Consoles
and System Manager Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Keyboard and Enhanced Engineering Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trackball Keyboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touchpad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4
3-1-5
3-1-6
3-1-6
3-1-7
3-1-8
3-1-9
3-1-10
3-1-11
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xii
Section 2:
Section 3:
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Electronics Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trackball Keyboard Electronics Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Keyswitch Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10P50840004
1984--3222--0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--2889--0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--1978--000x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Keyswitch Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--3222--1004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--2889--1004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Interface Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Interface LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Interface Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Interface Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRT: IIYAMA Vision Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: Hitachi HM--4721--D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: ViewSonic 17GS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: Mag Innovision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: Sony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: Conrac 7122 and 7241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conrac 7241 CRT Scan Board Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conrac 7241 CRT Scan Board Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conrac 7241 CRT Black Video or Black Bars on Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conrac 7241 CRT Power-up Diagnostics Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multitube Command Console CRT: Barco CD 551 and ICD 551 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-17
3-1-18
3-1-19
3-1-20
3-1-20
3-1-22
3-1-23
3-1-24
3-1-24
3-1-25
3-1-26
3-1-26
3-1-26
3-1-26
3-1-27
3-1-27
3-1-30
3-1-32
3-1-33
3-1-34
3-1-34
3-1-35
Pedestal Command Console and Basic Command Console .
3-2-1
Pedestal Command Console Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Loop Callup Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Command Entry Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Configuration Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Trackball Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Rotating (Alphanumeric) Keyboard . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Keyswitch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Disk Interface Card (SCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Command Console Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedestal Command Console Printer Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-3
3-2-4
3-2-4
3-2-4
3-2-4
3-2-5
3-2-5
3-2-6
3-2-8
3-2-11
3-2-11
3-2-11
MiniConsole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1
MiniConsole Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-4
RS3: Service Manual
3-1-12
3-1-12
3-1-13
3-1-13
3-1-14
3-1-15
3-1-16
Contents
SV: xiii
Section 4:
Section 5:
MiniConsole Power Regulator Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole PeerWay Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole OI Processor Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monochrome Video Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monochrome Video Generator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monochrome Video Generator Raster Test Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monochrome Video Generator Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole Printer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole Floppy Interface (SCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole Floppy Interface (SCSI) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floppy Disk Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floppy Disk Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote MiniConsole Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-6
3-3-6
3-3-6
3-3-7
3-3-9
3-3-9
3-3-10
3-3-11
3-3-11
3-3-11
3-3-12
3-3-13
3-3-14
3-3-16
3-3-16
RS3 Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1
RS3 Operator Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRT: Hitachi HM--4721--D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS CRT: Iiyama Vision Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS Operator Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROS Operator Keyboard Interface Circuit Board (10P56910001) . . . . . . .
ROS Operator Keyboard Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS3 Network Interface (RNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TP/8 Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS II Hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hub Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMS II Network Management Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transceiver Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hub Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPS Software Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2
3-4-3
3-4-3
3-4-3
3-4-4
3-4-6
3-4-7
3-4-8
3-4-9
3-4-11
3-4-11
3-4-12
3-4-13
3-4-13
3-4-14
3-4-14
3-4-15
3-4-16
3-4-17
Disk and Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1
Hard Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantum QM32100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantum Thunderbolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IBM Deskstar 540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantum ProDrive LPS 270S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantum ProDrive LPS 170S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantum ProDriver LPS 105S 3.5-Inch 102 Meg Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantum ProDriver 80S 3.5-Inch 100 MB Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quantum ProDriver Q280 5.25-Inch 100 MB Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2
3-5-5
3-5-6
3-5-7
3-5-8
3-5-9
3-5-10
3-5-11
3-5-13
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xiv
Section 6:
Section 7:
Quantum ProDriver Q540 5.25-Inch 40 MB Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MiniConsole 5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetic Tape Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetic Tape Drive Cabling and Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetic Tape Drive Jumper and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-15
3-5-16
3-5-16
3-5-18
3-5-20
3-5-23
3-5-24
3-5-25
Printers
.................................................
3-6-1
Fujitsu DL3800 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL3800 Printer Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL3800 Printer Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL4600 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL4600 Printer Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Paper Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DL2600 Printer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Vertical Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Error Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fujitsu DPL24C Printer Paper Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer Jumpers and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer Voltage Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer Modification for 30.5 Cm Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer Modification for Lowercase Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TI 810 Printer Printing Half Page of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-2
3-6-2
3-6-5
3-6-6
3-6-6
3-6-9
3-6-9
3-6-10
3-6-11
3-6-13
3-6-14
3-6-15
3-6-16
3-6-16
3-6-17
3-6-17
3-6-18
3-6-18
3-6-20
3-6-20
3-6-21
3-6-22
3-6-23
3-6-23
OI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-1
Electronics Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Manager Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Output Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Output Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Card Cage 10P52820001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Card Cage 1984--0660--0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Interface LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Interface Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7-2
3-7-4
3-7-5
3-7-5
3-7-7
3-7-10
3-7-14
3-7-15
3-7-17
3-7-18
3-7-20
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xv
OI Power Supply LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Power Supply Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Power Supply Jumpers for a System Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68040 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68040 Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68040 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68020 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68020 Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68020 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68000 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68000 Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Processor 68000 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pixel Graphics Video Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pixel Graphics Video Generator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Graphics Video Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Graphics Video Generator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Graphics Video Generator Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Interface LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Interface Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--3301--000x SCSI Board 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1984--1140--0001 OI SCSI Host Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Nonvolatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Bubble Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Bubble Memory LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Bubble Memory LED Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Bubble Memory Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM LED Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS3: Service Manual
3-7-22
3-7-23
3-7-23
3-7-24
3-7-25
3-7-27
3-7-29
3-7-29
3-7-29
3-7-30
3-7-32
3-7-33
3-7-33
3-7-34
3-7-36
3-7-37
3-7-38
3-7-39
3-7-41
3-7-42
3-7-44
3-7-45
3-7-46
3-7-49
3-7-51
3-7-52
3-7-55
3-7-56
3-7-56
3-7-58
3-7-60
3-7-62
3-7-65
3-7-66
3-7-67
3-7-69
3-7-74
3-7-77
3-7-78
3-7-81
Contents
SV: xvi
Chapter 4:
ControlFiles
Section 1:
ControlFile Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1
ControlFile Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Data Bus Terminators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Terminator II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Terminator Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-3
4-1-5
4-1-5
4-1-7
ControlFile Support Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-1
PeerWay Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Buffer LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Buffer Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Buffer Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile 5 VDC Only Power Regulator Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC LEDs and Test Points . . . .
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Power Regulator 5 VDC and 12 VDC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coordinator Processor (CP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-IV Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-I and CP-II Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP (Coordinator Processor) Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP LEDs, Test Points, and Enable/Disable Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP LED Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-IV+ (10P50870004 and 1984--4164--0004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-IV (1984--4064--000x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-II (1984--1594--000x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP-I (1984--1448--0001 or 1984--1240--0001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CP Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NV (Nonvolatile) Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory LED Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM NV Memory Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NV Memory and Powering Down the ControlFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bubble NV Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bubble NV Memory: LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bubble NV Memory Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bubble NV Memory Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-2
4-2-4
4-2-5
4-2-6
4-2-7
4-2-9
4-2-11
4-2-12
4-2-13
4-2-16
4-2-18
4-2-19
4-2-20
4-2-21
4-2-24
4-2-27
4-2-29
4-2-31
4-2-34
4-2-34
4-2-35
4-2-36
4-2-37
4-2-38
4-2-39
4-2-41
4-2-44
4-2-46
4-2-48
4-2-49
4-2-49
4-2-49
4-2-50
4-2-52
4-2-53
4-2-53
Section 2:
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xvii
Section 3:
Controller Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-1
MPC (MultiPurpose Controller Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC5 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC II Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC I Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC5 Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC II Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC I Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLC (MultiLoop Controller Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLC Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSC (Single Strategy Controller Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CC (Contact Controller Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CC Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX (Multiplexer Controller Processor)
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller Processor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX and PLC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX and PLC Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Processor LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Processor LED Sequence on Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MPC, CC, MUX, and PLC Controller Processor LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MultiLoop and Single Strategy Controller Processor LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Processor Enable/Disable Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Processor Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Processor Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-2
4-3-5
4-3-7
4-3-10
4-3-12
4-3-12
4-3-15
4-3-18
4-3-19
4-3-20
4-3-21
4-3-24
4-3-24
4-3-24
4-3-25
4-3-26
4-3-26
4-3-27
4-3-28
4-3-29
4-3-29
RS3: Service Manual
4-3-30
4-3-30
4-3-31
4-3-32
4-3-32
4-3-33
4-3-35
4-3-36
4-3-37
4-3-39
Contents
SV: xviii
Contents of Volume 2
Chapter 5:
Serial and Analog I/O
Section 1:
Analog Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1
Analog Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Card Cage Address Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V Communication Wiring . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card II Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Transfer Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Transfer Card LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Transfer Card Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bypass Card (OBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bypass Card Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bypass Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bypass Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Card Cage Field Interface Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse I/O FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse I/O FIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse I/O FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse I/O FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Input FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Input FIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Input FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Input FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2
5-1-3
5-1-4
5-1-6
5-1-7
5-1-8
5-1-10
5-1-10
5-1-13
5-1-16
5-1-17
5-1-18
5-1-21
5-1-21
5-1-22
5-1-23
5-1-24
5-1-28
5-1-30
5-1-31
5-1-34
5-1-35
5-1-36
5-1-37
5-1-37
5-1-37
5-1-38
5-1-40
5-1-41
5-1-43
5-1-44
5-1-45
5-1-46
5-1-51
5-1-52
5-1-53
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xix
Section 2:
Section 3:
Section 4:
Analog Extender Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Junction Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-53
5-1-54
5-1-57
5-1-57
Contact Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage FIC Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FlexTerm FIC Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FlexTerm Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Termination Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Termination Board Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Termination Board Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Marshaling Panel Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Marshaling Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Isolator Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete Switch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Field Interface Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Extender Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2
5-2-4
5-2-5
5-2-6
5-2-7
5-2-8
5-2-8
5-2-10
5-2-12
5-2-13
5-2-14
5-2-15
5-2-16
5-2-17
5-2-19
5-2-20
5-2-22
5-2-23
5-2-25
5-2-26
5-2-27
5-2-28
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1
MUX FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Power Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Power Regulator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Communication Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Marshaling Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RTD MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Front End Modules (FEMs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermocouple and Voltage FEM and Universal Voltage FEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-2
5-3-4
5-3-5
5-3-5
5-3-7
5-3-7
5-3-9
5-3-10
5-3-14
5-3-16
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-1
PLC FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC FlexTerm Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Controller Processor Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Port I/O Card Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-2
5-4-8
5-4-9
5-4-10
5-4-11
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xx
Section 5:
Port I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card RS-232 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card RS-422 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-13
5-4-13
5-4-15
5-4-16
5-4-17
5-4-19
5-4-20
5-4-22
5-4-22
5-4-23
5-4-24
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware . . . . . . . . .
5-5-1
MultiLoop FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-Strategy FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-Strategy FlexTerm Analog Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-Strategy FlexTerm Contact Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-Strategy FlexTerm Contact Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Input FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Input FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Input FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Output FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Output FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Output FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC Extender Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bypass Unit (OBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-2
5-5-4
5-5-5
5-5-5
5-5-6
5-5-7
5-5-8
5-5-10
5-5-11
5-5-12
5-5-13
5-5-13
5-5-14
5-5-14
5-5-15
5-5-16
5-5-17
5-5-18
5-5-19
5-5-20
5-5-21
5-5-24
5-5-25
5-5-26
5-5-27
5-5-29
5-5-30
5-5-32
5-5-33
5-5-34
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxi
Chapter 6:
Multipoint I/O
Section 1:
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1
Multipoint I/O Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Address Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Scanning Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O FIM Redundancy and Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O FIM Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O FIM Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel FIM Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring:
Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Redundancy . .
6-1-4
6-1-4
6-1-5
6-1-6
6-1-6
6-1-6
6-1-8
6-1-8
6-1-8
6-1-10
Communication Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1
Remote Communications Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel II Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel II Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel II Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel I Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel I Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel I Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Communications Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Fiber Optic Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-2
6-2-4
6-2-6
6-2-6
6-2-8
6-2-9
6-2-9
6-2-9
6-2-10
6-2-11
6-2-14
6-2-15
6-2-15
6-2-16
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1
Direct Discrete Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-3
6-3-4
6-3-8
6-3-9
6-3-10
6-3-13
6-3-14
6-3-16
6-3-16
6-3-21
6-3-22
6-3-23
Section 2:
Section 3:
RS3: Service Manual
6-1-10
6-1-11
Contents
SV: xxii
Section 4:
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Output Points . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Input Points . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Solid State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Solid State Relays . . . . . .
Discrete Field Interface Module (FIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete FIM Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete FIM Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete FIM Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete FIM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete FIM LED Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-25
6-3-26
6-3-28
6-3-31
6-3-33
6-3-36
6-3-37
6-3-38
6-3-39
6-3-40
6-3-41
6-3-43
6-3-43
6-3-44
6-3-45
6-3-46
6-3-48
6-3-48
6-3-49
6-3-50
6-3-51
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-1
Multipoint Analog I/O Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Loop Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wire Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shield Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Point Type Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System-Powered Input Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-Powered Input Point with External Ground Reference . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-Powered Input Point with Ground Reference at Termination Panel .
Marshaling Panel Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Loop Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring -- Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring -- Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-2
6-4-4
6-4-7
6-4-7
6-4-7
6-4-9
6-4-9
6-4-10
6-4-10
6-4-11
6-4-12
6-4-13
6-4-14
6-4-15
6-4-15
6-4-16
6-4-16
6-4-17
6-4-19
6-4-19
6-4-20
6-4-21
6-4-22
6-4-25
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxiii
Section 5:
Section 6:
MAIO Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel Loop Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Power Module (LPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Power Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Power Module Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO FIMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIM Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-Point Input FIMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-Point Output FIMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32-Point Input FIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO FIM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO FIM LED Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single FIM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant FIM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Failed FIM Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-27
6-4-28
6-4-29
6-4-32
6-4-32
6-4-33
6-4-33
6-4-35
6-4-38
6-4-39
6-4-41
6-4-41
6-4-42
6-4-43
6-4-44
6-4-46
6-4-48
6-4-49
6-4-50
6-4-50
6-4-50
6-4-51
Multipoint I/O Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-1
Standard Remote Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-2
Intrinsic Safety (IS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-1
Elcon Series 1000 IS Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Panel for Discrete Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Panel Discrete Cross Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Discrete IS Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Panel for Analog Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Power and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Panel Analog Cross Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Analog IS Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Panel Common Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL IS Termination Panel for Discrete Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping I/O points to MTL Discrete Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-3
6-6-6
6-6-7
6-6-8
6-6-9
6-6-10
6-6-10
6-6-11
6-6-12
6-6-12
6-6-12
6-6-12
6-6-12
6-6-13
6-6-14
6-6-18
6-6-19
6-6-19
6-6-19
6-6-19
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxiv
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Fault Detection (LFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL Discrete Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel A Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel B Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL IS Termination Panel for Analog Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL Analog Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-19
6-6-20
6-6-20
6-6-21
6-6-23
6-6-24
6-6-25
6-6-28
6-6-28
6-6-28
6-6-28
6-6-28
6-6-28
6-6-29
6-6-29
Chapter 7:
PeerWay Interface Devices
Section 1:
System Resource Unit (SRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-1
Section 2:
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1
RS-232C Asynchronous Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 Asynchronous Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 Asynchronous Protocol Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 X.25 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 X.25 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 X.25 Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIA Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-3
7-2-6
7-2-8
7-2-9
7-2-11
7-2-12
7-2-13
7-2-14
7-2-15
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-1
HIA Direct Connection of PeerWays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIA Connection of PeerWays Using Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Jumpering for the HIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Jumpering for HIA Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Jumpering for HIA Connection Using Modems . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure HIA Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIA Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-3
7-3-5
7-3-7
7-3-7
7-3-7
7-3-8
7-3-9
7-3-11
VAX/PeerWay Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-1
QBI Hardware Kit for the MicroVAX II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MicroVAX II -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QBI Hardware Kit for the VAX 3xxx and VAX 4xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-3
7-4-4
7-4-5
Section 3:
Section 4:
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxv
Section 5:
Section 6:
VAX 3xxx/VAX 4xxx -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Marshaling Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Board 1 (CPU Card) Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) Jumpers . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) LEDs . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-6
7-4-7
7-4-8
7-4-10
7-4-13
7-4-15
Diogenes Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-1
OI NV Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diogenes Interface Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diogenes Interface TI Communications Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diogenes Communication Convertor Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-4
7-5-5
7-5-6
7-5-7
RS3 Network Interface (RNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-1
RNI PeerWay Node Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RNI System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boot Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crash Dumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RNI Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RNI LEDs and Reset Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RNI Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RNI Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-3
7-6-4
7-6-6
7-6-6
7-6-6
7-6-7
7-6-8
7-6-9
7-6-10
Chapter 8:
Calibration
Section 1:
Calibrating Serial I/O Field Interface Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-1
Serial I/O Analog Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration of Serial I/O Analog Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Serial I/O Analog Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial I/O Analog Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration of Serial I/O Analog Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Serial I/O Analog Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-2
8-1-3
8-1-4
8-1-5
8-1-6
8-1-7
Calibrating Temperature Input FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-1
Temperature Input FIC Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermocouple Sensor Calibration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermocouple Sensor Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-2
8-2-6
8-2-7
Calibrating Pulse Input FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-1
Pulse Input FICs Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-2
Calibrating MUX FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-1
Entering Calibration Constants for Multiplexer FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Voltage Input and Thermocouple FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and Calibrating Voltage Input and Thermocouple FEMs . . . . . . . . .
8-4-2
8-4-3
8-4-5
Section 2:
Section 3:
Section 4:
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxvi
Section 5:
Section 6:
Calibrating 4--20 mA FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and Calibrating the 4--20 mA FEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration of RTD FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking RTD FEM Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-7
8-4-8
8-4-9
8-4-10
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-1
Analog I/O Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration of Analog I/O Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Non-Isolated Analog I/O Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Isolated Output FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog I/O Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration of Analog I/O Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points Setup Using Current Input . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points Setup Using Voltage Input . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-3
8-5-4
8-5-6
8-5-7
8-5-8
8-5-9
8-5-10
8-5-10
8-5-11
8-5-12
Calibrating Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) Output and
Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6-1
Checking and Calibrating MAIO Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and Calibrating MAIO Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6-1
8-6-4
Chapter 9:
Maintenance
Section 1:
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-1
Cleaning Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Floppy Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Console Fan Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Console Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Cabinet Filters and Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet Door Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet Fan Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Card Cage, HIA, SCI, and SRU Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Cabinet Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Active Hardware Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintaining the CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Glare Filter on a Command Console CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Degaussing a Command Console CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Diagnostic Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running Off-Line Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-4
9-1-4
9-1-5
9-1-6
9-1-6
9-1-8
9-1-9
9-1-9
9-1-9
9-1-10
9-1-11
9-1-12
9-1-13
9-1-14
9-1-14
9-1-15
9-1-16
9-1-17
9-1-18
9-1-19
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxvii
Section 2:
Section 3:
ControlFile Power Regulator Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Power Regulator Card Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Interface (OI) Power Regulator Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the AC/DC Power Supply Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the AC/DC Power Supply Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Backup Cards in Redundant Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Redundant Coordinator Processor Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Redundant Controller Processor Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and Installing Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling Fan (System Power Supply Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-19
9-1-21
9-1-24
9-1-26
9-1-27
9-1-28
9-1-29
9-1-29
9-1-30
9-1-31
9-1-32
9-1-32
9-1-32
Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-1
AC/DC Power Supply Battery and Charger Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command and Basic Command Console Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Console Hard Disk Drive Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Console Keyboard, Tape, or Floppy Disk Removal . . . . . . . . . . . .
FlexTerm Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FlexTerm Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-2
9-2-4
9-2-5
9-2-6
9-2-9
9-2-11
9-2-11
9-2-13
Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-1
Hand Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-1
9-3-2
9-3-2
9-3-3
9-3-3
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Section 1:
Troubleshooting the Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1-1
Section 2:
Troubleshooting a PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-1
PeerWay Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plant Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Performance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Overview Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen General Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Interval Controller (TIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIC Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-1
10-2-2
10-2-3
10-2-9
10-2-12
10-2-13
10-2-13
10-2-13
10-2-14
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxviii
Section 3:
Section 4:
Section 5:
Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Broadcast Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Point-To-Point Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Field Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Column 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Columns 2 and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Column 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Column 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Lower Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample PeerWay Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Fault Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detecting a PeerWay Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the PeerWay Overview Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Fault Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnosing a Console or SCI PeerWay Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnosing a ControlFile PeerWay Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With One ControlFile on the PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With Multiple ControlFiles on the PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Cable Fault Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Twinax PeerWay Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Fiber Optic PeerWay Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-14
10-2-14
10-2-14
10-2-14
10-2-15
10-2-15
10-2-15
10-2-19
10-2-21
10-2-23
10-2-25
10-2-29
10-2-30
10-2-31
10-2-33
10-2-35
10-2-36
10-2-37
10-2-37
10-2-39
10-2-40
10-2-41
10-2-42
Troubleshooting Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-1
General Console Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Power-Up Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Off-Line Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Controller Memory Dump Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Memory Dump Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory View Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Node Dump Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Confidence Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRT Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting OI Card Cage Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-2
10-3-3
10-3-8
10-3-12
10-3-12
10-3-14
10-3-15
10-3-16
10-3-19
10-3-20
10-3-21
10-3-22
10-3-24
Troubleshooting ControlFiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4-1
ControlFile Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wipe Bubble Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4-7
10-4-9
Troubleshooting Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-1
Restoring Redundant FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Procedures for Serial Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Procedures for Analog Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-2
10-5-3
10-5-8
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxix
Field I/O Status Screen (FIC Status Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIC Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RBL Controller and Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-13
10-5-18
10-5-21
Troubleshooting PeerWay Interface Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-6-1
OI Bubble Memory Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-6-1
Appendix A:
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Appendix B:
IEC and ISO Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Appendix C:
Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
Section 6:
Appendixes
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
SV: xxx
RS3: Service Manual
Contents
10P56988101
10P56988111
RS3t
Service Manual
Chapter 5:
Serial and Analog I/O
Section 1:
Analog Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1
Analog Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Card Cage Address Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V Communication Wiring . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Connect Card II Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Transfer Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Transfer Card LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Transfer Card Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bypass Card (OBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bypass Card Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bypass Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bypass Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Card Cage Field Interface Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse I/O FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse I/O FIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse I/O FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse I/O FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Input FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Input FIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Input FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2
5-1-3
5-1-4
5-1-6
5-1-7
5-1-8
5-1-10
5-1-10
5-1-13
5-1-16
5-1-17
5-1-18
5-1-21
5-1-21
5-1-22
5-1-23
5-1-24
5-1-28
5-1-30
5-1-31
5-1-34
5-1-35
5-1-36
5-1-37
5-1-37
5-1-37
5-1-38
5-1-40
5-1-41
5-1-43
5-1-44
5-1-45
5-1-46
5-1-51
5-1-52
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contents
SV: ii
Section 2:
Section 3:
Section 4:
Temperature Input FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Extender Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Junction Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-53
5-1-54
5-1-55
5-1-58
5-1-58
Contact Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage FIC Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FlexTerm FIC Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FlexTerm Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Termination Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Termination Board Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Termination Board Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Marshaling Panel Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Marshaling Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Isolator Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete Switch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Field Interface Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Extender Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2
5-2-4
5-2-5
5-2-6
5-2-7
5-2-8
5-2-8
5-2-10
5-2-12
5-2-13
5-2-14
5-2-15
5-2-16
5-2-17
5-2-19
5-2-20
5-2-22
5-2-23
5-2-25
5-2-26
5-2-27
5-2-28
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1
MUX FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Power Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Power Regulator LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Communication Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Marshaling Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RTD MUX Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Front End Modules (FEMs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermocouple and Voltage FEM and Universal Voltage FEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-2
5-3-4
5-3-5
5-3-5
5-3-7
5-3-7
5-3-9
5-3-10
5-3-14
5-3-16
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-1
PLC FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC FlexTerm Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Controller Processor Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-2
5-4-8
5-4-9
5-4-10
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contents
SV: iii
Section 5:
PLC Port I/O Card Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card RS232 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card RS422 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-11
5-4-13
5-4-13
5-4-15
5-4-16
5-4-17
5-4-19
5-4-20
5-4-22
5-4-22
5-4-23
5-4-24
Multi-Loop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware . . . . . . . . .
5-5-1
Multi--Loop FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single--Strategy FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single--Strategy FlexTerm Analog Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single--Strategy FlexTerm Contact Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single--Strategy FlexTerm Contact Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non--Isolated Analog Input FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non--Isolated Analog Input FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non--Isolated Analog Input FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non--Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart Transmitter FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Input FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Input FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Input FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Output FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non--Isolated Analog Output FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non--Isolated Analog Output FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non--Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non--Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Output FIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Output FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIC Extender Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Bypass Unit (OBU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-2
5-5-4
5-5-5
5-5-5
5-5-6
5-5-7
5-5-8
5-5-10
5-5-11
5-5-12
5-5-13
5-5-13
5-5-14
5-5-14
5-5-15
5-5-16
5-5-17
5-5-18
5-5-19
5-5-20
5-5-21
5-5-24
5-5-25
5-5-26
5-5-27
5-5-29
5-5-30
5-5-32
5-5-33
5-5-34
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contents
SV: iv
List of Figures
Figure
Page
5.1.1
Analog Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2
5.1.2
Analog Card Cage Address Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-3
5.1.3
Nonredundant Controller Processor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-5
5.1.4
Redundant Controller Processor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-5
5.1.5
Communications Connect Card III, IV, or V Used With Multipoint I/O .
5-1-6
5.1.6
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-7
5.1.7
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-8
5.1.8
Comm Connect Card II Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-10
5.1.9
Analog Transfer Card Redundancy Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-13
5.1.10
Analog Transfer Card Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-14
5.1.11
Analog Transfer Card LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-16
5.1.12
Analog Transfer Card Fuse Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-17
5.1.13
Output Bypass Card Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-18
5.1.14
Output Bypass Card Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-20
5.1.15
Output Bypass Card Fuse and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-22
5.1.16
Analog Field Interface Card Power Supply and Microprocessor . . . . .
5-1-25
5.1.17
Typical Output Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-26
5.1.18
Typical Input Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-27
5.1.19
Analog FIC Redundancy Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-28
5.1.20
Analog FIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-30
5.1.21
Analog FIC Revision B or Later Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-32
5.1.22
Analog FIC (Earlier Version) Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-32
5.1.23
Analog FIC Fuse Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-34
5.1.24
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-36
5.1.25
Analog FIC Smart Transmitter Daughterboard LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-40
5.1.26
Pulse I/O FIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-43
5.1.27
Pulse I/O FIC Card Fuse and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-44
5.1.28
Temperature Input FIC Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-47
5.1.29
Field Wiring Terminations for a Temperature Input FIC Cond for a
3-wire RTD Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-49
5.1.30
Field Wiring Terminations for an RTD Application with External
Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-49
5.1.31
Field Wiring Terminations for a Thermocouple and Cold Junction
Compensator RTD Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-50
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contents
SV: v
5.1.32
Temperature Input FIC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-51
5.1.33
Temperature Input FIC Fuse and Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-52
5.1.34
Analog Marshaling Panel 1984--2415--0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-55
5.1.35
European Analog Marshaling Panel 10P54620001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-55
5.1.36
Analog Marshaling Panel 1984--2512--0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-56
5.1.37
Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-57
5.1.38
Auxiliary Terminal Block Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-58
5.1.39
4--20 mA Application -- Redundancy Loop Power Mismatch . . . . . . . . .
5-1-58
5.1.40
4--20 mA Input Application -- External Supply and Constant
Loop Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-59
5.1.41
Pulse Application -- Simple DC Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-59
5.1.42
Pulse Application -- DC Block/Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-60
5.1.43
Pulse Application -- Low Pass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-60
5.2.1
Contact Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-4
5.2.2
FIC Addressing in a Contact Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-5
5.2.3
Contact Card Cage Wiring Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-6
5.2.4
Contact FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-7
5.2.5
FIC Addressing in Contact FlexTerms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-8
5.2.6
Contact FlexTerm Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-9
5.2.7
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Jumper Locations . . . . . . .
5-2-10
5.2.8
Remote Marshalling Connectors Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-11
5.2.9
Contact Termination Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-13
5.2.10
Contact FlexTerm Field Wiring Using a Contact Termination Board . .
5-2-14
5.2.11
Contact FlexTerm System Power Wiring Using a Contact
Termination Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-14
5.2.12
Contact Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-16
5.2.13
Contact Marshaling Panel Wiring Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-17
5.2.14
Contact Marshaling Panel Field Wiring: Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-18
5.2.15
Contact Marshaling Panel Field Wiring: Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-19
5.2.16
Discrete Switch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-22
5.2.17
Contact FIC Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-24
5.2.18
Contact Field Interface Card LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-25
5.2.19
Contact FIC 1984--1460--000x Fuse and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . .
5-2-26
5.2.20
Contact FIC 1984--1304--000x Fuse and Jumper Location . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-26
5.3.1
Multiplexer FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-2
5.3.2
Two MUX FlexTerms Connected to a Controller Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-3
5.3.3
Multiplexer Power Regulator Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-4
5.3.4
MUX Communication Card Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-5
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contents
SV: vi
5.3.5
Connecting a Two-Wire RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-12
5.3.6
Connecting a Three-Wire RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-13
5.3.7
Connecting a Four-Wire RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-13
5.3.8
Securing a FEM in the MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-15
5.3.9
RTD Input FEM Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-16
5.3.10
Field Termination of Four-Wire and Three-Wire RTDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-17
5.3.11
Field Termination of a Two-Wire RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-18
5.4.1
PLC FlexTerm 10P5320000x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-3
5.4.2
PLC FlexTerm 1984--2409--000x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-4
5.4.3
PLC Flexterm Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-5
5.4.4
PLC Cabling for Four PLC Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-6
5.4.5
Allen-Bradley Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-7
5.4.6
PLC Controller Processor Redundancy Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-10
5.4.7
Port I/O Redundancy with Allen-Bradley PLC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-11
5.4.8
Port I/O Redundancy with Modicon PLC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-12
5.4.9
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-14
5.4.10
Port I/O Card RS-422/RS-232 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-16
5.4.11
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O CARD Fuse and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-17
5.4.12
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-21
5.4.13
Port I/O Card RS-422/RS-422 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-22
5.4.14
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card Fuse and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-23
5.5.1
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-1
5.5.2
MultiLoop FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-2
5.5.3
Typical MultiLoop FlexTerm Field Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-3
5.5.4
Single-Strategy FlexTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-4
5.5.5
Single-Strategy Contact I/O Wiring with Contact Termination Panel . .
5-5-5
5.5.6
Non-Isolated Analog Input Field Interface Card Block Diagram . . . . . .
5-5-8
.5.7
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-10
5.5.8
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuse and Jumper Location . . . . . . . . .
5-5-11
5.5.9
Smart Transmitter FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-13
5.5.10
Smart Transmitter FIC Fuse and Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-14
5.5.11
Isolated Analog Input FIC Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-15
5.5.12
Isolated Analog Input FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-16
5.5.13
Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuse and Jumper Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-17
5.5.14
Analog Input Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-19
5.5.15
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-23
5.5.16
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-24
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contents
SV: vii
5.5.17
1985--1490--000x Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuse and
Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-25
5.5.18
1984--1273--000x Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuse and
Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-25
5.5.19
Isolated Analog Output FIC Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-28
5.5.20
Isolated Analog Output FIC LEDs and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-29
5.5.21
1984--1334--000x Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuse and Jumper
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-30
5.5.22
1984--1325--000x and --1469 Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuse and
Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-30
5.5.23
Output Bypass Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-34
5.5.24
Output Bypass Unit Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-36
5.5.25
Connecting the Output Bypass Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-38
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contents
SV: viii
List of Tables
Table
Page
5.1.1.
Cage Address Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-9
5.1.2.
Controller Redundancy Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-9
5.1.3.
Location Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-10
5.1.4.
Cage Address Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-11
5.1.5.
Comm Line Select Jumper Positions for Comm Connect II
(1984--2491--000x) Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-11
5.1.6.
Controller Redundancy Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-11
5.1.7.
Location Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-12
5.1.8.
Analog Transfer Card Fuse Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-17
5.1.9.
Output Bypass Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-22
5.1.10.
Analog FIC Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-27
5.1.11.
Analog FIC Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-33
5.1.12.
Analog FIC Fuse Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-34
5.1.13.
Pulse I/O FIC Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-41
5.1.14.
Pulse I/O FIC Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-42
5.1.15.
Pulse I/O FIC Card Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-44
5.1.16.
Pulse I/O Field Interface Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-45
5.1.17.
Temperature Input FIC Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-48
5.1.18.
Temperature Input FIC Card Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-52
5.1.19.
Temperature Input Field Interface Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-53
5.1.20.
European Analog Marshaling Panel 10P54620001 Fuses . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-55
5.2.1.
Comparison of Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Assemblies
5-2-2
5.2.2.
Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-3
5.2.3.
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Jumper Positions . . . . . . .
5-2-10
5.2.4.
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-12
5.2.5.
Contact Termination Board Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-15
5.2.6.
Contact Marshaling Panel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-17
5.2.7.
Contact Marshalling Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-19
5.2.8.
Optical Isolator Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-20
5.2.9.
Maximum Current Ratings for Modules Mounted on Marshaling Panels
5-2-21
5.2.10.
Contact FIC Specializations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-24
5.2.11.
Contact Field Interface Card Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-27
5.2.12.
Contact Field Interface Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-27
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contents
SV: ix
5.3.1.
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-7
5.3.2.
Wiring Voltage or Current MUX Marshaling Panel to FEM
.........
5-3-8
5.3.3.
4--20 mA MUX Marshaling Panel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-9
5.3.4.
RTD MUX Marshaling Panel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-10
5.3.5.
Wiring RTD MUX Marshaling Panel to FEM
.....................
5-3-11
5.4.1.
Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-2
5.4.2.
PLC FlexTerm Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-8
5.4.3.
Parts Replacement for the RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card
.........
5-4-13
5.4.4.
RS-232C Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-15
5.4.5.
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-19
5.4.6.
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-19
5.4.7.
Parts Replacement for the RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card
.........
5-4-20
5.4.8.
RS-422 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-22
5.4.9.
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-24
5.4.10.
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-24
5.5.1.
Contact Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-6
5.5.2.
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-11
5.5.3.
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-12
5.5.4.
Smart Transmitter FIC Jumper Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-14
5.5.5.
Smart Transmitter FIC Fuse Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-14
5.5.6.
Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-17
5.5.7.
Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-18
5.5.8.
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-26
5.5.9.
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-26
5.5.10.
Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-31
5.5.11.
Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-32
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contents
SV: x
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contents
SV: 5-1-1
Section 1:
Analog Card Cage
This section covers the Analog Card Cage and the devices that go with
it including:
D
Communications Connect card
D
Analog Transfer card
D
Output Bypass card
D
Analog Field Interface cards
D
Smart Transmitter Daughterboards
D
Pulse I/O Field Interface cards
D
Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Field Interface cards
D
Analog Extender card
D
Analog Marshaling Panels
NOTE: The Analog Card Cage can be connected only to a
Multipurpose Controller (MPC) Processor.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-2
Analog Card Cage
The Analog Card Cage (1984--2526--0002) has slots for eight Field
Interface cards (Analog 4--20 mA, Pulse, RTD/TC, Smart), two analog
Transfer cards or Output Bypass cards, and one Comm Connect card.
These cage slots are keyed. The card cage motherboard
(1984--2597--000x or 1984--1497--000x) provides all interconnection
among cage slots, power connectors, and marshaling panel connectors.
The printed wiring assembly (PWA) is marked “ANALOG I/O CAGE
MOTHERBOARD”. Figure 5.1.1 shows the location of cards in the
Analog Card Cage.
Field Interface Card
Slots 1 through 8
Comm Connect Card
Marshaling Panel Connector
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Analog Transfer Cards
or Output Bypass Card
Smart
Daughterboard Power Connections
Figure 5.1.1. Analog Card Cage
The Card Cage has no field termination capability and must be used
with an Analog Marshaling Panel or distributed I/O termination panel.
The Comm Connect card provides connection from the Analog Card
Cage to the ControlFile Controller Processor (or processors). An
installation using redundant Controller Processors must have an
additional cable and jumpers must be set on the Comm Connect card,
Contact FlexTerms, and comm termination panels. The Comm Connect
card has eight lines to connect distributed I/O termination panels or a
distant Analog Cage.
Space at the right of the Analog Card Cage provides a vertical wiring
channel with anchors to attach plastic wraps. Cabling can be routed
from side panels.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-3
Analog Card Cage Address Label
A label on the front of the Analog Cage records the hardware address.
Figure 5.1.2 shows the Analog Cage label. Write the hardware address
in the blanks provided. The address includes the ControlFile Node
(numeric), the Controller slot (A--H), and the FlexTerm or Card Cage
(A--D). Use the box beside each point number to record a tag or label.
Locations for Output Bypass or Transfer cards and the Comm Connect
are shown on the label.
CONTROL FILE NODE
101
102
103
SLOT 1
201
202
203
SLOT 2
301
302
303
SLOT 3
CONTROLLER SLOT
401
402
403
SLOT 4
Output
bypass or
transfer
card slots
1-- 4
501
502
503
SLOT 5
601
602
603
SLOT 6
FLEXTERM
701
702
703
SLOT 7
801
802
803
SLOT 8
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Output
bypass or
transfer
card slots
5-- 8
Comm
connect card
Figure 5.1.2. Analog Card Cage Address Label
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-4
Communications Connect Card
The Communications Connect card comes in four models:
D
D
D
D
Communications Connect Card V
(10P54560001),
marked “COMMUNICATIONS CONNECT V” on the PWA.
Communications Connect Card IV
(10P54530001),
marked “COMMUNICATIONS CONNECT IV” on the PWA.
Communications Connect Card III
(1984--2543--0002),
marked “COMMUNICATIONS CONNECT III” on the PWA.
Communications Connect Card II
(1984--2491--0001),
marked “EIGHT LINE COMM CONNECT” on the PWA.
The card fits in the last slot (far right) of the Analog Card Cage. This
card connects the Controller Processor card to the next Analog card
cage. The Communications Connect card has transient voltage
protection for eight communications lines from the Field Interface Cards
(FICs) or Field Interface Modules (FIMs) to the Controller Processor
card. Each communications line has a transient suppression diode
between the signal lines and communications ground. Communications
ground is referenced to system ground at the Controller Processor card
but allowed to float at the Analog Card Cage. A transient suppression
network ties communications ground to chassis ground.
The Communications Connect card has jumpers for:
D
Card Cage Address
D
Comm line Select (1984--2491--0001 only)
D
Controller Redundancy
D
Local or Remote Card Cage Location
Control Cable 1984--2783--9045 or shielded Control Communication
Cable 10P5590xxxx connects the ControlFile and the Communications
Connect card.
Refer to the Site Preparation and Installation Manual (SP) for
detailed cabling examples, including EMC compliance
requirements.
Two identical 40-pin cable connectors allow a daisy-chain connection of
multiple card cages to one Controller Processor or to a redundant pair
of Controller Processor cards. A jumper for each connector selects
Controller Processor card redundancy, in addition to the cable
connection. Figure 5.1.3 shows normal (nonredundant) operation of
card cages and the ControlFile. Figure 5.1.3 shows redundant
operation.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-5
Control Cable to Controller Processor
Comm
Connect Card
Analog Card Cage
Daisy chain cable
Comm
Connect Card
ControlFile Card Cage
Controller
processor
card
Analog Card Cage
Daisy chain cable
Comm
Connect Card
Analog Card Cage
Figure 5.1.3. Nonredundant Controller Processor Operation
Primary Controller
Processor Card
Control Cable to Primary
Controller Processor
Comm
Connect Card
Analog card cage
ControlFile Card Cage
Optional Redundant
Controller Processor Card
Daisy Chain Cable
Comm
Connect Card
Analog Card Cage
Cable to Redundant
Controller Processor
Figure 5.1.4. Redundant Controller Processor Operation
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-6
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V
Figure 5.1.5 shows Communications Connect Card III, IV, or V used to
connect Multipoint I/O Termination Panels, usually Discrete I/O.
PeerWay
A
B
A
B
ControlFile
Control Cable
Communication Connect
Card III / IV / V
MPC Controller
Analog Card Cage
Communication Cables
Multipoint I/O
Termination Panels
Figure 5.1.5. Communications Connect Card III, IV, or V Used With Multipoint I/O
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-7
Figure 5.1.6 is a block diagram of Communications Connect
Card III / IV / V.
Controller Comm Line (typical) to FIC in Card Cage
To Comm Cable
Current Limiting
To Comm Cable
Shield
TRANSORBS
Analog Card Cage Address
1
2
3
TO FICs in Card Cage
1
2
3
Card Cage Location
1 Remote
2
3 ControlFile Area
Controller Processor Redundancy
1
2
3
1 Normal
2
3 Redundant
To Controller
To Cabinet Ground
Figure 5.1.6. Communications Connect Card III / IV / V Block Diagram
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V Communication Wiring
Up to eight shielded, twisted pair communication lines may be
connected to TB--1 through TB--8 as shown in Figure 5.1.7.
Communications Connect Card III, IV, or V has required wiring
termination and transient protection and does not need a
Communication Termination Panel. The communication lines may run
directly to a Multipoint I/O Termination panel, usually Discrete I/O, or to
a remote Analog Card Cage. Communication lines to a remote Analog
Card Cage terminate at TB1 through TB8 of the remote Analog Card
Cage.
Warning
The transient suppression networks are sufficient for
cables within a building. For runs between buildings, put
lightning arrestors where the cable enters the building.
FRSI recommends metal conduit or a copper ground wire.
(Or use a Fiber Optic I/O Converter.)
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-8
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V Jumpers
Communications Connect Card III, IV, or V has three sets of jumpers.
Figure 5.1.7 shows the jumper locations for these Communications
Connect Cards (III: 1984--2543--000x, IV: 10P54530001, and
V: 10P54560001).
TB 1
Terminals for Communication Lines 1--8
(Each of these connections has +, -- ,shield)
TB 2
TB 3
Connector for Controller 1
TB 4
Connector for Controller 2
TB 5
HD1, HD2
Card Cage Address
TB 6
HD5
Card Cage Location
HD4 A & B
Controller Processor
Redundancy
TB 7
TB 8
Figure 5.1.7. Communications Connect Card III / IV / V
Cage Address Jumpers: Jumpers (HD1, HD2) indicate the Card Cage
address where the Communications Connect Card is installed. The
address may be A, B, C, or D. The jumper positions are designated “1”,
“2”, and “3” on one side and “ZERO” and “ONE” on the other side.
Table 5.1.1 gives jumper values for the Cage Address jumpers (HD1,
HD2).
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-9
Table 5.1.1. Cage Address Jumper Positions
Card Cage Address
Jumper HD1
Jumper HD2
A
1--2
ZERO
1--2
ZERO
B
2--3
ONE
1--2
ZERO
C
1--2
ZERO
2--3
ONE
D
2--3
ONE
2--3
ONE
Controller Redundancy Jumper: (HD4) indicates if the Controller
Processor is configured as NORMAL (not redundant) or REDUNDANT.
If the Controller Processor is redundant, you must set all associated
jumpers indicating redundancy. Redundancy jumpers are on the Comm
Connect card, the communication termination panels, and Contact
Flexterm. Table 5.1.2 gives the Controller Redundancy jumper values.
Table 5.1.2. Controller Redundancy Jumper Positions
Jumper
Controller Not
Redundant
Controller Redundant
HD4 A
1--2
NORMAL
2--3
REDUNDANT
HD4 B
1--2
NORMAL
2--3
REDUNDANT
Location Jumper: (HD5) indicates whether the card cage is located at
a remote I/O location or near the ControlFile. A card cage is in the
ControlFile area if it is connected directly to the ControlFile with one or
more Controller Cable(s) 10P5590xxxx or 1984--2783--xxxx or
1984--1259--xxxx or 1984--0083--xxxx (maximum length 200 feet). A
card cage is at a remote I/O location if it is connected to the ControlFile
via two comm termination panels. The Location jumper modifies
transient protection, depending on the location of the card cage.
Table 5.1.3 gives jumper values for the Location Jumper.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-10
Table 5.1.3. Location Jumper Positions
Jumper
Card Cage
in ControlFile Area
Card Cage
in Remote Location
HD5
2--3
CONTROL FILE AREA
1--2
REMOTE I/O
Communications Connect Card II
The Communications Connect Card II provides for up to eight
communications lines that are gathered and connected to either J459 or
J460.
Communications Connect Card II Jumpers
The Communications Connect Card II has four sets of jumpers.
Figure 5.1.8 shows the jumper locations for the Communications
Connect Card II (1984--2491--0001).
HD5
Card Cage Location
Connector for Controller 1
or Communication Cable
J459
Connector for Controller 2
or Communication Cable
HD4 A & B
Controller Processor Redundancy
J460
HD1, HD2
Card Cage Address
HD3 A--J
Comm Line Select
Figure 5.1.8. Comm Connect Card II Jumper Locations
Cage Address Jumpers: Jumpers (HD1, HD2) indicate whether the
card cage is cage A, B, C, or D. The jumper positions are designated
“1”, “2”, and “3” on one side and “ZERO” and “ONE” on the other side.
A Controller Processor can be configured to control up to four Analog
Card Cages (designated as A, B, C, or D). Configuration limitations
normally restrict the connections to three Analog Card Cages.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-11
Table 5.1.4 gives jumper values for the Cage Address jumpers (HD1,
HD2).
Table 5.1.4. Cage Address Jumper Positions
Card Cage Address
Jumper HD1
Jumper HD2
Applies to:
A
1--2
ZERO
1--2
ZERO
Analog Card Cages
B
2--3
ONE
1--2
ZERO
Analog Card Cages
C
1--2
ZERO
2--3
ONE
Analog Card Cages
D
2--3
ONE
2--3
ONE
Analog Card Cages
Comm Line Select Jumpers: (HD3 A--J) must be in the 2--3 position,
to indicate 1--8 comm lines. Table 5.1.5 gives Comm Line Select
jumper values for Comm Connect II.
Table 5.1.5. Comm Line Select Jumper Positions for
Comm Connect II (1984--2491--000x) Only
Jumpers A--J
Number of Comm Lines Connected
2--3
1--8
Controller Redundancy Jumper: (HD4) selects the Controller
Processor’s NORMAL (not redundant) or REDUNDANT configuration.
If redundant Controller Processors are used, all associated jumpers
indicating redundancy must be in the redundant position. Redundancy
jumpers are on the Comm Connect card, the Contact Flexterm, and the
Communications Termination panels. Table 5.1.6 gives the Controller
Redundancy jumper values.
Table 5.1.6. Controller Redundancy Jumper Positions
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Jumper
Controller Not Redundant
Controller Redundant
HD4 A
1--2
NORMAL
2--3
REDUNDANT
HD4 B
1--2
NORMAL
2--3
REDUNDANT
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-12
Location Jumper: (HD5) indicates if the card cage is at a remote I/O
location or in the ControlFile area. A card cage is in the ControlFile
area if it is connected directly to the ControlFile with one or more
Controller Cables (maximum length 200 feet). A card cage is at a
remote I/O location if it is connected to the ControlFile via two comm
termination panels. The Location jumper selects transient protection
appropriate to the location. Table 5.1.7 gives jumper values for the
Location Jumper.
Table 5.1.7. Location Jumper Positions
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Jumper
Card Cage
in ControlFile Area
Card Cage
in Remote Location
HD5
2--3
CONTROL FILE AREA
1--2
REMOTE I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-13
Analog Transfer Card
The Analog Transfer card (1984--2494--0001) is marked “ANALOG
TRANSFER” on the PWA. In the Transfer card slot of the Analog Cage,
it switches field signals from the primary Field Interface Card to the
backup FIC for 1--3 or 1--7 redundancy. The card also collects status
data from primary FICs and sends it to the backup FIC. Figure 5.1.9
shows card positions for 1--3 and 1--7 redundancy. The Transfer card is
not used for 1--1 redundancy.
With 1--3 redundancy, one Analog
Transfer Card transfers control for
FICs in slots 1 through 3 with the
backup FIC in slot 4.
With 1--3 redundancy, one Analog Transfer
card transfers control for FICs in slots 5
through 7 with the backup FIC in slot 8
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
With 1--7 redundancy, two Analog Transfer cards are required for slots 1
through 7. Both cards are controlled by the backup FIC (in slot 8) with signals
RSEL0, RSEL1, and RGRANT going from one Transfer card to the other.
Figure 5.1.9. Analog Transfer Card Redundancy Positions
Figure 5.1.10 is an Analog Transfer card function diagram of a backup
FIC configured through an Redundant Input/Output Block (RIOB).
Three lines from the backup FIC are a slot “address”: RSEL D 0,1, and
2 (redundancy select). The backup Field Interface Card (FIC) controls
the Analog Transfer card with this set of address lines and a
redundancy activation signal, RGRANTD (redundancy grant D). If I/O
redundancy is not active, the backup FIC uses the address lines and
short pulses on the RGRANTD line to send the state of the HELP line of
each primary FIC to the RREQD line of the backup FIC. Between
RGRANTD pulses, the Analog Transfer Card status is applied to
Redundancy Request (RREQ), giving the backup FIC access to the
status of cards it controls. The backup FIC indexes through addresses,
scans slots and monitors the RREQ line. The Controller Processor
determines if FICs are switched through the RREQ line.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-14
* Active Only On A Backup FIC
Slot 8 Or Slot 4
(Backup)
RSEL D 0,1,2*
**Active Only On A Primary FIC
D
RREQ D*
Field
Signal
Relay
Drive
RGRANT D*
FIELD SIGNALS
RELAY D
HELP**
TO
RELAYS
C
B
A
E
DISCONNECT**
Slot 7 Or Slot 3
FIELD SIGNALS
Address
Control
RELAY C
HELP
Disconnect
Selector
Logic
DISCONNECT
Slot 6 Or Slot 2
FIELD SIGNALS
RELAY B
HELP
DISCONNECT
Address
Control
RELAY A
Slot 5 Or Slot 2
FIELD SIGNALS
Status
MultiPlexer
HELP
DISCONNECT
30V A
30V B
STATUS
Power
Supply
+15V
+ 5V
RELAY E
RGRANT
Bidirectional
Drive Circuitry
RSEL
RREQ
To Other Analog Transfer Card
Figure 5.1.10. Analog Transfer Card Functional Diagram
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-15
If the Controller orders a backup card to take over from a primary card,
the RSEL0--RSEL2 lines continuously select the primary slot and the
RGRANT line goes active and is held. Two A through E relays are
energized to connect field signal lines from the primary FIC to the
backup FIC. The disconnect signal for the primary FIC goes active, to
open relays on the primary FIC and effectively disconnect it from the
field signals. In a power failure, these FIC relays de-energize and
disconnect the field device. Field signals are connected between
Transfer cards through relay E on each card.
The Analog Transfer Card status indication is “Good” if the card is
present and the 5V and 15V power supplies are good.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-16
Analog Transfer Card LEDs and Test Points
Two LEDs on the Analog Transfer card indicate a blown fuse and
whether the power supply is operating. LEDs on the Field Interface
card indicate if the Transfer card is active. Figure 5.1.11 shows the
Analog Transfer card LEDs and test points.
NOTE: The test points on some cards are blue-violet-grey; on others
they are all violet.
-
To measure the loop current without disconnecting the loop:
1. Insert the negative lead of the milliameter into TPB (front row).
2. Insert the positive lead of the milliameter into TPS (back row).
CAUTION
Do not connect the milliameter leads to test points for two
different points. Both loops could be disrupted, which
could result in incorrect signals or damage to the FIC in
one or both loops.
TPB
TPS
Slot 1 or 5 Point 1
Slot 1 or 5 Point 2
Slot 1 or 5 Point 3
Slot 2 or 6 Point 1
Slot 2 or 6 Point 2
Slot 2 or 6 Point 3
Slot 3 or 7 Point 1
Slot 3 or 7 Point 2
Slot 3 or 7 Point 3
Slot 4 or 8 Point 1
Slot 4 or 8 Point 2
Slot 4 or 8 Point 3
R
G
30 V Fuse Blown
(DS2)
LEDs
The 30 VDC power fuse is blown.
+5 V Status (DS1) Power is present on the card and the
regulator is operational.
Figure 5.1.11. Analog Transfer Card LEDs and Test Points
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-17
Analog Transfer Card Fuse
Figure 5.1.12 shows the location of the Analog Transfer card fuse.
Table 5.1.8 gives fuse data.
F1
Figure 5.1.12. Analog Transfer Card Fuse Location
Table 5.1.8. Analog Transfer Card Fuse Data
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Littelfuse Part No.
Schurter Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G50382--0014
273.500
MSF 034.4216
1/2 A 125 V
Plug-In
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-18
Output Bypass Card (OBC)
The Output Bypass Card (1984--2551--0001) is plugged into one of two
Output Bypass slots of the Analog Card Cage. It bypasses any selected
Analog (4--20) FIC in the adjacent left four cage slots. The OBC
supplies uninterrupted current to the field in place of an output FIC while
the FIC is being replaced. It provides bumpless transfer into and out of
bypass mode and allows local adjustment of the signal level.
The OBC displays the value of the output current on a digital display on
the card faceplate. The OBC has a “SLOT” pushbutton used to select
the FIC to bypass. Figure 5.1.13 shows the OBC faceplate.
FIELD
·
(mA)
S
L
O
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BYPASS
BALANCED
MODE
SLOT
Figure 5.1.13. Output Bypass Card Faceplate
Figure 5.1.14 is the OBC functional diagram. The OBC uses a onetime
programmable MC68701 microprocessor with 4Kb of Erasable
Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM). A watchdog circuit
assures microprocessor startup when the OBC is powered on.
The OBC has three operating modes: Diagnostics, Balance, and
Bypass.
Diagnostics mode is entered on power-up. The card runs self test
diagnostics in this mode.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-19
Pressing the SLOT button exits Diagnostics mode and enters Balance
mode for the first (leftmost) FIC. Pressing SLOT steps through the slots
and back to Diagnostics mode.
In Balance mode, the output current of the selected FIC is routed
through the OBC. The OBC does not source current in the Balance
mode. The FIC’s current value is in the “Field” area. If the measured
current is in the normal range (3--21 mA), the green Balance LED lights
on the faceplate of the OBC. If measured current is outside the normal
range, the OBC displays the nearest in-range value. Pressing MODE
exits Balance and enters Bypass mode. The transfer is bumpless for all
in-range values.
In Bypass mode, the OBC becomes the current source to the field
device. The OBC puts out the current value displayed while in Balance
mode. The Analog Output Block (AOB) will go into OVERRIDE mode.
You can manually slew the output value with the raise [up arrow] and
lower [down arrow] buttons.
In Bypass mode, the OBC monitors the selected FIC output but does
not send this output to the field. When the FIC output matches the
current being sent by the OBC, the green Balance LED lights. If the FIC
output does not match the OBC output, the OBC instructs the FIC to
raise or lower its value. This lets a good FIC track the setting of the
OBC and prepares for a bumpless transfer to control by the FIC.
NOTE: The OBC does not measure actual current going to the field. It
measures and displays the desired current value. If the output loop is
open or shorted, the actual output current sent to the field will not match
the desired value.
Normal operation of the FIC is restored when the green Balance LED is
lighted and the MODE button is pressed. The OBC returns control to
the FIC and reenters Balance mode. The transfer is bumpless.
NOTE: The AOB is left in MANUAL when control is returned to the FIC.
Use of AUTOLOCK in the AOB will cause the AOB to return to AUTO.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-20
+30 VI2
+15 VI2
Power
Regulator
+30V A
+8 VI1
--5 VI1
+5 V
+30V B
Return
+5 V
--5 VI1
+5 V
N.C.
POSITION
MODE
OPTO
Isolator
SLOT
Analog To Digital
Circuit
+
--
OBC
Microprocessor
UP
+5 V
Regulator
IGND 1
Digital Display
DOWN
+8 VI1
To FIC
Microprocessor
/OBU
/RAISE
+5 V
/LOWER
+
Watchdog
Circuit
IGND 2
OPTO
Isolator
Current
Flow Sense
Resistor
30 VI2 15 VI2
+15 V
IGND 2
-Digital To
Analog Circuit
+5 V
Regulator
From FIC
Output
Circuit
IGND 2
N.C.
N.C.
IGND 2
Field Load
IGND 2
Figure 5.1.14. Output Bypass Card Functional Diagram
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-21
Output Bypass Card Operating Instructions
NOTE: The FIC I/O Block faceplate shows OVERRIDE mode if the FIC
is bypassed. The FIC I/O Block faceplate goes to MANUAL if the FIC is
taken out of bypass (If Auto Lock field is “Yes,” it goes to AUTO mode).
-
To bypass an output FIC:
1. Plug the OBC in the “Output Bypass” slot next to the adjacent
slots 1 through 4 or slots 5 through 8 of the Analog Card Cage.
2. If the OBC is properly connected, a lamp test begins and the
numbers “8888” appear in the “Field” digital display. A slot or
mode cannot be selected while the lamp test is in progress.
3. The OBC begins the 4--20 mA ramping self-diagnostic test.
While the ramping test runs, a FIC is selected by pressing the
SLOT pushbutton on the OBC faceplate. One of four FICs in
adjacent slots to the left of the OBC can be selected.
4. The green Balance LED on the OBC lights automatically when
the selected FIC current balances with the range in the OBC.
The FIC current is displayed in the “Field” area of the OBC
faceplate.
5. To bypass FIC operation to the OBC, press the MODE button on
the OBC faceplate. When MODE is pressed, the red Bypass
LED lights on the OBC, the green LED on the bypassed FIC
flashes, and an alarm condition is annunciated at the console.
The OBC is now the current source and the current is displayed
in the “Field” area of the faceplate.
6. In BYPASS mode, the OBC current can be raised and lowered by
pushing the “UP’ and “DOWN” pushbuttons on the faceplate.
7. To replace a FIC card, bypass it as in steps 1--5 above. An alarm
is generated when removing the bypassed FIC from the card
cage. Insert the replacement FIC into the card cage. The new
FIC attempts to balance with the OBC current. Wait for the green
Balance LED on the OBC to light.
8. Press the MODE button on the Output Bypass card to return
control to the new FIC and to turn off the red Bypass LED.
9. Put the AOB into AUTO. It defaults to MANUAL after the
override.
Output Bypass Card LEDs
Figure 5.1.13 shows the LEDs on the Output Bypass card faceplate.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-22
Output Bypass Card Fuses
Figure 5.1.15 shows the locations of fuses on the Output Bypass card.
Table 5.1.9 gives fuse data.
LEDs
F2
F1
Switches
Figure 5.1.15. Output Bypass Card Fuse and Jumper Locations
Table 5.1.9. Output Bypass Card Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Schurter
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G09140--0030
AGC 2
312002
-- --
2 A 250 V Quick
Acting
F2
G50382--0009
-- --
273.125
MSF 034.4210
1/8 A 125 V
Plug-In
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-23
Analog Card Cage Field Interface Cards
The Field Interface Cards (FIC) that can be used with the Analog Card
Cage are:
D
Analog FIC (4--20 mA)
D
Analog FIC with Smart Transmitter Daughterboard
D
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard
D
Pulse I/O FIC
D
RTD/TC FIC
The Analog Extender card can be used to move FICs outside of the
Analog Card Cage for service access.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-24
Analog FIC
The 10P54440002 and 1984--2518--000x Analog Field Interface cards
(FICs), used with the MPC Analog Card Cage, provide an interface to
analog inputs and outputs. The 10P54440002 and 1984--2518--0002
cards are functionally identical. The 10P54440002 card is EMC
compliant. They are marked “FIC 4--20 MA” on the PWA.
The analog FIC accepts a 4--20 mA input signal and provides a 4--20
mA field output signal. Each card can accommodate three points, with
up to two input points and one output point, or three input points.
The 4--20 mA Analog FIC converts up to three 4--20 mA input signals to
digital input values and transmits them to the Controller Processor. The
analog FIC can also receive a digital output from the Controller
Processor card and convert it into a 4--20 mA analog output signal to
provide analog inputs and outputs for the system.
The card can be jumpered for various redundancy schemes -- normal or
reverse action of the output signal (for the output to either hold or go to
zero on a loss of communications with the Controller Processor); and
for self powered or system powered field devices.
The 10P54440002 and 1984--2518--0002 cards can support a Smart
Transmitter through the installation of a Smart Transmitter
Daughterboard.
Figure 5.1.16 shows a functional diagram of the power supply and
microprocessor portion of the card.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-25
Processor System
Redundancy
Circuitry
I/O Card
to
Transfer
Card or
OBC
Relay
Drive
Battery
Backed
RAM
8K Bytes
68701
Micro
2K
EPROM
RS-422
comm
lines
Serial Data to D/A
128 Byte
RAM
WD &
Power
Up/Down
Reset
Timer
5 Volt
And
30 Volt
Isolated
Regulator
30 Volt ISO
To Loop Power
Supply
30 Volt
Bus A
30 Volt
Bus B
SEL 1
SEL 2
SEL 3
DS4
Dual Pulse Input
1 NORM
2
3 REV
Output Action Jumper
Figure 5.1.16. Analog Field Interface Card Power Supply and Microprocessor
Power is usually supplied to the card by a 30 volt DC bus but power can
also be supplied by an external 24 to 32 volt DC power source for
remote installations. The power regulator provides:
D
D
D
Non-isolated +5 volts to the microprocessor, memory, and
associated circuits
Isolated +5 volts for communications
Three independent 30 volt sources, each source for one I/O
point.
Redundant power buses may be provided. Diodes provide isolation
between buses.
Each I/O point on the Field Interface card connects to the field wiring
through marshaling panels. Each field signal line is individually fused.
A transient suppression circuit protects the FIC against fault conditions
by conducting fault currents at voltages above 47 volts between the field
terminals and conducting to ground at a common mode voltage of 200
volts.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-26
Figure 5.1.17 shows a typical output circuit. The FIC input circuitry
includes a 24 volt nominal loop power supply. A 4--20 mA signal is
converted to 0.8 to 4.0 volts, filtered, and then turned into a series of
timing pulses by a dual pulse converter. Pulses are optically isolated
and go directly to the microprocessor timer subsystem.
The MC68701 microprocessor has 128 bytes of scratchpad RAM and a
2K EPROM with diagnostics and a startup routine. The microprocessor
system contains 8K bytes of “battery-backed” RAM memory that is not
affected by power outages. Battery-backed RAM gives nonvolatile
storage of the main operating code and calibration constants.
The microprocessor looks at the pulses, extracts the timing data, and
converts it to digital values. The digital values contain errors related to
components in the input sections. Error correction is done locally on the
FIC through calibration constants in the 8K RAM. Corrected values are
digitally filtered, packed into a message, and sent to the Controller
Processor cards.
Serial Data To D/A
Opt Isol
Status
Hold 1
2
Zero 3
From Microprocessor
Dual Pulse Input
5V
Ref
Digital To
Analog
Converter
Channel 3
Controlled
Current
Sink
SEL 3
N.C.
A
To Marshaling
Panel Terminals
B
Relay
N.O.
1 System
2
3 Self
Loop Power
Jumper (HD31)
S
INPUT 3
Signal
Condition
30 V ISO 3
Analog To
Dual Pulse
Converter
5V
Ref
24 V
Loop Power
Figure 5.1.17. Typical Output Circuit
Figure 5.1.18 shows a typical input circuit. For output, the Controller
Processor card sends a digital value to the Field Interface card. The
FIC then sends this digital value, adjusted by calibration constants, to
the digital to analog converter circuitry through an optical isolator.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-27
Dual Pulse Input
Channel 2
N.O.
INPUT 2
Relay
A
To Marshalling
Panel Terminals
B
To Optional Test Point
Loop Power
Jumper (HD21)
S
Analog To
Dual Pulse
Converter
Signal
Condition
1 System
2
3 Self
SEL 2
30V ISO 2
5V Ref
24 Volt
Loop Power
= Cabinet Metal -- Transient Suppression Only
Input 1 Circuit Similar To Input 2
Figure 5.1.18. Typical Input Circuit
Table 5.1.10 lists the specifications of the analog FIC.
Table 5.1.10. Analog FIC Specifications
Specification
Item
Temperature
0--50° C
Humidity
10--90%
Power Supply
voltage
Nominal
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum Battery Backup
Current (typical)
At 30 VDC
At 24 VDC
At 18 VDC
Accuracy
.1% of span
Resolution
over 4--20 mA span
Drift/Temperature
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
24 VDC to 30 VDC
22 VDC
34 VDC
18 VDC
214 mA
260 mA
347 mA
Input (A/D) 13 bits (0.012%)
Output (D/A)12.4 bits (0.019%)
.1% of span from 25° C to any temperature in 0--50° range
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-28
Analog FIC Redundancy
The 4--20 mA Isolated Analog FIC can be used in arrangements of 1--7,
1--3, and 1--1 redundancy. The Controller Processor card initiates the
command to switch control from a suspect FIC to the backup FIC.
Under normal operation, the three FIC relays that connect the card to
the marshaling panel terminals are energized and closed. On a backup
FIC the relays are de-energized and normally open. If the primary FIC
fails, the Controller Processor card sends a signal to the backup FIC to
de-energize, or open the relays on the failed FIC, thus removing it from
the system. Figure 5.1.19 shows the redundancy positions.
With 1--3 redundancy, the FIC in slot 4 backs up FICs in slots 1 through 3, and
the FIC in slot 8 backs up FICs in slots 5 through 7. One Analog Transfer
card is needed to reroute the field connections for each backup FIC.
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Analog Card Cage
With 1--1 redundancy, the FIC in the right slot
backs up the FIC to the left of it. No Analog
Transfer card is needed.
With 1--7 redundancy, the FIC in slot 8 backs up
FICs in slots 1 through 7. Two Analog Transfer
cards are needed to reroute field connections.
Figure 5.1.19. Analog FIC Redundancy Positions
NOTE: The revision level of the boot software in the redundant FIC
must be equal (or higher) to any FIC that is backed up. 1--1
redundancy is not available with the MPCAS, MPCAP, and MPCAT
Images.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-29
When a primary FIC with redundancy fails, the redundant FIC takes
over. The failed FIC lights its red LED or flashes its green LED.
Replace the failed FIC and determine that the new FIC has its green
LED on and that the FIC Status screen shows no error for the FIC. The
“Health” field of the primary FIC will still show “Bad”.
Restore the original configuration to have redundancy effective again.
CAUTION
Do not pull the redundant FIC to force a switch back to the
primary FIC. This introduces a “double hardware failure”
and may result in unexpected operation.
-
To restore FIC redundancy:
1. Call up the Redundant Input/Output Block (RIOB) screen.
2. Put the RIOB in MANUAL.
3. Highlight the line:
Reset Backup (Press enter)
and press [ENTER].
This restores the primary FIC and resets the backup FIC for
backup action. The Health field of the primary FIC will now show
“Good”.
4. Put the RIOB in AUTO.
Normal redundancy operation is restored.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-30
Analog FIC LEDs
Figure 5.1.20 shows the Analog Field Interface Card LEDs.
LEDs
G
R
Y
R
CARD
GOOD
(DS1)
No card faults are detected and the controller processor card is
controlling the output current. Blinking LED indicates the FIC is
not connected to the field (I/O redundancy) or the output is
being controlled by the Output Bypass card.
CARD
FAULT
(DS2)
A card fault is detected or communications with the Controller
Processor card have ceased.
Indicates communications activity. The signal that enables the
TX ENABLE transmit signal from the Field Interface card to the Controller
(DS3)
Processor card is active.
30 V FUSE
BLOWN
(DS4)
Power fuse F1 has blown. This LED does not indicate the
status of the fuses in the I/O loops. All fuses are installed in
sockets and are removable without soldering.
Figure 5.1.20. Analog FIC LEDs
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-31
Analog FIC Jumpers
Four sets of jumpers can be set for the Analog FIC:
D
FAIL -- to control action of the card on communications failure.
D
OUT -- to control normal or reverse action of the output signal.
D
REDUNDANCY -- to control FIC redundancy.
D
PWR -- to select field or system power for field devices.
The FAIL (HD1) jumper can be set either to HOLD or ZERO output on a
communications failure.
The OUT (HD2) jumper is set for either NORM or REVERSE action of
the output. This jumper is no longer used by the software. The AOB
block associated with the address should be set to control the output
action. The jumper should be in the NORM position.
The REDUNDANCY (HD4) jumpers set pins 1--2 for all redundancy
schemes except 1--1. The jumpers are set to 1--2 for nonredundant
applications. The revision A card uses jumper HD5 to set redundancy.
The proper hardware and software must be present to have FIC
redundancy.
There are three sets of PWR jumpers (HD11, HD21, and HD31), one for
each of the three I/O circuits. The PWR jumpers can be set to SYS (for
powering the loop from the system), or to SELF (for powering the loop
external to the system). HD11 corresponds to point xxxx01, HD21 to
point xxxx02, and HD31 to xxxx03.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-32
There are two versions of the card, which differ in the location of the
jumpers. The earlier version card uses an additional jumper (HD5) for
redundancy. Figure 5.1.21 shows jumper locations on all but the earlier
version card.
PWR
SYS 1
2
SELF 3
OUT ACT
NORM
HD2
REV
FAIL
HOLD 1
2
HD4
ZERO 3
1
1--7
HD1
2
3
1--1
REDUNDANCY
HD11
PWR
SYS 1
2
SELF 3
PWR
SYS 1
2
SELF 3
HD21
HD31
Figure 5.1.21. Analog FIC Revision B or Later Jumper Locations
Figure 5.1.22 shows the locations for the earlier version card.
HD11
HD21
HD31
HD3
HD5
HD2
HD4
HD1
Figure 5.1.22. Analog FIC (Earlier Version) Jumper Locations
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-33
Table 5.1.11 gives jumper values for the Analog Field Interface card.
Table 5.1.11. Analog FIC Jumper Positions
Jumper
Value
Action
FAIL HD1
HOLD
1--2
Hold output on failure.
ZERO
2--3
Zero output on failure
NORM
1--2
Normal output action
(Jumper not used by software.
Leave in the 1--2 position.)
REV
2--3
Reversed output action
(Jumper not used by software.)
1--2
1--7 redundancy or no redundancy
2--3
1--1 redundancy
SYS
1--2
System power for external devices
SELF
2--3
External devices are self powered
OUT HD2
REDUNDANCY
HD4
HD5 (Early version
only)
PWR
HD11
HD21
HD31
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-34
Analog FIC Fuses
Figure 5.1.23 shows the locations of the fuses on the Analog FIC.
Table 5.1.12 gives fuse data.
F11
F12
F21
F22
F31
F32
F1
Figure 5.1.23. Analog FIC Fuse Locations
Table 5.1.12. Analog FIC Fuse Data
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Schurter
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
C50382--0021
273002
MSF 034.4224
2 A 125 V Plug-In
F11
F12
F21
F22
F31
F32
C50382--0011
273.250
MSF 034.4213
1/4 A 125 V Plug-In
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-35
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard
Analog FIC with Smart Transmitter Daughterboard (1984--2519--000x)
is a Analog FIC (1984--2518--0002) with a factory-installed Smart
Transmitter Daughterboard Kit (1984--2483--000x).
An EMC-compliant Analog FIC with Smart Transmitter Daughterboard
(10P57240002) is a EMC-compliant Analog FIC (10P54440002)
equipped with a factory-installed EMC-compliant Smart Transmitter
Daughterboard (10P54500005).
Aside from EMC compliance, the two card combinations are functionally
identical.
The Analog FIC with Smart Transmitter Daughterboard supports
communications between a Smart transmitter and a MultiPurpose
Controller Processor. The Smart Daughterboard lets the system
communicate to a Smart device by sending digital information on top of
the 4--20 mA signal.
Smart Transmitter digital communication requires I/O block
reconfiguration. Refer to the I/O Block Configuration Manual for
information.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-36
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard LEDs
The Analog FIC and the Smart Transmitter Daughterboard have LEDs.
Figure 5.1.24 shows the combination.
No card faults detected,
the Controller Processor
card is controlling the
CARD GOOD output current. Blinking
(Green)
LED mean the FIC is not
(DS11)
connected to the field (I/O
redundancy) or the output
is being controlled by the
Output Bypass card.
CARD FAULT
(Yellow)
(DS2)
A card fault is detected or
communications with the
controller processor card
have ceased.
TX ENABLE
(Yellow)
(DS3)
Communications are
active. The signal that
enables the transmit
signal from the FIC to the
Controller Processor card
is active.
30 V FUSE
BLOWN
(Red)
(DS4)
Power fuse F1 has blown.
This LED does not show
the status of fuses in the
I/O loops. All fuses are
installed in sockets and
are removable without
soldering.
G
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
R
Y
Y
RTS
REQUEST
TO SEND
(Yellow)
(DS1)
The Smart daughterboard
has generated a request
to send. The card is
transmitting to a Smart
device.
XMIT/RECV
(Yellow)
(DS2)
Data transmission in either
direction. Flickering
shows data flow.
INPUT
SELECT 3
(Yellow)
(DS3)
The daughterboard is
communicating with the
third I/O point on the
FIC.
INPUT
SELECT 2
(YELLOW)
(DS4)
The daughterboard is
communicating with the
second FIC I/O point.
INPUT
SELECT1
(DS5)
The daughterboard is
communicating with the
first I/O point on the FIC.
Figure 5.1.24. Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard LEDs
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-37
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Jumpers
The jumpers are on the Analog FIC. See Figure 5.1.20 and
Figure 5.1.21 and Table 5.1.11 for jumper locations and settings.
NOTE: Jumpers HD2 (output action) and HD4 (redundancy) may be
covered by the Smart Transmitter Daughterboard. Changing these
jumpers requires removal of the daughterboard. See below for
daughterboard removal and replacement procedures.
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Fuses
The fuses are on the Analog FIC. See Figure 5.1.22 and Table 5.1.12
for fuse locations and data. There are no fuses on the Smart
Transmitter Daughterboard.
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Kit
A Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Kit (1984--2483--000x) may be
installed on a 1984--2518--0002 Analog FIC. For EMC compliance, a
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Kit (10P54500005) may be installed
on a 10P54440002 Analog FIC. The kit is marked “SMART
TRANSMITTER OPTION” on the PWA.
NOTE: Upgrade of a 1984--2518--0001 Analog FIC requires assistance
from FRSI System Support.
The Analog FIC supports communications between the Smart
transmitter and MultiPurpose Controller Processor when a Smart
daughterboard is attached. The Smart daughterboard allows the
system to communicate to a Smart device by sending digital information
on top of the 4--20 mA signal.
Smart Transmitter digital communication also requires I/O block
reconfiguration. Refer to the I/O Block Configuration Manual (IO) for
information.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-38
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard Installation
This is the procedure for installing a Smart Transmitter daughterboard
to an Analog FIC for Smart transmitter communications. The FIC being
upgraded must be removed from the system for upgrade.
This allows personnel with maintenance training and responsibility for
the system to add hardware to upgrade an existing 4--20 mA FIC for
Smart Transmitter digital communications. It does not have instructions
for system software upgrades that may be necessary for Smart
Transmitter communications.
Use antistatic wrist straps whenever you handle circuit cards, be sure to
transport cards in antistatic bags or boxes, and use an antistatic work
surface when you fasten the Smart daughterboard to the FIC. Static
discharge can damage the electronic circuitry, resulting in immediate or
delayed adverse effects on performance.
Do not remove the screws on the daughterboard side. The standoffs
should remain with the daughterboard and these screws secured with a
thread sealant when you separate a daughterboard from an FIC.
Materials needed:
D
D
D
01984--2518--0002 or 10P54440002 4--20 mA Field Interface
card (FIC)
01984--2483--0005 or 10P54500005 Smart Transmitter
Daughterboard
#1 Phillips screwdriver
NOTE: Use the 01984--2483--0005 Smart Transmitter Daughterboard
with the 01984--2518--0002 FIC OR use the EMC-compliant
10P54500005 Smart Transmitter Daughterboard with the
EMC-compliant 10P54440002 FIC.
-
To install a Smart Transmitter Daughterboard:
1. Take the FIC to be upgraded out of service. Do this while the
plant is not running, or with I/O redundancy active, or with the
output block in OVERRIDE with an Output Bypass card operating
and the inputs in MANUAL mode. If a system software upgrade
is needed, make all changes during a shutdown.
2. Remove the FIC from the Analog Card Cage and place the card
in an antistatic bag or box for transport to the work area.
3. Lay the FIC flat on the work surface. At this time, check that all
FIC jumpers are in the correct position. On some early FICs,
some jumpers are difficult to change without removing the Smart
daughterboard.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-39
4. Unpack the Smart daughterboard carefully to avoid bending
components and connector pins. Remove protective packaging
near two-pin connectors, if any. Remove screws (if installed)
from the exposed ends of the five stand-offs, and save them.
5. Orient the Smart daughterboard components over the FIC with
LEDs at the same end. Position the 20 pins on the Smart
daughterboard over the 20 position socket on the FIC. These
sockets and pins are just behind the LEDs on both cards. Do not
push the pins into the sockets at this time.
6. Align all six pins in the three two-pin connectors at the other end
of the Smart daughterboard over the three two-position sockets
on the FIC. It may be necessary to straighten some pins slightly
to align pins and sockets.
7. Carefully push the Smart daughterboard down evenly until the
five standoffs rest on the FIC.
8. While holding the two cards together lightly, turn them over so
that the assembly rests on the Smart daughterboard.
9. Check that the five standoffs line up with holes in the FIC. If not,
check that all pins are in sockets. If the pins are correctly
positioned, check to make sure that the pins are straight.
10. Start each screw into the standoffs. Tighten the screws securely.
From point of initial contact to full tightness is approximately 1/4
turn.
11. Reinstall the FIC/Smart daughterboard combination in the Analog
Card Cage. Be sure that the top and bottom edges of the FIC
are in the card guides to avoid brushing the assembly against
powered cards already in the cage.
12. After the FIC passes power-up diagnostics, it should immediately
perform all the functions it had before the upgrade. It will not be
able to perform Smart Transmitter digital communication until the
correct software is running in the Controller Processor and FIC.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-40
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard LEDs
Figure 5.1.25 shows the LEDs on the Smart Transmitter
Daughterboard.
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
RTS
REQUEST The Smart daughterboard has generated a request to send.
The card is transmitting to a Smart device.
TO SEND
Indicates data transmission in either direction. Flickering
XMIT/RECV indicates data flow.
INPUT
SELECT 3
The daughterboard is communicating with the third I/O point
on the FIC.
INPUT
SELECT 2
The daughterboard is communicating with the second I/O point
on the FIC.
INPUT
SELECT 1
The daughterboard is communicating with the first I/O point on
the FIC.
Figure 5.1.25. Analog FIC Smart Transmitter Daughterboard LEDs
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-41
Pulse I/O FIC
The Pulse I/O Field Interface Card (1984--2546--000x or EMC-compliant
10P54470002) can be used in any slot of an Analog Card Cage. The
Pulse I/O FIC accepts a field pulse input and generates pulses of the
specified width, frequency, or total count for output to the field. The
card accepts two pulse inputs and provides for one output. The Pulse
I/O FIC connects to a MultiPurpose Controller Processor (MPC). The
input/output point is configured as a PIOB (Pulse I/O Block). The card
is marked “PULSE I/O” on the PWA.
Pulse devices vary widely in their specifications. It may be necessary to
add signal conditioning, DC blocking, or filtering to the pulse input
circuit. Refer to the material on the Auxiliary Terminal Block
(1984--1543--000x) for suggestions. Table 5.1.13 lists the pulse and
contact input FIC specifications.
Table 5.1.13. Pulse I/O FIC Input Specifications
Term
Voltage Input Specification
Contact Input Specification
Input Frequency
Sine wave 1 Hz -- 50 kHz
Square wave .002 Hz -- 50 kHz
.002 Hz -- 50 kHz
Input Accuracy
0.05% of reading
0.05% of reading
Resolution
0.01% of reading
0.01% of reading
Count Match Response Time
5 ms maximum
5 ms maximum
Minimum Pulse Width
10 ms
10 ms
Voltage Range
50 mV to 30 V peak-to-peak
--
ON State Current
--
9 mA minimum
OFF State Current
--
5 mA maximum
Short Circuit Current
--
20 mA nominal
Open Circuit Voltage
--
21 V minimum, 24 V maximum
Impedance
100 K ohms minimum
300 pF maximum
--
Temperature Effect
0.01% within 0° to 50° C
0.01% within 0° to 50° C
Common Mode Rejection
80DB 47--52, 57--63 Hz, at 3 V
peak-to-peak
--
Normal Mode Protection
Fuse and transient suppressors
--
Isolation
Point-to-point
point-to-point
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-42
Table 5.1.14 lists the pulse and analog output FIC specifications.
Table 5.1.14. Pulse I/O FIC Output Specifications
Term
Pulse Output Specification
Analog Output Specification
Output Range
0 to 1 kHz
0--60 mA
Output Accuracy
--
0.5% of 4--20 mA span below
20 mA,
0.4% of reading above 20 mA
OFF State Leakage Current
20 mA maximum
20 mA maximum
Output Current Limit
20 +/--0.5 mA
60 mA minimum
65 mA maximum
Source Resistance
100 ohms maximum
25 ohms maximum
(supply mode)
Open Loop Voltage
21--24 V
21.5 V to 24.5 V
Output Resolution
--
11 bits 4--20 mA range on 7.5 mA
Output Fail Options
None
Off only
Timing Accuracy
+/--[ 20 ms + 0.01% of interval]
--
Timing Resolution
1 msec
--
Minimum Pulse Width
0.5 msec
--
Maximum Frequency
1 kHz with one output point
--
Temperature Effect
0.01%, within 0° to 50° C
on timing
0.1% of 4--20 mA span, within
0° to 50° C on output current
Isolation
point-to-point
point-to-point
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-43
Pulse I/O FIC LEDs
Figure 5.1.26 shows the Pulse I/O FIC LEDs.
LEDs
G
R
Y
R
CARD
GOOD
(DS1)
No card faults are detected and the Controller
Processor card is controlling the output current.
Blinking LED indicates the FIC is not connected to
the field I/O.
CARD
FAULT
(DS2)
A card fault is detected or communications with the
Controller Processor card have ceased.
TX ENABLE
(DS3)
Indicates communications activity. The signal that
enables the transmit signal from the Field Interface
card to the Controller Processor card is active.
30 V FUSE
BLOWN
(DS4)
Power fuse F1 has blown.
This LED does not indicate the status of the fuses in
the I/O loops.
STATUS 1
(DS5)
Represents the state of INPUT 1.
(Note: the state is shown after the prescaler)
STATUS 2
(DS6)
Represents the state of INPUT 2.
(Note: the state is shown after the prescaler)
NOT USED
For future use.
Y
Y
Y
Figure 5.1.26. Pulse I/O FIC LEDs
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-44
Pulse I/O FIC Jumpers
Figure 5.1.27 shows the Pulse I/O Field Interface card jumper locations.
Table 5.1.15 shows the jumper positions. All jumpers must be set to the
same position.
F11
F12
F21
F22
1--7
1--1
F31
1
2
3
F32
F1
HD4A, HD4B, HD4C
Figure 5.1.27. Pulse I/O FIC Card Fuse and Jumper Locations
Table 5.1.15. Pulse I/O FIC Card Jumper Positions
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Jumper
1:7, 1:3, or No Redundancy
1:1 Redundancy
HD4A
HD4B
HD4C
1--2
2--3
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-45
Pulse I/O FIC Fuses
Figure 5.1.27 shows the Pulse I/O FIC fuse locations. Table 5.1.16
gives fuse data.
Table 5.1.16. Pulse I/O Field Interface Card Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Schurter
Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G50382--0021
-- --
273002
MSF
034.4224
2.0 A 125 V Plug-In
F11
F12
F21
F22
F31
F32
G50382--0011
-- --
273.250
MSF
034.4213
1/4 A 125 V Plug-In
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-46
Temperature Input FIC
The Temperature Input FIC (1984--2731--000x) is marked “SIO,
RTD/TC” on the PWA. It is also known as the “TC/RTD FIC”. The card
can be used in any slot in an Analog Card Cage. The Temperature
Input FIC accepts a temperature sensor input signal and converts it to a
temperature value.
The Temperature Input FIC can be used with a 3-wire resistance
temperature device or with a thermocouple. Each of two Temperature
Input FIC channels can be configured to support Resistance
Temperature Detector (RTD), thermocouple, or cold junction
compensator RTD. One cold junction compensator channel can be
used to provide cold junction compensation for all thermocouple inputs
used in an Analog Card Cage. The cold junction compensator sensor
and thermal equalizer plate are attached to the marshaling panel. The
input point is configured as a TIB (Temperature Input Block).
NOTE: If the sensor circuit is disconnected and reconnected, the
reading will be inaccurate for approximately 20 minutes. The reading
will be within 1% in one minute and then gradually gain accuracy. This
is a characteristic of the circuitry used.
Figure 5.1.28 shows the Temperature Input FIC functional diagram.
Table 5.1.17 lists the Temperature Input FIC specifications.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-47
Processor System
Redundancy Jumpers
I/O Card
To
Transfer
Card
Isolation
Redundancy
Circuitry
Relay
Drive
RS-422
Comm
Lines
Serial Data To D/A
Channel 1
Battery
Backed
Ram 8k
Bytes
2K
EPROM
229 Microamp
Source
(RTD Only)
Flying Capacitor
Input
TC
Transient
Suppression
N.C.
229 Microamp
Source
(RTD Only)
30 V
Bus A
30 V
Bus B
SEL 1
DS4
SEL 2
128 Byte
RAM
Transient
Suppression
Channel 2
5V
5V (ISO)
For Inputs
1&2
68701
Micro
Flying Capacitor
Input
RTD
Wd &
Power
Up/ Down
Reset
Timer
5V
Regulator
Dual Pulse Input
INPUT 1
Signal
Conditioning
& Limiting
Sensor
Break
Detect
Analog To
Dual Pulse
Converter
5V
Ref
INPUT 2
Signal
Conditioning
& Limiting
Sensor
Break
Detect
SEL 2
SEL 2
Analog To
Dual Pulse
Converter
5V Ref
Figure 5.1.28. Temperature Input FIC Functional Diagram
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-48
Table 5.1.17. Temperature Input FIC Specifications
Term
Specification
Temperature Drift
±.125% Full Scale/25° C
change from calibration temperature
Cold Junction Compensation
RTD 57.72 ohms nickel sensor value
broadcast through Controller Processor
Cold Junction Temperature
Range
--30 C to +70° C
Accuracy Cold Junction
Compensation Circuit
±.55° C
Input Isolation
point-to-point
Maximum Sensor Wiring
Resistance
500 ohms per line
RFI Immunity
.2% to .6% Full Scale
External Resistance
3.21 to 390 ohms
Ambient Cabinet Temperature
0--50° C
Input Power
16--36 VDC
Power Requirements
35 V 100 mA, nominal
30 V 112 mA, nominal
24 V 140 mA, nominal
20 V 164 mA, nominal
Turn On Voltage
20 V, nominal
Turn Off Voltage
15 V, nominal
RTD Excitation Current
229 mA, nominal
RTD Resistance Range
Range 1: 0--100 ohms
Range 2: 0--400 ohms
Millivolt Input Range
Gain 1: --4 to 22 mV
Gain 2: --16 to 88 mV
Accuracy
(at calibration temperature)
TC/mV, Range 1: ±0.075% (19.5 mV)
TC/mV, Range 2: ±0.048% (50 mV)
RTD/ohms, Range 1: ±150 Milliohms
RTD/ohms, Range 2: ±200 Milliohms
Input Impedance for
Thermocouples
>100 Megohm
Use of a Temperature Input FIC requires you to configure the field
wiring terminations for an RTD application, a thermocouple application,
or a cold junction compensator RTD application. Field wiring is
terminated on the Analog Marshaling Panel.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-49
An RTD sensor requires field wiring of the Analog Marshaling Panel to
the Temperature Input FIC. If you use an external resistor to improve
the RTD resolution, the external resistor also requires termination of the
field wiring. Figure 5.1.29 shows the field wiring terminations for a
Temperature Input FIC configured for a 3-wire RTD application.
NOTE: A 4-wire RTD must be converted to a 3-wire RTD for proper
connection. The fourth wire may be removed or coiled and secured at
the RTD. Do not connect the fourth wire in parallel with the other wire.
101
A
B
102
A
B
101
C
102
C
201
A
B
202
A
201
202
C
C
B
Remove
fourth wire
3-wire RTD
4-wire RTD
Figure 5.1.29. Field Wiring Terminations for a Temperature Input FIC
Configured for a 3-wire RTD Application
Figure 5.1.30 shows the field wiring terminations for a Temperature
Input FIC configured for an RTD application with external resistance.
101
A
B
102
A
B
101
C
102
C
201
A
B
202
A
B
201
202
C
C
External resistor
RTD
Figure 5.1.30. Field Wiring Terminations for an RTD Application with External
Resistance
A thermocouple sensor, and the cold junction compensator RTD to
which it is linked, require field wiring of the Analog Marshaling Panel to
the Temperature Input FIC.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-50
A cold junction compensator RTD for use with a thermocouple requires
an FRSI supplied cold junction compensator RTD board mounted to the
Analog Marshaling Panel. The cold junction compensator RTD is wired
as an RTD. FRSI recommends that each cold junction compensator
RTD be connected to its own Analog Marshaling Panel. However, a
common cold junction compensator RTD may be connected to
numerous marshaling panels with a minimal temperature difference, if
the marshaling panels are located close to the thermocouples to which
the cold junction compensator RTDs are linked.
Figure 5.1.31 shows the field wiring terminations for a Temperature
Input FIC configured for a thermocouple application using a cold
junction compensator RTD.
101
A
B
102
A
101 102
B
C
C
201
A
B
202
A
201 202
B
C
C
CJC RTD
Thermocouple
Thermocouple
Thermocouple
Figure 5.1.31. Field Wiring Terminations for a Thermocouple and Cold Junction
Compensator RTD Application
A Temperature Input FIC can be used as a redundant FIC to back up
any combination of RTDs, thermocouples, or cold junction compensator
RTDs as long as the ranges that it is backing up have been calibrated.
Refer to Chapter 8, Calibration, for information about calibrating a
Temperature Input FIC.
The Temperature Input FIC supports 1:1, 1:3, or 1:7 redundancy. Upon
switchover from a failed Temperature Input FIC to the redundant FIC,
the hold forward flag is asserted for approximately 5 seconds or until the
A/D converter on the FIC is stable. This holds the input temperature
stable while the switchover occurs.
For 1:3 or 1:7 redundancy, the input terminal for the Redundant
Input/Output Block (RIOB) must not have any wiring connected to the
FIC. For 1:1 redundancy, the RIOB must have all input terminals
connected in parallel with the TIB. Use the same wire type as is used to
connect the FIC.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-51
Temperature Input FIC LEDs
Figure 5.1.32 shows the LEDs on the Temperature Input FIC.
G
R
Y
R
CARD
GOOD
(DS1)
No card faults are detected.
CARD
FAULT
(DS2)
A card fault is detected or communications with the Controller
Processor card have ceased.
TX
ENABLE
(DS3)
30 V FUSE
BLOWN
(DS4)
Indicates communications activity. The signal that enables
the transmit signal from the Field Interface Card to the
Controller Processor is active.
Power Fuse F1 has blown.
Figure 5.1.32. Temperature Input FIC LEDs
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-52
Temperature Input FIC Jumpers
The redundancy scheme jumpers indicate how the redundant Field
Interface cards are configured. The proper hardware and software
must be present to have FIC redundancy. Figure 5.1.33 shows
redundancy scheme jumper positions. Table 5.1.18 gives jumper
values. All three sets of jumpers must be in either the upper or lower
position for proper operation.
HD2 HD3 HD4
1
2
3
Other
1:1
Redundancy
F11
F9
F10
F6
F7
F1
F8
Figure 5.1.33. Temperature Input FIC Fuse and Jumper Positions
Table 5.1.18. Temperature Input FIC Card Jumper Positions
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Jumper
1:7, 1:3, or
No Redundancy
1:1 Redundancy
HD2
HD3
HD4
1--2
2--3
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-53
Temperature Input FIC Fuses
Figure 5.1.33 shows the locations of the fuses on the Temperature Input
FIC. Table 5.1.19 gives fuse data.
Table 5.1.19. Temperature Input Field Interface Card Fuses
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Littelfuse Part No.
Schurter Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G50382--0021
273002
MSF 034.4224
2.0 A 125 V Plug-In
F6
to
F11
G50382--0009
273.125
MSF 034.4210
1/8 A 125 V Plug-In
Analog Extender Card
An Analog Extender card (1984--2461--000x) may be used to move
cards out of the Analog Card Cage for easier access. It is marked
“FIC 2--IN 1--OUT/COMM EXTENDER BD” on the PWA.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-54
Analog Marshaling Panel
The Analog Marshaling Panel provides connection of field wiring to the
Analog Card Cage. Analog Marshaling Panels exist in several versions
with different markings on the PWA. Aside from EMC compliance and
mounting differences, they are functionally identical.
D
D
D
D
1984--2415--0001 marked “MULTISTRATEGY MARSHALLING
PANEL” near the part number on the PWA. This Marshaling
Panel is EMC compliant.
10P54590001 European Analog Marshalling Panel (without
fuses) and 10P54620001 European Analog Marshalling Panel
(with fuses). These two Marshaling Panels are EMC compliant.
1984--2512--000x marked “MULTISTRATEGY MARSHALLING
PANEL” near the part number on the PWA.
1984--2448--000x marked “ANALOG MARSHALLING PANEL”
near the part number on the PWA.
The label at the top of the panel may show either:
D
“SERIAL MARSHALLING PANEL”
D
“MPC MARSHALLING PANEL”
Shield connections are made to the SHIELDS terminals. A multipin
connector serves to connect the Analog Marshaling Panel to the Analog
Card Cage. Labels are provided to show examples of wiring different
devices and to record the details of field wiring connections.
Refer to the Site Preparation and Installation Manual (SP) for
detailed mounting, cabling, and field wiring examples; including
EMC compliance requirements.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-55
Figure 5.1.34 shows Analog Marshaling Panel: 1984--2415--0001.
Figure 5.1.35 shows European Analog Marshaling Panel 10P54620001
(with fuses). Table 5.1.20 shows fuse data for European Analog
Marshaling Panel 10P54620001.
Figure 5.1.34. Analog Marshaling Panel 1984--2415--0001
Fuses
Figure 5.1.35. European Analog Marshaling Panel 10P54620001
Table 5.1.20. European Analog Marshaling Panel 10P54620001 Fuses
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Characteristics
F1 to F24
G53394--0250--0005
0.25 A 125 V
IEC 127--2
Fast Acting 5 x 20 mm
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-56
Figure 5.1.36 shows Analog Marshaling Panel 1984--2512--0001.
01984--2512--0001
101
102
101 102
201
202 201 202
301
302
301302
401
402
401 402
101
102
103
201
202
301
302
303
401
402
403
A B A B C C A B A B C C A B A B C C A B A B C C
Å
203
MPC Marshalling panel
A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
TB3
TB1
J946
SHIELDS
Field Devices
INPUTS
To I/O
Card
Cage
--
A
B
4--20 : SYS PWR
--
+
4--20 : RMT PWR
+
V
+
--
1 -- 5 VOLT
V+ V--
PULSE
OUTPUTS (1 -- 8)
4 -- 20
F+ F-A
B
-+
Field
Valve
+
T
--
-T
+
Self Powered
Transmitter
System Powered
Transmitter
SHIELDS
Å
TB2
TB4
501
502
501 502
601
602
601 602
701
702
701702
801
802
801 802
501
502
503
601
502
503
701
702
703
801
802
803
A B A B C C A B A B C C A B A B C C A B A B C C
CONTROL FILE NODE
A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
CONTROLLER SLOT
FLEXTERM
Figure 5.1.36. Analog Marshaling Panel 1984--2512--0001
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-57
Cold Junction Compensator
A Cold Junction Compensator (1984--2616--000x) is used with
thermocouples. It carries a label (1984--2618--000x) that shows the
connections to be used for various applications. It mounts firmly against
the metal in the center of the Analog Marshaling Panel to sense the
ambient temperature at the Analog Marshaling Panel. There are no
replaceable parts in the Cold Junction Compensator.
Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block
The Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block (1984--1543--000x)
provides a method of connecting external components into the control
loop. Figure 5.1.37 shows the Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal
Block.
Clamp Screws
(6 total)
Field Device or Component Termination Points
(6 Total)
Analog Marshalling Panel Terminal
Support Standoff
Figure 5.1.37. Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block
NOTE: The terminal block may be mounted to either the upper or lower
row of terminals on the Analog Marshaling Panel. The block is marked
with normal and inverted letters; use the set that is right side up for your
connections.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-58
If a Cold Junction Compensator is in place, the screw and standoff at
the bottom of the block should be removed to provide clearance for the
cold junction compensator plate.
The Auxiliary Terminal Block has six field device or component
termination points and an A and B connection point for the Analog
Marshaling Panel. The termination points are connected in pairs and
there are no active components. The layout is designed to meet CSA
250V spacings for a PWB without transient limiting. The Auxiliary
Terminal block is also CSA approved for 300V and accepts 14 AWG
wire.
The electrical diagram is shown in Figure 5.1.38. Values of components
connected will vary with specific applications.
Field Device
or Component
Termination Points
Marshaling Panel
Connection Fingers
NOTE: Observe the “A” and “B”
Terminal Labels When Connecting
Components.
Figure 5.1.38. Auxiliary Terminal Block Wiring Diagram
Figure 5.1.39 shows a method of resolving self- or system-powered
jumper conflicts when implementing 3--1 or 7--1 redundancy. A 27 volt
Zener diode in series with a system-powered input will accept a 4--20
mA signal from a self-powered transmitter. This approach must be used
carefully.
B
Input with “Sys Pwr” Jumper Set
A
NOTE: Observe the “A” and “B”
terminal labels when connecting
components.
Self Powered XMTR --
Self Powered XMTR +
Figure 5.1.39. 4--20 mA Application -- Redundancy Loop Power Mismatch
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-59
Figure 5.1.40 shows the Auxiliary Terminal Block which is used when a
separate power supply and monitoring device are required in series with
the 4--20 mA current loop and transmitter. Loop continuity is preserved
even if the FIC fails or is removed. The Auxiliary Terminal Block allows
wiring to such a device without supplying separate rail mounted terminal
blocks.
B
Supply and Monitor -Supply and Monitor +
Input
XMTR + (Loop Powered)
NOTE: Observe the “A” and “B”
terminal labels when connecting
components.
A
XMTR --
Figure 5.1.40. 4--20 mA Input Application -- External Supply and Constant Loop Continuity
The Auxiliary Terminal Block can also be used to connect current meter
leads and Field calibrator leads.
Figure 5.1.41 to Figure 5.1.43 show some applications of the Auxiliary
Terminal Block in Pulse I/O. The need may arise to install external
components in order to perform signal level translation, attenuation, or
filtering. This is due to the wide variety of devices and signal levels
encountered in pulse I/O.
B
Pulse --
Pulse +
NOTE: Observe the “A” and “B”
terminal labels when connecting
components.
A
Figure 5.1.41. Pulse Application -- Simple DC Block
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-1-60
Figure 5.1.42 shows the addition of a loading resistor to the blocking
capacitor.
B
NOTE: Observe the “A” and “B”
terminal labels when connecting
components.
Pulse --
Pulse +
A
Figure 5.1.42. Pulse Application -- DC
Block/Load
B
NOTE: Observe the “A” and “B”
terminal labels when connecting
components.
Pulse --
Pulse +
A
Figure 5.1.43. Pulse Application -- Low Pass Filter
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Analog Card Cage
SV: 5-2-1
Section 2:
Contact Card Cage
This section covers the:
D
Contact Card Cage
D
Contact FlexTerm
D
Contact Termination Boards
D
Contact Marshaling Panels
D
Opto-Isolators
D
Discrete Switch Panel
D
Contact Field Interface cards
D
Contact Extender card
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-2
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm
The MultiPurpose Controller (MPC) Contact Card Cage (also known as
the MPC Contact FlexTerm) and the superseded Contact FlexTerm
each may contain eight Contact Field Interface cards to control 48
modules for field interface. A ControlFile MPC Controller Processor or
Contact Controller Processor can control 96 modules on two Contact
Card Cages or on two Contact FlexTerms connected together. Each
Contact Card Cage or Contact FlexTerm can hold two 1984--1288--000x
Contact Field Termination cards which contain field wiring terminals for
24 points and up to 24 input or output solid state switch modules.
There are three different Contact FlexTerm and Contact Card Cage
assemblies with different capabilities. Table 5.2.1 compares the
features of each of these assemblies. Table 5.2.2 shows parts
replacement data.
Table 5.2.1. Comparison of Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Assemblies
Capability
Contact Card
Cage
1984--2576--0001
Contact FlexTerm
1984--1175--000x
Contact FlexTerm
1984--1336--000x
Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA) Marking
MPC CONTACT
FLEXTERM
MOTHERBOARD
CONTACT
FLEXTERM
MOTHERBOARD
II
CONTACT
FLEXTERM
MOTHERBOARD
Marshaling Panel Connectors
Yes
Yes
No
2 Controller Communication Connectors
with redundancy jumpers
Yes
Yes
No
Image
MPC
CC
CC
Cage A/B jumpers
Yes
No
No
Local I/O modules
Yes
No
No
Connector bottom for cage jumpering
Yes
Yes
Yes
Connectors for contact switch panels
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fuse board for powering switch panel
Yes
Yes
Yes
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-3
Table 5.2.2. Parts Replacement
Part No.
Replaces
Characteristics
1984--2576--0001
None
Used only with MPCx images
1984--1336--000x
None
Used only with CC image.
1984--1175--000x
1984--1336--000x
Used only with CC image.
Has marshaling panel connectors
Contact input/output modules are mounted on two panels with field
wiring fuses and terminal strips. Modules are color-coded according to
module type. The contact modules have internal isolation so that no
electrical connection is made between the system circuits and the field
wiring. Label and legend stickers attached to the motherboard and
cabinet doors describe module, fuse, and terminal strip assignments.
The fuse card only protects the power to the manual switch station
connectors.
Optional contact switch panels can be used to manually set discrete
contact outputs to ON, OFF, or AUTO. Each panel is equipped with six
three-way switches and System Normal and System Fail indicators.
A Contact Card Cage can be cabled only to a ControlFile MPC
Controller card (1984--2500--000x) loaded with the MPC image.
A Contact FlexTerm can be cabled to a ControlFile MPC Controller card
(1984--2500--000x) loaded with the standard CC image or to a Contact
Controller card (1984--1374--000x or 1984--1445--000x) with the
standard CC image.
NOTE: You cannot cable a Contact Card Cage and a Contact FlexTerm
to the same Controller card.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-4
Contact Card Cage
The Contact Card Cage (1984--2576--0001) is marked “MPC CONTACT
FLEXTERM MOTHERBOARD” on the PWA.
A Contact Card Cage can be cabled only to a ControlFile MPC
Controller card (1984--2500--000x) loaded with the MPC image.
Figure 5.2.1 shows a Contact Card Cage. It has cage address jumpers
to select either Cage A or Cage B and uses the MPC point addressing
scheme. It also has Controller redundancy select jumpers. The
40-position connectors at the top are used to connect to another
Contact Cage, an Analog Cage, and a Controller Processor or
redundant Controller Processor. The 40-position connector at the
bottom is not used with the Contact Card Cage. The Contact Card
Cage has a connector for a Field Termination Board as well as for
remote Contact Marshaling Panels.
Fuse Card
Field
Termination
Board
Redundant
Cable Connection
Redundancy Jumpers
Power Connector
Field Termination
Board
FICs
Marshaling Panel
Cable Connection
Address Jumpers
Figure 5.2.1. Contact Card Cage
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-5
Contact Card Cage FIC Addressing
Figure 5.2.2 shows the addressing scheme for Contact Card Cage Field
Interface Cards (FICs). The FIC in the first slot addresses points 101
through 106, the one in the second slot addresses points 201 through
206, etc. The left hand Termination Board addresses points 101
through 406, which are controlled by the upper set of FICs. The right
hand Termination Board addresses points 501 through 806, which are
controlled by the lower set of FICs.
501
101 201 301 401
101
106 206 306 406
501 601 701 801
806
506 606 706 806
406
Figure 5.2.2. FIC Addressing in a Contact Card Cage
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-6
Contact Card Cage Wiring
The Contact Card Cage may be wired to field points either with a
Termination Board or a Marshaling Panel. Each accommodates 24 field
I/O terminations. The Termination Board plugs directly into the Contact
Card Cage motherboard left or right position, depending on the
addresses served. Similarly, the Marshaling Panel connects by the
appropriate connector on the motherboard. Figure 5.2.3 shows the
connection of a Marshaling Panel serving points 501 through 806.
Cable Between Card Cage
and Marshaling Panel
Optional Marshaling Panel
Field Termination Board
Fuses
OPTO Isolators
Fuses
Terminal Strips
Figure 5.2.3. Contact Card Cage Wiring Example
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-7
Contact FlexTerm
The Contact FlexTerm II (1984--1175--000x) is marked “CONTACT
FLEXTERM MOTHERBOARD II” on the PWA. It is used with the
Contact Controller Processor or the MPC Controller Processor running
the Contact Controller (CC) program. The I/O points are numbered
1--96. This assembly has connectors for remote Contact Marshaling
Panels and Controller redundancy select jumpers. The two 40-position
connectors at the top connect to the Contact Controller and the optional
redundant Contact Controller only. This Contact FlexTerm serves points
1--48. The 40-position connector at the bottom connects only to
another Contact FlexTerm that would serve points 49--96. Figure 5.2.4
shows the Contact FlexTerm.
1
2
3
6
7
4
No.
5
Description
8
No.
Description
1
Power Plug
5
To Marshaling Panel 1
2
Fuse Panel
6
To Marshaling Panel 12
3
Cable to ControlFile
7
Contact Termination Board 2
4
Contact Termination Board 1
8
To Second Contact FlexTerm
Figure 5.2.4. Contact FlexTerm
The earlier Contact FlexTerm (1984--1336--000x) is marked “CONTACT
FLEXTERM MOTHERBOARD” on the PWA. It is like the
1984--1175--000x except that it does not have marshaling panel
connectors or Controller redundancy jumpers and has only one
40-position connector to go to a Contact Controller.
A Contact FlexTerm may be cabled to a ControlFile MPC Controller
card (1984--2500--000x) loaded with the standard CC image or to a
Contact Controller card (1984--1374--000x or 1984--1445--000x) with the
standard CC image.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-8
Contact FlexTerm FIC Addressing
Figure 5.2.5 shows the contact I/O points controlled by each FIC and
connected by the Contact Termination Boards.
25
13 19
1
7
6
12 18 24
1
25 31 37 43
48
30 36 42 48
24
Figure 5.2.5. FIC Addressing in Contact FlexTerms
Contact FlexTerm Wiring
A Contact FlexTerm may contain eight Contact Field Interface cards and
connect 48 OPTO modules for field interface points. A Contact Control
Processor can control 96 modules on two Contact FlexTerms. Contact
FlexTerms are connected together by cabling between the bottom plug
of the first FlexTerm, and the top of the second. Figure 5.2.6 shows
wiring for two Contact FlexTerms connected together to serve 96
contact points.
The Field Interface cards are paired up so that the first communication
line talks to cards 1 and 2, the second communication line talks to cards
3 and 4, and so on. Communication lines 5 through 8 go to the lower
cage.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-9
25
1
Wire
Channel
Cable Ties
48
First Contact FlexTerm
Containing
Termination Points
1 Through 48
Terminal Strips
24
73
Second Contact
FlexTerm Containing
Termination Points
49 Through 96
Figure 5.2.6. Contact FlexTerm Field Wiring
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-10
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Jumpers
The Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm motherboards have
jumpers for card cage addressing and for redundancy. The older
Contact FlexTerm (1984--1336--000x) does not have redundancy
jumpers.
The redundancy jumpers indicate whether or not redundant Controller
Processors are connected to the Contact Card Cage in the ControlFile.
Figure 5.2.7 shows the jumper locations on the motherboard.
Table 5.2.3 shows the jumper positions.
Address Jumpers
HD3A through HD3D
Redundancy
Jumpers
HD1 and HD2
Address Jumpers
HD3E through HD3H
Figure 5.2.7. Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Jumper Locations
Table 5.2.3. Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Jumper Positions
Jumper
Purpose
Position
HD1
HD2
Indicates whether redundant Controller
Processor Cards are connected to the
Contact Card Cage and the ControlFile.
NORMAL:
No redundant Controller Processors
REDUNDANT: Redundant Controller Processors
(HD1 and HD2 must be jumpered in
the same position.)
HD3A
through
HD3H
Indicates whether the Contact Card Cage
is Card Cage A or Card Cage B. The
eight sets of jumpers correspond to the
eight contact FICs.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Card Cage A
Card Cage B
Indicates Card Cage A
Indicates Card Cage B
(HD3A through HD3H must be
jumpered in the same position.)
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-11
The Remote Marshaling Connectors Label indicates the Contact Card
Cage address, A or B, and its corresponding I/O point addresses. This
label is for information only. When the card cage address jumpers are
positioned, write an “X” in the appropriate box to track the cage
jumpering location. Figure 5.2.8 shows the Remote Marshaling
Connectors Label and markings.
“X” Indicates Cage A is Jumpered.
J425 FIC I/O Point Addresses: A101--A406
J426 FIC I/O Point Addresses: A501--A806
“X” Indicates Cage B is Jumpered.
J425 FIC I/O Point Addresses: B101--b406
J426 Fic I/O Point Addresses: B501--B806
Remote Marshaling
Connectors
Remote Marshaling
Connectors
(Cage Jumpering A or B)
(Cage Jumpering A or B)
J425
A101-A406
X
B101-B406
J426
J425
J426
A501-A806
A101-A406
A501-A806
B501-B806
Label
B101-B406
X
B501-B806
Figure 5.2.8. Remote Marshalling Connectors Label
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-12
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Fuses
A fuse panel (1984--1321--000x) is mounted at the top left hand side of
the Card Cage or FlexTerm. Table 5.2.4 gives fuse data.
Table 5.2.4. Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Fuses
FRSI Part No.
Bussman Part No.
Littelfuse Part No.
Characteristics
G09140--0032
MDL 2
313002
2 A 250 V Slow Blow
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-13
Contact Termination Board
The Contact Termination Board (1984--1288--000x) is marked
“CONTACT FIELD TERMINATION” on the PWA and is also known as a
“Local Field Termination Board”. The Contact Termination Board plugs
directly into the motherboard connectors of a Contact Card Cage or a
Contact FlexTerm. It accommodates 24 field I/O terminations. The
Contact Termination Board provides optical isolation and fusing for each
I/O point.
The Contact Termination Board allows use of the 1 amp OPTO only.
The fuses on the Termination Board are in line with the field wiring.
Figure 5.2.9 shows the Contact Termination Board.
NOTE: When installing a Contact Termination Board take particular
care to be sure that both connectors are correctly inserted in the
receiving slots.
Fuse 101
Fuse 102
101
102
103
104
105
106
201
202
203
204
205
206
301
302
303
304
305
306
401
402
403
404
405
406
OPTOs
Field wiring
terminal strip
Figure 5.2.9. Contact Termination Board
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-14
Contact Termination Board Wiring
Figure 5.2.10 shows an example of field wiring using a Contact
Termination Board. The wiring using a Contact Marshaling Panel is
different.
NOTE: The “+” and “--” terminals are reversed on the second Contact
Termination Board.
1
2
+
--
--
+
+
--
--
+
25
26
Figure 5.2.10. Contact FlexTerm Field Wiring Using a Contact Termination Board
The system can power a Contact Termination Board by wiring in power
from an external source. The power must be fused somewhere
between the power supply and where it is connected to the Contact
Termination board. Figure 5.2.11 shows an example of system
powering.
OPTO
1.5A
OPTO
1.5A
OPTO
1.5A
OPTO
1.5A
OPTO
1.5A
OPTO
1.5A
+
Field wiring
Figure 5.2.11. Contact FlexTerm System Power Wiring Using a Contact Termination Board
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-15
Contact Termination Board Fuses
The Contact Termination Board provides fuses in line with the field
wiring. Figure 5.2.9 shows the fuse locations. Table 5.2.5 gives fuse
data.
NOTE: Contact Termination Boards may have 4 amp fuses installed.
The fuses should be sized to match the load.
Table 5.2.5. Contact Termination Board Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
F1 to
F24
G09140--0029
MDQ 1--1/2
-- --
1.5 A 250 V Slow Blow
NOTE: Other fuses may be used
to match the applied load.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-16
Contact Marshaling Panel
The Contact Marshaling Panel (1984--2459--000x) connects to the
Contact Card Cage or Contact FlexTerm. Each Contact Marshaling
Panel has 24 I/O points arranged in groups of six. Each group of 6 I/O
points is served by a Contact Field Interface card in the card cage or
FlexTerm. It is marked “CONTACT MARSHALLING PANEL” on the
PWA. Figure 5.2.12 shows the Contact Marshaling Panel.
AC or DC Input Voltage
for Modules 101 -- 106
OPTO 1
VI+-- N1 VI+-- N1
VI+-- N1 VI+-- N1
VI+-- N1 VI+-- N1
V2+-- N2 V2+-- N2
V2+-- N2 V2+-- N2 V2+-- N2 V2+-- N2
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
V1
N1
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
101
102
103
104
105
301
302
303
304
305
Å
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
V2
N2
Ä
Ä
306
Ä
401
402
403
Ä
Ä
Ä
404
405
406
Ä
Ä
V4
Ä
N4
N3
oooo
oooo
oooo
+
--
106
201
202
203
204
205
206
CONTACT MARSHALLING PANEL
CONTROL FILE NODE_________CONTROLLER SLOT_______
V3
V3+--N3 V3+--N3
Å
Å
Å
Å
oooo
oooo
V3+--N3 V3+--N3 V3+--N3
oooo
V3+--N3
oooo
oooo
V4+--N4 V4+--N4
oooo
V4+--N4
ROSEMOUNT INC 1986 CONTACT Marshalling PANEL
PWA 01984--2459--0001 ___ SER____________
oooo
oooo
Å
Å
Å
Å
oooo
V4+--N4 V4+--N4 V4+--N4
Jumper
Figure 5.2.12. Contact Marshaling Panel
The Contact Marshaling Panel provides field wiring termination strips,
optical isolators, fuses, and address labels for field wiring. Optical
Isolator Modules of up to 3 ampere capacity may be used with the
Contact Marshaling Panel.
Each group of 6 points is connected to a single contact FIC card as
indicated by the highlighting in Figure 5.2.13. Each group of 6 points
can be powered (i.e., system powered) from the appropriate terminal
strip at the right side as shown in the figure.
Table 5.2.6 lists the Contact Marshaling Panel specifications.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-17
Table 5.2.6. Contact Marshaling Panel Specifications
Specification
Term
Current Ratings/Temperature
(at panel)
DC Output:
2.3 amps at 25° C
1.8 amps at 40° C
1.0 amps at 60° C
AC Output:
3.0 amps at 25° C
2.3 amps at 40° C
1.2 amps at 60° C
Voltage
Maximum: 300V rms
Fusing
4 amp slow blow per Optical Isolator Module
Cabling
50 conductor round cable
Maximum distance
Card Cage or FlexTerm to Marshaling Panel:
230 m (750 feet)
Connection to Card Cage
or FlexTerm
50 conductor cable terminated to connector on
motherboard
Wire gauge
2.5--0.34 mm2 (14--22 AWG) solid or stranded
Contact Marshaling Panel Wiring
The Contact Marshaling Panel accommodates 24 field I/O terminations,
with four contacts available at each point as shown in Figure 5.2.13.
The (+) and the (--) connections are used for devices powered in the
field. A jumper is required from Vx to + to provide system power to the
point. Jumpers are shown in Figure 5.2.12 on points 305 and 403. The
fuse is in series with the Vx power supply to the point.
+Vx
Vx
Nx
Module
+
--
Nx
Figure 5.2.13. Contact Marshaling Panel Wiring Circuit
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-18
Figure 5.2.14 and Figure 5.2.15 show several examples of powering
input devices. Bringing power to the V1 and N1 connections at the right
of the panel provides power for the six points served by FIC 1
(101--106). Address 104 shows the recommended wiring hookup for
system powering an input. Address 101 shows an alternate wiring
hookup for system powering an input. Address 203 shows the
recommended wiring hookup for remote powering an input. Address
205 shows an alternate wiring hookup for remote powering an output.
NOTE: When you are using system power DC, you will need to use a
commutating diode across the field wiring. A 1N4003 diode is often
used. A good alternative is a P6KE36CA transient suppressor.
AC or DC
Remote
Supply
Input Powered
From V1
(Alternate), and
Load Powered
From V1
+
+V
Input Powered
From V1
(Recommended)
+
-OPTO 1
--V
DC
Remote
Supply
+ --
See Note in Text on Use
of Diode
Commutating Diode
Fuse
Fuse
AC or DC Input
Voltage for Modules
101--106
--
VI+-- N1 VI+-- N1
VI+-- N1 VI+-- N1
VI+-- N1 VI+-- N1
V2+-- N2 V2+-- N2
V2+-- N2 V2+-- N2 V2+-- N2 V2+-- N2
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
oooo
V1
N1
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
101
102
103
104
Å
AC or DC
Input
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
V2
N2
Å
Å
Å
Å
+
--
105
106
201
202
203
204
205
206
CONTACT MARSHALLING PANEL
CONTROL FILE NODE_________CONTROLLER SLOT_______
AC or DC
Input
AC or DC
Input
DC
Output
AC or DC Input
Voltage for Modules
201--206
Figure 5.2.14. Contact Marshaling Panel Field Wiring: Example 1
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-19
CONTACT MARSHALLING PANEL
CONTROL FILE NODE_________CONTROLLER SLOT_______
Å
301
302
303
304
305
306
401
402
403
404
405
406
V4
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
Ä
N4
V3
N3
oooo
oooo
V3+--N3 V3+--N3
oooo
oooo
V3+--N3 V3+--N3 V3+--N3
oooo
oooo
V3+--N3
oooo
oooo
V4+--N4 V4+--N4
oooo
V4+--N4
ROSEMOUNT INC 1986 CONTACT Marshalling PANEL
PWA 01984--2459--0001 ___ SER____________
AC Out
oooo
oooo
Å
Å
Å
Å
+
-+
--
oooo
V4+--N4 V4+--N4 V4+--N4
DC Out
Load (No diode
required for AC)
AC Voltage
For Modules
301--306
DC
Relay
See Note In Text On Use
Of Diode
DC Voltage
For Modules
401--406
Figure 5.2.15. Contact Marshaling Panel Field Wiring: Example 2
Contact Marshaling Panel Fuses
Contact Marshaling Panel fuses are in line between the terminal block
and the individual point (V1, 2, 3, or 4), not in the field wiring.
Table 5.2.7 gives fuse data.
This fuse size is for the maximum allowable load on the Optical Isolator
Module. A smaller fuse may be used if a smaller load is applied.
Table 5.2.7. Contact Marshalling Panel Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
F1 to F24
G09140--0038
MDL 4
313004
4 A 250 V Slow Blow
NOTE: Smaller fuses should be
used if smaller loads are applied.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-20
Optical Isolator Modules
Optical Isolator Modules (G12243--00xx) are solid-state, optically
isolated relays that define each contact point as an input or an output.
Care must be taken to make sure that the proper type of modules are
installed because input and output modules are mechanically
interchangeable. Each module has a fuse in series with the field pair.
Table 5.2.8 lists the module types currently available.
Table 5.2.8. Optical Isolator Modules
*
Part Number
C12243--
Model
Function
Output
Contact*
Voltage
Color
--0005
IAC5A
Input
None
180--280 VAC
Yellow
--0006
IDC5
Input
None
10--32 VDC
White
--0007
IDC5B
IDC5F
Input
None
4--16 VDC
White
--0008
IAC5
Input
None
90--140 VAC
Yellow
--0009
ODC5
Output
N.O.
5--60 VDC
Red
--0010
ODC5A
Output
N.O.
5--200 VDC
Red
--0011
OAC5A5
Output
N.C.
24--280 VAC
Black
--0012
OAC5
Output
N.O.
12--140 VAC
Black
--0013
OAC5--A
OAC5--1
Output
N.O.
24--280 VAC
Black
All output modules, except OAC5A5, have normally open (N.O.) outputs. The output contact is open
when the block output is false.
NOTE: AC inputs are yellow and outputs are black. DC inputs are
white and outputs are red.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-21
The maximum current rating for modules depends on the location of the
optical isolation modules. The maximum current rating for modules
mounted on standard Contact Termination Boards (1984--1288--000x) is
1 amp. Table 5.2.9 lists the maximum current ratings for modules
mounted on Contact Marshaling Panels (1984--2459--000x).
Table 5.2.9. Maximum Current Ratings for Modules Mounted on Marshaling
Panels
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Ambient
Temperature
DC Output
Modules
AC Output
Modules
25° C
2.3 Amps
3.0 Amps
40° C
1.8 Amps
2.3 Amps
60° C
1.0 Amp
1.2 Amps
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-22
Discrete Switch Panel
A Discrete Switch Panel (1984--0360--000x) is available to allow
bypassing a Contact FIC output. Figure 5.2.16 shows the Discrete
Switch Panel.
The panel provides 6 switches and LEDs to indicate the switch position
(red -- open; green -- closed). The switch can also be placed in the
center position, which allows the Contact FIC to operate normally.
When in this position, the LEDs indicate the state of the point. The
bottom red and green LEDs indicate the status of Controller
Communication. If the green LED is on, the Controller is
communicating with the Card Cage or FlexTerm.
The Discrete Switch Panel plugs into the connectors on a Contact Card
Cage or Contact FlexTerm, where there is a plug for each FIC, to
bypass the Contact FIC output. Cable 1984--0361--00xx is used.
OFF
AUTO
ON
R
G
R
G
R
G
R
G
R
G
R
G
FAIL
R
NORM
SYSTEM
G
Figure 5.2.16. Discrete Switch Panel
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-23
Contact Field Interface Cards
The 1984--1460--000x and 1984--1304--000x Contact Field Interface
cards interface with the Controller Processor to turn optical isolator
output modules on and off. Contact FIC --1460 supersedes card --1304.
Both cards perform the same function, but the --1304 works only with
the CC image. The cards are marked “CONTACT I/O” on the PWA.
The jumpers have the same effects on the outputs of both cards.
Each Contact Field Interface card card can control six modules in any
combination of input or output, AC or DC. Isolated voltage from the
switching power regulator provides power for the isolated circuits on the
communication line to the Controller Processor. Figure 5.2.17 shows a
functional diagram of the Contact Field Interface card.
The 6801 microprocessor with 2K of ROM and 128 bytes of RAM
handles all communications and module write and feedback sense. A
watchdog timer driven from the latch strobe line monitors the
microprocessor for lack of activity and resets the microprocessor if it
fails. As communications from the Controller Processor indicate the
proper state of each output module, the microprocessor passes this
information to the latch and pulses the strobe line. This line goes
through a circuit that pulses the latch to clock the data through to the
output circuit. The output circuit has 6 identical circuits. An 8 mA
current source is turned on and off by the latch and goes through a
sense resistor to the indicator LED and to the microprocessor in order to
indicate if the current flow path through the output module is complete.
In the case of input modules, the current source is turned on all the time
by the latch. If the module has no input voltage to it, no current will flow,
so no voltage will be seen across the sense resistor. If the module is
on, the current path is completed through the module (and the indicator
LED), causing a voltage drop across the sense resistor which indicates
to the microprocessor that the module is on.
The power regulator, in addition to providing isolated 5 V, also provides
5 V to the microprocessor and associated circuitry. +8 V is generated
for the current source.
Six additional input lines are provided to the microprocessor from the
Manual Switch Station to indicate each output module that is manually
bypassed.
Table 5.2.10 lists the Contact FIC specifications.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-24
30 V (A)
+5 V
+12 V
Power
Regulator
+5 V Isolated
30 V (B)
Isolated Return
Return
Hold
Clear
Typical
(6 Circuits)
Output
WatchLatch
dog
+5 V Timer Strobe
Q0
Receive Data
Transmit Data
Comm &
Transmit
Enable
Isolation
RS-422
Comm
Lines
+5 V
+12 V
Q6
Reset
Optical
Module
IN
6801
Micro
Processor
Contact Switch
Panel Sense
Lines
Micro OK Signal
Figure 5.2.17. Contact FIC Functional Diagram
Table 5.2.10. Contact FIC Specializations
Item
Specification
Power:
Voltage
Current
22--34 VDC
90 mA at 30 V typical
Switching current
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
10 mA typical,
8 mA minimum
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-25
Contact FIC LEDs
LEDs are used to indicate transmit enable, whether the card is good or
bad, and the six output module states.
Figure 5.2.18 shows the Contact Field Interface card LEDs.
LEDs
Y
Y
Y
I/O 1--6
(DS5--DS10)
Indicates the logic state of the module’s input or output.
With a normally open input or output, the module is ON if
the LED is ON. With a special order, normally-closed output
module, contact is made with no power applied. The LED is
ON with an open contact on the module.
30 V FUSE
BLOWN
(DS3)
Replace power fuse F1 on the Contact Field Interface Card.
Y
Y
Y
R
Y
R
G
TX ENABLE
(DS4)
The signal that enables the transmit signal from the Field
Interface Card to the Contact Processor is active.
CARD FAULT A Fault is detected on the contact Field Interface card, or
communications with the contact processor have ceased.
(DS2)
Discrete outputs will go to the condition called for by the
position of jumper HD1 (hold or off).
CARD GOOD No faults are detected on the Contact Field Interface card
(DS1)
and communication with the Contact Processor is active.
Figure 5.2.18. Contact Field Interface Card LEDs
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-26
Contact FIC Jumpers
Figure 5.2.19 shows the jumper locations on a 1984--1460--000x card.
Figure 5.2.20 shows the jumper locations on a 1984--1304--000x card.
HD1
F1
Figure 5.2.19. Contact FIC 1984--1460--000x Fuse and Jumper Locations
HD1
F1
Figure 5.2.20. Contact FIC 1984--1304--000x Fuse and Jumper Location
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-27
Table 5.2.11 gives jumper values for both cards.
Table 5.2.11. Contact Field Interface Card Jumper Positions
Jumper
Position
Effect
HD1
HOLD
Hold output value on communications failure
OFF
Drive output to zero on communications failure
Contact FIC Fuses
Figure 5.2.19 shows the fuse location on a 1984--1460--000x card.
Figure 5.2.20 shows the fuse location on a 1984--1304--000x card.
Table 5.2.12 gives fuse data.
Table 5.2.12. Contact Field Interface Card Fuses
Card
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Schurter
Part No.
Characteristics
1984--1460--000x
F1
G50382--001
4
-- --
273.500
MSF
034.4216
1/2 A 125V Plug-In
1984--1304--000x
F1
G9140--0016
AGC 1/2
312.500
-- --
1/2 A 250V Quick
Acting
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-2-28
Contact Card Cage and Contact FlexTerm Extender Card
An extender card (1984--1364--000x) is available that allows you to
move contact FICs out of the card cage for easier access. The
extender is marked “COORDINATOR PROCESSOR EXTENDER” on
the PWA.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Contact Card Cage
SV: 5-3-1
Section 3:
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
This section describes the Multiplexer (MUX) FlexTerm and field
interface equipment, including the following components:
D
Multiplexer FlexTerm
D
MUX Power Regulator
D
MUX Communication
D
MUX Marshaling Panels
D
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
—
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel
—
Current MUX Marshaling Panel
—
RTD MUX Marshaling Panel
Front End Modules (FEMs)
—
Voltage FEM
—
Current FEM
—
Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) FEM
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-2
MUX FlexTerm
The MUX (Multiplexer) FlexTerm (1984--0620--0001) consists of a DC
Power Supply, a Communication card, and Front End Modules (FEMs).
Up to five FEMs can be installed for a total of 100 input points. Signals
from the FEMs are fed to the Communication card, which takes 7
seconds to scan all 100 points. The individual readings are sent to the
Controller Processor in the ControlFile through an isolated RS-422
communications line. Marshaling panels can be connected to the
Multiplexer FlexTerm to facilitate field terminations. Figure 5.3.1 shows
the Multiplexer FlexTerm.
The type of FEM that is installed controls the type of Field Input that can
be used. The Multiplexer FlexTerm can support these FEMs:
D
Thermocouple and MilliVolt input
D
Current input
D
Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) input
D
Universal input
FEMs are described later in this section.
FEMs
Communications Card
Power Supply
81 61 41 21
1
100 80 60 40 20
Cable Routing
Strain Relief
Leave Approximately 75 cm
(30 in.) to Allow Removal of
FEM
Figure 5.3.1. Multiplexer FlexTerm
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-3
An MPC II or MPC5 Controller Processor may control two MUX
FlexTerms by use of the “Y” cable “MUX Cable Assembly, 200 Points”
(1984--3062--00xx). Points in the first MUX FlexTerm have addresses
001 to 100. Those in the second MUX FlexTerm have addresses 101 to
200. The first Flex Term connects to plug P106. The second connects
to plug P107.
The MPC II must be loaded with the MPC2+ image and have the MPC II
image functionality jumpers set to MUX+ to allow the use of up to 200
points. The MPC II baud rate jumpers (HD21--HD24) must be set to the
industrial standard speed, 9600 baud. Figure 5.3.2 shows this
configuration.
The MPC5 must be loaded with the MPC5+ image and have the MPC5
Image Functionality jumpers set to MUX+ to allow the use of up to 200
points.
ControlFile
Figure 5.3.2. Two MUX FlexTerms Connected to a Controller Card
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-4
MUX Power Regulator
The Multiplexer Power Regulator (1984--0605--0001) takes the system
30 volt DC bus inputs through the input switch provided on the front
panel. The A and B DC buses are diode isolated. The input voltage is
chopped into a square wave and sent through a transformer to produce
an unregulated 300 volt square wave. This is then fed to the input of a
second transformer and rectified, filtered and regulated to +5, +12, and
--12 VDC. There is also a low voltage 15 KHz square wave generated
for power and timing to the FEMs. Voltages are sensed for proper
tolerance and this circuit drives the red/green LED pair.
Figure 5.3.3 shows a functional diagram for the Multiplexer Power
Regulator.
Power Switch
>
30 VDC
A & B Power Input
>
30 VDC Return >
Power Regulator
Outputs:
+5 VDC
+12 VDC
--12 VDC
LED
Status,
Control
Power is sent to the
processor card
+5 VDC
Green LED:
Power Good
+12 VDC
Red LED:
Power Bad
--12 VDC
MUX
FlexTerm
Comm Card
Precision
Oscillator
Signal
Converts crystal
input to 15 kHz
square wave for use
by the A/D sections
for timing and by the
FEMs for 5V power
15 kHz Square Wave
To all FEMs
Figure 5.3.3. Multiplexer Power Regulator Functional Diagram
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-5
MUX Power Regulator LEDs
The Multiplexer Power Regulator has red and green LEDs on the
faceplate to indicate status. It also has an on-off switch.
CAUTION
The MUX power supply must be turned off when you install
or remove boards in the MUX.
MUX Communication Card
The MUX Communication card (1984--0628--000x) has a 68000
microprocessor that handles all functions within the MUX FlexTerm.
This includes communication with the FEMs, A/D conversion timing,
thermocouple and RTD conversion, and communication to the
Controller Processor card. There is also a watchdog timer that must be
reset by the microprocessor or the timer will reset the microprocessor.
Figure 5.3.4 shows a functional diagram for the Multiplexer
Communication card.
FlexTerm
FEMs
5 Max in the
Card Cage
Multiplexer
Controller
RS-422
Comm
MicroProcessor
Command and
Data Signals
+5 VDC
+12 VDC
--12 VDC
Table
ROM
Multiplexer
Power
Supply
Digital A/D
Section
Crystal
OSC
15 KHz Square Wave
Figure 5.3.4. MUX Communication Card Functional Diagram
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-6
The Communication card operates by using on board RAM and single
ROM for operating instructions. The Communication card also handles
communication and timing for the FEM. Communication to each FEM is
handled by a serial bitstream of data to sequence the input points,
communicate the type of FEM, and handle the A/D timing.
The Communication card and FEM (this includes all types of FEMs)
comprise a dual slope analog to digital (A/D) to convert the analog
voltage to a digital value that is then changed to the proper scaling by
the microprocessor. The analog portion of the A/D is contained on the
FEM and the digital portion of the A/D is on the Communication card.
The Communication card addresses the FEM and input point on that
FEM and a voltage pulse is sent to the field input for the “break detect”.
This voltage pulse is normally shorted out through the field device and
no residual voltage is left. If the sensor (thermocouple or RTD) is open,
the voltage charge will remain on the input and the A/D will measure an
overvoltage condition. A MUX Overvoltage alarm is generated for that
point.
The dual slope A/D converter works as follows. The Communication
card sends a start instruction to the FEM. The FEM applies the
unknown field voltage to a precision capacitor for a period of time
determined by the timer on the Communication card, thus charging the
capacitor to some voltage. The FEM then applies a precise reference
voltage (negative voltage) to the same capacitor, thereby discharging it.
A signal is sent from the FEM to the Communication card to indicate
when the zero voltage point is reached. The Communication card uses
a digital timer to measure the time between when the reference voltage
is applied to the capacitor and the zero cross is detected. The digital
count then represents the analog voltage.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-7
MUX Marshaling Panels
There are three MUX Marshaling Panels available to connect field
wiring to the MUX FlexTerm:
D
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel
D
Current MUX Marshaling Panel
D
RTD MUX Marshaling Panel
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel
The Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2457--000x) is marked
“ANALOG MARSHALING PANEL” on the Printed Wiring Assembly
(PWA) and “VOLTAGE MUX MARSHALLING PANEL” on the label at the
top. It accepts field inputs for voltage input Front End Modules. Each
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel has a total of 20 I/O points. Table 5.3.1
lists the Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel specifications.
Table 5.3.1. Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel Specifications
Item
Specification
Voltage
CSA: 150V rms
With a locally coated connector: 250V rms
Wire gauge
4 to 0.5 mm2 (12--20 AWG) solid, stranded, or lugged
Temperature
Maximum: 105° C
Connection to FlexTerm
50 conductor cable
terminated to connector on FlexTerm motherboard
Cable 1984--0500--xxxx connects the marshaling panel and the
FlexTerm. The system typically ships with the cable connected. If the
wires are to be connected in the field, follow Table 5.3.2.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-8
Table 5.3.2. Wiring Voltage or Current MUX Marshaling Panel to FEM
Wire Color
Band Color
Connect to
Wire Color
Band Color
Connect to
yellow
orange
1+
blue
yellow
11+
orange
yellow
1--
yellow
blue
11--
green
yellow
2+
grey
black
12+
yellow
green
2--
black
grey
12--
brown
yellow
3+
brown
black
13+
yellow
brown
3--
black
brown
13--
yellow
grey
4+
green
black
14+
grey
yellow
4--
black
green
14--
blue
white
5+
orange
black
15+
white
blue
5--
black
orange
15--
white
orange
6+
blue
black
16+
orange
white
6--
black
blue
16--
white
green
7+
grey
red
17+
green
white
7--
red
gray
17--
white
brown
8+
brown
red
18+
brown
white
8--
red
brown
18--
white
grey
9+
green
red
19+
grey
white
9--
red
green
19--
red
blue
10+
orange
red
20+
blue
red
10--
red
orange
20--
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-9
Current MUX Marshaling Panel
The Current MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2458--000x) is marked
“MUX MARSH PANEL” on the PWA and “4--20 MUX MARSHALLING
PANEL” on the label. It is designed to terminate 4--20 mA signals for
MUX inputs. The 4--20 MUX Marshaling Panel accepts field inputs for
three types of Front End Modules: a 4--20 mA FEM with a self-powered
transmitter, a 4--20 mA FEM with system bus power, and a 4--20 mA
FEM with remote power at the Marshaling panel. The 4--20 mA
Marshaling Panel has 20 inputs per panel and 60 terminals for field
termination.
Table 5.3.3 lists the 4--20 mA MUX Marshaling Panel specifications.
Table 5.3.3. 4--20 mA MUX Marshaling Panel Specifications
Item
Specification
DC power isolation and
fusing
1984--1321 fuse module with isolating diodes
Per point fusing
1/4 A
Temperature range
0--70° C
Maximum voltage
Transmitter powered: 250 V RMS
System and remote powered: 150 V RMS
Wire gauges
4 to 0.5 mm2 (12--20 AWG) AWG solid, stranded, or
lugged
Connection to FEM
50 conductor cable terminated directly to FEM
terminals
Cable 1984--0500--xxxx connects the marshaling panel and the
FlexTerm. The system typically ships with the cable connected. If the
wires are to be connected in the field, follow Table 5.3.2.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-10
RTD MUX Marshaling Panel
The RTD MUX Marshaling Panel (1984--2456--000x) is marked
“MULTISTRATEGY MARSHALLING PANEL” on the PWA and “RTD
MUX MARSHALLING PANEL” on the label (1984--2466--000x). It
accepts field inputs for RTD Front End Modules. Each RTD MUX
Marshaling Panel has a total of 10 I/O points. Table 5.3.4 lists the RTD
MUX Marshaling Panel specifications.
Table 5.3.4. RTD MUX Marshaling Panel Specifications
Item
Specification
Voltage
CSA: 150 V RMS
With a locally coated connector: 250V RMS
Wire gauge
4 to 0.5 mm2 (12--20 AWG) AWG solid, stranded, or
lugged
Temperature
Maximum: 105° C
Connection to FlexTerm
50 conductor cable terminated to connector on
FlexTerm motherboard.
Cable 1984--0500--xxxx connects the marshaling panel and the
FlexTerm. The system typically ships with the cable connected. If the
wires are to be connected in the field, follow Table 5.3.5.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-11
Table 5.3.5. Wiring RTD MUX Marshaling Panel to FEM
Wire Color
Band Color
Connect to
Wire Color
Band Color
Connect to
yellow
orange
1V+
blue
yellow
6V+
orange
yellow
1I+
yellow
blue
6I+
green
yellow
1 V --
grey
black
6 V --
yellow
green
1 I --
black
grey
6 I --
brown
yellow
2V+
brown
black
7V+
yellow
brown
2I+
black
brown
7I+
yellow
grey
2 V --
green
black
7 V --
grey
yellow
2 I --
black
green
7 I --
blue
white
3V+
orange
black
8V+
white
blue
3I+
black
orange
8I+
white
orange
3 V --
blue
black
8 V --
orange
white
3 I --
black
blue
8 I --
white
green
4V+
grey
red
9V+
green
white
4I+
red
gray
9I+
white
brown
4 V --
brown
red
9 V --
brown
white
4 I --
red
brown
9 I --
white
grey
5V+
green
red
10 V +
grey
white
5I+
red
green
10 I +
red
blue
5 V --
orange
red
10 V --
blue
red
5 I --
red
orange
10 I --
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-12
When an RTD Marshaling Panel is used, four wires are run from the
RTD Marshaling Panel to the FEM. Each additional wire adds to the
accuracy of the temperature reading. Inaccurate readings will result
when two and three wire RTDs are connected to the Marshaling Panel
unless special wiring practices are followed. The inaccuracies are
introduced by the added resistance of the unused wires between the
Marshaling Panel and the FEM.
Wiring procedures for connecting two, three, and four-wire RTDs are
shown below.
-
To connect a two-wire RTD:
1. Connect the wires from the RTD to the V+ and V-- terminals on
the Marshaling Panel as shown in Figure 5.3.5.
2. Connect the cable from the Marshaling Panel to the V+ and V-terminals of the FEM.
3. Jumper I+ to V+and I-- to V-- on the FEM.
RTD
V+
V+
I+
I+
V --
V --
I --
I -FEM
RTD Marshaling Panel
Figure 5.3.5. Connecting a Two-Wire RTD
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-13
-
To connect a three-wire RTD:
1. Connect the wires from the RTD to the V+, V--, and I-- terminals
on the Marshaling Panel as shown in Figure 5.3.6.
2. Connect the cable from the Marshaling Panel to the V+, V--, and
I-- terminals of the FEM.
3. Jumper I+ to V+ on the FEM.
RTD
V+
V+
I+
I+
V --
V --
I --
I -FEM
RTD Marshaling Panel
Figure 5.3.6. Connecting a Three-Wire RTD
-
To connect a four-wire RTD:
1. Connect the wires from the RTD to the V+, V--, I+, and I-terminals on the Marshaling Panel as shown in Figure 5.3.7.
2. Connect the cable from the Marshaling Panel to the V+, V--, I+,
and I-- terminals of the FEM.
RTD
V+
V+
I+
I+
V --
V --
I --
I -FEM
RTD Marshaling Panel
Figure 5.3.7. Connecting a Four-Wire RTD
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-14
MUX Front End Modules (FEMs)
The MUX Front End Module (FEM) (1984--0607--000x) provides the
interface between field wiring and the MUX FlexTerm. The most
commonly used FEMs are:
D
Thermocouple and Voltage Input
D
Current Input
D
RTD Input
Other specialized FEMs are available.
Power for the Front End Module is provided by a low voltage 15 KHz
square wave provided by the Multiplexer Power Supply. This signal is
rectified, filtered, and regulated to the required voltages to operate the
FEM. This same 15 KHz square wave is also used for timing the A/D
sequence.
All FEMs include some form of multiplexing to switch one of the 20 field
inputs directly into the A/D input for evaluation every 70 milliseconds.
The multiplexer circuit can utilize either solid state or reed relays. The
solid state circuit has a very long life but the common mode voltage
(voltage measured between any two input points on the FEM) must be
below 6 VDC or damage may occur to the unit. The reed relay FEM
has common mode voltage protection of 200 VDC between points.
CAUTION
MUX power must be OFF when FEMs are removed or
inserted. The securing bar must be firmly in place to
ensure that all FEM contacts are engaged.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-15
-
To install a FEM in the MUX FlexTerm:
1. Ensure that the securing bar is firmly in place with a washer
under the head of the screw to the FlexTerm and a washer
between the securing bar and the FEM as shown in Figure 5.3.8.
Securing Bar
FEM
Washers
Mounting Screws
FlexTerm Base
Figure 5.3.8. Securing a FEM in the MUX
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-16
Thermocouple and Voltage FEM and Universal Voltage FEM
The RTD FEM (1984--0607--0003 and 1984--0607--0009) is intended to
measure the resistance of a Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD).
The --0003 uses completmentary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS)
solid state circuitry. The --0009 uses reed relays. Several ranges are
available. The FEM can handle grounded or ungrounded RTDs. All
inputs are multiplexed into the input of the A/D along with an internal
precise 100 ohm resistor. Every cycle, this resistor value is read and
the calibration is corrected to provide accurate readings. No manual
calibration is required for RTD FEMs. Figure 5.3.9 shows the functional
diagram for the RTD Input FEM.
Multiplexer
Flexterm
Processor
15
kHz Power
Supply
5 VDC
Field
Termination
20 Points
Per FEM
+I
+V
Control
Section
Analog A/D
Section
Multiplexer
Switching
Reed Relays
or
Solid State
for
20 Inputs
Self
Calibration
100 Ohm
Resistor
--V
--I
+I 0.5 mA
+V
RTD
Sensor
+
--
--V
0.5 mA
Current
--I
Figure 5.3.9. RTD Input FEM Functional Diagram
To measure the RTD through a four wire configuration, a precise 0.5
milliamp current is generated by the RTD FEM, sent to the RTD, and
returned to the FEM through one pair of wires. These are the +I and --I
wires. The other pair of wires is also connected across the RTD and
connected to the input of the A/D converter. These are the +V and --V
wires. This gives a precise reading of the voltage drop across the RTD
without including the voltage drop across the current wires.
RDTs are available with two, three, or four wires. The more wires used,
the more accurately the resistance of the RTD may be measured.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-17
NOTE: If an RTD Marshaling Panel is used between the RTD and the
FEM, special wiring techniques are required for the use of two or three
wire RTDs. See the material on the RTD Marshaling Panel earlier in
this section for wiring procedures.
Figure 5.3.10 shows typical wiring of four-wire and three-wire RTDs.
Use of a three-wire RTD requires connecting the +I and +V wires
together at the FEM. The FEM accurately measures the RTD by
subtracting twice the voltage drop on the --I and --V wires from the
measured voltage on the RTD.
1
2
3
I
--
V
--
I
+
V
+
I
--
V
--
I
+
7
8
I
--
1
V
+
I
--
V
--
I
+
V
--
I
+
6
V
+
V
+
Jumper
6
Terminal
Position 1
Three wire termination
Four wire termination
Orange terminal strips must
be pulled out to gain access
to screws.
Terminal
Position 6
Gray terminal strips cannot be
removed.
Figure 5.3.10. Field Termination of Four-Wire and Three-Wire RTDs
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-3-18
Figure 5.3.11 shows a method of terminating a two-wire RTD at the
FEM.
4
--
3
+
-- +
2
--
1
-- +
+
2
Orange terminal strips must be
pulled out to gain access to
screws.
Gray terminal strips cannot be
removed.
1
Figure 5.3.11. Field Termination of a Two-Wire RTD
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-4-1
Section 4:
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
This section covers the PLC equipment:
D
PLC FlexTerm
D
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O card
D
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O card
See the I/O Block Configuration Manual (IO) for more information on
using and configuring PLCs.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-2
PLC FlexTerm
The PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) FlexTerm is also called the
Communications FlexTerm and the RBLC FlexTerm, depending on its
application. These versions are available:
D
10P53200001
CE compliant version with communication
line capability.
D
1984--2409--0001
Original version.
Table 5.4.1. Parts Replacement
Part No.
Replaces
10P53200001
1984--2409--0001
1984--2409--0001
10P53200001
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Characteristics
Replaces in all cases.
Except in CE compliant installations or
ones using the communication lines.
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-3
Figure 5.4.1 shows the 10P53200001 Flexterm and identifies the parts.
Note that the motherboard part number (10P53140001) is not the same
as the assembly part number.
10P53200001
1
J364
2
3
J365
1
J370
2
3
4
5
CONTROLLER 1
Y
Y
R
G
J371
4
6
7
8
Y CONTROLLER 2
Y
R
G
Y
Y
R
G
J367
NORMAL
J706
J707
J708
COMM LINE 1 COMM LINE 2 COMM LINE 3 COMM LINE 4
CONTROLLER 1
J709
J710
J711
J712
COMM LINE 1 COMM LINE 2 COMM LINE 3 COMM LINE 4
CONTROLLER 2
FISHER--ROSEMOUNT SYSTEMS, INC.
PLC/RBL COM MOTHERBOARD
PWA 10P53140001
HD1A
HD2A
HD1B
HD2B
REDUNDANT
J939
J705
5
30VDC Power
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Figure 5.4.1. PLC FlexTerm 10P5320000x
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
J364 Control Cable to primary Controller
Processor 1 for Slots 1 and 2
9
J370 Control Cable to primary Controller
Processor 2 for Slots 5 and 6
2
J365 Control Cable to optional redundant
Controller Processor 1 for Slots 1 and 2
10
J371 Control Cable to optional redundant
Controller Processor 2 for Slots 5 and 6
3
Slot number (Only 1, 2 and 5, 6 are used)
11
J366 Slot 1 served by Controller 1
(FIC shown installed)
4
J705--J706 Communication lines 1 and 2 for
Controller 1, Port A I/O Card
12
J367 Slot 2 served by Controller 1
(No FIC shown installed)
5
J707--J708 Communication lines 3 and 4 for
Controller 1, Port B I/O Card
13
J372 Slot 5 served by Controller 2
(FIC shown installed)
6
J939 DC power plug
14
J373 Slot 6 served by Controller 2
(FIC shown installed)
7
HD1A--HD1B Redundancy jumpers for
Controller 1
15
J709--J710 Communication lines 1 and 2 for
Controller 2, Port A I/O Card
8
HD2A--HD2B Redundancy jumpers for
Controller 2
16
J711--J712 Communication lines 3 and 4 for
Controller 2, Port B I/O Card
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-4
Figure 5.4.2 shows a 1984--2409--0001 PLC FlexTerm. Note that the
motherboard part number (1984--2405--0001) is not the same as the
assembly part number.
1984--2409--000x
1
J364
2
3
J365
1
J370
2
3
4
5
Y
Y
R
G
Y
Y
R
G
J371
6
7
8
Y
Y
R
G
NORMAL
FISHER-ROSEMOUNT SYSTEMS, INC.
PLC/RBL COM MOTHERBOARD
PWA 1984--2405--0001
HD1A
HD2A
HD1B
HD2B
REDUNDANT
J939
30VDC Power
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 5.4.2. PLC FlexTerm 1984--2409--000x
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
J364 Control Cable to primary Controller
Processor 1 for Slots 1 and 2
7
J370 Control Cable to primary Controller
Processor 2 for Slots 5 and 6
2
J365 Control Cable to optional redundant
Controller Processor 1 for Slots 1 and 2
8
J371 Control Cable to optional redundant
Controller Processor 2 for Slots 5 and 6
3
Slot number (Only 1, 2 and 5, 6 are used)
9
J366 Slot 1 served by Controller 1
(FIC shown installed)
4
J939 DC power plug
10
J367 Slot 2 served by Controller 1
(No FIC shown installed)
5
HD1A--HD1B Redundancy jumpers for
Controller 1
11
J372 Slot 5 served by Controller 2
(FIC shown installed)
6
HD2A--HD2B Redundancy jumpers for
Controller 2
12
J373 Slot 6 served by Controller 2
(FIC shown installed)
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-5
Either PLC Flexterm can be cabled directly from the ControlFile to the
Controller 1 or Controller 2 connectors on the Flexterm as shown on the
left in Figure 5.4.3. The 10P5320 Flexterm can be connected via a
Remote Communications Termination Panel and two communication
lines as shown at the right in Figure 5.4.3.
1
5
6
2
7
3
8
PLC
4
9
10
PLC
Figure 5.4.3. PLC Flexterm Cabling
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
ControlFile with MPC Card jumpered as PLC
5
ControlFile with MPC Card jumpered as PLC
2
Control Cable 1984--2783--xxxx from
ControlFile to PLC/RBL FlexTerm
6
Control Cable 1984--2783--xxxx from
ControlFile to Remote Communications
Termination Panel II
3
PLC/RBL FlexTerm
(shown with one Port I/O Card in Slot 1) with
Jumpers HD1A and HD1B set to NORMAL
7
Remote Communications Termination Panel II
with redundancy jumpers HD2A and HD2B
set to NORMAL
8
Communications lines 1 and 2 from TB1 and
TB2 of Remote Communications Termination
Panel to J705 and J706 of PLC/RBL
FlexTerm
9
PLC/RBL FlexTerm
(shown with one Port I/O Card in Slot 1)
Jumpers HD1A and HD1B are set to
NORMAL
10
Cable from Port I/O Card in Slot 1 to PLC
4
Cable from Port I/O Card in Slot 1 to PLC
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-6
Figure 5.4.4 shows wiring of a PLC FlexTerm and ControlFile to connect
four PLC systems.
Port I/O Card
Controller Processor
Card 1
RS-422
RS-422
Controller Processor
Card 2
Port A
PLC System 1
Port B
PLC System 2
Port A
PLC System 3
Port B
PLC System 4
PLC FlexTerm
RS-232 or RS-422
ControlFile
Figure 5.4.4. PLC Cabling for Four PLC Systems
The Controller Processor can be a PLC Processor card
(1984--1494--000x) or a MultiPurpose Controller card
(1984--2500--000x) jumpered as a PLC Processor and with the
communications rate set at 9600 baud.
Communication between the Controller Processor card and the PLC
FlexTerm is carried by an RS-422 cable. Communication between the
FlexTerm and the PLCs is carried by either an RS-232C cable or an
RS-422 cable, depending on the type of Port I/O card being used.
Each Controller Processor card may control two ports (A and B). Each
port consists of a Port I/O card that provides connection of the PLCs to
the system.
The Port chosen establishes the hardware address of the Port I/O card.
Port selection is by jumper on the Port I/O card. There is no
correspondence between the FlexTerm slot number and the port
assignment. Port A can be in slot 1 and port B in slot 2, or vice versa.
For example, =F1 is the Port A Card whether it is in Slot 1 or Slot 2.
Two Port I/O cards are available: RS-422/RS-232 (1984--2402--0001)
and RS-422/RS-422 (1984--2441--0001). Both of these cards can be
connected to any of the Controller Processor cards (A--H) by an RS-422
connection. The attributes of each port, such as the baud rate and the
communication format, are configured separately on a PLC
CONFIGURATION screen. There are two basic screens associated
with PLCs, the PLC Configuration screen and the PLC I/O Block.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-7
Figure 5.4.5 shows an Allen-Bradley configuration. For Allen-Bradley
configurations, the Port I/O card is not connected directly to the PLC,
but to a module that provides an interface to a “Data HighwayÔ” (KE or
KF module). The Allen-Bradley PLCs are also connected to the “Data
HighwayÔ” by way of another module. A standard RS-232 cable will
work to connect the Communications FlexTerm to the Allen-Bradley
RS-232/Data Highway Interface. The Allen-Bradley manual has the
required wiring diagrams.
A Port I/O card can address one file (word) on all connected PLCs. A
second card is required if another file (word) is to be addressed, as
shown by the two interfaces in Figure 5.4.5.
RS3
Communications
FlexTerm
Allen-Bradley
RS-232/Data
Highway
Interface “B”
Allen-Bradley
RS-232/Data
Highway
Interface “A”
Allen-Bradley Data Highway
PLC
PLC
Allen-Bradley
PLC Interface
Module
Allen-Bradley
PLC
Figure 5.4.5. Allen-Bradley Configuration
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-8
PLC FlexTerm Jumpers
There are four jumpers on the PLC FlexTerm. The A and B jumpers
must be set to the same value. Table 5.4.2 shows jumper values.
NOTE: The Controller redundancy jumpers on the PLC FlexTerm
motherboard have no effect if the communication line interface is used.
Table 5.4.2. PLC FlexTerm Jumpers
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Jumper
No Redundancy
Redundancy
HD1A
HD1B
1--2
2--3
HD2A
HD2B
1--2
2--3
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-9
PLC Redundancy
PLC redundancy may be achieved at several levels:
D
Redundant Controller Processor cards
D
Redundant Port I/O cards
The basic requirements for PLC redundancy are:
D
The primary and redundant Port I/O cards must have the same
“Device Type” field entries on their respective PLC Configuration
screens.
NOTE: Press [EXCHANGE] from the PLC Configuration screen to
access the Port I/O (FIC) configuration fields.
D
D
Redundant Port I/O cards must have their PLC Blocks configured
as Port A.
The redundant Port I/O cards must be jumpered as Port A and
Port B. The Port B card backs up the Port A card.
Control switches between the Port A (primary) and Port B (backup) card
only when the Port A (primary) card has a fault or alarm condition.
Control cannot switch back. The operator must perform an FIC reset
from the PLC Configuration screen to restore the Port A card as the
primary.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-10
PLC Controller Processor Redundancy
Redundant Controller Processors may be used with either or both sets
of Port I/O cards. Figure 5.4.6 shows cable connections to the PLC
FlexTerm.
If you use the Control Cable connection, the PLC FlexTerm jumpers
must be set to allow redundant Controller Processors.
The primary Controller Processor for FIC Slots 1--2 goes to J364.
D
The redundant Controller Processor for FIC Slots 1--2 goes to
J365.
D
The primary Controller Processor for FIC Slots 5--6 goes to J370.
D
The redundant Controller Processor for FIC Slots 5--6 goes to
J371.
D
If you use the communication line connection, the redundancy jumpers
must be set on the Communications Termination Panel. The jumpers
on the PLC/RBL panel are not used.
The primary Controller Processor for FIC Slots 1--2 uses comm
lines 1 and 2 to J705 and J706.
D
The redundant Controller Processor for FIC Slots 1--2 uses
comm lines 3 and 4 to J707 and J708.
D
The primary Controller Processor for FIC Slots 5--6 uses comm
lines 1 and 2 to J709 and J710.
D
The redundant Controller Processor for FIC Slots 5--6 uses
comm lines 3 and 4 to J711 and J712.
D
J364
J365
J370
J371
J705
J706
J707
J708
COMM LINE 1 COMM LINE 2 COMM LINE 3 COMM LINE 4
CONTROLLER 1
J709
1 1
1 1
2 2
2 2
3 3
3 3
HD1A
HD2A
HD2B
HD1B
J710
J711
J712
COMM LINE 1 COMM LINE 2 COMM LINE 3 COMM LINE 4
CONTROLLER 2
Figure 5.4.6. PLC Controller Processor Redundancy Connections
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-11
PLC Port I/O Card Redundancy
When redundant Port I/O cards are used, one must be jumpered as
Port A and the other as Port B. The Port B card serves as backup.
Figure 5.4.7 and Figure 5.4.8 show typical cabling for connecting
redundant Port I/O FICs to field devices.
Manual action is required to restore redundancy operation after a switch
from the Port A card to the Port B card. The Port A card must be
primary for redundancy to work.
PeerWay Tap
Configuration
Terminal
Data Hwy
PeerWay Tap
MPC Card RS-232 Cable A
(Jumpered as PLC)
Port A I/O Card
RS-232
Data Hwy
Module
Analog I/O
Discrete I/O
PLC FlexTerms
ControlFile
Port B I/O Card
RS-232 Cable B
RS-232
Data Hwy
Module
PLC
PLC Processor
Allen-Bradley PLC System
Figure 5.4.7. Port I/O Redundancy with Allen-Bradley PLC System
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-12
Communications Port
PeerWay Tap
MPC Card
(Jumpered as PLC)
Port A I/O Card RS-232 Cable A
PLC FlexTerms
ControlFile
Modicon
PLC
Port B I/O Card
RS-232 Cable B
Communications Port
Figure 5.4.8. Port I/O Redundancy with Modicon PLC System
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-13
Port I/O Card
The Port I/O Cards optically isolate the system from the field and
provide the interface between the Controller Processor and the field
device. Two types of Port I/O cards are available:
D
RS-422/RS-232
Provides a RS-232 interface to the PLC.
D
RS-422/RS-422
Provides a RS-422 interface to the PLC.
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card
The RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O card is connected to the Controller
Processor by an RS-422 cable and to the field device by an RS-232
cable. The card is marked “INTERFACE RS-422--RS-232” on the PWA.
Two versions are available:
D
10P54880001
CE approved. Has green ground wire.
D
1984--2402--0001
Original card. No ground wire.
Table 5.4.3 shows the parts replacement rules.
Table 5.4.3. Parts Replacement for the RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card
Part No.
Replaces
10P54880001
1984--2402--0001
1984--2402--0001
10P54880001
Comments
Always permitted.
Allowed only for non-CE approved installations.
NOTE: The green ground wire of the 10P54880001 card must be
fastened to one of the mounting screws of the FlexTerm.
Figure 5.4.9 shows a block diagram of the RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O
card.
Power is supplied to the Port I/O card through a 1/2 amp power fuse
(F1), which supplies 30 VDC to the card’s power regulator. The power
regulator generates and regulates the DC voltages. The isolated
voltages are used to power all components on the PLC side of the
optical isolation. The non-isolated +5 VDC is used on the processor
side of the optical isolation. Optical isolation isolates the PLC data from
the processor.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-14
Fuse Blown LED
DS2 (Red)
30V (B)
+12 VDC Isolated
--12 VDC Isolated
Power
Regulator
30V (A)
DS1
(Green)
+5 VDC Isolated
Isolated Return
+5 VDC
Board Power Fuse
1/2 A (F1)
Return
Pin 1
Ground
Return
+
TXD A Comm A TXMT
-+
TXD B Comm B TXMT
--
HD1C
A
MODEM
RS-422
DS3
B
Optical
Isolation
HD1D
A
RS-232
B
HD2A
M
T
HD2B
M
TXD Pin 2
T
RCVD Pin 3
TERMINAL
CTS Pin 5
+
RCVR A Comm A RCVR
-+
RCVR B Comm B RCVR
--
HD1A
A
B
HD1B
A
B
RS-422
Optical
Isolation
RS-232
DS4
RTS Pin 4
M
HD3
Optical
Isolation
PLC
Device
S
+12V ISO
PLC Controller
+12V ISO
DSR Pin 6
DTB Pin 20
DCD Pin 8
GND Pin 7
Figure 5.4.9. RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card Block Diagram
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-15
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card RS-232 Pin Assignments
The pin assignments for the RS-232C connection on the RS-422/RS-232
Port I/O card are listed in Table 5.4.4. A multipoint link uses all of the pin
assignments. A single point link uses pin assignments 1, 2, 3, and 7 only.
Table 5.4.4. RS-232C Pin Assignments
PLC Plug (15 Pin)
(For Allen Bradley
KE Module only)
Signal
Port I/O Card
(25 Pin)
Signal
1
SHLD
1
SHLD
2
TXD
2
TXD
3
RXD
3
RXD
4
RTS
4
RTS
5
CTS
5
CTS
6
DSR
6
SR
7
GND
7
GND
8
DCD
8
DCD
11
DTR
11
GND
13
GND
20
DTR
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-16
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card LEDs
The LEDs on the RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O card are shown in
Figure 5.4.10.
LEDs
RECEIVE DATA
(DS4)
Indicates that data is being received from the PLC
device.
TX DATA
(DS3)
Indicates that data is being sent to the PLC device.
Y
Y
R
30V FUSE
BLOWN
(DS2)
G
CARD GOOD
(DS1)
Power fuse F1 is blown.
All voltages are within tolerances.
RS-232C Connector for PLC Cable
Figure 5.4.10. Port I/O Card RS-422/RS-232 LEDs
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-17
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card Jumpers
Figure 5.4.11 shows the jumper locations on the RS-422/RS-232 Port
I/O card.
INTERFACE RS-422--RS-232
HD2
MODEM
TERM
RS-232 Plug
A B
HD3
M
HD1
S
ABCD
Fuse F1
P
BO
AR
T
1984--2402--000x
Figure 5.4.11. RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O CARD Fuse and Jumpers
Port Select Jumpers: Data between the Port I/O card and the
Controller Processor is in RS-422 format. The data must pass through
four jumpers (HD1A through HD1D) that determine whether
communication port A or B is being used. Communication port A is
used in normal operation. The jumpers shown in the block diagram are
set for port A. The four HD1 jumpers, (A, B, C, and D) must all be at the
same position. The port specified by the port select jumpers must
correspond to the port specified in the interface software (PLC
CONFIGURATION screen or RBL script). For example, if a Square DÔ
PLC is configured on the PLC CONFIGURATION screen for port A, the
jumpers on the Port I/O card connected to the Square D PLC must be
set for port A. PLC CONFIGURATION screens configure the software
for ports A and B. The hardware and software must be in agreement
for communication with the PLC to occur. Each Port is independent:
Ports A and B can communicate with different kinds of PLCs.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-18
Terminal/Modem Jumpers: Data between this Port I/O card and the
PLC is in RS-232 format. A set of jumpers (HD2A and HD2B) enable
the Port I/O card to be designated as the modem or terminal side of the
RS-232 interface. The jumpers must be set as a pair (i.e., both jumpers
must be in the same position). The terminal/modem jumpers (HD2A
and HD2B) enable the Port I/O card to be set so that the transmit and
receive pins on the RS-232C interface match those on the field device.
If the field device transmits on pin 2 and receives on pin 3, for example,
the jumpers can be set so that the Port I/O card receives on pin 2 and
transmits on pin 3.
In most cases, the Port I/O card should be jumpered as the modem
(M position) so that pin 2 (transmit data) receives data from the field
device and pin 3 (receive data) sends data to the field device. The
opposite is the case if the Port I/O card is jumpered as a terminal
(T position). In this case pin 2 transmits data and pin 3 receives data.
Multipoint/Single Point Jumpers: The multipoint/single point jumpers
(HD3) specify whether the Port I/O card is connected to a multipoint or a
single point field device link. A multipoint field device link has a number
of field devices on the same line. A single point field device link has
only one field device on a line.
If the Port I/O card is talking to one PLC, jumper HD3 should be set to
the S (single point) position. This pulls RTS and CTS high all of the
time. If the card is talking to more than one PLC, the jumper should be
set to the M (multidrop) position. In the M position, the card uses the
CTS and RTS from the PLCs.
For:
D
D
D
D
Allen-BradleyÔ PLCs: HD3 should be in the S (single) position.
ModbusÔ protocol with one PLC on the bus: HD3 should be in
the M (multipoint) position.
ModbusÔ protocol with more than one PLC on the bus: HD3
position depends on the requirements of the field devices.
RBL (Rosemount Basic Language) applications: HD3 position
depends on the requirements of the field device.
Table 5.4.5 shows the jumper values.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-19
Table 5.4.5. RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card Jumper Positions
Jumper
Position
Effect
HD1A--D
A
B
Use Communications Port A
Use Communications Port B
HD2A--B
MOD
TERM
Port I/O Card is a Modem
Port I/O Card is a Terminal
HD3
S
M
Single Point: One PLC
Multidrop: Several PLCs
RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card Fuse
Figure 5.4.11 shows the location of the fuse on the RS-422/RS-232 Port
I/O card. Table 5.4.6 shows fuse data.
Table 5.4.6. RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card Fuse
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Littelfuse Part No.
Schurter Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G50382--0014
273.500
MSF 034.4216
1/2 A 125V Plug-In
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-20
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card
The RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card is connected to the Controller
processor and to the field device by RS-422 cables. The card is
marked “INTERFACE RS-422--RS-422” on the PWA. There are two
versions:
D
10P54850001
CE approved. Has green ground wire.
D
1984--2441--0001
Original card. No ground wire.
Table 5.4.7 shows the parts replacement rules.
Table 5.4.7. Parts Replacement for the RS-422/RS-232 Port I/O Card
Part No
Replaces
10P54850001
1984--2441--0001
1984--2441--0001
10P54850001
Comments
Always permitted.
Allowed only for non-CE approved installations.
NOTE: The green ground wire of the 10P54850001 card must be
fastened to one of the mounting screws of the FlexTerm.
Figure 5.4.12 shows a block diagram of the RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O
card (1984--2441--000x ). Power is supplied to the Port I/O card
through a 2 amp power fuse (F1). The fuse supplies 30 VDC to the
card power regulator. The power regulator generates and regulates the
DC voltages. The isolated voltages are used to power all components
on the PLC side of the optical isolation.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-21
+5V Non-isolated
Fuse Blown LED
DS2 (Red)
Power
Regulator
30V (A)
30V (B)
Board Power Fuse
2 A (F1)
TXD A Comm A TXMT
-+
TXD B Comm B TXMT
-To PLC
Controller
+
RCVR A Comm A RCVR
-+
RCVR B Comm B RCVR
--
HD1C
A
Isolated Return
Return
30V Return
+
+5V Isolated
RS-422
Transmitter
RS-422
B
Pin
9+
Optical
Isolation
HD1D
A
Pin
3--
B
HD1A
A
B
HD1B
A
RS-422
Receiver
RS-422
Optical
Isolation
PLC
Device
Pin
6+
Pin
4--
B
Isolated Return
Pin
5
Figure 5.4.12. RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-22
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card RS-422 Pin Assignments
The pin assignments for the RS-422 connection to the PLC on the
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O card are listed in Table 5.4.8.
Table 5.4.8. RS-422 Pin Assignments
Pin
Signal
1
To Cable Shield
3
Transmit Data --
9
Transmit Data +
4
Receive Data --
6
Receive Data +
5
Isolated Return
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card LEDs
The LEDs on the RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O card are shown in
Figure 5.4.13.
LEDs
RECEIVE DATA
(DS4)
Indicates that data is being received from the PLC
device.
TX DATA
(DS3)
Indicates that data is being sent to the PLC device.
Y
Y
R
30V FUSE
BLOWN
(DS2)
G
CARD GOOD
(DS1)
Power fuse F1 is blown.
All voltages are within tolerances.
RS-232C Connector for PLC Cable
Figure 5.4.13. Port I/O Card RS-422/RS-422 LEDs
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-23
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card Jumpers
Figure 5.4.14 shows the location of the jumpers on the RS-422/RS-422
Port I/O card.
INTERFACE RS-422--RS-422
HD1
Fuse F1
ABCD
P
BO
A
R
T
PWA 01984--2441--0001
Figure 5.4.14. RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card Fuse and Jumpers
The port select jumpers (HD1A--D) specify whether the Port I/O card is
port A or port B. All four jumpers must be in the same position. The
port specified by the port select jumpers must correspond to the port
specified in the interface software (PLC CONFIGURATION screen or
RBL script).
For example, if a PLC is configured on the PLC CONFIGURATION
screen for port A, the jumpers on the Port I/O card connected to that
PLC must be set for port A. PLC CONFIGURATION screens configure
the software for ports A and B. The hardware and software must be in
agreement for communication with the PLC to occur.
Ports A and B on the same Processor can communicate with different
kinds of PLCs. There is no correspondence between the Flexterm slot
number and the port. Port A can be in slot 1 and port B in slot 2, or vice
versa.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-4-24
Table 5.4.9 shows jumper values.
Table 5.4.9. RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card Jumpers
Jumper
Port A
Port B
HD1A--D
A
B
RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card Fuse
Figure 5.4.14 shows the fuse location on the RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O
card. Table 5.4.10 shows fuse data.
Table 5.4.10. RS-422/RS-422 Port I/O Card Fuses
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Littelfuse Part No.
Schurter Part No.
Characteristics
F1
G50382--0021
273002
MSF 034.4224
2 A 125V Plug-In
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Hardware
SV: 5-5-1
Section 5:
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
This section covers the MultiLoop FlexTerm, the Single-Strategy
FlexTerm, and the Field Interface cards (FICs) that can be installed in
the FlexTerms. Figure 5.5.1 shows the FlexTerms.
Devices covered are:
D
MultiLoop FlexTerm
D
Single-Strategy FlexTerm
D
Analog Marshaling Panels
D
Analog Input Field Interface cards (FIC)
D
Analog Output Field Interface cards (FIC)
D
Analog FIC Extender card
D
Output Bypass Unit
MultiLoop
FlexTerm
Single-Strategy
FlexTerm
Figure 5.5.1. MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerms
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-2
MultiLoop FlexTerm
The MultiLoop FlexTerm (1984--1176--000x) contains two card cages for
the 4 X 7 inch Field Interface cards. Each FlexTerm card cage connects
to one MultiLoop Controller. The lower cage is dedicated to input Field
Interface cards. The upper cage can contain either output or input Field
Interface cards. Above the upper cage are eight connectors used for
bypassing the outputs with the Output Bypass Unit (OBU) or for the
Remote Operating Panel. There is also a connector for powering the
OBU. A fuse card provides fusing for only the OBU power output.
Figure 5.5.2 shows the MultiLoop FlexTerm.
1
1
Recorder
Termination
Card
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
Inputs
or
Outputs
9
Wire
Tie
Bracket
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FICs
Inputs
Only
16
Two Card Cages
Housing I/O Interface Cards
Ground Drain Bar
Field
Termination
Card
Figure 5.5.2. MultiLoop FlexTerm
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-3
Customer wiring is connected to a Field Termination card with 32
terminals. Wiring to all FlexTerms is routed vertically between the card
cages and the Field Termination card. The optional Recorder
Termination card is installed on the left side of the FlexTerm. Cables
from the Controller Processor and the DC power bus also enter on the
left side. Both Termination cards have copper drain buses for
connecting field wiring shields. A ground wire connects the drain to the
chassis frame. Figure 5.5.3 shows typical field wiring.
1
Recorder
Terminations
--
A
+
B
1
Field Wire
Terminations
-2
+
A
B
2
Figure 5.5.3. Typical MultiLoop FlexTerm Field Termination
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-4
Single-Strategy FlexTerm
The Single-Strategy FlexTerm (1984--1300--000x) looks similar to the
MultiLoop FlexTerm. Each Single-Strategy FlexTerm, however,
connects to two Single-Strategy Controller Processors. The upper and
lower halves of the Single-Strategy FlexTerm each contain one Contact
Field Interface card for discrete outputs, four Input Field Interface cards,
and two Output Field Interface cards that can be substituted for inputs.
There are two bypass connectors above each cage and a power
connector for the Output Bypass Unit (OBU). Field Termination and
Recorder Termination cards are identical to the MultiLoop FlexTerm.
Two cables connect to the ControlFile on the left side of the
motherboard, one from the upper connector of each Single-Strategy
Controller. The fuse card is connected only to the Output Bypass Unit
power cables. Figure 5.5.4 shows the Single-Strategy FlexTerm.
Field Interface cards that can be installed into the Single-Strategy
FlexTerm are the standard MultiLoop cards and either of the Contact
FICs.
1
1
2
3
4
5
2
6
1
2
First Card
Cage Inputs
3
Controller
Cable
4
5
First Card
Cage Inputs
or Outputs
6
1
2
3
4
5
Not Used
6
Second Card
Cage Inputs
Controller
Cable
16
Recorder Terminations
Not Used
Analog FICs
Ground Drain Bar
Second
Card Cage
Inputs or
Outputs
Analog Field Terminations
Figure 5.5.4. Single-Strategy FlexTerm
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-5
Single-Strategy FlexTerm Analog Wiring
Analog field termination points are located on a terminal strip attached
to the right of the card cage. The Analog FICs are the same cards that
were used in the MultiLoop. The first two pairs of terminations are not
used. The second four pairs of terminations are for inputs. The next
two pairs are for inputs or outputs. This order is repeated for the
second card cage. A ground drain bar next to the terminal strip
provides the required I/O cable ground.
Single-Strategy FlexTerm Contact Wiring
Terminations for 12 contact I/O points are located on a separate Contact
Termination Panel (1984--1356--000x). Fusing, optical isolators, and
Contact Switch Panel connections are also provided. Two
Single-Strategy Controller Processor cards connect to 12 contact points
on this panel (six points per controller). Figure 5.5.5 shows the Contact
Termination Panel and typical wiring.
OPTO Isolator
Terminal strip
1st card cage
Fuse
3
2
1
6
5
4
9
8
7
12
11
10
1
6
7
12
Contact
field wire
Terminal strip
2nd card cage
Contact termination
panel
Figure 5.5.5. Single-Strategy Contact I/O Wiring with Contact Termination Panel
Six contact I/O termination points are located on each of two terminal
strips mounted on the right end of the Contact Termination Panel. The
numbers 11--16, shown on each of the Contact Field Interface cards,
refer to a hardware address rather than a terminal number. The six I/O
contact points are controlled from the first FIC card in the card cage.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-6
CAUTION
Two different phases of 220 or 120 VAC must not be
connected to the same Field Termination Board on a
Single-Strategy FlexTerm.
Single-Strategy FlexTerm Contact Fuses
Figure 5.5.5 shows the locations of the fuses on the Contact
Termination Panel. Table 5.5.1 gives fuse data.
Table 5.5.1. Contact Termination Panel Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
F1--F12
G09140--0060
MTH 4
312004
4 A 250V Regular
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-7
Analog Input FICs
Analog Input Field Interface cards are provided in non-isolated and
isolated forms. With the non-isolated Analog Input FIC there is no
isolation between the controller and the field transmitter because the
card references system ground. With the isolated Analog Input FIC the
field transmitter can be grounded independently of the system ground.
D
D
Non-isolated Analog Input FIC
—
1984--1463--000x, marked “ANALOG INPUT
NON-ISOLATED”
—
1984--1394--000x, marked “FIC NON-ISOLATED INPUT”
Smart Transmitter FIC
—
D
Isolated Analog Input FIC
—
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
1984--2412--000x, marked “SMART XMTR FIC”
1984--1325--000x, marked “ISOLATED INPUT”
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-8
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC
The 1984--1463--000x and 1984--1394--000x Non-Isolated Analog Input
Field Interface cards convert the 4--20 mA field signal to a 1--5V analog
voltage for the controller A/D converter. The --1463 card, marked
“ANALOG INPUT NON-ISOLATED”, supersedes the --1394 card, which
is marked “FIC NON-ISOLATED INPUT” on the PWA.
Both cards perform the same function and are interchangeable. The
card plugs into the MultiLoop or Single-Strategy FlexTerm. There is no
isolation between the controller and the field transmitter because the
card references system ground. The card is used where the transmitter
is electrically floating above any ground connections. External power
can be used if the remote power supply can reference the system
ground. Figure 5.5.6 shows the Non-Isolated Analog Input Field
Interface card functional diagram.
Fuse Blown LED
(Red)
30V (A)
Board Power
Fuse
30V (B)
+28V
Power
Regulator
Return
12V Reg
Power
On
LED
(Green)
Recorder
Buffer
1--5V OUT
TP
System
Powered
>
From
Transmitter
47V
Zener
Self
Powered
Over
Voltage and
Current
Protection
250 Ohm
Precision
Analog
Output to
Controller
Card
TP
1--5V
>
Figure 5.5.6. Non-Isolated Analog Input Field Interface Card Block Diagram
When more inputs are needed, this card can be plugged into an analog
output slot, which makes that slot an input. Card edge keying protects
against insertion into a slot that is not intended for this card type.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-9
Voltage regulation for the power to the transmitter is accomplished by a
simple regulator circuit. The 30 VDC is applied to a 555 timer
generating a square wave to the input of a transformer. As input
voltage varies, the output timing of the square wave varies inversely to
the input voltage changes so the voltage on the secondary of the
transformer remains relatively stable. The input voltage can vary from
19 to 36 volts with less than 1 volt change in the supply output. A
power-on green LED indicates the presence of +12V on the card. A
and B power buses are isolated on the card by diodes. A 1/4 amp fuse
protects the circuit and an LED indicates a blown fuse. The 30V rail is
regulated down to +12V through a simple zener/transistor circuit.
Transmitters can be powered from the FIC card power supply or from
external remote power supplies. For system power, the 30V bus is
connected to the positive input of the transmitter through a 1/4 amp fuse
and the negative return is the 4--20 mA input.
For an externally powered transmitter, the card is jumpered to ground
the transmitter power leg. This makes the transmitter power leg the
negative return line, referencing the field devices to the system ground
(non-isolated). The remote supply positive input is then connected in
series with the transmitter and the plug output is fed to the 4--20 mA
input.
The 4--20 mA input has a 1/4 amp fuse as well as a 27V zener for
voltage and current protection of the field input. There is a current limit
circuit that senses the input voltage and limits the input current to 24 mA
through the card. This is accomplished by a comparator that senses
the voltage and turns off a Field Effect Transistor (FET) in series with
the input resistor.
The heart of the card is a 250 ohm precision resistor that develops
1--5V for the 4--20 mA input. This voltage is fed directly to the controller.
There is also a buffered output that is used to drive a recorder. This
output is 1--5V and is current limited by the 2000 ohm resistor in the
buffer circuit.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-10
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC LEDs and Test Points
Figure 5.5.7 shows the descriptions of the LEDs and test points for
Non-Isolated Analog Input FICs.
NOTE: There are no LED indicators to show blown fuses on the
transmitter input lines.
LEDs
30V FUSE The 30 VDC power fuse to the card is blown. Note that this
BLOWN LED does not indicate whether field transmitter power and input
current fuses are operational.
R
+12V
STATUS
(DS1)
G
Power is present on the card and the regulator is operational.
TEST POINTS
BROWN
Ground return.
YELLOW
1 to 5V analog signal to controller.
Figure 5.5.7. Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC LEDs and Test Points
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-11
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC Jumpers
A jumper selects whether transmitters are powered from the FIC power
supply or from external remote power supplies. The power type
jumpers must be positioned by the user. Figure 5.5.8 shows the jumper
location. Table 5.5.2 shows the Field Interface card jumper positions.
HD1
F1
1--2: System-powered
2--3: Self-powered
Transmitter Power
F2
F3
Figure 5.5.8. Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuse and Jumper Location
Table 5.5.2. Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC Jumper Positions
Jumper
Purpose
Position
HD1
Specifies the power
arrangement for the
FIC
1--2: System supplies power to transmitter
output device.
2--3: Transmitter or output device supplies its
own power.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-12
Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuses
Figure 5.5.8 shows the locations of the fuses on the Non-Isolated
Analog Input Field Interface card. Table 5.5.3 gives fuse data.
Table 5.5.3. Non-Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuses
Card
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Bussman
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Characteristics
1984--1463--000x
F1
F2
F3
G09140--0010
AGC 1/4
312.250
1//4 A 250V Quick Acting
1984--1394--000x
F1
F2
F3
G09140--0010
AGC 1/4
312.250
1//4 A 250V Quick Acting
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-13
Smart Transmitter FIC
The Smart Transmitter FIC (1984--2412--000x) is a non-isolated analog
input FIC that supports communications between the Smart transmitter
and a Controller Processor. The Smart Transmitter FIC allows the
system to communicate to a Smart device by sending digital information
on top of the 4--20 mA signal. It is marked “SMART XMTR FIC” on the
PWA.
NOTE: The Smart Transmitter FIC operates with standard I/O. See the
Smart Transmitter Option (1984--2483--000x) for operation with serial
I/O.
Smart Transmitter FIC LEDs and Test Points
Figure 5.5.9 shows the LEDs and Test Points of the Smart Transmitter
FIC. The “Controller” test point gives access to the 4--20 mA loop
current. Measuring voltage between the “Controller” and the “GND” test
points measures the loop current voltage drop across a 250 ohm
precision resistor in series with the loop.
LEDs
TP1
Y
R
COMMUNICATIONS
ACTIVITY
(DS4)
R
G
TP2
Indicates communications activity. The signal that
enables the transmit signal from the Field Interface
Card to the Controller Processor card is active.
FUSE F3 BLOWN
(DS3)
Power fuse F3 has blown. This LED does not
indicate the status of the fuses in the I/O loops.
CARD BAD
(DS2)
A card fault is detected or communications with
the Controller Processor have ceased.
CARD GOOD
(DS1)
Card has passed power-up diagnostics.
TEST POINTS
TP1
Controller
TP2
GND
Controller loop current measured across 250
ohm resistor.
Return
Figure 5.5.9. Smart Transmitter FIC LEDs and Test Points
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-14
Smart Transmitter FIC Jumpers
Figure 5.5.10 shows the location of the Smart Transmitter FIC jumpers.
Table 5.5.4 gives jumper values.
TP1
F1
F2
TP2
XMTR POWER
HD1
1 SYSTEM
2
3 SELF
F3
Figure 5.5.10. Smart Transmitter FIC Fuse and Jumper Locations
Table 5.5.4. Smart Transmitter FIC Jumper Values
Jumper
Smart Transmitter
Powered by System
Smart Transmitter
Self Powered
HD1
1--2
2--3
Smart Transmitter FIC Fuses
Figure 5.5.10 shows the fuses on the Smart Transmitter FIC.
Table 5.5.5 gives fuse data.
Table 5.5.5. Smart Transmitter FIC Fuse Data
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Littelfuse Part No.
Schurter Part No.
Characteristics
F1
F2
G50382--11
273.250
MSF 034.4213
1/4 A Plug-In
F3
G50382--14
273.500
MSF 034.4216
1/2 A Plug-In
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-15
Isolated Analog Input FIC
The Isolated Analog Input Field Interface card (1984--1325--000x) is
very similar to the non-isolated version, with the addition of optical
isolation in the voltage feedback that provides the 1--5 volts to the
controller. It is marked “ISOLATED INPUT” on the printed wiring
assembly (PWA). Figure 5.5.11 shows a functional diagram of the
Isolated Analog Input Field Interface card. The voltage drop from the
resistor is fed to a circuit that changes the voltage to a pair of pulses, a
start and a stop pulse. The stop pulse is wider than the start pulse for
differentiation. The timing between the pulses varies with the voltage
applied. These pulses are sent through an optical isolator and decoded
using the leading edge only. The result is the exact voltage that was
applied to the input of the circuit. This voltage is sent to the controller.
With this additional isolation, the field transmitter can be grounded
independently of the system ground.
Fuse Blown
LED (Red)
30V (A)
Board Power Fuse
30V (B)
Return
>
Isolated
Power
Supply
System
Powered
47V
Zener
Fuse
Power
On LED
(Green)
Recorder
Buffer
1--5V OUT
Self
Powered
TP
From
Transmitter
Fuse
>
Over Voltage
And Current
Protection
Analog to
Dual Pulse
Converter
Dual Pulse to
Analog
Converter
TP
250 Ohm
Precision
Opto Isolation
Analog
Output To
Controller
Card
1--5V
Figure 5.5.11. Isolated Analog Input FIC Functional Diagram
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-16
Isolated Analog Input FIC LEDs and Test Points
Figure 5.5.12 shows the LEDs and test points for the Isolated Analog
Input Field Interface card.
LEDs
INPUT SIGNAL
(DS4)
Y
R
30V FUSE BLOWN
(DS3)
G
+12V
NON-ISOLATED
STATUS
(DS2)
G
+12V ISO STATUS
(DS1)
Indicates that the field input is present. The LED
glows brighter as the field input increases. With
no input, the LED is off.
The 30 VDC power fuse to the card is blown. Note
that this LED does not indicate whether field
transmitter power and input current fuses are
operational.
The non-isolated +12V regulator is operational.
The isolated +12V regulator is operational.
TEST POINTS
YELLOW
BROWN
1 to 5V analog signal to controller.
Ground return.
Figure 5.5.12. Isolated Analog Input FIC LEDs and Test Points
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-17
Isolated Analog Input FIC Jumpers
The Isolated Analog Input Field Interface card has one set of power
type jumpers that must be positioned by the user. Figure 5.5.13 shows
the power type jumper locations. Table 5.5.6 shows the jumper
positions.
F1
F2
F3
HD1
Figure 5.5.13. Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuse and Jumper Location
Table 5.5.6. Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumper Positions
Jumper
Position
HD1
1--2
System supplies power to transmitter or output device.
2--3
Transmitter or output device supplies it own power.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
Purpose
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-18
Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuses
Figure 5.5.13 shows the location of the fuses on the Isolated Analog
Input FIC. Table 5.5.7 gives fuse data.
Table 5.5.7. Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Bussman Part No.
Littelfuse Part No.
Characteristics
F1
F2
G09140--0010
AGC 1/4
312.250
1/4 A 250V Quick
Acting
F3
G09140--0016
AGC 1/2
312.500
1/2 A 250V Quick
Acting
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-19
Analog Input Field Wiring
Figure 5.5.14 shows typical analog input field wiring.
Jumper
J1(1--2)
System
Power
Jumper
J1
1--5V
Analog
Signal
+28V
1
2
--
B
+
B
Two Wire Transmitter
Field Wiring
Terminations
System Powered Input
A
Jumper
J1(2--3)
3
250
Ohm
A
+
A
4--20 mA Input
--
B
Input Field Interface Card
Equivalent Circuit
Four Wire
(Self-powered)
Self Powered Input
Transmitter
Power To Transmitter
Figure 5.5.14. Analog Input Field Wiring
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-20
Analog Output FICs
Analog Output Field interface cards are provided in non-isolated and
isolated forms. With the Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC there is no
isolation between the controller and the field transmitter because the
card references system ground. With the Isolated Analog Output FIC
the field transmitter can be grounded independently of the system
ground.
The Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC includes:
D
1984--1273--000x
D
1984--1490--000x
The Isolated Analog Output FIC includes:
D
1984--1334--000x
D
1984--1469--000x
D
1984--1525--000x
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-21
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC
The Non-Isolated Analog Output Field Interface card (1984--1273--000x,
1984--1490--000x) receives the digital output value from the controller
and converts it to a 4--20 mA signal. The return line current from the
field is converted from current to voltage and fed back to the controller
for a tolerance verification. There is also an integral digital hold circuit
that can maintain the output of the card indefinitely if the card
microprocessor should fail.
The --1273 card is marked “NON-ISO ANALOG OUTPUT” and the
--1490 card is marked “NON-ISOLATED OUTPUT” on the PWA.
Figure 5.5.15 shows the Non-Isolated Analog Output Field Interface
card functional diagram.
All of the Field Interface card functions center around the 6801
microprocessor. The microprocessor is set in a special mode in which
the address and data pins are used as individual ports rather than a bus
function. The 6801 has an on-chip ROM (2K X 8) and RAM (128
bytes).
The microprocessor handles all communications of intended output
current with the controller through the optically isolated RS-422 port.
Two communications wires multiplexing transmit and receive are also
fed to the connector for the Analog Panel Station. The panel station is
used for monitoring and backup control when the controller fails. This
port uses optical isolators and an isolated +5V supply to prevent system
ground loops when the controller and the FlexTerm are not powered
from the same source. In case the communications from the controller
and panel station are lost, there is a jumper-selectable option either to
hold the last known output or drop to zero. There is also a jumper to
indicate forward or reverse acting, but this is needed only in conjunction
with Analog Panel Stations.
The intended value of the output from the controller is converted to a
400 Hz pulse width modulated signal by the microprocessor. The 400
Hz signal is monitored by a watchdog timer. If this signal stops pulsing,
the circuit resets the microprocessor.
In normal operation the 400 Hz signal is routed through a switch FET
and integrated by a resistor/capacitor combination and then converted
to a corresponding 1--5V signal. Power for the pulse to voltage
converter is supplied by a 5V three terminal regulator with a 2 percent
voltage/temperature tolerance. The 1--5V signal is converted to 4--20
mA. No adjustment potentiometer is used. Close tolerance parts hold
the output tolerance to less than 3 percent without feedback and better
than 0.5 percent or less with feedback.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-22
A second watchdog timer monitors the 400 Hz pulse, and if it stops, the
backup analog hold circuit will be switched in, thereby keeping the 1--5
volt signal driving the integrator circuit at the same voltage and holding
the output current indefinitely.
The analog backup hold is maintained at the same voltage level by a
digital to analog (D/A) converter. An oscillator output is used to clock a
counter with the output fed into a resistor network. As the counter
outputs progress, the output voltage from the resistor network increases
a proportional amount with each bit increase. The voltage out is
compared to the integrated voltage output derived from the 400 Hz
signal. As the D/A output reaches the same voltage as the signal from
the microprocessor, it latches the counter output at that binary value,
thus holding the output voltage at the same level. Every 100
microseconds the counter is cleared and the process starts over.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-23
+30V
Analog Panel Station
+10V
30V (A)
30V (B)
+5V
Power
Regulator
RETURN
+5V Isolated
ISO Return
+5 Isolated
RS-422
Comm Lines
To Controller
Taps
+5V
Comm &
Isolation
Receive Data
Transmit Data
Transmit Enable
ISO Return
Output
Bypass
Control
6801
Micro
Processor
Raise
Lower
OBU Hooked Up
400 Hz Pulse Width
Modulated Signal
+5V
Activate
Backup
Hold
Micro Reset
+10V +30V
Select
+10V
Output to Output
Bypass Unit
Voltage To
Current
Converter
Transient
Protection
Backup
Analog
Hold
To Controller
Analog Input
HOLD
FAIL
OFF
0.5 TO 2.5V Feedback
125 Ohm
Precision
Board
Fault
HOLD
FAIL
OFF
Watchdog
Timer
Regulator
Pulse
Width To
Voltage
Converter 1--5V
Board
Enable
Output to
Final
Control
Element
24 mA
Current
Limit
Transient
Protection
Final
Control
Element
From
Final
Control
Element
Figure 5.5.15. Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Functional Diagram
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-24
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC LEDs and Test Points
Two LEDs driven by the microprocessor indicate the microprocessor
status. A yellow LED indicates transmit enable. A fourth LED indicates
whether any of the three power fuses (digital, analog, or panel station
power) have blown. The panel station power fuse protects against
shorts in the cable going from the Field Interface card to the panel
station. Refer to Chapter 3 for LEDs and test points.
Figure 5.5.16 shows the Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC LEDs and test
points.
LEDs
TX ENABLE The signal that enables the transmit signal from the Field
(DS4)
Interface Card to the MultiLoop Processor is active.
Y
R
30V FUSE One of three fuses has blown:
BLOWN
F3 = digital section power regulator;
(DS3)
F4 = analog panel station power;
F5 = analog section power.
This LED does not indicate the status of the two fuses on the
output.
R
G
CARD
FAULT
(DS3)
CARD
GOOD
(DS1)
A card fault is detected, or communications with the MultiLoop
processor have ceased.
If a communication problem occurs, the output current is held at
its last value or goes to zero.
No card faults are detected and the MultiLoop Processor or
an analog panel station is controlling the output current.
TEST POINTS
(ON CARD BUT NOT SHOWN)
BROWN
Ground return
YELLOW
Main 5V regulator
Figure 5.5.16. Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC LEDs and Test Points
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-25
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumpers
The Non-Isolated Analog Output Field Interface card has one set of
failure option jumpers that must be positioned by the user.
Figure 5.5.17 and Figure 5.5.18 show the jumper locations.
HD1
F2
F1
HD2
F5
F3
F4
Figure 5.5.17. 1985--1490--000x Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuse and Jumper Locations
F2
F1
HD1
F5
F3
F4
Figure 5.5.18. 1984--1273--000x Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuse and Jumper Locations
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-26
Table 5.5.8 shows the jumper positions.
Table 5.5.8. Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumper Positions
Purpose
Jumper
HD1
Position
Indicates whether the FIC holds
the last output value or sets the
output current to zero if there is
loss of communication with the
Controller Processor card.
HD2
(1984--1490--000x only)
Select normal or reversed output
HOLD:
The last output value is held if
there is a failure within the
ControlFile, with the comm lines,
or at the FIC. If the power supply
should fail, the output current
goes to zero.
OFF:
The output value is held for about
1/2 second before going to zero if
there is a failure in the FIC
processors. For other types of
failures, the output value is held
for up to four seconds before the
output current goes to zero.
1--2: Normal Output
2--3: Reversed Output
Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses
Figure 5.5.17 and Figure 5.5.18 show the location of the Non-Isolated
Analog Output Field Interface card fuses. Table 5.5.9 shows fuse data.
Table 5.5.9. Non-Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Littelfuse Part No.
Schurter Part No.
Characteristics
F1
F2
G50382--0011
273.250
MSF 034.4213
1/4 A 125V Plug-In
F3
F5
G50382--0014
273.500
MSF 034.4216
1/2 A 125V Plug-In
F4
G50382--0021
273.002
MSF 034.4224
2 A 125V Plug-In
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-27
Isolated Analog Output FIC
The Isolated Analog Output Field Interface card is very similar to the
non-isolated version with the addition of two optical isolation circuits.
D
1984--1525--000x, marked “ISOLATED OUTPUT FIC 0--20 MA”
D
1984--1469--000x, marked “ISOLATED OUTPUT FIC”
D
1984--1334--000x, marked “ANALOG OUTPUT ISOLATED”
The first isolation circuit isolates the pulse from the microprocessor to
the current converter, through an optical isolator. The second provides
isolation for the voltage feedback, thus providing the 0.5--2.5 volts to the
controller. The voltage drop from the resistor is fed to a circuit that
changes the voltage to a pair of pulses (a start and a stop pulse), the
stop pulse being wider than the start pulse for differentiation. The
timing between the pulses varies with the voltage applied.
These pulses are sent through an optical isolator and decoded using
the leading edge only. The result is the exact voltage as applied to the
input of the circuit. With this additional isolation, the field control device
can reference chassis ground and not affect the functions of the system.
The 0--20 mA Isolated Analog Output Field Interface card
(1984--1525--000x) is similar to the 4--20 mA Isolated Analog Output
FIC. Where the 4--20 mA FIC directly creates a 4--20 mA signal, the
0--20 mA FIC rescales the output signal to 0--20 mA using a precision
resistor network and an isolated +10V reference. The return signal from
the field device is also scaled to .5V -- 2.5V, isolated, and then returned
to the microprocessor.
Figure 5.5.19 shows a block diagram of the Isolated Analog Output
Field Interface card.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-28
Analog Panel Station
30V (A) >
+5V
30V (B) >
Return
>
+5 Isolated
RS-422
Comm
Lines to
Controller
Taps
+5V
Isolated GND
Receive Data
Transmit Data
Transmit Enable
Comm
and
Isolation
ISO Return
Output
Bypass
Control
Raise
Lower
OBU Hooked Up
400 Hz
Pulse Width
Modulated
Signal
Board
Enable
6801
Micro
processor
Processor
Watchdog
Timer
+5V
Watchdog
Timer
Pulse
Width To
Voltage
Converter
Backup
Analog
Hold
To
Controller
Analog
Input
Dual Pulse to
Analog
Converter
HOLD
FAIL
OFF
Micro-reset
Field
System
+28V ISO
1--5V
Transient
Protection
Select
HOLD
FAIL
OFF
Voltage To
Current
Converter
+10V
0.5 TO 2.5V
Feedback
Board
Fault
Output To Output
Bypass Unit
Regulator
Active
Backup
Hold
+5V Comm Isolated
Comm GND
+28V Isolated
+10V Isolated
Switching
Power
Regulator
Optical
Isolation
Analog to
Dual Pulse
Converter
Output
To Field
Device
Field
Device
+10V ISO (1525 Only)
Transient
Protection
From
Field
Device
Precision Resistor Network
Current to Voltage Converter
Figure 5.5.19. Isolated Analog Output FIC Functional Diagram
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-29
Isolated Analog Output FIC LEDs and Test Points
Figure 5.5.20 shows the LEDs and test points on the Isolated Analog
Output FIC.
LEDs
TX ENABLE
(DS4)
The signal that enables the transmit signal from the Field
Interface Card to the MultiLoop Processor is active.
30V FUSE
BLOWN
(DS3)
One of three fuses has blown:
F3 = digital section power regulator;
F4 = analog panel station power;
F5 = analog section power.
This LED does not indicate the status of the two fuses on
the output.
Y
R
R
G
CARD FAULT
(DS3)
CARD GOOD
(DS1)
A card fault is detected, or communications with the
MultiLoop Processor have ceased.
If a communication problem occurs, the output current is
held at its last value or goes to zero (see Output Hold
jumper).
No card faults are detected and the MultiLoop Processor
or an analog panel station is controlling the output current.
TEST POINTS
YELLOW
Main 5V Regulator
BROWN
Ground Return
Figure 5.5.20. Isolated Analog Output FIC LEDs and Test Points
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-30
Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumpers
Figure 5.5.21 and Figure 5.5.22 show the location of the jumpers on the
Isolated Analog Output FIC. Table 5.5.10 gives jumper values.
F2
HD2
F1
HD1
F4
F3
Figure 5.5.21. 1984--1334--000x Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuse and Jumper Locations
HD1
(A & B)
A B
F1
F2
HD2
F3
F4
Figure 5.5.22. 1984--1325--000x and --1469 Isolated Analog Input FIC Fuse
and Jumper Locations
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-31
Table 5.5.10. Isolated Analog Output FIC Jumper Positions
Card
1984--1525--000x
1984--1469--000x
Jumper
HD1A
and
HD1B
Purpose
Position
Indicates whether the FIC
holds the last output value
or sets the output current to
zero if there is loss of
communication with the
Controller Processor card.
HOLD: The last output value is
held if there is a failure within
the ControlFile, with the
comm lines, or at the FIC. If
the power supply should fail,
the output current goes to
zero.
OFF: The output value is held for
about 1/2 second before
going to zero if there is a
failure in the FIC processors.
For other types of failures, the output
value is held for up to four seconds
before the output current goes to
zero.
HD2
1984--1334--000x
HD1
HD2
Select normal or reversed
output
Indicates whether the FIC
holds the last output value
or sets the output current to
zero if there is loss of
communication with the
Controller Processor card.
1--2 Normal Output
2--3 Reversed Output
HOLD: The last output value is
held if there is a failure within
the ControlFile, with the
comm lines, or at the FIC. If
the power supply should fail,
the output current goes to
zero.
OFF: The output value is held for
about 1/2 second before
going to zero if there is a
failure in the FIC processors.
For other types of failures, the output
value is held for up to four seconds
before the output current goes to
zero.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-32
Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses
Figure 5.5.21 and Figure 5.5.22 show the fuse locations on the Isolated
Analog Output FIC. Table 5.5.11 gives fuse data.
Table 5.5.11. Isolated Analog Output FIC Fuses
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Littelfuse Part No.
Schurter Part No.
Characteristics
F1
F2
F3
F4
G50382--0014
273.500
MSF 034.4216
1/2 A 125V Plug-In
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-33
Analog FIC Extender Card
An extender card (1984--1362--000x) is available that allows you to
move the FICs out of the FlexTerm for easier access in servicing. It is
marked “NON-ISO & ISO ANALOG OUTPUT/INPUT CARD
EXTENDER”.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-34
Output Bypass Unit (OBU)
The Output Bypass Unit (OBU) (1984--1129--000x) is used to supply
uninterrupted current in place of an output Field Interface card when the
card must be removed from the FlexTerm. The OBU will display the
current source at the Field Interface card, provide a manual balance
adjustment so that the transfer of current control to the OBU is
bumpless, and then provide the current to the field device and allow
manual adjustment of the output. As soon as the new Field Interface
card is in place and the connector is plugged in, the Field Interface card
output will automatically be balanced to the OBU output. The OBU can
then be removed. Operating instructions are outlined on a sticker
attached to the OBU. Figure 5.5.23 shows the unit.
OUTPUT BYPASS UNIT
OUTPUT
BYPASS
25
20
15
10
5
0
BALANCE
5
10
15
20
25
READ
INPUT
Figure 5.5.23. Output Bypass Unit
The OBU is capable of bypassing any type of output Field Interface
card. The Output Bypass Unit has three cables. Power to the OBU
from the FlexTerm is supplied through the first, output connections
through the second, and the third is used to balance the Field Interface
card to the OBU output after the new Field Interface card is in place.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-35
Figure 5.5.24 shows the functional diagram. The power regulator for
the OBU consists of a 555 timer set up as a stable multivibrator that
senses the input voltage and varies the output square wave pulse width
to the transformer primary to compensate for voltage changes. The
resulting regulation on the secondary of the transformer is 26 volts ±2V
for an input of 19 to 36V.
The variable 4--20 mA current is controlled by the front panel
potentiometer by varying the input to a current source generator.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-36
28V
Power
Cable
+30V
Power
Regulator
Return
4--20 mA
Variable
Current
Source
Zero Center
Meter
Raise
Balance
Control
+
-+ 25
mA
-- 25
mA
Lower
OBU
Connected
Relay
Driver
Latch
Balance
Control
Cable
Read
Bal.
Microprocessor
Bypass
Output
Field
Interface
Card
Output
Current
Cable
+
Final
Control
Element
--
Analog
Feedback
Current
Flow
Sense
Figure 5.5.24. Output Bypass Unit Functional Diagram
A latch relay is used to prevent an improper current from driving a final
control element if the OBU is connected while still in the bypass
position. Once this circuit is energized it will not release unless the
power is removed.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-37
A balance circuit is used to toggle the RAISE/LOWER lines to the Field
Interface card to balance the Field Interface card to the OBU output.
This happens only when the current flow circuit senses the current
being sourced from the OBU in the bypass position. The OBU
connected line tells the Field Interface card to ignore the signals coming
from the controller and follow the RAISE/LOWER lines. These three
outputs are optically isolated back to the Field Interface card.
With the switch in the read position, the output current from the variable
current source in the OBU is used to energize the relay latch driver.
The relay then closes and the current from the Field Interface card is
routed through the meter, to display the current to the final control
element.
In the balance position the current from the OBU is routed through the
meter in an opposite direction from the Field Interface card read
direction, thereby zeroing the meter when the currents are of equal
value.
In the bypass position, the current from the OBU is fed to the final
control element and returned to the OBU through the meter. The Field
Interface card current is bypassed around the final control element
through the meter and returned to the Field Interface card analog
feedback resistor.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
SV: 5-5-38
-
To Bypass an output card:
1. Switch to the READ OUTPUT position on the Output Bypass
Unit.
2. Connect a P047 lead to the connector mounted above the
OUTPUT card slot, as shown in Figure 5.5.25. Connect a P926
lead to the power connector. The Output Bypass Unit meter
shows the current provided by the output card.
P047
P926
Output
Bypass Unit
P048
Figure 5.5.25. Connecting the Output Bypass Unit
3. Switch to the BALANCE position on the Output Bypass Unit.
4. Adjust the Output Bypass Unit control until the meter reads zero.
5. Switch to OUTPUT BYPASS position on the Output Bypass Unit.
The output card can now be removed from the card cage. When
the output card is removed, the meter on the Output Bypass Unit
will show the current provided by the Output Bypass Unit.
-
To replace an output card:
1. Complete steps 1 through 5 of the above procedure.
2. Install the new output card into the card cage.
3. Connect the P048 lead to the connector on the leading edge of
the output card.
4. When the Output Bypass Unit meter reads zero, switch the
Output Bypass Unit to the READ OUTPUT position. The output
card now controls the current.
5. Disconnect the output Bypass Unit. Disconnect leads P047 and
P048. Disconnect lead P926 when finished with the output
Bypass unit.
RS3: Serial and Analog I/O
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Hardware
RS3t
Service Manual
Chapter 6:
Multipoint I/O
Section 1:
Section 2:
Section 3:
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1
Multipoint I/O Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Address Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Scanning Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O FIM Redundancy and Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O FIM Online Replacement
.............................
Multipoint I/O FIM Redundancy
....................................
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel FIM Power Wiring
...................
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring
...............
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring:
Online Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Redundancy . .
6-1-4
6-1-4
6-1-5
6-1-6
6-1-6
6-1-6
6-1-8
6-1-8
6-1-8
6-1-10
Communication Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1
Remote Communications Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel II Installation . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel II Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel II Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel I Installation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel I Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Communications Termination Panel I Jumpers
.............
Fiber Optic I/O Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Communications Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Fiber Optic Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optic I/O Converter LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-2
6-2-4
6-2-6
6-2-6
6-2-8
6-2-9
6-2-9
6-2-9
6-2-10
6-2-11
6-2-14
6-2-15
6-2-15
6-2-16
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1
Direct Discrete Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-3
6-3-4
6-3-8
6-3-9
RS3: Multipoint I/O
6-1-10
6-1-11
Contents
SV: ii
Section 4:
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers
.......................
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Fuses
.........................
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers
.......................
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring
.....................
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Output Points . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Input Points . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Solid State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers
........................
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Fuses
..........................
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers
............
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Solid State Relays . . . . . .
Discrete Field Interface Module (FIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete FIM Online Replacement
..................................
Discrete FIM Redundancy
.........................................
Discrete FIM Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete FIM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete FIM LED Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-10
6-3-13
6-3-14
6-3-16
6-3-16
6-3-21
6-3-22
6-3-23
6-3-25
6-3-26
6-3-28
6-3-31
6-3-33
6-3-36
6-3-37
6-3-38
6-3-39
6-3-40
6-3-41
6-3-43
6-3-43
6-3-44
6-3-45
6-3-46
6-3-48
6-3-48
6-3-49
6-3-50
6-3-51
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-1
Multipoint Analog I/O Termination Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Loop Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wire Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shield Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Point Type Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System-Powered Input Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-Powered Input Point with External Ground Reference . . . . . . . . . . . .
Self-Powered Input Point with Ground Reference at Termination Panel .
Marshaling Panel Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO16 Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-2
6-4-4
6-4-7
6-4-7
6-4-7
6-4-9
6-4-9
6-4-10
6-4-10
6-4-11
6-4-12
6-4-13
6-4-14
6-4-15
6-4-15
6-4-16
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Contents
SV: iii
Section 5:
Section 6:
MAIO16 Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Loop Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring -- Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring -- Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel Loop Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAI32 Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Power Module (LPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Power Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Power Module Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO FIMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog FIM Redundancy
..........................................
16-Point Input FIMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-Point Output FIMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32-Point Input FIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO FIM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIO FIM LED Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single FIM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundant FIM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Failed FIM Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-16
6-4-17
6-4-19
6-4-19
6-4-20
6-4-21
6-4-22
6-4-25
6-4-27
6-4-28
6-4-29
6-4-32
6-4-32
6-4-33
6-4-33
6-4-35
6-4-38
6-4-39
6-4-41
6-4-41
6-4-42
6-4-43
6-4-44
6-4-46
6-4-48
6-4-49
6-4-50
6-4-50
6-4-50
6-4-51
Multipoint I/O Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-1
Standard Remote Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-2
Intrinsic Safety (IS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-1
Elcon Series 1000 IS Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Panel for Discrete Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Panel Discrete Cross Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Discrete IS Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Panel for Analog Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Power and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Panel Analog Cross Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Analog IS Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elcon Panel Common Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-3
6-6-6
6-6-7
6-6-8
6-6-9
6-6-10
6-6-10
6-6-11
6-6-12
6-6-12
6-6-12
6-6-12
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Contents
SV: iv
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL IS Termination Panel for Discrete Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mapping I/O points to MTL Discrete Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Fault Detection (LFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL Discrete Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel A Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel B Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL IS Termination Panel for Analog Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MTL Analog Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS3: Multipoint I/O
6-6-12
6-6-13
6-6-14
6-6-18
6-6-19
6-6-19
6-6-19
6-6-19
6-6-19
6-6-20
6-6-20
6-6-21
6-6-23
6-6-24
6-6-25
6-6-28
6-6-28
6-6-28
6-6-28
6-6-28
6-6-28
6-6-29
6-6-29
Contents
SV: v
List of Figures
Figure
Page
6.1.1.
Multipoint I/O Using the Communication Termination Panel II . . . . . . .
6-1-2
6.1.2.
Multipoint I/O Using the Analog Card Cage and Communication
Connect Card III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-3
6.1.3.
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-4
6.1.4.
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Power Wiring: Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-8
6.1.5.
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Power Wiring: Option 2 . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-9
6.1.6.
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Online
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-10
6.1.7.
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Redundant
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-11
6.2.1.
Remote Communications Termination Panel II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-4
6.2.2.
Remote Communications Termination Panel II Used With
Multipoint I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-5
6.2.3.
Remote Communications Termination Panel II Field Wiring . . . . . . . . .
6-2-7
6.2.4.
Remote Communications Termination Panel I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-9
6.2.5.
Fiber Optic I/O Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-11
6.2.6.
Fiber Optic Link in a Communications Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-12
6.2.7.
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-13
6.2.8.
Power and Ground Wiring: Using the Power Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-14
6.2.9.
Power and Ground Wiring: Using the Power strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-14
6.2.10.
Communication Line Connector Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-15
6.3.1.
Recommended Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-4
6.3.2.
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II (10P 5270 0001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-7
6.3.3.
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-8
6.3.4.
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Field Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-9
6.3.5.
Direct Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-15
6.3.6.
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Connections . . . . . . . .
6-3-17
6.3.7.
Label for Direct Discrete Termination Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-18
6.3.8.
Label for the Direct Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-19
6.3.9.
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Connections . . . . . . . .
6-3-20
6.3.10.
Multi-FIM Isolated Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-24
6.3.11.
Field Wiring to a Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-25
6.3.12.
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-29
6.3.13.
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-30
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Contents
SV: vi
6.3.14.
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Connections . . . . . .
6-3-32
6.3.15.
Label for Isolated Discrete Termination Field Wiring Panel A . . . . . . . .
6-3-33
6.3.16.
Label for Isolated Discrete Termination Panel A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-34
6.3.17.
Label for Isolated Discrete Termination Panel B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-35
6.3.18.
System-Powered Output Point Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-36
6.3.19.
Field-Powered Output Point Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-36
6.3.20.
Contact-Closure Input Point Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-37
6.3.21.
Field-Powered Input Point Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-37
6.3.22.
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-42
6.3.23.
Field Wiring to a Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-43
6.3.24.
Discrete Field Interface Module (FIM) Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-47
6.3.25.
Discrete Field Interface Module (FIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-50
6.4.1.
MAIO16 Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-5
6.4.2.
MAIO16 Termination Panel Field Wire Landing Methods . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-10
6.4.3.
MAIO16 Output Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-11
6.4.4.
MAIO16 System-Powered Input Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-12
6.4.5.
MAIO16 Self-Powered Input Point with External Ground Reference . .
6-4-13
6.4.6.
MAIO16 Self-Powered Input Point with Ground Reference at
Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-14
6.4.7.
MAIO Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-18
6.4.8.
Field I/O Point Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-20
6.4.9.
Output Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-21
6.4.10.
System-Powered Input Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-22
6.4.11.
Self-Powered Input Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-23
6.4.12.
Self-Powered Input Point (Referred to Loop Power Return:
Non-isolated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-24
6.4.13.
MAIO Termination Panel Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-26
6.4.14.
MAI32 Analog Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-30
6.4.15.
MAI32 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-33
6.4.16.
MAI32 Field Wiring Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-34
6.4.17.
System-Powered Input Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-36
6.4.18.
Self-Powered Input Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-37
6.4.19.
Loop Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-39
6.4.20.
Loop Power Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-40
6.4.21.
MAIO 16-Point Input FIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-44
6.4.22.
MAIO 16-Point Input FIM Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-45
6.4.23.
MAIO 16-Point Output FIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-46
6.4.24.
MAIO 16-Point Output FIM Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-47
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Contents
SV: vii
6.4.25.
MAIO 32-Point Input FIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-48
6.5.1.
Standard Remote Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5-2
6.6.1.
Intrinsic Safety Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-1
6.6.2.
Elcon Intrinsically Safe Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-4
6.6.3.
Discrete I/O with Elcon IS Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-6
6.6.4.
Elcon Panel Cross Wiring for Discrete Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-7
6.6.5.
Elcon Discrete Panel Polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-8
6.6.6.
Analog I/O with Elcon IS Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-9
6.6.7.
Elcon Panel Cross Wiring for Analog Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-10
6.6.8.
Elcon Analog Panel Polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-11
6.6.9.
MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-15
6.6.10.
MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-16
6.6.11.
Discrete I/O with MDIO MTL IS Termination Panel A and B . . . . . . . . .
6-6-17
6.6.12.
LFD Jumper Settings for Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-23
6.6.13.
LFD Jumper Settings for Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-23
6.6.14.
MTL Analog IS Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-26
6.6.15.
Analog I/O with MTL IS Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-27
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Contents
SV: viii
List of Tables
Table
Page
6.1.1. I/O Point and Minimum Controller Scan Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-5
6.2.1. Remote Communications Termination Panel Parts Replacement . . . . . . .
6-2-2
6.2.2. Remote Communications Terminal Panel II Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-8
6.2.3. Remote Communications Termination Panel I Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-10
6.2.4. Fiber Optic I/O Converter LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-16
6.3.1. Parts Replacement for the Direct Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . .
6-3-3
6.3.2. Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Jumper Settings
...............
6-3-10
6.3.3. Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-13
6.3.4. Direct Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-21
6.3.5. Direct Discrete Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-22
6.3.6. Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-27
6.3.7. Solid State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-38
6.3.8. Isolated Discrete Termination Panel A Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-39
6.3.9. Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-40
6.3.10. High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Address Jumpers . . .
6-3-44
6.3.11. High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, Solid State Relays .
6-3-45
6.3.12. Parts Replacement for the Discrete Field Interface Module . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-46
6.3.13. MDIO, MDIOH, and MDIOL LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-50
6.4.1. Multipoint Analog I/O Termination Panel Parts Replacement
.........
6-4-3
6.4.2. MAIO16 Termination Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-6
6.4.3. MAIO Marshaling Panel Cable Pin-Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-15
6.4.4. MAIO16 Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-16
6.4.5. MAIO Termination Panel Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-28
6.4.6. MAI32 Analog Termination Panel Components
.....................
6-4-31
...............................
6-4-35
6.4.8. MAI32 Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-38
6.4.9. Loop Power Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-41
6.4.10. MAIO FIM Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-42
6.4.11. MAIO FIM LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-49
6.4.12. MAIO FIM LED Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-51
6.5.1. Standard Remote Termination Panel, Marshaling Panel Cable . . . . . . . . .
6-5-3
6.6.1. Elcon IS Termination Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-5
6.4.7. MAI32 Termination Panel Jumpers
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Contents
SV: ix
6.6.2. Elcon Discrete IS Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.3. Elcon Analog IS Barriers
6-6-8
........................................
6-6-11
6.6.4. Elcon IS Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-13
6.6.5. Mapping of I/O Points to MTL Discrete Panel A Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-18
6.6.6. Mapping of I/O Points to MTL Discrete Panel B Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-18
6.6.7. MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-20
6.6.8. MTL Discrete IS Isolators
.......................................
6-6-22
6.6.9. MTL Analog IS Termination Panel Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6-28
6.6.10. MTL Analog Input and Output Isolators
6-6-29
RS3: Multipoint I/O
..........................
Contents
SV: x
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Contents
SV: 6-1-1
Section 1:
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
Multipoint I/O (MIO) is a family of I/O products that allow for the
distribution of the I/O electronics and marshaling panels close to the I/O
devices controlled. The devices share a common packaging format and
system cable connection method. Multipoint I/O is used to read and
control analog and discrete (contact) I/O points. The MIO Termination
Panel provides connection for field I/O devices, one or two Field
Interface Modules (FIM), optional Loop Power Module (LPM), and
communications to the Controller Processor in a ControlFile.
Most Multipoint I/O termination panels provide the option of online Field
Interface Module (FIM) replacement or redundant FIM operation. For
online replacement operation, a single FIM is installed and a single
communication line is used. If this FIM fails, a replacement may be
inserted in the empty socket. The replacement will take over for the
failed FIM. Redundant operation requires two installed FIMs, two
communication lines, and use of a Redundant I/O Block (RIOB). Both
FIMs operate continuously with one as primary, the other as secondary.
If the primary FIM fails, the secondary FIM takes over immediately.
A Communication Connect Card III, Communication Termination
Panel II, or Remote Communication Termination Panel provides up to
eight communications lines between an MPC controller in a ControlFile
and the MIO termination panels. Up to four MIO termination panels can
be connected to each communication line, with each panel having a
separate address. Configuration space and processor time will limit the
amount of hardware that can be connected and serviced.
A pair of Fiber Optic I/O Converters can be used to insert a fiber optic
link in the communication line.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SV: 6-1-2
Multipoint I/O termination panels can be connected directly to a
ControlFile by using a Communications Termination Panel II
(1984--4205--000x) or a Remote Communications Termination Panel
(1984--2552--000x). Figure 6.1.1 shows a typical installation.
PeerWay
A
A
B
B
ControlFile
Control Cable
Communication Termination Panel II
Controller
Communication Lines
Multipoint I/O
Termination Panel
Figure 6.1.1. Multipoint I/O Using the Communication Termination Panel II
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SV: 6-1-3
Multipoint I/O termination panels can be connected to an Analog Card
Cage using a Communications Connect Card III (1984--2543--000x).
Figure 6.1.2 shows a typical installation.
PeerWay
A
A
B
B
ControlFile
Communication
Connect Card III
Control Cable
Controller
Analog Card Cage
Communication Lines
Multipoint I/O
Termination Panel
Figure 6.1.2. Multipoint I/O Using the Analog Card Cage and Communication Connect Card III
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SV: 6-1-4
Multipoint I/O Addressing
Figure 6.1.3 shows how Multipoint I/O addresses are formed. The
standard RS3 address format has been generalized to make the new
hardware configuration fit logically within the familiar RS3 address
structure.
The ControlFile Node Address specifies which ControlFile is used.
The Controller Slot Address specifies which controller is used.
The “Cage Address” specifies which termination panel on the
communication line is used.
The communication line or “Card Cage Slot” specifies which
communication line is used.
The Point Address specifies which I/O point is used.
=2 G A 2 11
ControlFile Node Address
(1--992)
Controller Slot Address
(A--H)
Termination Panel Address
“Cage” Address (A--D)
Point Address
(01--32)
Communication Line Address
“Card Cage Slot” (1--8)
Figure 6.1.3. Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Addressing
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Address Jumpers
The termination panel address or “card cage address” is specified by a
jumper that is set to address A, B, C, or D. The isolated Discrete
Termination Panel pair has an address jumper on each of the two
panels. Both must be set to the same address. The MultiFIM Discrete
Termination Panel has a separate address jumper for each of the three
FIMs.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SV: 6-1-5
Multipoint I/O Scanning Rates
The rate at which I/O points are scanned depends on the highest card
cage address served by the communication line.
D
D
D
D
The maximum panel scanning rate of 32 per second is achieved
when only address “A” is used on the communication line; the
scanning pattern is “A A A A”.
Using address “B” halves the rate for all points to 16 scans per
second; the scanning pattern is “A B A B”.
Using address “C” gives 16 scans per second to A and 8 each to
B and C; the scanning pattern is “A B A C”.
Using address “D”, gives 8 scans per second to all; the scanning
pattern is “A B C D”.
The Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO) I/O point update rate is equal to the
panel scan rate.
The Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) I/O point update rate is one-fourth the
panel scan rate. Four messages are needed to update the points, so
the analog I/O point update rate is the panel scan rate divided by 4.
Thus a MAIO panel addressed as “A”, with a panel scan rate of 32
scans per second, gives 8 I/O point scans per second or a scan time of
.125 second. The minimum useable controller scan time is .25 second.
Table 6.1.1 shows the scan rates and minimum controller scan time for
various cage addresses.
NOTE: The controller scan time (1.0, .50, .25, .125 second), selected
from the ControlFile Status screen, must always be greater than the I/O
point scan time. The controller scan time applies to all card cages
served by the controller, so the scan time of the slowest cage must be
used.
Table 6.1.1. I/O Point and Minimum Controller Scan Rates
Highest
Card Cage
Address
Cage Scan Rate
Minimum Controller Scan Time
(Seconds)
Cage
Scan Pattern
(Scans
Per Second)
MDIO
MAIO
A
AAAA
32
.125
.25
B
ABAB
16
.125
.50
C
ABAC
.25
25
10
1.0
D
ABCD
.25
1.0
RS3: Multipoint I/O
A: 16
B, C: 8
8
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SV: 6-1-6
Multipoint I/O FIM Redundancy and Online Replacement
Most Multipoint I/O termination panels support FIM redundancy and FIM
online replacement.
Multipoint I/O FIM Online Replacement
The online replacement operation is provided when one FIM and one
communication line is used. The FIM can be installed in either the “A”
or the “B” socket. The other socket is available for an online
replacement. The redundancy jumper(s) must be set to normal to allow
the online replacement operation.
If the FIM fails in any way, a good FIM can be plugged into the empty
socket. Normally, the failed FIM red LED goes ON. The new FIM takes
over from the installed FIM in a few seconds. The failed FIM can be
removed for repair as soon as the new FIM green LED goes ON and
the yellow “Comm Active” LED (see note below) flashes.
NOTE: The label for a discrete FIM is marked “Comm Active”. Current
labels for analog FIMs are marked “Comm A” and “Comm B”. Older
labels for analog FIMs were marked “Port A” and “Port B”.
NOTE: The new FIM may be left in service in that socket; the failed FIM
should be removed immediately. The empty socket will provide for
another online replacement. Do not leave two FIMs plugged into an
online replacement style panel.
Multipoint I/O FIM Redundancy
Full FIM redundancy is provided when two FIMs are used. Two
communication lines are required, one for an odd numbered slot and
one for the next even numbered slot. The primary FIM is in the “FIM A”
socket and the redundant FIM is in the “FIM B” socket. The redundancy
jumper(s) must be set at redundant to allow redundant operation. A
Redundant I/O Block (RIOB) must be configured to control operations.
Analog FIM redundancy requires that the jumpers at HD18 and HD19
on the Analog Termination Panel be set to the “R” position while
discrete FIM redundancy requires that the jumpers at HD2 on the
Discrete Termination Panel be removed.
The odd numbered slot address must be wired to FIM A, the “primary”
FIM. The even numbered slot must be wired to FIM B, the “secondary”
FIM.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SV: 6-1-7
Primary (A) FIM Failure: If the primary FIM fails, the secondary FIM
takes over and assumes the duties of the primary. Normally the failed
FIM red LED goes ON and the green LED flashes. The failed FIM
should be removed and replaced. As soon as the new FIM A powers
up, it assumes the duties of the primary FIM and FIM B returns to
secondary operation.
Secondary (B) FIM Failure: If the secondary FIM (B) fails, the primary
FIM (A) continues to operate. Normally, the failed FIM red LED goes
ON and the green LED flashes. The failed FIM B should be removed
and replaced. As soon as the new FIM B powers up, it resumes the
duties of secondary FIM.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SV: 6-1-8
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Installation
The termination panel must be mounted with the long dimension placed
vertically. The panel can be installed in a rack, on DIN rails, or against a
flat surface. Ambient air temperature specifications refer to the
temperature of the air at the bottom of each terminal panel.
Wire tie-wrap anchor points are provided on the label bracket at each
end of the panel.
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Grounding
The termination panel must be connected to the cabinet ground. If the
panel is mounted on a grounded DIN rail or mounted against a
grounded metal panel it will be adequately grounded. Otherwise you
must connect a ground wire to one of the ground terminals of the power
strip.
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel FIM Power Wiring
NOTE: Removing power from a termination panel stops processing for
all points served by the panel.
Terminal panel (FIM) power is supplied either from the RS3 system DC
power supply bus or from a local DC source such as a Remote I/O
Power Supply (1984--4302--00xx). Provision is made for optional A and
B redundant DC supplies.
There are two approved ways to supply FIM power. Option 1 uses the
standard RS3 4-pin power jack and a standard RS3 DC power cable as
shown in Figure 6.1.4.
Power Jack
Power Strip
Power Jack
A Supply
B Supply
A Return
Standard A and
B Power Supply
Cable
B Return
Figure 6.1.4. Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Power Wiring: Option 1
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SV: 6-1-9
Option 2 is more suitable if FIM power is supplied by a local source or if
additional panels are to be fed from the same source. Figure 6.1.5
shows option 2.
From A From B
Supply Supply
A & B Power
to another unit
(10 amp max A+B)
A B
RTN
A B
Power Strip
RTN
A+
A --
A -A+
B+
B --
B -B+
Daisy chain to
next device
NOTE: Maximum current (A + B) 7 amps
Figure 6.1.5. Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Power Wiring: Option 2
CAUTION
Do not use both the power jack and the power strip at the
same time. This may result in damage to the panel.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SV: 6-1-10
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring
Port A and Port B provide for connecting two independent
communication lines. The communication line used determines the
panel slot address. One line is used for single FIM (online replacement)
applications. An odd-even pair is used for redundant FIM applications.
Each terminal is labeled +, --, and S for the plus and minus signal wires
and the shield. The terminals will accommodate one wire of 0.34 to 4
mm2 (22 to 12 AWG) size or two wires in the range 0.34 to 0.75 mm2
(22 to 18 AWG). This allows communication wires to be daisy chained
to other panels as required.
Shield grounding is supplied within the termination panel. An internal
spark gap transient suppressor is supplied on the communication lines
and within the FIM. A low impedance connection between the panel
and local ground is required for proper protection. No further transient
suppression should be required.
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring:
Online Replacement
The communication line can be connected to Port A or Port B. The
other port can be used to daisy chain the communication line to another
panel.
NOTE: It is good practice to use an odd numbered line and to reserve
the next even numbered line for eventual redundant operation.
The redundancy jumpers connect the communication lines to allow for
an online replacement operation with a single line. These jumpers must
be at normal for online replacement operation.
Figure 6.1.6 shows communication wiring for the single FIM (online
replacement) application.
Communication Line
Slot N (odd)
Port A
NOTE: Redundancy jumpers must be on normal
Figure 6.1.6. Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring:
Online Replacement
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SV: 6-1-11
Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Redundancy
The use of redundant FIMs requires two independent communication
lines as shown in Figure 6.1.7. The odd numbered line must be wired
to Port A, for FIM A (the “primary” FIM). The even numbered line must
be wired to Port B for FIM B (the “secondary” FIM).
The redundancy jumpers must be set at redundant to allow the use of
the two independent communication lines.
Communication Line
Slot N+1 (even)
Communication line
slot N (odd)
Port A
Port B
NOTE: Redundancy jumpers must be set at redundant
Figure 6.1.7. Multipoint I/O Termination Panel Communication Wiring: Redundant Operation
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SV: 6-1-12
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring
SV: 6-2-1
Section 2:
Communication Devices
This section covers devices that connect Multipoint I/O termination
panels to the ControlFile:
D
Remote Communications Termination Panel
D
Fiber Optic I/O Converter
Another device used is covered in Section 1 “Analog Card Cage”:
D
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Communications Connect Card
Communication Devices
SV: 6-2-2
Remote Communications Termination Panel
There are two models of the Remote Communications Termination
Panel (also known as the Communications Termination Panel):
D
D
Remote Communications Termination Panel II
(1984--4205--000x) is marked “COMM TERM PNL II” on the
PWA. This panel provides one set of communication lines.
Remote Communications Termination Panel I
(1984--2552--000x) is marked “COMM TERMINATION PNL” on
the PWA. This panel provides two independent sets of
communication lines. It essentially is two single panels mounted
together. Table 6.2.1 shows a replacement for this unit.
The Remote Communications Termination Panel provides termination
and transient suppression for communication lines between a Controller
Processor and a Multipoint I/O termination panel, an analog card cage,
or a FlexTerm for long distance applications.
When used with a ControlFile and Contact FlexTerm or with a PLC
FlexTerm, a Remote Communications Termination Panel must be
installed at each end of the communication link. The panel must be
mounted in the same cabinet or set of cabinets as the ControlFile or
remote I/O to which it is attached.
When used with a Multipoint I/O termination panel, only one Remote
Communications Termination Panel is required. The Multipoint I/O
termination panel provides adequate termination for the other end of the
communication lines.
NOTE: A Remote Communications Termination Panel cannot be used
with Single-Strategy or MultiLoop FlexTerms.
NOTE: The Communications Connect Card also provides termination
and transient suppression for communication lines. It may be used in
place of a Remote Communications Termination Panel II.
Table 6.2.1. Remote Communications Termination Panel Parts Replacement
Part No.
1984--4409--0001
(Kit)
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Replaces
Characteristics
1984--2552--000x
The kit replaces a Remote
Communications Termination Panel I.
The kit has two Remote Communications
Termination Panel II units and a DIN rail for
mounting them.
Communication Devices
SV: 6-2-3
NOTE: The transient suppression networks are sufficient for cables
within a building. For runs between buildings, lightning arrestors should
be provided where the cable enters the building. The use of metal
conduit or a copper ground wire is recommended. You can also use the
Fiber Optic I/O Converter to put a fiber optic link in the communication
line.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Communication Devices
SV: 6-2-4
Remote Communications Termination Panel II
Figure 6.2.1 shows the Remote Communications Termination Panel II.
There are two connectors on each panel for a pair of redundant
Controller Processors or for daisy chain cabling to a local card cage or
FlexTerm.
The panel features a pair of transient suppression diodes for each
communications line to protect the Controller Processor.
NOTE: The panel is shipped with a ground wire attached to TB9. This
must be connected to chassis ground for proper operation of the
transient protection. The other terminal of TB9 may be used to ground
the communications cable overall (external) shield. The overall shield
must be grounded only at the ControlFile end of the run.
2
J567
40
HD2A HD2B
1
NORM
2
39
RED
40
J568
3
39
1
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
TB5
OVERALL
SHIELD
CONNECT
AT CONTROL
FILE AREA
TB6
TB7
TB8
HD1
REMOTE I/O
CONT FILE
AREA
TB9
Ground Cable to Chassis Ground
Figure 6.2.1. Remote Communications Termination Panel II
Figure 6.2.2 shows how the Remote Communications Termination
Panel II is used with Multipoint I/O termination panels.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Communication Devices
SV: 6-2-5
PeerWay
A
A
B
B
ControlFile
Control Cable
Communication
Termination
Panel II
Controller
Communications Lines
Isolated Discrete I/O
Termination Panel
Direct Discrete I/O
Termination Panel
Figure 6.2.2. Remote Communications Termination Panel II Used With Multipoint I/O
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Communication Devices
SV: 6-2-6
Remote Communications Termination Panel II Installation
The Remote Communications Terminal Panel II (1984--4205--000x) is
mounted on a DIN rail. It is approximately 77 x 200 mm (3 x 7.9 in.).
There are plastic loops at each corner of the panel for attaching strain
relief ties.
NOTE: The chassis ground wire (green) must be connected to a good
ground or system transient immunity will be severely compromised.
Terminal TB9 may also be used for grounding a communication line
overall cable shield (if any is present).
Remote Communications Termination Panel II Wiring
The Remote Communications Termination Panel II provides two
connectors for cables to Controller Processor or to a local card cage or
FlexTerm.
Eight terminals (TB1--TB8) are provided for connecting individually
shielded twisted--pair communication lines. The individual shields must
be terminated at both ends of the cable. A 50P05890103
(G53373--0103) mating connector is used on the communication line.
The communication line establishes the slot address of the device
connected to the line. Figure 6.2.3 shows typical wiring for use with a
Multipoint I/O termination panel. For each twisted pair, connect the
shield (or drain) to “S”, the black wire to “--”, and the red wire to “+”.
NOTE: If the communication lines are gathered into a shielded cable,
the overall cable shield must be grounded to terminal TB9 only at the
ControlFile end of the cable run.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Communication Devices
SV: 6-2-7
To ControlFile
2
40
J567
HD4A HD4B
1
NORMAL
2
39
REDUNDANT
J568
40
3
1
COMM
1
TB1
39
COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM COMM
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TB2
TB3
TB4
TB5
TB6
TB7
TB8
OVERALL
SHIELD
CONNECT
AT CONTROL
FILE AREA
HD1
REMOTE I/O
CONT FILE
TB9
Ground Cable
to Chassis Ground
Terminals for Communication Lines 1--8
(Each of these connections has +, -- , shield)
Figure 6.2.3. Remote Communications Termination Panel II Field Wiring
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Communication Devices
SV: 6-2-8
Remote Communications Termination Panel II Jumpers
There are jumpers on each panel to specify the location of the panel
and whether normal or redundant Controller Processor operation is
being used. Table 6.2.2 shows jumper positions for the Remote
Communications Terminal Panel II.
Table 6.2.2. Remote Communications Terminal Panel II Jumpers
Jumper
Position
Effect
HD1
REMOTE I/O
(1--2)
Used when the panel is at the remote end of the
communication line; at the card cage or FlexTerm.
CONT FILE
(2--3)
Used when the panel is at the ControlFile (source)
end of the communication line.
HD4A
HD4B
NORMAL
(1--2)
REDUNDANT
(2--3)
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Normal operation. One cable is used from the
ControlFile to the panel. The panel is connected
to one Controller Processor.
Redundant operation. Two cables are used
between the ControlFile and the panel. The panel
is connected to two Controller Processors.
Communication Devices
SV: 6-2-9
Remote Communications Termination Panel I
Remote Communications Termination Panel I (1984--2552--000x)
handles two independent communication terminations. The upper half
of the panel handles one termination, the lower half the other
termination. Each provides two connectors for cables to the Controller
Processor or to a local card cage or FlexTerm. Figure 6.2.4 shows the
Remote Communications Termination Panel I. A kit (1984--4409--000x)
is available to replace this unit.
6
8
2
3
4
5
7
1
+ -- S + -- S + -- S + -- S + -- S + -- S + -- S + -- S
+ -- S + -- S + -- S + -- S + -- S + -- S + -- S + -- S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 6.2.4. Remote Communications Termination Panel I
Remote Communications Termination Panel I Installation
The Remote Communications Termination Panel I is mounted in a
standard 19-inch rack.
Remote Communications Termination Panel I Wiring
Two sockets are provided for the cable from the Controller Processor
and for the optional redundant Controller Processor.
Eight sets of screw connections are provided for connecting individually
shielded, twisted-pair communication lines. The individual shields must
be terminated at both ends of the cable. The communication line
establishes the slot address of the device connected to the line.
NOTE: If the communication lines are gathered into a shielded cable,
the overall cable shield should be grounded to the “Overall Shield”
terminal only at the ControlFile end of the cable run.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Communication Devices
SV: 6-2-10
Remote Communications Termination Panel I Jumpers
There are jumpers on each panel to specify the location of the panel
and whether normal or redundant operation is being used. Table 6.2.3
shows jumper positions for the Remote Communications Termination
Panel I.
Table 6.2.3. Remote Communications Termination Panel I
Jumpers
Jumper
HD1A
HD1B
(Top panel)
HD3
(Top panel)
HD2A
HD2B
(Lower panel)
HD4
(Lower panel)
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Position
Effect
NORMAL
(1--2)
Normal operation. One cable is used from the
ControlFile to the panel.
REDUNDANT
(2--3)
Redundant operation. Two cables are used
between the ControlFile and the panel.
REMOTE I/O
(1--2)
Used when the panel is at the remote end of
the communication line, at the card cage or
FlexTerm.
CONTROL
FILE
(2--3)
NORMAL
(1--2)
Used when the panel is at the ControlFile
(source) end of the communication line.
Normal operation. One cable is used from the
ControlFile to the panel.
REDUNDANT
(2--3)
Redundant operation. Two cables are used
between the ControlFile and the panel.
REMOTE I/O
(1--2)
Used when the panel is at the remote end of
the communication line, at the card cage or
FlexTerm.
CONTROL
FILE
(2--3)
Used when the panel is at the ControlFile
(source) end of the communication line.
Communication Devices
SV: 6-2-11
Fiber Optic I/O Converter
The Fiber Optic I/O Converter (1984--3278--000x) allows for the
insertion of one fiber optic link in a twisted pair communications line
between a controller and an I/O device. Two converters are required,
one at either end of the fiber optic link.
NOTE: Revision Level C/D or higher includes the ground wire and DIN
rail clip.
Figure 6.2.5 shows front and top views of the converter.
Top View
FIBER OPTIC I/O CONVERTER
5V POWER
CF NODE
RECEIVE DATA
CONTROLLER
TRANSMIT DATA
COMM LINE
TB1
F/O Receiver
R
TB2
TB3
J980 A B RTN
T
F/O Transmitter
Power Strip
Power Jack
Comm Ports
(three position)
Ground Wire
and DIN Clip
Front View
Figure 6.2.5. Fiber Optic I/O Converter
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Communication Devices
SV: 6-2-12
Figure 6.2.6 shows a typical installation.
NOTE: Only one fiber optic link may be used in a communication line
run.
PeerWay
A
A
B
B
ControlFile
Controller to FlexTerm Cable
Communication
Termination Panel II
Fiber Optic I/O Converter
Controller
Communication Line
Fiber Optic Cable
Fiber Optic I/O Converter
Communication
Line
Figure 6.2.6. Fiber Optic Link in a Communications Line
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Communication Devices
SV: 6-2-13
The operation of the Fiber Optic I/O Converter is divided into four
subgroups. Figure 6.2.7 is the converter block diagram.
+5V
Vin
+5V
DC/DC
Power Supply
Fiber Optic
Receiver
Fiber Optic
Input Fiber
+5V
+
-Shield
Communications
Line
RS-485/Digital
Communications
Converter
+5V
Fiber Optic
Transmitter
Fiber Optic
Output Fiber
Figure 6.2.7. Fiber Optic I/O Converter Block Diagram
The power supply section converts 18--36 VDC to 5 VDC. The only
voltage required by the rest of the circuitry is 5 V.
The fiber optic receiver section converts the optical signal from the
receiving optical fiber to a digital signal that is passed to the
Communications section.
The fiber optic transmitter section converts the digital signal provided by
the Communications section into an optical signal on the transmitting
optical fiber.
The RS-485/Digital communications section coverts the input RS-485
signal from the twisted pair communication line to a digital signal used
by the transmitter section. It also converts the digital signal from the
receiver to a RS-485 signal for output on the communication line. It
provides RS-485 isolation to eliminate line contention between the
transmitter and receiver sections.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Communication Devices
SV: 6-2-14
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Power Wiring
CAUTION
The panel must be connected to a good earth ground. It is
mounted to the DIN rail by nonconducting plastic feet. The
connection for chassis ground is on the power strip (TB3).
The power jack (J980) is a four-position locking connector and is
compatible with the 30 V bus cable used in other parts of the system. It
provides for 30 V A and B supplies, thereby allowing for redundant
power connections. Figure 6.2.8 shows this usage.
NOTE: Use either the power jack or the power strip. Do not use both.
A B
RTN
J980
A B RTN
A B RTN
TB3
B Return
A Return
B Supply
A Supply
Standard A and
B Power Supply
Cable
Figure 6.2.8. Power and Ground Wiring: Using the Power Jack
The power strip (TB3) is a screw down terminal block style connector. It
provides two inputs for 30 V A and B supplies. This allows for easy
daisy chaining of power. The maximum current through the terminal
block is 7 amps. Figure 6.2.9 shows this usage.
A B
RTN
A B
RTN
TB3
A+
A -B+
B --
A -A+
B -B+
Daisy chain to
next device
NOTE: Maximum current (A + B) 7 amps
Figure 6.2.9. Power and Ground Wiring: Using the Power strip
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Communication Devices
SV: 6-2-15
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Communications Wiring
The communication line at either end of the fiber optic link must not
exceed 75 meters (300 feet) in length. The converter handles one
communication line that should be connected to TB1. The second jack
(TB2) is provided to allow daisy chaining of the communication line to
other devices.
Three-position communication line connectors (50P05890103 or
G53373--0103) are used. Connect the shield (or drain) to “S”, the black
wire to “--”, and the red wire to “+” as shown in Figure 6.2.10.
+
--
Red
Black
S
Shield
Figure 6.2.10. Communication Line Connector Wiring
Fiber Optic I/O Converter Fiber Optic Link
Standard fiber optic cable is used. The transmitter and receiver
connectors are bayonet type ST. See Site Preparation and Installation
Manual (SP) for fiber optic cable installation and testing details.
Transmit (T) of the unit nearest the ControlFile must connect to Receive
(R) on the distant unit. The receive (R) of the near unit must connect to
Transmit (T) on the distant unit.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Communication Devices
SV: 6-2-16
Fiber Optic I/O Converter LEDs
There are three LEDs on the converter. Table 6.2.4 shows details.
Table 6.2.4. Fiber Optic I/O Converter LEDs
RS3: Multipoint I/O
LED
Color
Function
5V POWER
Green
ON when power is ON.
RECEIVE DATA
Yellow
Flashes when the unit is receiving data.
TRANSMIT DATA
Yellow
Flashes when the unit is transmitting data.
Communication Devices
SV: 6-3-1
Section 3:
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
This section covers the:
D
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II
—
D
(Original)
1984--4127--000x
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel
1984--4282--000x
—
D
D
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel (pair)
—
Panel A
1984--4121--000x
—
Panel B
1984--4124--000x
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel
1984--4167--000x
—
D
Standard Remote Termination Panel
1984--4344--000x
—
D
10P52700001
Direct Discrete Termination Panel
—
D
(CE approved)
Discrete Field Interface Module (FIM)
—
MDIOH
High-side switching FIM (CE approved)
10P53550006
—
MDIOL
Low-side switching FIM (CE approved)
10P53520006
—
MDIO
Low-side switching FIM (Original)
1984--4080--000x
NOTE: A high-side switching Field Interface Module (FIM) breaks the
supply side of the circuit; a low-side switching FIM breaks the return
side of the circuit.
Multipoint Discrete I/O is used to read and control discrete (contact) I/O
points. It allows location of the I/O electronics (FIM) at the field wiring
termination panel. The Discrete Termination Panels may be mounted
where the user desires (within communication wiring length limits).
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-2
The Direct Discrete, the Multi-FIM, and the Isolated Discrete
Termination Panels provide the option of online replacement or
redundant FIM operation. For an online replacement operation, a single
FIM is installed and a single communication line is used. If this FIM
fails, a replacement may be inserted in the empty socket. The
replacement will take over for the failed FIM. Redundant operation
requires two installed FIMs, two communication lines, and use of a
Redundant I/O Block (RIOB). Both FIMs operate continuously, with one
as primary, and the other as secondary. If the primary FIM fails, the
secondary FIM takes over immediately.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-3
Direct Discrete Termination Panels
There are two versions of the panel:
D
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II
—
D
10P 5270 0001
For use with high or low-side switching
FIMs. CE approved.
Direct Discrete Termination Panel
—
1984--4127--000x
Only for use with low-side switching
FIMs
NOTE: A high-side switching FIM breaks the supply side of the circuit;
a low-side switching FIM breaks the return side of the circuit.
Table 6.3.1 shows the parts replacement options.
Table 6.3.1. Parts Replacement for the Direct Discrete Termination Panel
Part No.
Replaces
Name on PWA
Characteristics
10P 5270 0001
1984--4127--000x
DIRECT DISCRETE
TERMINATION PANEL II
Use only the MDIOL Low-Side
Switch FIM to ensure
compatability.
10P 5270 0001
DIRECT DISCRETE
TERMINATION PNL
1984--4127--000x
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Valid replacement only for
non-CE installations that use
the MDIOL Low-Side Switch
FIM.
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-4
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II
The Direct Discrete Termination Panel II (10P 5270 0001) is CE
approved for installations conforming to the CE EMC directives. It can
hold either a high-side switching FIM (MDIOH) or a low-side switching
FIM (MDIOL or MDIO). The panel keying can be changed to prevent
insertion of a FIM that is wrong for the installation. Figure 6.3.2 shows
the panel.
FIMs
The High-Side Switch FIM (MDIOH) breaks the high (supply) side of the
circuit for outputs. This FIM should be used for all new installations.
The Low-Side Switch FIM (MDIOL) breaks the low (return) side. This
FIM is used primarily for installations that are backward compatible with
the earlier MDIO FIM (1984--4080--0001).
I/O Points
The panel supports 16 input/output points (1--16) and 16 input-only
points (17--32).
D
All points share a common return bus which is floating relative to
the panel chassis ground.
D
Points 1--16 can be configured as inputs or as outputs.
D
Points 17--32 can only be configured as inputs.
D
D
Point 1 must be configured (either as input or output) and the
transition voltage must be specified. The transition voltage
applies to all 32 points. See the I/O Block Configuration Manual
(IO:10).
For most applications, FRSI recommends that VTH = ½Vsource
(Figure 6.3.1). For an input point with VTH = ½Vsource, the
resistance to Vsource of the field device in the ON state must be
1400 Ω or less to ensure positive turn-ON. The resistance to
Vsource of the field device in the OFF state must be 3200 Ω or
greater to ensure positive turn-OFF.
Vsource
Rs
where 1) Rs=Resistance of field device
2) VTH=Threshold Voltage
3) Vsource=voltage powering the loop
To FIM
Figure 6.3.1. Recommended Resistance
Loop Power
A source of loop power is required unless all points are voltage inputs.
The source must not exceed 36 Volts.
D
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Each group of 8 points can have an independent source of loop
power but all sources must share the common return bus. The
panel is normally shipped with all voltage terminals (V1--V4) and
their returns (N1--N4) jumpered together.
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-5
D
Voltage source inputs must have their returns connected to the
loop power return.
CAUTION
Do not use the same source to power the panel and to
supply loop power. This bypasses power isolation and can
result in field wiring faults propagating to the power
source.
NOTE: Removing power from the panel stops processing for all 32
points.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-6
9
8
10
11
12
7
13
2
3
14
15
16
6
17
18
5
19
4
20
3
21
2
22
23
1
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-7
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
HD17 Address Jumper
13
F25--F32 Fuses for input points 25--32
2
Polarizing plug for MDIOH FIM
14
TB7
Field wiring for input points 25--32
3
Polarizing plug for MDIOL FIM
15
TB5
V3 for input points 17--24 and
V4 for input points 25--32
4
HD1--HD16 Point Selection Jumpers for
input/output points 1--16
16
F17--F24 Fuses for input points 17--24
5
FIM A (required)
17
TB5
Field wiring for input points 17--24
6
Socket for FIM B (optional for redundancy)
18
TB2
V2 for input/output points 9--16 and
V3 for input points 17--24
7
Port B Communications (for redundancy)
19
TB3 Field wiring for input/output points 9--16
8
Port A Communications (required)
20
F9--F16 Fuses for input/output points 9--16
9
J968 Power Jack
21
10
HD18 Redundancy Jumper
22
F1--F8 Fuses for input/output points 1--8
11
TBA Power Strip
23
TB1 Field wiring for input/output points 1--8
12
Spare polarizing plugs
TB2
V1 for input/output points 1--8 and
V2 for input/output points 9--16
Figure 6.3.2. Direct Discrete Termination Panel II (10P 5270 0001)
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-8
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Installation
See 6-1-1, “Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring”, for
installation, panel addressing, power wiring, communication wiring,
redundancy, and online replacement information.
Keying
Panels and FIMs are keyed to prevent insertion of the wrong FIM type.
The FIM has a pair of keying pins that fit into matching holes in the
panel. The panel is set up by inserting plugs into the unused holes at
each end of the FIM. Figure 6.3.3 shows a panel set up for a MDIOH
FIM. Two spare plugs are provided with each panel.
FIM A
PLUG FOR MDIOH
PLUG FOR MDIOL
Figure 6.3.3. Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Keying
-
To remove a plug:
1. Insert a screwdriver under the lip of the plug. The small access
hole at the edge of the plug can be used to get the screwdriver
under the plug.
2. Pry the plug up until you can grip it with you fingers and pull it
out.
-
To insert a plug:
1. Press the plug into the hole until it clicks in place. Be sure to use
the marked hole rather than the nearby access hole.
2. Repeat for the other end of the FIM.
Labels
A replaceable label (1984--4195--0001) is provided on top of the
termination panel label holder assembly. The label provides space at
the end to record the ControlFile Node address, Controller Slot
Address, Termination Panel (FIM) address, and Communication Line.
The body of the label provides for recording each point’s field
connection and the source of external loop power (V+, V--).
A label on the underside of the label holder shows wiring examples.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-9
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Field Wiring
The panel supports 32 I/O points in four groups of eight points. Each
has a group supply bus (V). All groups share a common return bus (N).
The supplies (V1--V4) are isolated so that each group may be powered
independently (as long as the returns can be common). The terminals
will accommodate wire sized 4 to 0.34 mm2 (12 to 22 AWG).
Loop Power
The panel is normally shipped with all supply (V1--V4) terminals
jumpered together. Jumpers are also installed on all return (N1--N4)
terminals (N) to carry excess current between the terminals. The
jumpers on the return terminals (N) should not be removed.
NOTE: The loop power return bus is isolated from chassis ground. You
can supply a connection to the chassis ground terminal of TBA if it is
required for your installation.
Field Terminals
Figure 6.3.4 shows the terminals for points 9--16. Note that the group
supply line terminates at each end of the group. This makes it easy to
daisy chain groups together.
Output points and contact-closure input points are wired between the
upper (odd) terminal and the corresponding lower (even) terminal.
Voltage-input points are wired between the lower (even) terminal and
the common return bus.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
V1
V2
N1 N2
1
2
3
2
Description
No.
4
No.
V2
V3
N2 N3
1
5
2
2
Description
1
V2 Loop Power + (for points 9--16)
4
Points 9--16 return --
2
Common Loop Power return bus
5
V3 Loop Power + (for points 17--14)
3
Points 9--16 supply +
Figure 6.3.4. Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Field Terminals
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-10
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Jumpers
There are three sets of jumpers on the panel. HD17 specifies the panel
(FIM) address. HD18 specifies normal single-FIM operation or optional
redundant (two-FIM) operation. Jumpers HD1--HD16 change
connections for points as shown on the following pages. Table 6.3.2
shows jumper settings.
Table 6.3.2. Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Jumper Settings
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Jumper
Setting
HD1--HD16
Left
(One jumper per point)
Right
Function
MDIOL: Input or Output Point
MDIOH: Input Point
MDIOH: Output Point
A
Use Card Cage Address A
HD17
B
Use Card Cage Address B
(One jumper)
C
Use Card Cage Address C
D
Use Card Cage Address D
E
Not used
F
Not used
HD18
NORM
Normal single-FIM operation
(Two jumpers)
REDUN
Redundant operation with two FIMs
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-11
Low-Side Switch FIM: Put the jumper at the left for all points.
Contact Closure
input Point
5
1
V+
V--
1
2
2
No.
4
3
Voltage Input Point
Description
1
V+ (Loop power supply)
2
Field terminal block (Odd number, upper
row)
3
Input contact
4
Field terminal block (Next even number,
lower row)
5
FIM input to A/D converter
1
V+
V--
No.
4
1
2 2
Description
1
FIM input (A/D converter)
2
Field terminal block (Next even number,
lower row)
3
Voltage input source
4
Voltage input return (Connected to any point
on the common return bus)
No.
Description
3
Output Point
5
V+
1
2
V--
1
2
4
3
RS3: Multipoint I/O
1
V+ (Loop power supply)
2
Field terminal block (Odd number, upper
row)
3
Load
4
Field terminal block (Next even number,
lower row)
5
FIM input (V-- switched return)
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-12
High-Side Switch FIM: Put the jumper at the left for inputs and at the
right for outputs.
Contact Closure
Input Point
5
V+
2
1
No.
V--
1
2
4
3
Voltage Input Point
Description
1
V+ (Loop power supply)
2
Field terminal block (Odd number, upper
row)
3
Input contact
4
Field terminal block (Next even number,
lower row)
5
FIM input (A/D converter)
1
V+
No.
V--
4
1
2 2
Description
1
FIM input (A/D converter)
2
Field terminal block (Odd number, upper
row)
3
Voltage input source
4
Voltage input return (Connected to any point
on the common return bus)
No.
Description
3
Output Point
1
V+
2
V-- 5
1
2
4
3
RS3: Multipoint I/O
1
FIM output (Switched V+)
2
Field terminal block (Odd number, upper
row)
3
Load
4
Field terminal block (Next even number,
lower row)
5
V-- (Common return)
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-13
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Fuses
The panel is supplied with a 1.6-amp fuse in each circuit as shown in
Table 6.3.3. Do not use larger fuses; smaller fuses can be used if
desired. Jumpers HD1--HD16 place the fuse in the powered side of the
16 I/O points. Fuses 17--32 are always on the powered side of the
input-only points.
NOTE: The fuse is out of the circuit when voltage inputs are used.
Table 6.3.3. Direct Discrete Termination Panel II Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Wickman
Part No.
Characteristics
F1 to F32
G53394--1000--0005
216 001
19 194
1A
1 A 250 V (IEC)
Quick action
5x20 mm Ceramic
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-14
Direct Discrete Termination Panel
The Direct Discrete Termination Panel (1984--4127--000x) is marked
“DIRECT DISCRETE TERMINATION PNL” on the Printed Wiring
Assembly (PWA). This panel handles 32 points: 16 input/output points
and 16 input-only points.
The Direct Discrete Termination Panel (1984--4127--000x) can hold only
low-side switching FIMs (MDIOL or MDIO).
One FIM must be installed, the second is required only for redundant
operation.
NOTE: Removing power from the panel stops processing for all 32
points.
Figure 6.3.5 shows the Direct Discrete Termination Panel.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-15
ADDRESS/COMM
RATE
A BCDEF
HD1
Power Jack
STATUS LEDS
FIM A
THIS END
J968
STATUS LEDS
FIM B
F1
F3
F2
F5
F4
F7
F6
F9 F11 F13 F15
F8
F10 F12 F14 F16
THIS END
F17 F19 F21 F23
F25 F27 F29 F31
F18 F20 F22 F24
F26 F28 F30 F32
TBA
TB1
TB3
TB5
TB4
TB2
TBC
TB7
FIM POWER
TB6
Power Strip
NOTE: These variations exist for HD2:
Two three-position headers
Two two-position headers
Two wires soldered in place
TBB
HD2
AB
See text for jumper usage
CLIP FOR
MODULE
REDUNDANCY
HD2
NORM
A
B
FIM
REDUND
Figure 6.3.5. Direct Discrete Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-16
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Installation
See 6-1-1, “Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring”, for
installation, panel addressing, power wiring, communication wiring,
redundancy, and online replacement information.
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring
The panel supports 32 I/O points in four groups of eight points. Each
has a group supply bus. All groups share a common neutral bus. The
supplies are isolated so that each group may be used as desired (as
long as the neutrals can be common). The terminals will accommodate
one wire sized 4 to 0.34 mm2 (12 to 22 AWG).
NOTE: The neutral line is isolated from chassis ground. You must
supply the connection to chassis ground.
For most applications, FRSI recommends that VTH = ½Vsource
(Figure 6.3.1). For an input point with VTH = ½Vsource, the resistance to
Vsource of the field device in the ON state must be 1400 Ω or less to
ensure positive turn-ON. The resistance to Vsource of the field device
in the OFF state must be 3200 Ω or greater to ensure positive turn-OFF.
Figure 6.3.6 shows a pictorial representation and a circuit diagram of a
typical group. Note that the group supply line terminates at each end of
the group. This makes it easy to daisy chain groups together. The
panel is shipped with all of the group supplies jumpered together (all
1--2 terminals connected).
Jumpers are installed on all neutral terminals (3--4) to carry excess
current between the terminals.
CAUTION
The jumpers on terminals 3-- 4 should not be removed.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-17
1
1
2
3
3
5
7
9 11 13 15
4
2
4
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
8 10 12 14 16
Side View
1
2
Group Supply Bus
1
15
2
16
FIM Interface
3
4
Common Neutral Bus
3
4
Figure 6.3.6. Direct Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Connections
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-18
Direct Discrete
A replaceable label (1984--4195--0001), Figure 6.3.7, is provided on the
Termination Panel Direct Termination Panel label holder assembly. The label provides
Field Wiring
spaces at the end to record the ControlFile Node address (1--32),
Controller Slot Address (A--H), Termination Panel (FIM) address (A--D),
and Communication Line (1--8). There is provision for recording both
the primary and redundant communication line addresses. The body of
the label provides for recording the group supply sources (V1--V4) and
each point’s field connection (1--32).
Labels
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 V1 V2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 V2 V3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 V3 V4 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
CF NODE
CNTRLR
TP ADDR
COMM
PRIM RED
Figure 6.3.7. Label for Direct Discrete Termination Field Wiring
The underside of the label holder carries a replaceable label
(1984--4196--0001). This label shows a schematic of the field wiring
terminations and provides space for recording fuse values.
Figure 6.3.8 shows the schematic and relates it to the panel circuit
diagram.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-19
F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24
V2 V3
1
TB5
2
TB4
3
4
COMMON
INPUT POINT
V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3 V3
V3 V4
1
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
+
+
+
17 18 19
9
11
8
10
+
+
13 15
12 14 16
+
+
20 21 22 23
2
TB6
3
4
+
COMMON
24
INPUT POINT
TBA TBB
+ -- S + -- S
TBC
A B RTN A B RTN TH
+ + -- -- + + -- --
GROUND
FIM POWER 24--30 VDC
REDUNDANT BUSES A AND B
Figure 6.3.8. Label for the Direct Discrete Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-20
Direct Discrete
Figure 6.3.9 shows how to wire output points (1--16).
Termination Panel
Field Wiring
Point 1 has been wired to use the group supply to feed FIM Pt 1. The
field load will be ON when FIM Pt 1 is ON.
Output Points
NOTE: The FIM interface is on the low side of the load, therefore this is
a low-side switching device.
Direct Discrete
Figure 6.3.9 also shows two ways to wire input points (1--32).
Termination Panel
Field Wiring
Point 3 has been wired to use the group supply to feed FIM Pt 3. FIM
Pt 3 will go ON when the field contact is closed.
Input Points
Point 8 has been wired to use a field-supplied voltage. FIM Pt 8 will go
ON when the field wiring circuit supplies signal voltage.
1
1
2
3
3
5
7
9 11 13 15
4
2 4
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
8 10 12 14 16
Side View
1
2
Group Supply Bus
1
Field Load
Field Contact
15
2
Field Contact and
Supply
16
+
--
FIM Interface
3
4
1 2
3
4
5 6
7
Common Neutral Bus
8
3
4
Figure 6.3.9. Direct Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Connections
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-21
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers
Jumper HD1 specifies the termination panel (FIM) address. The slot
address is specified by the communication line used.
The factory sets HD1 for FIM address A. There is a jumper in position
F. The jumper at F is reserved for a future application.
The jumpers at HD2 specify normal or redundant operation of the panel.
The jumpers must be removed to allow FIM redundancy.
Table 6.3.4 shows jumper values.
Table 6.3.4. Direct Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers
Jumper
HD1
HD2
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Value
Effect
A
FIM address A (factory setting)
B
FIM address B
C
FIM address C
D
FIM address D
E
Not used
F
Factory setting, do not move
Both Jumpers ON
or
both jumpers at
NORM
or both wires
intact
Normal single FIM operation
with online replacement capability
Both Jumpers
OFF
or
both jumpers at
FIM REDUND
or
both wires cut
Redundant FIM operation
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-22
Direct Discrete Termination Panel Fuses
There are 32 fuses protecting the signal circuits. The factory installs
1-amp fuses in all positions. Other fuses appropriate for the load to be
protected may be installed but must not exceed a 1.0 amp rating (IEC)
or 1.6 amp (UL/CSA). If other fuses are installed, the fuse rating should
be marked on the point’s data label. Table 6.3.5 shows fuse data.
Table 6.3.5. Direct Discrete Termination Panel Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Wickman
Part No.
Characteristics
F1 to F32
G53394--1000--0005
216 001
19 194
1A
1 A 250 V (IEC)
Quick action
5x20 mm Ceramic
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-23
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel
The Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel (1984--4282--000x) holds
three Discrete FIMs and provides marshaling panel connections for
three sets of 32 I/O points. It is marked “MULTI-FIM TERMINATION
PANEL” on the PWA.
There are no fuses supplied for the field wiring.
The panel may be used in three ways:
1. With three independent (nonredundant) FIMs.
2. With FIM A and FIM B as a redundant pair and FIM C as a
stand-alone (nonredundant) FIM. FIM A will be the primary and
FIM B will be the secondary.
3. With FIM A and FIM B as an online replacement pair and FIM C
as a stand-alone (nonredundant) FIM. Only one FIM is required
in either the A or B position. The other position is then available
for an online replacement.
The Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel can hold only low-side
switching FIMs (MDIOL or MDIO).
NOTE: Removing power from the panel stops processing for all three
sets of 32 points.
Figure 6.3.10 shows the Multi-FIM Isolated Discrete Termination Panel.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-24
J582
Communication
Port B
J583
Communication
Port C
HD12 Communication
Line Connections
Jumper
TBA Power Strip
J973
Power Jack
J581
Communication Port
A
HD11 FIM C
Direct/Isolated
Jumper
HD4 through HD8
Redundancy / Online
Replacement Jumpers for
FIM A and B
J579
FIM C Points 1--16
(Input and Output)
J580
FIM C Points 17--32
(Input Only)
HD10 FIM B
Direct/Isolated
Jumper
FIM A
FIM B
J577
FIM B Points 1--16
(Input and Output)
FIM C
J578
FIM B Points 17--32
(Input Only)
HD9 FIM A
Direct/Isolated
Jumper
J576
FIM A Points 17--32
(Input Only)
J575
FIM A Points 1--16
(Input and Output)
HD1, 2, 3
Address Jumpers
for FIM A, B, C
Labels for FIM
Addresses
Figure 6.3.10. Multi-FIM Isolated Discrete Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-25
The Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel can be connected to up to six
Standard Remote Termination Panels by marshalling panel cables. Use
the 1984--4299--xxxx cable for single FIM applications and the
1984--4319--xxxx cable for redundant FIM applications. Figure 6.3.11
shows connections for an application using FIMs A and B as a
redundant pair and FIM C as a single FIM.
Field wiring is landed on a Standard Remote Termination Panel. Wiring
methods are identical to those used for the Direct Discrete Termination
Panel. See the write-up on that panel for details.
1984--4299--xxxx single FIM cables
FIM C Points 1--16
(Input and Output)
FIM C Points 17--32
(Input Only)
Redundant FIM A/B Points 1--16
(Input and Output)
1984--4319--xxxx redundant FIM cables
Redundant FIM A/B Points 17--32
(Input Only)
Figure 6.3.11. Field Wiring to a Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel Label
Label holders are provided by jumper positions HD1, 2, and 3 to record
the address of FIMs A, B, and C. Write the FIM address on the label
next to the FIM.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-26
Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers
Jumpers HD1, HD2, and HD3 specify the termination panel address (A,
B, C, or D) for FIMs A, B, and C. The address should be set to A
whenever possible to get the highest scan rate. The factory sets each
FIM for address A. Only one jumper is allowed in positions A--D. There
is also a jumper in position F; this is reserved for a future application.
Jumpers HD4 through HD8 control redundancy or online replacement
operation of FIMs A and B. Unused jumpers may be “parked” at 1--2 for
normal operation or all placed to 2--3 for redundant FIM operation.
Jumpers HD9, HD10, and HD11 provide a return path for the loop or
supply power for Intrinsically Safe barriers. Only two configurations are
allowed, any other may cause damage to the FIM.
CAUTION
Remove power from the panel before moving the jumpers
on HD9, 10, or 11. The FIM may be damaged if 1-- 8 is ON
when any of the other positions are ON.
For normal loop operation, install the three jumpers in positions 2--7,
3--6, and 4--5 (1--8 is open). For use with Intrinsically Safe barriers, only
1--8 is installed. The other two jumpers can be parked by placing them
horizontally across the other pins as shown on the PWA.
Jumper HD12 allows for the connection of communication ports A and B
to support online replacement of FIMs A and B. For normal operation,
all jumpers are removed from HD12. For online replacement of FIMs A
and B, jumpers are placed on 1--12, 3--10, and 5--6.
Table 6.3.6 shows jumper values.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-27
Table 6.3.6. Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers
Jumper
Value
A ON
HD1, 2, 3
HD4--8
HD9, 10, 11
RS3: Multipoint I/O
FIM address A (factory setting)
NOTE: Only one jumper is allowed in
positions A--D
B ON
FIM address B
C ON
FIM address C
D ON
FIM address D
E OFF
Not used
F ON
Factory setting, do not move
1--2
Normal individual FIM operation
2--3
Redundant operation of FIMs A and B
1--8 OFF
2--7 ON
3--6 ON
4--5 ON
Normal loop operation
1--8 ON
2--7 OFF
3--6 OFF
4--5 OFF
HD12
Effect
Used with Intrinsically Safe barriers
CAUTION
Remove power from the panel before
moving jumpers on HD9, 10, or 11. The
FIM may be damaged if 1--8 is ON when
any of the other positions are ON.
OFF
No jumpers)
Communication Ports A and B are
independent
(normal operation of FIMs A and B)
1--12 ON
3--10 ON
5--6 ON
Communication Ports A and B are
connected
(online replacement operation of FIMs A
and B)
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-28
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel
The Isolated Discrete Termination Panel set consists of two panels
normally connected by a flat ribbon cable. The pair services 32 discrete
I/O points. The “A” panel supports 16 input/output points (1--16). The
“B” panel supports 16 input-only points (17--32). Solid state relay
modules are used for input and output control.
The “A” panel (1984--4121--000x) is marked “ISOLATED DISCRETE
TERMINATION PANEL A” on the PWA.
The “B” panel (1984--4124--000x) is marked “ISOLATED DISCRETE
TERMINATION PANEL B” on the PWA.
The “B” panel must always be used in conjunction with an “A” panel
because there is no provision for connecting a communication line to
the “B” panel. The panels are normally connected by a
(1984--4186--00xx) flat cable. An “A” panel may be used alone if no
more than 16 points are required and the online replacement feature is
not required.
Each panel has a socket for one low-side switching FIM (MDIOL or
MDIO). Either socket may be used for a single FIM. The socket on the
other panel is then available for an online replacement if needed.
For redundant operation, the primary FIM is inserted in the “FIM A”
socket (“A” panel) and the redundant FIM is inserted in the “FIM B”
socket (“B” panel).
Both termination panels must be mounted with the long dimension
vertical to allow cooling of the solid state relays by natural air
convection. The panels can be mounted with the “A” panel at the top
and the “B” panel directly below. The panels are connected using a
short (1984--4186--00xx) flat cable.
The panels can also be mounted side by side using a round cable no
more than 152 cm (5 feet) long. Cable 1984--0498--0005 can be used.
NOTE: Removing power from the panel stops processing for all 32
points.
CAUTION
The solid state relays may be hot enough to cause burns.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-29
Figure 6.3.12 shows Isolated Discrete Termination Panel A.
ADDRESS / COMM RATE
A B C D E F
HD1
STATUS LEDS
FIM A
THIS END
SSR2
SSR4
SSR6
SSR8
SSR10
SSR12
SSR14
SSR16
J564
SSR1
F1
F2
SSR3
F3
F4
SSR5
F5
F6
SSR7
F7
F8
SSR9
F9
TB3
TB1
SSR13
SSR15
F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16
TB5
TB4
TB2
SSR11
TB7
TBA
TBB
TBC
TB6
Power Strip
NOTE: These variations exist for HD2:
Two three-position headers
Two two-position headers
Two wires soldered in place
HD2
AB
See text for jumper usage
CLIP FOR
MODULE
REDUNDANCY
HD2
NORM
A
B
FIM
REDUND
Figure 6.3.12. Isolated Discrete Termination Panel A
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-30
Figure 6.3.13 shows Isolated Discrete Termination Panel B.
HD1
ADDRESS / COMM RATE
A B C D E F
HD1
STATUS LEDS
FIM B
THIS END
SSR18
SSR20
SSR22
SSR24
SSR26
SSR28
SSR30
SSR32
Power
Jack
J565
SSR17
SSR19
SSR21
SSR23
SSR25
SSR27
SSR29
SSR31
J969
F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30 F31 F32
TB8
TB10
TB9
TB12
TB11
TBC
TB14
1 2
TB13
Figure 6.3.13. Isolated Discrete Termination Panel B
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-31
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring
Each panel supports 16 points in four groups of four points. Each group
has a group supply line and a group return line. The groups are entirely
isolated so that each group may be used as desired. The terminals will
accommodate one wire sized 4 to 0.34 mm2 (12 to 22 AWG).
NOTE: A ControlBlock must be configured for address 1 since the
switch voltage for the entire FIM is set from the address 1 ContolBlock.
set the swtich voltage at 1.7 Volts to ensure consistent switching.
Figure 6.3.14 shows a pictorial representation and a circuit diagram of a
typical group. Note that the group supply and group return lines
terminate at each end of the group. This makes it easy to daisy chain
groups together. The panels are shipped with all of the group supplies
jumpered together (1--2) and the group returns jumpered together
(3--4).
The Solid State Relays (SSRs) are connected to terminals in each row
(2--3, 6--7, 10--11, 14--15). They may be used with the group supply and
return or individually.
The A panel is shipped with All SSR “+” terminals jumpered to the group
supply (1--3, 5--7, 9--11, 13--15) to make the SSRs available as output
devices.
The B panel is shipped with all SSR “--” terminals jumpered to the group
return (2--4, 6--8, 10--12, 14--16) to make the SSRs available as input
devices.
NOTE: Rules for Low Voltage Directive (LVD) compliance are covered
in the Site Preparation and Installation Manual (SP).
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-32
1
1
3
2
15
4
2
16
1
2
3
4
3
4
Top View
1
1
2
3
3
5
7
9
11 13 15
4
1
2 4
6
2
8 10 12 14 16
Side View
Group Supply
F9
2
1
3
1
V
F10
3
SSR9+
5
V
F11
7
SSR10+
+
4
SSR9
13
11
SSR11+ V
+
+
SSR10
SSR11
SSR12
-6
SSR10--
1
8
N
-10
12
SSR11-- N
2
15
SSR12+
+
-2
4
SSR9-- N
9
V
F12
3
-14
16
SSR12-- N
Group Return
Figure 6.3.14. Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Connections
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-33
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Labels
A replaceable label is provided on each Isolated Termination Panel
assembly (1984--4195--0002 for panel “A”, and 1984--4195--0003 for
panel “B”). Figure 6.3.15 shows the panel “A” label. The label provides
spaces at the end to record the panel’s ControlFile Node address
(1--32), Controller Slot Address (A--H), Termination Panel (Card Cage)
address (A--D), and Communication Line (1--8). There is provision for
recording both the Primary and Redundant communication line
addresses. The body of the label provides for recording the group
supply sources (V1--V4) and each point’s field connection (1--16, or
17--32).
1
2
3
4
V1 V2 5
6
7
8 V2 V3
9
10
11 12
V3 V4 13 14 15
16
CF NODE
CNTRLR
TP ADDR
COMM
PRIM RED
Figure 6.3.15. Label for Isolated Discrete Termination Field Wiring Panel A
The underside of the label holder carries a schematic of the field wiring
terminations. Figure 6.3.16 shows the label for the “A” panel
(1984--4196--0002) and relates it to the panel circuit diagram.
Figure 6.3.17 shows the label for the “B” panel (1984--4196--0003).
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-34
Group Voltage 3
F9
F10
TB5--3
SSR9+
TB4--2
TB5--1
V3
TB5--7
SSR10+
TB5--5
V3
+
TB4--4
F11
SSR10
TB5--4
N3
TB5--2
SSR9--
SSR11
--
--
--
TB5--8
N3
TB5--6
SSR10--
TB5--15 TB6--1
SSR12+
TB5--13
+
V3
TB6--3
SSR12
TB5--11
SSR11+
TB5--9
+
V3
+
SSR9
F12
--
TB5--12
N3
TB5--10
SSR11--
TB5--14
SSR12--
TB5--16
N3
Group Return 3
F9
F10
F12
F11
F9 F10 F11 F12
V3 + V3 + V3 + V3 +
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
V3 V4
1 2
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
---- N3 ---- N3 ---- N3 ---- N3
9
10
11
12
TB6
TB5
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
3 4
N3 N4
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
TBA TBB
+ -- S + -- S
TBC
A B RTN A B RTN
+ + -- -- + + -- --
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
TB5
TB6
TB7
GROUND
FIM POWER 24--30 VDC
REDUNDANT BUSES A AND B
Figure 6.3.16. Label for Isolated Discrete Termination Panel A
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-35
F26
F28
F27
F25 F26 F27 F28
TB5
V3 + V3 + V3 + V3 +
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
V3 V4
1 2
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
---- N3 ---- N3 ---- N3 ---- N3
25
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
26
F24
27
F25
TB6
3 4
N3 N4
28
F26
F27
F28
F29
F30
F32
F31
GROUND
Figure 6.3.17. Label for Isolated Discrete Termination Panel B
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-36
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Output Points
Output points are available only on panel A. The output Solid-State
Relay acts as a switch. Figure 6.3.18 and Figure 6.3.19 show
examples.
System-Powered
Output Point
1
3
--
+
2
5
4
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
Fuse and group supply (terminals 1, 5, 9, 13)
4
Group return (terminals 4, 8, 12, 16)
2
Solid-State Relay -- (terminals 2, 6, 10, 14)
5
Output load
3
Solid-State Relay + (terminals 3, 7, 11, 15)
Figure 6.3.18. System-Powered Output Point Wiring
Field-Powered
Output Point
1
3
--
+
2
5
No.
4
Description
No.
Description
1
Fuse and group supply (unused)
4
Group return (unused)
2
Solid-State Relay -- (terminals 2, 6, 10, 14)
5
Output load including power source
3
Solid-State Relay + (terminals 3, 7, 11, 15)
Figure 6.3.19. Field-Powered Output Point Wiring
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-37
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring Input Points
Input points are available on both panels. The input Solid-State Relay
acts as a sensor. Figure 6.3.20 and Figure 6.3.21 show examples.
Contact-Closure
Input Point
1
3
5
--
+
2
4
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
Fuse and group supply (terminals 1, 5, 9, 13)
4
Group return (terminals 4, 8, 12, 16)
2
Solid-State Relay -- (terminals 2, 6, 10, 14)
5
Input contact closure
3
Solid-State Relay + (terminals 3, 7, 11, 15)
Figure 6.3.20. Contact-Closure Input Point Wiring
Field-Powered Input
Point
1
3
--
+
2
5
No.
4
Description
No.
Description
1
Fuse and group supply (unused)
4
Group return (unused)
2
Solid-State Relay -- (terminals 2, 6, 10, 14)
5
Input contact closure including power source
3
Solid-State Relay + (terminals 3, 7, 11, 15)
Figure 6.3.21. Field-Powered Input Point Wiring
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-38
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Solid State Relays
Solid State Relays (G12243--00xx), also called Optical Isolator Modules,
are solid-state, optically isolated relays that define each contact point as
an input or an output. Care must be taken to make sure the proper type
of module is installed because input and output modules are
mechanically interchangeable. Table 6.3.7 lists the module types
currently available.
NOTE: AC inputs are yellow and outputs are black. DC inputs are
white and outputs are red.
Table 6.3.7. Solid State Relays
Part Number
C12243--
Model
Function
Output Contact*
Voltage
Color
--0005
IAC5A
AC Input
None
180--280 VAC/VDC
Yellow
--0006
IDC5
DC Input
None
10--32 VDC
White
--0007
IDC5--B
IDC5--F
DC Input
None
4--16 VDC
White
--0008
IAC5
AC Input
None
90--140 VAC/VDC
Yellow
--0009
ODC5
DC Output
N.O.
5--60 VDC
Red
--0010
ODC5A
DC Output
N.O.
5--200 VDC
Red
--0011
OAC5A5
AC Output
N.C.
24--280 VAC
Black
--0012
OAC5
AC Output
N.O.
12--140 VAC
Black
--0013
OAC5--A
OAC5--1
AC Output
N.O.
24--280 VAC
Black
--0014
IDC5G
IDC5N
DC Input
None
35--60 VAC/VDC
White
N.O.
100 VDC
130 VAC
(Max switching
current .5 A,
10 VA contact
rating)
--0015
*
ODC5RM
ORR5--1
Dry Contact
Relay
All output modules, except OAC5A5, have normally open (N.O.) outputs. The output contact is open
when the block output is FALSE.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-39
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers
Jumper HD1 specifies the card cage address (A--D) of the termination
panel. The slot address is specified by the communication line. The
factory sets HD1 for card cage A.
Positions E and F specify the communication rate used. Position F
specifies the standard System 3 rate of 10.4 kb. This jumper should not
be moved.
NOTE: Both jumpers on HD1 must be set identically on panels “A” and
“B”.
Jumper HD2 on panel “A” specifies normal or redundant operation of
both the “A” and “B” panels. Three variations exist, they all perform the
same function:
D
Two 3-position headers
D
Two 2-position headers
D
Two 2-position headers with soldered in wires.
Figure 6.3.12 and Figure 6.3.13 shows the jumper locations and
variations. Table 6.3.8 shows jumper values.
Table 6.3.8. Isolated Discrete Termination Panel A Jumpers
Jumper
HD1
(Panels “A” & “B”)
HD2
(Panel “A” only)
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Value
Effect
A
Card cage A (factory setting)
B
Card cage B
C
Card cage C
D
Card cage D
E
Not used
F
Factory setting, do not move
Both Jumpers ON
or
both jumpers at
NORM
or both wires
intact
Normal single FIM operation
with online replacement capability
Both Jumpers
OFF
or
both jumpers at
FIM REDUND
or
both wires cut
Redundant FIM operation
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-40
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Fuses
There are 16 fuses on each panel to protect the field circuits. The
factory installs 3.15-amp fuses (IEC) in all positions. Other fuses
appropriate for the load being protected may be installed but must not
exceed a 4 amp UL/CSA rating. If other fuses are installed, the fuse
rating should be marked on the point’s data label. Table 6.3.9 shows
fuse data.
Table 6.3.9. Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Fuses
Fuse
FRSI
Part No.
Littelfuse
Part No.
Wickman
Part No.
Characteristics
F1 to F32
G53394--3150--0005
216 3.15
19 194
3.15 A
3.15 A 250 V (IEC)
Quick action
5x20 mm Ceramic
WARNING
Hazardous voltage may be present. Cock out and tag
hazardous voltage circuits prior to servicing.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-41
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel
The High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel services 32
discrete I/O points: 16 input/output points (1--16) and 16 input-only
points (17--32). Miniature solid state relay modules are used for input
and output control.
The panel (1984--4167--000x) is marked “HIGH DENSITY ISOLATED
DISCRETE TERMINATION PANEL” on the PWA.
The panel has a socket for one low-side switching FIM (MDIOL or
MDIO). Neither online replacement nor redundant FIM operation is
supported by this panel. There are no fuses supplied for the field
wiring.
NOTE: Removing power from the panel stops processing of all 32
points.
Figure 6.3.22 shows the High Density Isolated Discrete Termination
Panel.
WARNING
The solid state relays may be hot enough to cause serious
burns.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-42
J591
Communication Port A
J592
Communication Port B
TBA
Power Strip
J970
Power Jack
FIM Address Label
Solid State Relay 32
Connector #2 (J560)
Points 17--32
(Input Only)
FIM
Connector #1 (J559)
Points 1--16
(Input and Output)
Solid State Relay 1
HD1,
Address Jumpers
A--F
Solid State Relay 4
Figure 6.3.22. High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-43
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Field Wiring
Field wiring is landed on a Standard Remote Termination Panel, which
is connected to the termination panel with a marshaling panel cable.
Figure 6.3.23 shows the cabling. Connector #1 (J559) supports
input/output points 1--16. Connector #2 (J560) supports input points
17--32. Use Marshaling Panel Cable 1984--4298--xxxx for standard
applications and 1984--4345--xxxx for NEC/CSA applications.
NOTE: A ControlBlock must be configured for address 1 since the
switch voltage for the entire FIM is set from the address 1 ContolBlock.
set the swtich voltage at 1.7 Volts to ensure consistent switching.
1984--4298--xxxx
Marshaling Panel Cable
1984--4298--xxxx
Marshaling Panel Cable
High Density Isolated
Termination Panel
Points 17--32
(Input Only)
Points 1--16
(Input and Output)
Standard Remote
Termination Panel
Figure 6.3.23. Field Wiring to a Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel
NOTE: Rules for LVD compliance are covered in the Site Preparation
and Installation Manual (SP).
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Label
A label holder is provided to record the address of the FIM. Write the
FIM address on the label.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-44
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Jumpers
Jumper HD1 specifies the termination panel address (A--D) of the panel.
The slot address is specified by the communication line. The factory
sets HD1 for address A.
Positions E and F specify the communication rate used. Position F
specifies the standard System 3 rate of 10.4 kB. This jumper should not
be moved.
Only two jumpers may be in place on HD1: one for the panel address
and one in position F.
Position 2--3 is ON. Position 1--2 is reserved for future use.
Table 6.3.10 shows jumper values.
Table 6.3.10. High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Address
Jumpers
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Position
Effect
A
Termination panel address is A (factory setting) (2--3 is ON)
B
Termination panel address is B
C
Termination panel address is C
D
Termination panel address is D
E
Not used
F
Factory setting, do not move
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-45
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel Solid State Relays
Miniature solid state relays, also called Optical Isolator Modules,
(G60350--xxxx) are solid-state, optically isolated relays that define each
contact point as an input or an output. Table 6.3.11 lists the module
types currently available.
NOTE: Care must be taken to make sure the proper type of module is
installed because input and output modules are mechanically
interchangeable.
WARNING
The solid state relays may be hot enough to cause serious
burns.
Table 6.3.11. High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, Solid State Relays
Part Number
C60350--
Model
Function
Output
Contact
Voltage
Color
0001
70M--IAC5--A
AC Input
None
180--280 VAC
Yellow
0002
70M--IDC5
DC Input
None
10--32 VDC
White
0003
70M--IAC5
AC Input
None
90--140 VAC
Yellow
0004
70M--ODC5
DC output
N.O.
5--60 VDC
Red
0007
70M--OAC5--A
AC output
N.O.
24--280 VAC
Black
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-46
Discrete Field Interface Module (FIM)
Electronics for Discrete I/O are provided by the Discrete Field Interface
Module (FIM), The FIM handles 32 I/O points. The first 16 points can
be input or output. The remaining 16 points are input only. There are
three models available:
D
D
D
10P 5355 0006
MDIOH High-side switching FIM (CE
approved) marked “DISCRETE FIELD INTERFACE MODULE:
HIGH SIDE SWITCH” on the front label.
10P 5352 0006
MDIOL
Low-side switching FIM (CE
approved) marked “DISCRETE FIELD INTERFACE MODULE:
LOW SIDE SWITCH” on the front label.
1984--4080--000x MDIO
Original low-side switching FIM
marked “DISCRETE FIELD INTERFACE MODULE” on the front
label.
NOTE: A high-side switching FIM breaks the supply side of the circuit;
a low-side switching FIM breaks the return side of the circuit.
Table 6.3.12 shows the parts replacement rules.
Table 6.3.12. Parts Replacement for the Discrete Field Interface Module
Part No.
Replaces
Name on Label
10P 5355 0006
None
DISCRETE FIELD
INTERFACE MODULE:
HIGH SIDE SWITCH
High-side switching FIM
(CE approved)
10P 5352 0006
1984--4080--000x
DISCRETE FIELD
INTERFACE MODULE: LOW
SIDE SWITCH
Low-side switching FIM
(CE approved)
1984--4080--000x
10P 5352 0006
DISCRETE FIELD
INTERFACE MODULE
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Characteristics
Low-side switching FIM
Use only in non-CE approved
installations
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-47
The Discrete FIM may be used on a Discrete Termination Panel, either
singly or as part of a redundant pair. When used singly, there is
provision for replacement of a failed FIM by a online replacement.
There are no field serviceable components inside the Discrete FIM
case. All jumpering and fusing is handled on the discrete Field
Termination Panel. The FIM case should not be opened.
Figure 6.3.24 shows a block diagram of the Discrete Field Interface
Module (FIM).
BRAM
MUX
To/From
Field or
Solid State
Relays
Output
Latches
I/O
Circuits
Micro
68HC711
A/D
Converter
A/D =
Analog to Digital
BRAM = Battery Racked Random
Access Memory
MUX =
LED
Drivers
Comm
Circuits
From
Address
Jumpers
Communication
Line
LEDs
Multiplexer
Figure 6.3.24. Discrete Field Interface Module (FIM) Block Diagram
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-48
Discrete FIM Online Replacement
Most discrete termination panels have sockets for two Discrete FIMs.
The FIM may be installed in either socket. The other socket may be
used for online replacement.
If a FIM fails in any way, a good FIM may be plugged into the empty
socket. The new FIM takes over from the installed FIM in a few
seconds. The failed FIM can be removed for repair as soon as the new
FIM’s green LED goes ON and the yellow “Comm Active” LED flashes.
The new FIM may be left in service in that socket. The empty socket
will provide for future online replacement.
See the write-up on the particular Discrete Termination Panel for more
information about online replacement operation.
Discrete FIM Redundancy
Redundancy requires the use of two FIMs, two communications lines
(two adjacent addresses, one odd and one even), and removing the
jumpers at HD2 on the Discrete Termination Panel.
The FIM at the odd numbered address is considered “primary”; the FIM
at the even numbered address is “secondary”.
If the primary FIM fails, the secondary FIM takes over. Normally the
failed FIM red LED goes ON and the green LED flashes. The failed FIM
should be removed and replaced with a good FIM. As soon as the new
A FIM powers up, it takes over from the secondary FIM and resumes
the duties of the primary FIM.
If the secondary FIM fails, the primary FIM continues to operate.
Normally the failed FIM red LED goes ON and the green LED flashes.
The failed FIM should be removed and replaced with a good FIM. As
soon as the good FIM powers up, it resumes the duties of the
secondary FIM.
See the write-up on the particular Discrete Termination Panel for more
information on redundancy.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-49
Discrete FIM Precision
The analog to digital converter (A/D) within the Discrete FIM has a
tolerance of ±5%. Thus a nominal switch reference voltage of 10 volts
may lie anywhere within 9.5 and 10.5 volts.
There is also a built-in histeresis of ±12.5%. Thus, with an actual 10
volt switch reference voltage, the circuit would come ON at 11.25 volts
and go OFF at 8.75 volts.
See the specification sheets for further details.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-50
Discrete FIM LEDs
The Discrete FIM has 32 yellow I/O status LEDs, and a set of three FIM
status LEDs. Figure 6.3.25 shows the FIM front panel. Table 6.3.13
explains the meaning of the LEDs.
On: FIM Good
Flashing: Inactive
FIM Failure
Comm Active
DISCRETE FIELD INTERFACE MODULE
INPUT ONLY POINTS
INPUT / OUTPUT POINTS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Figure 6.3.25. Discrete Field Interface Module (FIM)
Table 6.3.13. MDIO, MDIOH, and MDIOL LEDs
Meaning
LED
On: FIM Good
Flashing: FIM Inactive
(Green)
FIM Failure
(Red)
Comm Active
(Yellow)
Input/Output Points 1--16
(Yellow)
Input-Only Points 17--32
(Yellow)
RS3: Multipoint I/O
ON steady when the FIM is in normal operation.
Flashing when the FIM is disconnected from the field.
ON when FIM considers itself failed or when the FIM is not communicating
with the Controller.
Flashes when the FIM is communicating with the Controller Processor.
Input:
Output:
ON for voltage above threshold or for a closed contact
OFF otherwise
ON when point is commanded ON
OFF otherwise
ON for voltage above threshold or for a closed contact
OFF otherwise
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-51
Discrete FIM LED Patterns
When the FIM boots up, the red LED will go ON, the green LED will
blink several times and then go ON. The red LED will go OFF, the
green LED will go ON, and the yellow Comm Active LED will begin to
flash rapidly as the FIM communicates with the Controller Processor.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-3-52
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Discrete I/O (MDIO)
SV: 6-4-1
Section 4:
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
This section covers the:
D
Multipoint Analog I/O Termination Panels
—
MAIO16 Serves 16 input or 16 output points, CE approved
—
MAIO
Serves 16 input or 16 output points
—
MAI32
Serves 32 input points, CE approved
D
Loop Power Module (LPM)
D
Multipoint Analog I/O Field Interface Modules (FIMs)
—
MAI16
Serves 16 input points, CE approved
—
MAO16
Serves 16 output points, CE approved
—
MAIO Input
Serves 16 input points
—
MAO Output
Serves 16 output points
—
MAI32
Serves 32 input points, CE approved
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) is used to read and control analog I/O
points. It allows placing the I/O electronics Field Interface Module (FIM)
at the field wiring termination panel. The MAIO termination panels may
be mounted where the user desires (within communication wiring length
limits).
The MAIO termination panels provide the option of online FIM
replacement or redundant FIM operation. For online replacement
operation a single FIM is installed and a single communication line is
used. If this FIM fails, a replacement may be inserted in the empty
socket. The replacement will take over for the failed FIM, which is then
removed for repair. Redundant operation requires two installed FIMs,
two communication lines, and use of a Redundant I/O Block (RIOB).
Both FIMs operate continuously, with one as primary, and the other as
secondary. If the primary FIM fails, the secondary FIM takes over
immediately.
Loop power can be supplied from an external source or from a Loop
Power Module (LPM). The LPM produces up to 380 mA of DC current
at 25.0 to 25.5 VDC. Externally supplied loop power must fall in the
range 23--29 VDC. Because it might range outside the limit, do not use
standard RS3 DC power.
NOTE: Removing power from a termination panel stops processing of
all points served by the panel.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-2
Multipoint Analog I/O Termination Panels
These panels handle sixteen input points or sixteen output points,
depending on the type of FIM that is installed:
D
D
MAIO16 4--20 mA Termination Panel (CE approved):
with field terminals
10P54770001
with field terminals and
marshaling panel connector
10P54770002
MAIO 4--20 mA Termination Panel:
with field terminals
with field terminals and
marshaling panel connector
1984--4383--0001
1984--4383--0002
This panel handles thirty-two input points:
D
MAI32 4--20 mA Termination Panel (CE approved):
with field terminals
10P53490001
with field terminals and
marshaling panel connector
10P53490002
Table 6.4.1 shows the parts replacement rules.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-3
Table 6.4.1. Multipoint Analog I/O Termination Panel Parts Replacement
Part No.
Replaces
10P54770002
10P54770001
MAIO16
Comments
Only if marshaling cable is not used.
1984--4383--0001
Valid for all cases.
1984--4383--0002
Only if marshaling cable is not used.
10P54770001
Valid for all cases.
1984--4383--0001
Valid for all cases.
1984--4383--0002
Valid for all cases.
1984--4383--0001
MAIO
1984--4383--0002
Only if marshaling cable is not used.
1984--4383--0002
MAIO
1984--4383--0001
Valid for all cases.
10P53490001
MAI32
10P53490002
Only if marshaling cable is not used.
10P53490002
MAI32
10P53490001
Valid for all cases.
10P54770002
MAIO16
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-4
MAIO16 Termination Panel
The MAIO16 termination panel (10P5477000x) is available in two
versions. It is marked “MAIO16 TERMINATION PANEL” on the PWA.
This panel is CE approved when used with MAIO16 FIMs.
D
With field terminals
10P54770001
D
With field terminals and
marshaling panel connector
10P54770002
The panel can be used with these components:
D
Loop Power Module (LPM)
D
MAIO16 Field Interface Module (FIM):
4--20 mA Input 16 Point
4--20 mA Output 16 Point
1984--4398--0001 or
10P57070001
10P54040004 or
10P57700005
10P54080004 or
10P58080005
Figure 6.4.1 shows the panel. Table 6.4.2 lists the figure callouts.
The panel can handle either 16 inputs or 16 outputs, depending on the
type of FIM installed. One FIM must be installed; the second is required
for redundant operation or for online replacement.
Field wiring is landed directly on the --0001 panel using terminal blocks
TB1 through TB16. A multiconductor cable and a remote marshaling
panel is used with the --0002 panel to land the field wiring at a remote
location.
Loop power can be supplied by the user or by an optional Loop Power
Module (LPM). There is a provision for a redundant Loop Power
Module. Externally supplied loop power must fall in the range +23 to
+29 VDC.
CAUTION
Do not use the RS3 DC bus as a source of loop power. The
bus can exceed the limits of the loop power specification.
NOTE: The length of the marshaling panel cable must be added to the
field wiring cable length.
The panel must be grounded by a solid connection to a grounded DIN
rail, grounded mounting plate, or ground wire to the power strip ground
terminal.
A three-position terminal (+, --, and S) is used to connect field wiring to
the panel. All of the field wire shields are connected together within the
panel. TB18 provides a way to connect all field wire shields to the panel
chassis ground or to leave them floating.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
9
RS3: Multipoint I/O
HD17
ADDRESS
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
HD4
TB5
HD5
TB6
HD6
TB7
HD7
TB8
HD8
TB9
HD9
TB10
HD10
TB11
HD11
TB12
HD12
11
HD3
TB13
HD13
TB22
TB14
HD14
TB21
TB15
HD15
TB16
HD16
12
HD2
J597
TB17 TB18
17
HD1
TB20
16
TB19
LPM2
PORT B
HD 18
N HD 19
R
15
FISHER--ROSEMOUNT
FIM B
10
N
R
PORT A
13
FISHER--ROSEMOUNT
PORT C
SV: 6-4-5
1
2
14
3
4
5
6
17
7
8
Figure 6.4.1. MAIO16 Termination Panel
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-6
Table 6.4.2. MAIO16 Termination Panel Components
No.
Description
No.
1
TBA Power Strip: For panel DC supply using
stranded wire. Allows daisy chaining of DC
power and access to panel chassis ground.
10
FIM A (J593): Input or Output FIM.
2
Power Jack (J974): For panel DC supply
using a 1984--0158--xxxx cable.
11
FIM B (J594): Optional redundant Input or
Output FIM.
3
TB18: Connects all field wiring shields (SH)
to chassis ground (CH) when jumpered.
12
LPM 2 (J596): Optional second Loop Power
Module.
4
TB17: External loop power terminal.
V+ is loop power pos. V-- is loop power neg.
13
Port C (J598): Not used.
5
TB1--TB16: Field wiring terminals for points
1--16 (+, --, shield).
14
Port A (J599): Odd-numbered communication
line for FIM A.
6
Marshaling panel connector (J597): Installed
on --0002 panel only.
15
HD18--HD19: FIM redundancy jumpers.
7
HD1--HD16: Point Type jumpers. Control the
supply of loop power to each field point.
16
Port B (J600): Even-numbered
communication line for redundant FIM B.
8
LPM 1 (J595): Loop Power Module.
17
9
HD17 Panel (Card Cage) address
(A, B, C, or D).
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Description
Loop power supply jumpers TB19, TB20,
TB21, and TB22. Jumper at TB21 shown in
“holder” position. Jumper at TB22 shown in
the “fully installed” position.
position
CAUTION: SEE Loop Power SECTION FOR
INFORMATION ON PROPER PLACEMENT
OF JUMPERS FOR ALL LOOP POWER
OPTIONS.
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-7
MAIO16 Termination Panel Installation
The termination panel is keyed to prevent installation of any other type
of FIM. The keying does not prevent installing an input FIM when an
output FIM is desired. An alarm will be generated if a Analog Input
Block (AIB) finds an output FIM or an Analog Output Block (AOB) finds
an input FIM.
Checklist for CE Installation
Follow these rules to ensure CE compliance:
1. Mount the termination panel in a properly grounded cabinet, on
grounded DIN rails, or on a grounded mounting plate.
2. Use only FIMs bearing the 10P part number. Earlier FIMs with
1984 part numbers must not be used.
3. Use a Loop Power Module or a CE-approved source for external
loop power.
4. Use shielded cable for field wiring.
MAIO16 Termination Panel Loop Power
A locally grounded source of loop power is required unless all points on
the panel are self-powered inputs. Loop power can be supplied in any
one of three ways:
1. Loop Power Module(s) (LPMs)
This option is used when the FIM and loop power are supplied by
the RS3 system DC bus or any DC supply that should be isolated
from the field devices.
In this case, loop power is derived from system power applied at
TBA Power Strip through single or redundant LPM(s). A second
LPM can be used to provide backup to the first LPM.
When using one or two LPMs, remove all four jumpers at TB19
through TB22. Also, install a short wire jumper from the V-terminal of TB17 to the SH terminal of TB18 to provide a loop
power ground reference; or leave a four-tab jumper connecting
the V-- terminal of TB17 with the CH and SH terminals of TB18.
2. Combined FIM power and loop power
This option is used when a DC power supply such as the Remote
I/O Power Supply is located with the MAIO termination panel. A
single supply or redundant pair of supplies powers both FIMs and
loops.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-8
In this case, loop power comes directly from a suitable power
supply (+24 to +28 VDC nominal) connected at TBA Power Strip
through loop power jumpers TB19--TB22.
For this option, all four jumpers at TB19 through TB22 must be in
the “fully installed” position with both tabs of the jumper installed
in the terminal block. The loop power supply must be ground
referenced at its negative side. At no time may the loop power
supply voltage exceed 29 VDC.
3. External Loop Power
This option requires separate power wiring for FIM power and
loop power. There is no provision for redundant loop supplies on
the termination panel.
In this case, a suitable power supply (+24 to +28 VDC nominal) is
connected at external loop power terminal TB17.
For this option, all four jumpers at TB19 through TB22 must be in
the “holder” position with only one tab of the jumper installed in
the terminal block. This prevents inappropriate installation of an
LPM later. The loop power supply must be ground referenced at
its negative side. At no time may the loop power supply voltage
exceed 29 VDC.
Loop power options 2 and 3 above require a ground referenced external
supply. This ground reference must be at or near the termination
panels. For supplies rated or fused at more than 7 Amps, the ground
reference must be external to any termination panel, and TB17 V-terminal should not be jumpered to TB18 CH. Move the 4-tab jumper at
TB17 and TB18, if installed, to the position where tabs are in TB18 only
and one uninstalled tab is on each side of TB18. Smaller supplies,
including the Remote I/O Power Supply, should be ground referenced at
the termination panel by installing a wire jumper from TB17 V-- to TB18
SH, or leaving the 4-tab jumper connecting TB17 V-- to TB18 SH and
TB18 CH.
Loop Power modules provide well regulated loop power, which can be
referenced to a local instrument ground. They provide a degree of fault
isolation by serving a limited number of loops (up to 16) and by limiting
the effects of any typical wiring fault on one of those loops to at most
the loops served. Loop power modules can be used redundantly and
can be connected to redundant system power. If the LPM is used with
redundant FIMs, two LPMs are required. LPMs use the same system
power source as the FIMs attached to the TBA Power Strip or the J974
Powerjack. Loop Power modules are used when no suitable external
loop power supply is available or when fault isolation is required.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-9
Power applied at TBA Power Strip directly supplies loop power as well
as FIM power when TB19, TB20, TB21, and TB22 are left in place.
This supply must be in the +23 to +29 VDC range and must have its
negative side grounded at the I/O cabinet that contains the termination
panel. (RS3 system power supplies are not suitable for this purpose.)
Some applications, such as with I.S. barriers, may require a voltage
higher than +23 VDC. This method of providing loop power is typically
used with a remote I/O cabinet that contains an AC-to-24 VDC or
28 VDC power supply. These power supplies may be redundant.
An external +23 to +29 VDC supply may be connected to TB17 -External Loop Power Terminal. Redundant supplies are not directly
supported. A power connection must still be made at the TBA Power
Strip for FIM power. This approach is used when RS3 System power is
available for Fim power and a separate supply is provided to power a
large number of loops.
CAUTION
Jumpers at TB19, TB20, TB21, and TB22 must be removed
before connecting power to TB17 or when using one or two
Loop Power Modules.
MAIO16 Termination Panel Field Wiring
CAUTION
Both signal wires of all input points must be constrained to
operate within the common mode range +29 to - 2 VDC or
erroneous results will be reported.
The condition in the CAUTION is automatically met for all system
powered inputs with an appropriate source of loop power. The ground
reference is the V-- terminal of TB17.
A self-powered input with a remote ground reference can operate with a
ground differential of up to +/-- 2 VDC. A self-powered input with no
other ground reference must be ground referenced at its point type
jumper HD1 to HD16.
Wire Landing
Field wiring is landed at terminal blocks TB1--TB16 on the --0001
MAIO16 termination panel. A Remote Marshaling Panel and cable are
used with the --0002 MAIO16 panel. The I/O Point Type jumpers
(HD1--HD16) are used with both panels. Field wiring is landed as
shown in Figure 6.4.2.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-10
--0001
--0002
Figure 6.4.2. MAIO16 Termination Panel Field Wire Landing Methods
Shield Grounding
All field wire shields are connected together and to TB18 SH at the
termination panel. As shipped from the factory, TB18 SH and TB18 CH
are tied together and newer panels also connect this to TB17 V--. This
grounds shields and loop power negative to the chassis. In a few cases
where the chassis ground is very noisy, the shields may need to be tied
to a quieter ground. TB18 SH may be connected to this ground. If so,
TB17 V-- should also be connected to the quieter ground.
I/O Point Type Jumpers
The ganged Point Type jumpers (HD1--HD16) are set to define each
point. Each jumper can be set fully to the left, centered, or fully to the
right. A point can be defined as:
RS3: Multipoint I/O
D
Output
D
System-powered input
D
Self-powered input (with external ground reference)
D
Self-powered input (with ground reference at termination panel).
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-11
Output Point
One of the three sources of loop power is required for output points.
The Output FIM distributes the power to each point. All returns are
connected to the loop power return. All Point Type jumpers
(HD1--HD16) must be set to the full left position as shown in
Figure 6.4.3.
1
--LP
(all 16 pts)
+LP
(all 16 pts)
+LP
--LP
2
3
+
--
S
4
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
Output constant-current driver in FIM
3
Field wiring terminal block
2
Jumper at full left position
4
Valve or I/P
Figure 6.4.3. MAIO16 Output Point
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-12
System-Powered Input Point
A system-powered input point requires one of the three sources of loop
power (described earlier). The Point Type jumper (HD1--HD16) must be
set in the center as shown in Figure 6.4.4.
1
+LP
--LP
2
3
+
--
S
4
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
Input sense resistor in FIM
3
Field wiring terminal block
2
Jumper centered
4
Transmitter
Figure 6.4.4. MAIO16 System-Powered Input Point
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-13
Self-Powered Input Point with External Ground Reference
A self-powered input point obtains its loop power from the transmitter or
other device. The point can be isolated from the other points by placing
the Point Type jumper (HD1--HD16) in the full left position as shown in
Figure 6.4.5. This should be done only when the loop is ground
referenced elsewhere in the loop, such as at the transmitter. Both the
negative and positive sides of the loop must remain within the +29 VDC
to --2 VDC range, relative to loop power negative TB17 V--.
CAUTION
The V-- terminal of TB17 must be tied to a suitable ground
if Loop Power Modules are used.
1
+LP
--LP
2
3
+
--
S
4
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
Input sense resistor in FIM
3
Field wiring terminal block
2
Jumper at full left position
4
Transmitter
Figure 6.4.5. MAIO16 Self-Powered Input Point with External Ground Reference
This configuration is useful when an additional device is placed in the
loop between the negative terminal and ground, when a loop is
referenced to a positive supply, or when the loop is ground referenced
at a remote transmitter and there is some ground differential between
the remote ground and local ground. The differential must be less than
2 VDC.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-14
Self-Powered Input Point with Ground Reference at Termination Panel
A self-powered input point obtains its loop power from the transmitter or
other device. The point can be referenced to the loop power return by
placing the Point Type jumper (HD1--HD16) in the full right position as
shown in Figure 6.4.6. This jumper position should be used when there
is no other ground reference in a loop, such as when the loop is
powered by a floating supply at the field device.
1
+LP
--LP
2
3
+
--
S
4
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
Input sense resistor in FIM
3
Field wiring terminal block
2
Jumper at full right position
4
Transmitter
Figure 6.4.6. MAIO16 Self-Powered Input Point with Ground Reference at Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-15
Marshaling Panel Cable
The pin-out specification for the marshaling panel cable is shown in
Table 6.4.3.
Table 6.4.3. MAIO Marshaling Panel Cable Pin-Out
Pin
DIN
#
Signal
Pin
DIN
#
Signal
Pin
DIN
#
Signal
Pin
DIN
#
Signal
1
D2
1+
10
D2
0
10+
33
Z2
1--
42
Z20
10--
2
D4
2+
11
D2
2
11+
34
Z4
2--
43
Z22
11--
3
D6
3+
12
D2
4
12+
35
Z6
3--
44
Z24
12--
4
D8
4+
13
D2
6
13+
36
Z8
4--
45
Z26
13--
5
D1
0
5+
14
D2
8
14+
37
Z10
5--
46
Z28
14--
6
D1
2
6+
15
D3
0
15+
38
Z12
6--
47
Z30
15--
7
D1
4
7+
16
D3
2
16+
39
Z14
7--
48
Z32
16--
8
D1
6
8+
17
B2-B30
Open
40
Z16
8--
9
D1
8
9+
18
B32
Shield
41
Z18
9--
MAIO16 Termination Panel Labels
A replaceable label (1984--4195--0010) is provided on top of the
termination panel label holder assembly. The label provides space at
the end to record the ControlFile Node address, Controller Slot
Address, Termination Panel (FIM) address (A--D), and Communication
Line. There is provision to record both the primary and redundant
communication line addresses. The body of the label provides for
recording each point’s field connection (1--16) and the source of
external loop power (V+, V--).
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-16
MAIO16 Termination Panel Jumpers
All panel jumpers must be set for correct operation as shown in
Table 6.4.4.
Table 6.4.4. MAIO16 Termination Panel Jumpers
Jumper
Value
Effect
HD1--HD16
Full left
Self-Powered Input Point with external
ground reference or Output Point
Centered
System-Powered Input Point
Full right
Self-Powered Input Point with ground
reference at termination panel
A at 1--2
Cage address A
(Factory setting)
B at 1--2
Cage address B
C at 1--2
Cage address C
D at 1--2
Cage address D
Both at “N” (1--2)
Normal single FIM operation
Both at “R” (2--3)
Redundant FIM operation
Requires two FIMs and two
communication lines
V--, SH & CH jumpered (4 tab jumper
installed)
Loop power negative and field wiring
shields connected to chassis ground.
Use with LPMs. (New factory setting.)
SH to CH jumpered (4 tab jumper
straddling TB18 or 2 tab jumper installed)
Field wire shields connected to chassis
ground. Use with locally grounded source
of loop power. (Old factory setting with 2
tab jumper.)
SH to CH open
(Jumper removed)
Allows connecting shield to a different
ground reference than chassis.
Jumpers fully installed, absent, or in
”holder for loop position”.
Fully installed: Power at TBA used for
loop power Holder position: Loop power
connected at TB17
Absent: LPMs used for loop power
HD17
HD18
HD19
TB18
TB19
TB20
TB21
TB22
MAIO16 Termination Panel Fuses
There are no fuses on the panel. Current limiting is provided by the
FIM.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-17
MAIO Termination Panel
The MAIO termination panel (1984--4383--000x) is marked “MAIO
TERMINATION PANEL” on the PWA. This panel handles 16 I/O points,
with direct connection of I/O field wiring to the panel. There are two
versions:
D
D
1984--4383--0001 with TB1--TB16 for the direct landing of field
wires.
1984--4383--0002 with marshaling panel connector J597 for the
remote landing of field wires on an MIO Marshaling Panel.
The panel can handle either 16 inputs or 16 outputs, depending on the
type of FIM installed. One FIM must be installed; the second is required
for redundant operation or for online replacement.
Loop power can be supplied by the user or by an optional Loop Power
Module (LPM). There is a provision for a redundant Loop Power
Module. Externally supplied loop power must fall in the range +23 to
+29 VDC.
CAUTION
Do not use the RS3 DC bus as a source of loop power. The
bus can exceed the limits of the loop power specification.
Field wiring is landed directly on the --0001 panel. The --002 panel
allows for both the direct landing of field wires and the use of a remote
marshaling panel for landing field wires.
NOTE: The length of the marshaling panel cable must be added to the
field wiring cable length.
The panel must be grounded by a solid connection to a grounded DIN
rail, grounded mounting plate, or ground wire to the power strip ground
terminal.
Figure 6.4.7 shows the MAIO termination panel. One FIM and one
Loop Power Module are shown installed. The --0001 panel is built with
TB1--TB16; the marshaling connector J597 is not supplied. The --0002
panel has both TB1--TB16 and J597.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-18
POWER JACK
POWER STRIP
Loop Power
Module
TB10
TB11
TB12
TB13
TB14
TB15
TB16
Field Point 16
External
Marshaling Panel
Connector J597
(--0002 panel only)
TB7
TB6
TB5
TB4
TB3
Field Wire
Termination Points
1--16
TB2
HD4
HD2
HD1
ADDRESS
TB1
HD8
HD6
HD7
HD5
HD3
LPM1
HD17
External Loop
Power
TB9
J597
HD9
FIM B
FIM A
HD10
HD11
FIM A
Field Wire Shield
Grounding
TB8
HD12
HD13
LPM2
HD14
HD15
HD16
TB17 TB18
PORT B
HD 18
N HD 19
R
N
R
PORT A
PORT C
Communication
Ports
Power Jack
Power Strip
Redundancy
Jumpers
Field Point 1
Loop Power
Jumpers
Figure 6.4.7. MAIO Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-19
MAIO Termination Panel Installation
See 6-1-1, “Multipoint I/O Installation and System Wiring”, for
installation, panel addressing, power wiring, communication wiring,
redundancy, and online replacement information.
The termination panel is keyed to prevent installation of any other type
of FIM. The keying does not prevent installing an input FIM when an
output FIM is desired. An alarm will be generated if a Analog Input
Block (AIB) finds an output FIM or an Analog Output Block (AOB) finds
an input FIM.
MAIO Termination Panel Loop Power
Loop power for all points is supplied either by:
D
a Loop Power Module (LPM) on the panel
D
an external power source connected to TB17.
The LPM draws power from the termination panel where it is installed
and produces up to 380 mA of DC current at 25.0 to 25.5 VDC. Two
LPMs can be used on a termination panel to provide backup operation
in which one will supply the loop power if the other fails. They operate
in a “hot standby” mode and do not significantly share the load. Using
the LPM with redundant FIMs requires using two LPMs.
An external DC source with nominal voltage from 24 to 28V can be
connected to TB17 to provide loop power to all points. At no time may
loop power voltage exceed 29 VDC.
NOTE: Do not use both an LPM and an external power source. Do not
draw power from TB17 when an LPM is used. Do not use the standard
RS3 DC bus since the voltage can fall outside the limits.
Distribution of loop power to each point is controlled by a per-point
jumper (HD1--HD16).
NOTE: All input points must be constrained to operate within the
common mode range of +29 VDC to --2 VDC. This is automatic when
all inputs are system powered. The ground levels must remain within
± 2 Volts of each other or erroneous results will be reported. The
ground reference is available on TB17.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-20
MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring
The panel supports 16 analog I/O points. Field wiring may be landed
directly on the --001 panel using TB1 through TB16.
Cable connection on the --0002 panel uses a marshaling cable plugged
into J597 and connected to an MIO Marshaling Panel where the field
wiring is landed.
A three-position terminal is used to connect field wiring to the panel.
Each terminal is labeled +, --, and S for the plus and minus signal wires
and the shield. The terminals will accommodate one wire sized 4 to
0.34 mm2 (12 to 22 AWG).
All of the field wire shields are connected together on the panel. TB19
provides a way to connect all field wire shields to chassis ground or to
leave them floating. The factory installs a wire from TB19 SH to CH,
which connects all shields to panel chassis ground.
Figure 6.4.8 shows the field I/O point circuit. A three-position ganged
jumper is used to connect all but two of the pins. The jumper can be at
one of three positions: full left, centered, or full right.
FIM
Input or output
circuit
+LP
--LP
Jumper
Field Wiring +
Terminal Block
--
S
Figure 6.4.8. Field I/O Point Circuit
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-21
MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring - Output Points
A source of loop power (described earlier) is required for output points.
The Output FIM distributes the power to each point. All returns are
connected to the loop power return. All Point Type jumpers
(HD1--HD16) must be set to the full left position as shown in
Figure 6.4.9.
1
--LP
(all 16 pts)
+LP
(all 16 pts)
+LP
--LP
2
3
+
--
S
4
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
Output constant-current driver in FIM
3
Field wiring terminal block
2
Jumper at full left position
4
Valve or I/P
Figure 6.4.9. Output Point
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-22
MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring - Input Points
A system-powered input point requires a source of loop power
(described earlier). The Point Type jumper (HD1--HD16) must be set in
the center as shown in Figure 6.4.10.
1
+LP
--LP
2
3
+
--
S
4
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
Input sense resistor in FIM
3
Field wiring terminal block
2
Jumper centered
4
Transmitter
Figure 6.4.10. System-Powered Input Point
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-23
Self-Powered Input Point (Isolated): A self-powered input point
obtains its loop power from the transmitter or other device. The point
can be isolated from the other points by placing the Point Type jumper
(HD1--HD16) in the full left position as shown in Figure 6.4.11. This
should be done only when the loop is ground referenced elsewhere in
the loop, such as at the transmitter. Both the negative and positive
sides of the loop must remain within the +29 VDC to --2 VDC range,
relative to --LP at TB17.
CAUTION
TB17 must be tied to a suitable ground if Loop Power
Modules are used and any points are configured as
self-powered input point - isolated.
1
+LP
--LP
2
3
+
--
S
4
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
Input sense resistor in FIM
3
Field wiring terminal block
2
Jumper at full left position
4
Transmitter
Figure 6.4.11. Self-Powered Input Point (Isolated)
This configuration is useful when an additional device is placed in the
loop between the negative terminal and ground, when a loop is
referenced to a positive supply, or when the loop is ground referenced
at a remote transmitter and there is some ground differential between
the remote ground and local ground. The differential must be less than
2 VDC.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-24
Self-Powered Input Point (Non-isolated): A self-powered input point
obtains its loop power from the transmitter or other device. The point
can be referenced to the loop power return by placing the Point Type
jumper (HD1--HD16) in the full right position as shown in Figure 6.4.12.
This jumper position should be used when there is no other ground
reference in a loop, such as when one is powered by a floating supply.
1
+LP
--LP
2
+
3
--
S
4
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
Input sense resistor in FIM
3
Field wiring terminal block
2
Jumper at full right position
4
Transmitter
Figure 6.4.12. Self-Powered Input Point (Referred to Loop Power Return: Non-isolated)
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-25
MAIO Termination Panel labels
A replaceable label (1984--4195--0010), is provided on top of the
termination panel label holder assembly. The label provides space at
the end to record the ControlFile Node address (1--32), Controller Slot
Address (A--H), Termination Panel (FIM) address (A--D), and
Communication Line (1--8). There is space to record both the primary
and redundant communication line addresses. The body of the label
provides for recording each point’s field connection (1--16) and the
source of external loop power (V+, V--).
The underside of the label holder carries a label that shows jumper
settings, communication line connections, and power connections.
Figure 6.4.13 shows the labels.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
RS3: Multipoint I/O
POINT 2
-- S
TB2
-- S
TB1
HD2
HD
POINT 3
-- S
TB3
POINT 4
-- S
TB4
HD4
POINT 5
-- S
TB5
HD5
POINT 6
-- S
TB6
HD6
POINT 7
-- S
TB7
HD7
POINT 8
-- S
TB8
HD8
+
TB9
POINT 9
-- S
HD9
+
HD12
HD13
POINT 10 POINT 11 POINT 12
-- S
-- S
-- S
TB12
TB10
TB11
HD10
HD11
+
POINT 13 POINT 14
-- S
-- S
TB13
TB14
HD14
HD15
+
POINT 15 POINT 16
-- S
-- S
TB15
TB16
HD16
FIM/LPM DC POWER
REDUNDANT SOURCES A AND B
-- S
PORT C
REDUND
EXT
LOOP
POWER
V+ V--
GROUND/
SHIELD
REF
SH CH
GROUND
SEE SERVICE MANUAL
A B RTN
A B RTN
TBA
PORT B
-- S
COMMUNICATION CONNECTION
-- S
PORT A
+
+
HD3
SINGLE FIM CONNECT ODD # COMM LINE TO PORT A
REDUNDANT FIM CONNECT ODD # COMM LINE TO PORT A
CONNECT EVEN # COMM LINE TO PORT B
+
POINT 1
HD1
JUMPER POSITION
SYSTEM POWERED INPUTS
LPM OR EXTERNAL LOOP POWERED
SELF POWERED INPUTS OR
SYSTEM POWERED OUTPUTS
SELF POWERED INPUTS
REFFERED TO LOOP POWER RETURN
PRIMARY
COMM LINE
TP ADDRESS
CONTROLLER
CONTROLFILE
NODE
SV: 6-4-26
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Figure 6.4.13. MAIO Termination Panel Labels
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-27
MAIO Termination Panel Jumpers
Jumpers HD1 through HD16 control the supply of loop power to each
I/O point. See “MAIO Termination Panel Field Wiring” on page 6-4-20.
Jumper HD17 controls the card cage address of the termination panel.
Legal addresses are A, B, C, or D. Jumpers HD18 and HD19 control
single FIM or redundant FIM operation. Terminal block TB18 provides
for grounding all field wiring shields to chassis ground when TB18 SH is
jumpered to CH. The panel ships with this wire in place. When using
Loop Power Modules, a short jumper wire must be installed from the V-terminal of TB17 to the SH terminal of TB18, in addition to the SH to CH
jumper; or a 4-tab jumper may be used to connect all three terminals.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-28
Table 6.4.5. MAIO Termination Panel Jumpers
Jumper
HD1--HD16
HD17
HD18
HD19
TB17
TB18
TB19
TB20
TB21
TB22
Value
Effect
Full left
Self-powered input point
with external ground reference
output point.
Centered
System-powered input point
Full right
Self-powered input point
with ground reference at Termination Panel.
A at 1--2
Cage address A (factory setting).
B at 1--2
Cage address B.
C at 1--2
Cage address C.
D at 1--2
Cage address D.
Both at “N” (1--2)
Normal single FIM operation.
Both at “R” (2--3)
Redundant FIM operation
Requires two FIMs and two communication lines.
V--, SH and CH jumpered (4-tab
jumper installed)
Loop power negative and field wiring shields
connected to chassis ground. Use with LPMs. (New
factory setting.)
SH to CH jumpered (4-tab jumper
straddling TB18 or 2 tab jumper
installed)
Field wire shields connected to chassis ground. Use
with locally grounded source of loop power. (Old
factory setting with 2-tab jumper.)
SH to CH open
(Jumper removed)
Allows connecting shield to a different ground
reference than chassis.
Jumpers fully installed, absent, or
in “holder for loop position”.
Fully installed: Power at TBA used for loop power.
Holder position: Loop power connected at TB17.
Absent: LPMs used for loop power.
MAIO Termination Panel Fuses
There are no fuses on the panel. Current limiting is provided by the
FIM.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-29
MAI32 Termination Panel
The MAI32 Termination panel is available in two versions. It is marked
“MAI32 Termination Panel” on the PWA. The panel is CE approved.
D
D
MAI32 4--20 mA Termination Panel
with field terminals
with field terminals and
marshaling panel connector
MAI32 Field Interface Module (FIM)
10P53490001
10P53490002
10P53190004
MAI32 is used to read up to 32 4--20 mA analog input points. The
MAI32 termination panel can be remotely mounted within
communication wiring length limits. Figure 6.4.14 shows the panel.
The panel supports 32 analog input points using two termination panel
addresses. The first address supports the Left Group of points
(L1--L16), the second address supports the Right Group of points
(R1--R16). An Analog Input Block (AIB) or a Smart Transmitter Input
Block (SIB) must be configured for each address. Highway
Addressable Remote Transducer (HART) variables can be addressed
by configuring a Value Input Block (VIB).
The Field I/O Status Screen (previously the FIC Status Screen) shows
the type of device connected to each controller. The MAI32 FIM will
have two entries, one for each cage address used. The type code is
“MAI32--x” where the “x” shows the card cage of the OTHER set of 16
points. Thus if the panel is addressed as A and C, the first entry will
show “MAI32--C” and the second will show “MAI32--A”.
Wires can either be landed directly on the panel or at a remote location
using multiconductor cables and remote marshaling panels. Terminal
blocks TB1--TB4 are used to connect field wiring to the panel. All of the
field wire shields are connected together within the panel. TB21
provides a way to connect all field wire shields to the panel chassis
ground, tie them to an external ground, or leave them floating.
Connectors J701 and J702 are used when a remote marshaling panel is
desired. A combination of remote landing and local landing of field
wires can be used.
A source of loop power is required unless all points on the panel are
self-powered inputs. Loop power is supplied by an external DC source
(23 to 29 VDC) connected to TB23.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-30
15
16
14
17
17
13
12
18
11
19
10
20
21
22
9
20
8
23
7
20
6
24
5
25
20
4
26
3
20
2
1
Figure 6.4.14. MAI32 Analog Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-31
Table 6.4.6. MAI32 Analog Termination Panel Components
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
HD33: Panel (Card Cage) address
jumpers.
14
Port B (J705): To daisy-chain the
communication line to another panel.
2
HD34: Loop power detect jumpers.
15
Port C (J704): Not used.
3
HDL1--HDL8: Point Type jumpers for Left
Points 1--8.
16
TBA Power Strip: For panel DC supply
using stranded wire. Allows daisy chaining
of DC power and access to panel chassis
ground.
4
FL1--FL8: Fuses for Left Points 1--8.
17
Power Jack (J983): For panel DC supply
using a 1984--0158--xxxx cable.
5
HDL8--HDL16: Point Type jumpers for Left
Points 9--16.
18
TB23: External loop power terminal.
6
FL9--FL16: Fuses for Left Points 9--16.
19
TB21: Connects all field wiring shields to
chassis ground when jumpered.
7
MAI32 Input FIM.
20
Shield Terminals (TB6--20): For field wiring
shields.
8
HDR1--HDR8: Point Type jumpers for Right
Points 1--8.
21
TB4: Field wiring terminals for Right Points
9--16.
9
FR1--FR8: Fuses for Right Points 1--8.
22
Marshaling panel connector (J702): Serves
Left Points 1--16.
10
HDR8--HDR16: Point Type jumpers for
Right Points 9--16.
23
TB3: Field wiring terminals for Right Points
1--8.
11
FR9--FR16: Fuses for Right Points 9--16.
24
TB2: Field wiring terminals for Left Points
9--16.
12
FIM LEDs.
25
Marshaling panel connector (J701): Serves
Right Points 1--16.
13
Port A (J703): FIM Communication line.
26
TB1: Field wiring terminals for Left Points
1--8.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-32
MAI32 Termination Panel Installation
See 6--1--1, “Multipoint I/O Installation and system Wiring” for
installation, panel addressing, power wiring, and communication wiring,
information.
The MAI32 FIM requires one comm line connected to Port A. Port B
can be used to daisy chain the comm line to another destination. Port C
is not used.
The MAI32 panel requires two Card Cage addresses that are set by
jumper HD33. The alphabetically lowest jumper at 1--2 specifies the
cage address for the Left Group of points (L1--L16). The next jumper at
1--2 specifies the address for the Right Group of points (R1--R16). The
parity (P) jumper must be at 1--2 to establish the correct address parity.
MAI32 Termination Panel Loop Power
A source of loop power is required unless all points are self-powered
inputs. The external source of loop power must be attached to TB23.
The source must be in the range 23 to 29 VDC. The current draw will
be under 700 mA.
CAUTION
Do not use the same source to power the panel and to
supply loop power. This bypasses power isolation and can
result in field wiring faults propagating to the power
source.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-33
MAI32 Termination Panel Field Wiring
Field wiring can be landed directly at terminal blocks on the panel. TB1
and TB2 serve the Left Group of points. TB3 and TB4 serve the Right
Group. A Remote Marshaling Panel and cable can be used to land field
wires at a remote location. Connector J701 serves the Left Group of
points. Connector J702 serves the Right Group of points. Wiring can
be mixed with some points landing directly on the panel and others
landing at the remote marshaling panel. Field wiring is landed as
shown in Figure 6.4.15.
Field wire shields can be landed at the SHIELD terminals (TB6, 8, 10,
12, 14, 16, 18, 20). All field wire shields are connected together within
the termination panel. Jumpering Terminal Block TB21 lets you connect
all of the shields to the panel chassis ground. If TB21 is open, the
shields are connected together but are floating relative to the panel
ground. TB21 can also be used to connect the shields to an external
ground.
Figure 6.4.15. MAI32 Field Wiring
NOTE: The negative (return) sides of all self-powered transmitters are
connected to the negative (return) side of the Loop Power source.
MAI32 Termination Panel labels
Figure 6.4.16 shows the replaceable label (1984--4195--0011) that is
provided on top of the termination panel label holder assembly. The
label provides space at the end to record the ControlFile node address,
the Controller slot address, the two termination panel (FIM) addresses,
and the Communication Line number. The body of the label provides
for recording each point’s field connection and the source of external
loop power (V+, V--). The underside of the label shows examples of
field wiring.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
L1
RS3: Multipoint I/O
L2 L3
L4
L5
L6 L7
L8 L9
L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 L16 R1
LOWER TP/CAGE ADDRESS SERVES POINTS ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE TP
R2 R3 R4 R5
R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 V+
UPPER TP/CAGE ADDRESS SERVES POINTS ON THE RIGHT SIDE OF THE TP
V--
R
COMM LINE
L
TP ADDR
CNTRLR
CP NODE
SV: 6-4-34
Figure 6.4.16. MAI32 Field Wiring Label
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-35
MAI32 Termination Panel Jumpers
All panel jumpers must be set to ensure correct operation as shown in
Table 6.4.7.
NOTE: Three jumpers are required for the ADDRESS (HD33).
D
D
D
The alphabetically lowest jumper at 1--2 specifies the cage
address for the Left Group of points (L01--L16).
The next jumper at 1--2 specifies the address for the Right Group
of points (R01--R16).
The third jumper (P) must be at 1--2 to establish correct address
parity.
Table 6.4.7. MAI32 Termination Panel Jumpers
Jumper
Position
Effect
HDL01--HDL16
HDR01--HDR16
Full left
Point Type
Full right
HD33
One jumper
A--C at 1--2
Cage address for Left Group of points L01--L16
(A is recommended)
ADDRESS
One jumper
B--D at 1--2
Cage address for Right Group of points
R01--R16 (B is recommended)
System-powered input point
Self-powered input point
P at 1--2
Required for correct parity
HD34
ENABLE
Enables detection of loop power loss
LOOP PWR DETECT
DISABLE
Disables detection of loop power loss
TB21
SH and CH connected
All field wiring shields are connected to panel
chassis ground
Shield Grounding
SH and CH open
All field wiring shields are connected together
and are floating with respect to panel chassis
ground
SH connected to external
ground
All field wiring shields are connected together
and are connected to the external ground point
The Point Type jumpers (HDL1--HDL16, HDR1--HDR16) are set to
define each point. Each jumper can be set fully to the left or fully to the
right. A point can be defined as:
RS3: Multipoint I/O
D
System-powered input
Jumper fully left
D
Self-powered input
Jumper fully right
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-36
System-Powered
Input Point
A system-powered input point requires a source of loop power at TB23.
The Point Type jumper must be set fully to the left as shown in
Figure 6.4.17.
1
2
LP +
LP --
3
4
+
5
--
6
No.
Description
1
System-powered input point
2
Input sense resistor
3
Point Type Jumper set fully to the left for system-powered input
point
4
Fuse F1--F32
5
Field wiring terminal block: +, --
6
System-Powered transmitter
Figure 6.4.17. System-Powered Input Point
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-37
Self-Powered Input A self-powered input point requires no source of loop power. The return
Point
sides of all points are connected to the Loop Power return, The Point
Type jumper must be set in the full right position as shown in
Figure 6.4.18.
1
2
LP +
LP --
3
4
+
5
--
6
No.
Description
1
Self-powered input point
2
Input sense resistor
3
Point Type Jumper set fully to the right for self-powered input point
4
Fuse
5
Field wiring terminal block: +, --
6
Self-powered transmitter
Figure 6.4.18. Self-Powered Input Point
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-38
MAI32 Termination Panel Fuses
Each input point is individually fused. Do not use a fuse larger than
1/10 amp 250V.
Table 6.4.8. MAI32 Termination Panel Fuses
Fuse
FRSI Part No.
Littlefuse
Part No.
Wickman
Part No.
Characteristics
F1 to F32
G53394--0080--0005
Series 216
Series 19194
0.08 A 250V (IEC)
Quick action
5x20 mm Ceramic
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-39
Loop Power Module (LPM)
The Loop Power Module (LPM) (1984--4398--000x or 10P57070001)
are marked “LOOP POWER MODULE” on the label. The LPM is used
to supply power to the I/O loops. Figure 6.4.19 shows the LPM.
Figure 6.4.19. Loop Power Module
The LPM draws power from the termination panel where it is installed. It
accepts redundant A and B supply voltages. Two LPMs can be used on
a termination panel to provide redundant operation in which one will
supply the loop power if the other fails. They operate in a “hot standby”
mode and do not significantly share the load.
The LPM produces up to 380 mA of DC current at 25.0 to 25.5 VDC. It
is not adjustable.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-40
Figure 6.4.20 shows the LPM block diagram.
30 VDC Input
Transformer
and
Power Switch
EMI and Input
Filter
Switching
Regulator
Optical
Isolator
Rectifier
and
Filter
25 VDC Output
Error
Amplifier
Figure 6.4.20. Loop Power Module Block Diagram
The power supply consists of an EMI filter in the form of ferrite beads
arranged in a pi configuration and an input filter for the normal mode
switching currents on the power supply. This is followed by a
transformer operating in the flyback mode of switching. The power
switch is implemented by means of a Metal-Oxide Semiconductor
(MOS) Field Effect Transistor (FET). The secondary rectifies the output
during the relaxation phase of the flyback transformer to generate the
output voltage. The feedback is by means of an error amplifier where
the reference is generated by a 2.5V reference diode. The error
amplifier is configured in a proportional plus integral mode of control
that feeds an optical isolator in order to generate the correction
feedback for the switching regulator. The switching regulator is a current
mode switching regulator whose power is generated by means of zener
diodes and transistors.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-41
Loop Power Module LEDs
There are two LEDs on the LPM. Table 6.4.9 shows their meaning.
Table 6.4.9. Loop Power Module LEDs
LED
GOOD
(Green)
BAD
(Red)
None Lit
Meaning
LPM functioning normally.
LPM out of specification or failed.
LPM out of specification, failed, or no input power.
Loop Power Module Fuses
There are no fuses in the Loop Power Module.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-42
MAIO FIMs
Multipoint Analog FIMs are available for 16-point input or output and for
32-point input.
There are three 16-point input FIMs:
D
D
D
MAIO16 Field Interface Module (FIM) CE Approved:
4--20 mA Input 16 Point
10P54040004 or
10P57700005
MAIO Field Interface Module (FIM):
4--20 mA Input
1984--4414--100x
MAIO Field Interface Module (FIM) -- Nonredundant:
4--20 mA Input
1984--4414--0001
(FIM redundancy not supported)
There are two 16-point output FIMs:
D
D
MAIO16 Field Interface Module (FIM) CE Approved:
4--20 mA Output 16 Point
10P54080004
MAIO Field Interface Module (FIM):
4--20 mA Output
1984--4418--0001
There is one 32-point input FIM:
D
MAI32 Field Interface Module (FIM) CE Approved:
4--20 mA Input 32 Points
10P53190004
Table 6.4.10. MAIO FIM Parts Replacement
Part Number
Replaces
10P57700005
10P54040004
1984--4414--0001
Comments
All cases
1984--4414--100x
1984--4414--100x
1984--4414--0001
All cases
10P54080004
1984--4418--000x
All cases
10P53190004
--
RS3: Multipoint I/O
No substitute exists
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-43
Analog FIM Redundancy
Redundancy requires the use of two FIMs, two communications lines
(two adjacent addresses, one odd and one even), and setting the
jumpers at HD18 and HD19 on the Analog Termination Panel to the “R”
position.
The FIM at the odd numbered address is considered “primary”; the FIM
at the even numbered address is “secondary”.
If the primary FIM fails, the secondary FIM takes over. Normally the
failed FIM red LED goes ON and the green LED flashes. The failed FIM
should be removed and replaced with a good FIM. As soon as the new
A FIM powers up, it takes over from the secondary FIM and resumes
the duties of the primary FIM.
If the secondary FIM fails, the primary FIM continues to operate.
Normally the failed FIM red LED goes ON and the green LED flashes.
The failed FIM should be removed and replaced with a good FIM. As
soon as the good FIM powers up, it resumes the duties of the
secondary FIM.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-44
16-Point Input FIMs
The 16-point MAIO Input FIM is marked “4--20 mA ANALOG INPUT
FIELD INTERFACE MODULE” on the label. There are two versions:
D
D
MAIO16 Field Interface Module (FIM) CE Approved:
4--20 mA Input 16 Point
10P54040004 or
10P57700005
MAIO Field Interface Module (FIM):
4--20 mA Input
1984--4414--000x
Both online replacement and full redundancy are supported by the FIM,
depending on the termination panel in which it is installed.
There are no field serviceable components in the FIM. The FIM case
should not be opened.
Figure 6.4.21 shows the MAIO input FIM.
Figure 6.4.21. MAIO 16-Point Input FIM
Figure 6.4.22 shows a simplified block diagram.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-45
Power Supply
Block
Inter FIM
Communications
Microprocessor
Block
Port A
Port B
Analog Input Block
HART
Dual Universal
Asynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter
(DUART)
Maintenance Port
Analog Inputs 1--16
Figure 6.4.22. MAIO 16-Point Input FIM Block Diagram
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-46
16-Point Output FIMs
The 16-point MAIO Output FIM is marked “4--20 mA ANALOG OUTPUT
FIELD INTERFACE MODULE” on the label. There are two versions:
D
D
MAIO16 Field Interface Module (FIM) CE Approved:
4--20 mA Output 16 Point
10P54080004
MAIO Field Interface Module (FIM):
4--20 mA Output
1984--4418--0001
Both online replacement and full redundancy are supported by the FIM,
depending on the termination panel in which it is installed.
There are no field serviceable components in the FIM. The FIM case
should not be opened.
Figure 6.4.23 shows the MAIO Output FIM.
Figure 6.4.23. MAIO 16-Point Output FIM
Figure 6.4.24 shows a simplified block diagram.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-47
Power Supply
Block
Inter FIM
Communications
Microprocessor
Block
Port A
Port B
Analog Output Block
Readback
Analog Outputs 1--16
HART
Dual Universal
Asynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter
(DUART)
Maintenance Port
Figure 6.4.24. MAIO 16-Point Output FIM Block Diagram
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-48
32-Point Input FIM
The 32-point MAI Input FIM is marked “32-POINT 4 20 MA ANALOG
FIELD INTERFACE MODULE” on the label.
D
MAI32 Field Interface Module (FIM) CE Approved:
4--20 mA Input 32 Points
10P53190004
The FIM supports 32 analog input points using two termination panel
addresses. The first address supports the Left Group of points
(L1--L16); the second address supports the Right Group of points
(R1--R16). An Analog Input Block (AIB) or a Smart Transmitter Input
Block (SIB) must be configured for each address. HART variables can
be addressed by configuring a Value Input Block (VIB).
The FIM and panel are keyed to prevent insertion of an incorrect FIM.
The Field I/O Status Screen (previously the FIC Status Screen) shows
the type of device connected to each controller. The MAI32 FIM will
have two entries, one for each cage address used. The type code is
“MAI32--x” where the “x” shows the card cage of the OTHER set of 16
points. Thus if the panel is addressed as A and C, the first entry will
show “MAI32--C” and the second will show “MAI32--A”.
Figure 6.4.25 shows the FIM.
Figure 6.4.25. MAIO 32-Point Input FIM
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-49
MAIO FIM LEDs
There are six LEDs on the MAIO FIM. Table 6.4.11 shows their
meaning.
Table 6.4.11. MAIO FIM LEDs
Meaning
LED
RS3: Multipoint I/O
On: FIM Good
Flashing: FIM Inactive
(Green)
ON steady when the FIM is in normal operation.
Flashing when the FIM is disconnected from the field.
FIM Failure
(Red)
ON when FIM considers itself failed.
Flashing when the FIM is not communicating with the
Controller.
Port A Active
(Yellow)
Flashes when communication Port A is active.
Port B Active
(Yellow)
For factory use only.
STATUS 1
(Yellow)
Flashes steadily while the FIM operates.
STATUS 2
(Yellow)
Flashes a diagnostic code if the FIM is disabled and
the red LED is ON.
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-50
MAIO FIM LED Patterns
The 16-point MAIO FIMs can be operated as a single FIM (with online
replacement capability) or as a fully redundant pair of FIMs. The
32-point input FIM can only operate as a single FIM.
When the FIM boots up, the red LED goes ON, the green LED blinks
briefly and then goes ON, the red LED goes off, and the yellow “Port A”
LED begins to flash rapidly as the FIM communicates with the
Controller Processor. The green LED blinks if there is no I/O block for
any point configured in the Controller Processor or if the FIM is
disconnected from the field due to redundancy operation, on-line
replacement operation, or communication failure.
Single FIM Operation
Normal Operation: The green LED is ON and the yellow Port Active
LEDs are flashing. The “Status 1” LED flashes regularly.
If the FIM fails, the red LED goes ON, the green LED goes OFF, and the
Port Active LEDs go out. Put a new FIM in the other socket. It should
boot up with the green LED ON. Remove the failed FIM and return it for
repair.
Redundant FIM Operation
Normal Operation: FIM A (primary) will have its green LED ON and
FIM B (secondary) will have its green LED flashing. This is the normal
operating condition.
If the primary FIM (A) fails, its red LED should come ON. The green
LED of the secondary FIM (B) should come ON as it assumes primary
duty. Replace the failed FIM A. The replacement should boot up with
the green LED ON as the new FIM resumes the primary duties. FIM B
should then return to secondary function with the green LED flashing.
If the secondary FIM (B) fails, its red LED will come ON. Replace the
failed FIM B. The new FIM should boot up with the green LED flashing
as it resumes the secondary function.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-51
Failed FIM Indications
A failed FIM will have the red LED ON. The yellow “Status 2” LED
might flash a code number indicating the cause of the problem. The
LED will flash a number of times, pause, and then flash the code again.
Table 6.4.12 shows the meaning of the code. Code 5 shows a
correctable problem; otherwise replace the FIM.
NOTE: Please record the code and send it along when the FIM is
returned for repair.
A FIM with no LEDs lighted has an internal failure (or the DC supply has
failed). If the DC supply is good, replace the FIM. The FIM’s Status 2
LED should never be continuously ON. The purpose, and the
programming, for the LED is to blink a diagnostic code when a problem
is detected.
Table 6.4.12. MAIO FIM LED Patterns
Meaning
LED Code Number
RS3: Multipoint I/O
1
RAM failure.
2
Voltage failure, one or more internal voltages are out of
tolerance.
3
Point failure.
4
ADC failure.
5
Address jumpers on the termination panel are not set
to A, B, C, or D.
6
Write or erase failure in FLASH.
7
Verification failure in BOOT or APP code.
8
Not assigned.
9
Not assigned.
10
Point diagnostic failure.
11
Temperature failure.
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-4-52
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO)
SV: 6-5-1
Section 5:
Multipoint I/O Marshaling Panel
Many Multipoint I/O termination panels allow for remote landing of field
wires on a remote marshaling panel.
This version is available:
D
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Standard Remote Termination Panel (1984--4344--000x)
Multipoint I/O Marshaling Panel
SV: 6-5-2
Standard Remote Termination Panel
Figure 6.5.1 shows the Standard Remote Termination Panel
(1984--4344--000x) used to connect field wiring to a Multipoint discrete
termination panel. It is marked “STANDARD REMOTE TERMINATION
PANEL” on the Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA). The panel may handle
currents up to 1 amp per point. No fuses are supplied for the field
wiring. Unshielded wire is used.
J620
Connector to Termination Panel
Label Holder
16+ (32+)
1+ (17+)
Field Wiring Block, Positive
Field Wiring Block, Negative
16-- (32--)
1-- (17--)
Top View
1
2
1
3
2
4
3
5
4
6
5
7
6
8 9
7
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Side View
Figure 6.5.1. Standard Remote Termination Panel
The panel snaps onto a standard DIN rail.
The label holder provides a place to record the addresses of the points
served by the panel. The panel is shipped with two sets of stick-on
numbers so the the user may indicate the use of points 1--16 or 17--32.
The Standard Remote Termination Panel can be connected to a
discrete I/O termination panel with a Marshaling Panel Cable as shown
in Table 6.5.1
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Marshaling Panel
SV: 6-5-3
Table 6.5.1. Standard Remote Termination Panel, Marshaling Panel Cable
Application
Use Cable
Multi-FIM Termination Panel
1984--4299--xxxx
Multi-FIM Termination Panel, Redundant FIMs
1984--4319--xxxx
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel
1984--4298--xxxx
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, NEC/CSA
1984--4345--xxxx
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Marshaling Panel
SV: 6-5-4
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Multipoint I/O Marshaling Panel
SV: 6-6-1
Section 6:
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
Operating electrical equipment in hazardous (classified) locations where
flammable gases, flammable liquids, or other combustible materials
exist requires special handling. One approach is to use equipment that
is intrinsically safe, that is, equipment where the energy supplied to the
hazardous area is not enough to ignite the materials present.
RS3
System
Normal Wires
IS BARRIER
Figure 6.6.1 shows this concept. The normal RS3 equipment is located
in the Safe (nonhazardous) Area. The device being controlled is
located in the Hazardous Area. An Intrinsically Safe Barrier (in the Safe
Area) is used to isolate the Hazardous Area by limiting the energy that
can be sent into the area.
IS Wires
Safe Area
IS Device
Hazardous Area
Figure 6.6.1. Intrinsic Safety Example
RS3 systems are designed for connection to IS products specified by
Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc. (FRSI). RS3 supports IS applications
with the Elcon IS Termination Panel and both MTL Discrete and Analog
IS Termination Panels if proper installation practices are followed. Refer
to RS3 Control Drawing for Intrinsically Safe Associated Apparatus and
Field Wiring as Used in RS3 Equipment, 10P57190001, for complete
recommendations and requirements.
Standards for hazardous wiring practices include current versions of:
D
D
Europe
—
EN50014, Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive
Atmospheres: General Requirements
—
EN50020, Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive
Atmospheres: Intrinsic Safety “I”
Canada
—
RS3: Multipoint I/O
C22.1, Canadian Electrical Code Part 1
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-2
D
United States
—
ANSI/ISA RP12.6, Installation of Intrinsically Safe Systems for
Hazardous (Classified) Locations
—
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code
The rules and guidelines below apply to IS-associated RS3 equipment
and in some nations or localities, may be required by law. Where local
law or practices require deviation from these rules and guidelines, the
deviations must be reviewed by FRSI prior to implementation.
D
D
D
D
RS3: Multipoint I/O
IS wiring and non-IS wiring cannot share the same cabinet cable
entry locations. In addition, IS wiring must meet one or more of
the following criteria:
—
Installed in a wireway separate from all non-IS wiring
—
Positively segregated from any non-IS wiring within an
enclosure or cable tray by means of a grounded metal
partition or an insulating partition in a wireway
—
Spaced at least 50 mm from any non-IS wiring and tied down.
The non-IS wiring must also be secured to prevent it from
violating the 50 mm spacing requirement.
Care must be taken in terminal layout and wiring methods to
prevent contact of IS and non-IS circuits. Some layouts will not
provide adequate separation if a wire becomes disconnected (for
example, when terminals are arranged one above the other). In
these cases, additional precautions, such as tie-downs, are
necessary.
Wiring to an IS device must be installed following the instructions
provided with each MTL or Elcon product. MTL provides
instructions with their isolators. Elcon provides instructions with
their discrete and analog termination panels and
barriers/isolators.
Wire routing requirements within RS3 equipment enclosures are
provided in control drawing 10P57190001. This drawing is
included with all shipments of the MTL IS Analog Termination
Panels and MTL IS Discrete Termination Panels.
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-3
Elcon Series 1000 IS Termination Panel
The Elcon Series 1000 Intrinsically Safe Termination Panel (Elcon P/N
1216/CW--ROS4) can be used for either discrete or analog applications.
Figure 6.6.2 shows the panel and Table 6.6.1 describes its components.
Dimensions are given as mm (inches). Up to 16 barriers can be
installed to service up to 32 I/O points. Elcon provides a variety of
galvanic isolation barriers to meet different requirements. The Elcon
panel is used with an Multipoint Discret Input/Output (MDIO) termination
panel which holds the RS3 Field Interface Module (FIM).
NOTE: Elcon refers to their galvanic isolation barriers as “barriers”.
The Elcon panel is characterized as analog or discrete at the factory by
installing specific cross-wiring. A special tool (Elcon P/N 1301/PZ) is
available to assist in changing the cross-wiring should a panel have to
be converted in the field. Wire from 0.4 to 0.65 mm2 (26 to 22 AWG)
can be used for cross wiring.
Keying Plugs (Elcon P/N 601077) reduce the possibility of installing an
incorrect barrier. Install keying plugs in all empty locations.
This section describes:
D
Discrete applications
D
Analog applications
D
Common features of Elcon panels
NOTE: See the Site Preparation and Installation Manual (SP: 7--5) for
installation details and lists of available barriers.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-4
7
168 (6.6)
(Module Inserted)
6
Side View
8
24
(0.9)
7
5
4
3
503
(19.8)
Cross--Wiring Cover
Top View
535
(21.1)
8
2
9
10
1
146
(5.8)
239
(9.4)
27
(1.1)
Figure 6.6.2. Elcon Intrinsically Safe Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-5
Table 6.6.1. Elcon IS Termination Panel Components
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
DC power block
6
Cross-wiring cover
2
Fuse
7
Elcon Barrier
3
FIM cable connection C1 barriers 1--8
8
Hazardous area I/O terminals
4
FIM cable connection C2 barriers 9--16
9
Spare fuse
5
Cross-wiring block
10
Hazardous area shield ground
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-6
Elcon Panel for Discrete Applications
Figure 6.6.3 shows how an Elcon panel is connected for discrete I/O
applications and describes the components. Points 1--16 can be input
or output, points 17--32 can only be inputs.
1
2
3
9
8
4
10
7
5
6
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
ControlFile
6
Single FIM cable for points 1--16
(barriers 1--8)
2
Control cable
7
MDIO multi-FIM termination panel with one
MDIO FIM
3
Communication Termination Panel II
8
Communication Line
4
Elcon IS Termination Panel with up to 16
barriers installed
9
MPC II or MPC5 controller
5
IS field wires
10
Single FIM cable for points 17--32
(barriers 9--16)
Figure 6.6.3. Discrete I/O with Elcon IS Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-7
The MDIO Multi-FIM Termination Panel (1984--4282--000x) can support
up to three Elcon panels. Each Elcon panel requires an MDIO FIM
(1984--4080--000x) or MDIOL (10P53520006), a communication line,
and two Single-FIM Cables (1984--4299--xxxx).
FIM redundancy is available by use of the A and B FIMs as a redundant
pair, two communication lines, two Redundant FIM Cables
(1984--4319--xxxx), and proper jumpering. The C FIM can be used to
support another Elcon panel or any other MDIO application.
Elcon Panel Discrete Cross Wiring
The Elcon panel is cross-wired at the factory. Figure 6.6.4 shows the
cross-wiring for discrete applications.
G H M N
FROM
T
R
V
U
J
K
TO
G
J
H
R
M
K
N
U
Figure 6.6.4. Elcon Panel Cross Wiring for Discrete Applications
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-8
Elcon Discrete IS Barriers
Table 6.6.2 shows the Elcon discrete barriers available for use with
RS3. All of these discrete barriers are dual-channel so one barrier
serves two consecutively numbered I/O points. The panel is polarized
to prevent plugging in a module with current/voltage characteristics
higher than the circuit design. Figure 6.6.5 shows module polarization.
Open Hole
Configuration 2
(26.4 V / 198 mA)
Configuration 6
(26.4 V / 99 mA)
Configuration 12
(Reverse Contact)
Figure 6.6.5. Elcon Discrete Panel Polarization
Table 6.6.2. Elcon Discrete IS Barriers
Model
Elcon P/N
1822
1822 C0 0030 CC
1842
Configuration
Comment
Contact/Proximitor Input,
Relay Output
2
Input
1842 C0 0030 CC
Contact/Proximitor Input, Optocoupler
Output
2
Input
1862
1862 L0 0060 CC
Contact Actuator
12
Output
1872
1872 L0 0060
WW
Solenoid Valve Driver
(35 mA per channel)
6
Output
1882
1882 L0 0060 UU
Solenoid Valve Driver
(70 mA per channel)
Solenoid Valve Normally Energized
2
Output
1882
1882 L0 0060
WW
Solenoid Valve Driver
(70 mA per channel)
Solenoid Valve Normally Deenergized
2
Output
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Description
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-9
Elcon Panel for Analog Applications
Figure 6.6.6 shows how the Elcon panel is connected for analog
applications.
1
2
3
11
10
4
5
9
6
8
7
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
ControlFile
7
Point 1
2
Control cable
8
Marshaling panel cable
3
Communication Termination Panel II
9
MAIO Termination Panel with MAIO FIM
4
Elcon IS Termination Panel with 8 barriers
installed
10
Communication line
5
Point 16
11
MPC II or MPC5 controller
6
IS field wires
Figure 6.6.6. Analog I/O with Elcon IS Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-10
One MAIO Termination Panel (1984--4383--0002) and an MAIO FIM can
support up to16 points on 8 dual-channel barriers. Use an MAIO Input
FIM (10P54040004 or 10P57700005) for inputs or an MAIO Output FIM
(10P54080004) for outputs. Use Marshaling Panel Cable
1984--4298--xxxx.
Two MAIO Termination Panels are required to support all 16 barriers.
One could be for inputs, the other for outputs. The FIM attached to
Elcon panel connector C1 serves the first 16 points (barriers 1--8). The
FIM attached to C2 serves the next 16 points (barriers 9--16).
FIM redundancy on the MAIO panel requires use of two FIMs, two
communication lines, but only one Marshaling Panel cable.
Each barrier carries a wiring diagram showing how to terminate the field
wiring.
Loop Power and Jumpers
An Elcon panel used for analog inputs requires no external source of
loop power since the barrier supplies the power. A panel used for
analog outputs requires a source of loop power, either from a Loop
Power Module (LPM) on the MAIO Termination Panel or from an
external DC source.
Set all Point Type Jumpers (HD1--HD16) on the MAIO Termination
Panel to the full left position.
Elcon Panel Analog Cross Wiring
The Elcon panel is cross-wired at the factory. Figure 6.6.7 shows the
cross-wiring for analog applications.
G H M N
FROM
T
R
V
U
J
K
TO
G
R
H
J
M
U
N
K
Figure 6.6.7. Elcon Panel Cross Wiring for Analog Applications
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-11
Elcon Analog IS Barriers
Table 6.6.3 shows the Elcon analog barriers available for use with RS3.
All of these analog barriers are dual-channel so one barrier serves two
consecutively numbered points. The panel is polarized to prevent
plugging in a module with current/voltage characteristics higher than the
circuit design. Figure 6.6.8 shows module polarization.
NOTE: The type of FIM (input or output) determines the type of barrier
used on the panel.
Open Hole
Configuration 6
(26.4 V / 99 mA)
Configuration 7
(13.1 V / 26 mA)
Figure 6.6.8. Elcon Analog Panel Polarization
Table 6.6.3. Elcon Analog IS Barriers
Model
Elcon P/N
1012
1012 V0 0444 AA
1022
Configuration
Comment
Volt/mA Converter
7
Input
1022 A0 0242 AA
Smart Transmitter Barrier
(Low Frequency Protocols)
6
Input
1026
1026 A0 0242 AA
Smart (High Frequency
Protocols) or Non-Smart
Transmitter Barrier
6
Input
1032
1032 H0 0242 AA
Bus-Powered Analog Output
Barrier
6
Output
1034
1034 H0 0242 AA
Loop-Powered Analog Output
Barrier
6
Output
1072
1072 D3 0510 AA
RTD/tx Potential Converter
7
Output
1072
1072 F3 0510 AA
RTD/tx Potential Converter
7
Output
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Description
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-12
Elcon Panel Common Features
Elcon panels for analog or discrete applications differ in their
cross-wiring and in the barriers installed. All other characteristics are
common.
DC Power
Barriers on a panel can draw up to 3.2 amps in a discrete application
and up to 1.92 amps in an analog application. The actual current draw
depends on the number and type of barriers installed.
CAUTION
Elcon barriers require a DC source between 21.5 and 28
volts. Because the standard RS3 power bus can exceed
these limits, do not power the panel directly from the
standard DC bus. A Remote I/O Power Supply
(1984--4302--0000x) can be used.
Grounding
The panel provides for two forms of grounding; one for the chassis and
one for the hazardous-side field wire shields. The chassis ground
screw must be connected to the local chassis ground. The
hazardous-side shield grounding terminal must be connected to ground
in accordance with local intrinsic safety grounding rules.
Jumpers
The jumpers on the Multi-FIM Discrete Termination Panel must be set
as described in section 3 of this chapter.
Fuses
The panel has one fuse controlling power to the isolator barriers. There
is a spare fuse in another fuse holder. Table 6.6.4 shows the fuse data.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-13
Table 6.6.4. Elcon IS Panel Fuses
Panel
FRSI P/N
Wickman P/N
Littelfuse P/N
Characteristics
Input
G53394--1600--0005
19 194
1.60 A
216 1.60
1.6 Amp
5x20 mm Ceramic 250 V IEC
Output
G53394--3150--0005
19 194
3.15 A
216 3.15
3.15 Amp
5x20 mm Ceramic 250 V IEC
Keying
Keying Plugs (Elcon P/N 601077) must be inserted in the proper
configuration for the module type to be installed. Empty locations must
have all four keying plugs installed to prevent insertion of a module.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-14
MTL IS Termination Panel for Discrete Applications
The MTL discrete IS panel is implemented as a set:
D
MDIO MTL IS Termination Panel A
(10P5037000x)
D
MDIO MTL IS Termination Panel B
(10P5049000x)
The panels are marked “MDIO-MTLE I.S. ISOLATOR BARRIERS
TERMINATION PANEL A” and “MDIO-MTLE I.S. ISOLATOR
BARRIERS TERMINATION PANEL B” on the printed wiring assembly.
Panel A holds 16 isolators that can serve up to 32 input points (1--32),
up to 8 odd-numbered output points (1--15), or a combination of inputs
and outputs. Panel B can hold 16 isolators but only 8 are used to serve
the 8 even-numbered output points (2--16). Panel B is required only
when there are more output points than can be served with Panel A or
when FIM redundancy is required.
NOTE: The MDIO FIM supports 16 input/output points (1--16) and 16
input-only points (17--32). The 8 odd-numbered output points (1--15)
are mapped to Panel A, the 8 even-numbered points (2--16) are
mapped to Panel B.
NOTE: MTL refers to their galvanic isolator barriers as “isolators”.
MTL provides a number of galvanic isolator barriers to meet different
signal requirements. Hazardous-side field wiring is brought to a
connector at the top of the isolator.
NOTE: See the Site Preparation and Installation Manual (SP: 7--5) for
installation details and Table 6.6.8 of this manual for a list of available
barriers.
Figure 6.6.9 shows Panel A (10P5037000x) and describes its
components. Figure 6.6.10 shows Panel B (10P5049000x) and
describes its components.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-15
7
6
8
9
10
5
11
4
12
3
13
2
14
1
15
16
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
Isolator 16 -- Serves input points 31 and 32
9
Power Strip (TBD) for panel DC supply using
stranded wire (Allows daisy chaining of DC
power and access to panel chassis ground)
2
HD18 -- Common Line Fault Detect Jumper
10
Port B (TBB) -- Even-numbered
communication line for redundant FIM B
3
Silk-screen label showing relationship of
Isolators and I/O points
11
Port A (TBA) -- Odd-numbered
communication line for FIM A
4
Isolator 1 -- Serves input points 1 and 2 or
output point 1
12
HD1--HD16 -- Individual point Input/Output
and Line Fault Detect selection jumpers
5
Fuse Blown LED
13
FIM A (required)
6
Fuse -- 3.15 Amp, 250 V, IEC
14
HD17 -- Panel (Card Cage) address
(A, B, C, or D)
7
Power Jack (J636) for panel DC supply using
a 1984--0158--xxxx cable
15
Mounting holes (2) for wire Tagging Kit
8
HD20--HD21 -- FIM redundancy jumpers
16
Connector (J635) for ribbon cable to Panel B
Figure 6.6.9. MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel A
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-16
6
5
7
8
4
3
9
2
10
1
11
12
Description
No.
No.
Description
1
Fuse Blown LED
7
HD17--HD32 -- Jumpers that enable/disable
Common Line Fault Detect for the
corresponding isolator
2
Fuse -- 3.15 Amp, 250 V, IEC
8
FIM B (optional) for redundancy
3
Isolator 24 -- Serves output point 16
9
Mounting holes (2) for wire Tagging Kit
4
Silk-screen label showing relationship of
Isolators and I/O points
10
Power Jack (J982) for panel DC supply using
a 1984--0158--xxxx cable
5
Isolator 17 -- Serves output point 2
11
HD1 -- Panel (Card Cage) address
(A, B, C, or D)
6
Connector (J638) for ribbon cable to Panel A
12
Power Strip (TBD) for panel DC supply using
stranded wire (Allows daisy chaining of DC
power and access to panel chassis ground)
Figure 6.6.10. MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel B
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-17
Figure 6.6.11 shows how the MDIO MTL IS Termination Panel is
attached to an RS3 ControlFile.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
10
Description
No.
1
2
ControlFile with MPC II or MPC5 Controller
Control Cable
(1984--2783--xxxx non-EMC)
(10P56510xxx EMC)
No.
Description
6
MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel A
7
IS field wiring (connects to top of isolators)
3
Communication Termination Panel II
8
Cable (1984--4186--9100) Panel A to Panel B
4
Communication Line (1984--4188--xxxx
shielded twisted pair) connected to Port A of
Panel A
9
MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel B
5
DC power for Panel A -- Connected to Power
Jack or Power Strip
10
DC power for Panel B -- Connected to Power
Jack or Power Strip
Figure 6.6.11. Discrete I/O with MDIO MTL IS Termination Panel A and B
FIM redundancy requires use of Panels A and B, two identical FIMs,
two communication lines, and a Redundant I/O Block (RIOB).
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-18
Mapping I/O points to MTL Discrete Isolators
Table 6.6.5 and Table 6.6.6 show the mapping of I/O points to isolators
on the MTL discrete panels.
Table 6.6.5. Mapping of I/O Points to MTL Discrete Panel A Isolators
Isolator
Position
Input
Point
Output
Point
Isolator
Position
Input
Point
1
1--2
1
9
17--18
2
3--4
3
10
19--20
3
5--6
5
11
21--22
4
7--8
7
12
23--24
5
9--10
9
13
25--26
6
11--12
11
14
27--28
7
13--14
13
15
29--30
8
15--16
15
16
31--32
Table 6.6.6. Mapping of I/O Points to MTL Discrete Panel B Isolators
Isolator
Position
Output
Point
17
2
18
4
19
6
20
8
21
10
22
12
23
14
24
16
25--32
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Comment
Isolator positions 17--24 serve even-numbered output points
Positions 25--32 are currently not used
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-19
DC Power
The MTL discrete isolators will function over the voltage range 20.7 to
36 VDC. The standard RS3 DC bus can range from 18 to 36 VDC.
CAUTION
The MTL discrete isolators can be operated from the
standard RS3 DC bus but you must be aware that the
isolators will stop operating at low voltage before the
system stops.
NOTE: Both discrete Panel A and Panel B require DC power
connections.
Grounding
Grounding is accomplished by mounting the panel to a metal part that is
grounded. When the panel is mounted on a nonconducting wall, a
ground wire must be run to the ground terminal of the power strip.
Communication Wiring
A single communication line is connected to Port A for normal
single-FIM operation. Two lines, connected to Port A and Port B, are
required for redundant FIM operation.
Field Wiring
Hazardous-side field wiring is brought to a connector at the top of each
MTL isolator. The hazardous-side wiring must follow local standards for
intrinsic safety (refer to the first page of this section).
Labels
Descriptive labels on the discrete panels show the relationship between
isolator positions and I/O points.
Each panel has a place to record the address of the primary FIM.
An optional label holder spans the length of the panel and provides a
place to record the field wiring connection to each isolator.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-20
Fuses
Each panel has a fuse and a “Fuse Blown” LED. The maximum allowed
fuse size is 3.15 Amp, 250 Volt IEC.
Table 6.6.7. MTL Discrete IS Termination Panel Fuses
FRSI P/N
Wickman P/N
Littelfuse P/N
Characteristics
G53394--3150--0005
19 194
3.15 A
216 3.15
3.15 Amp
5x20 mm Ceramic 250 V IEC
Line Fault Detection (LFD)
Line Fault Detection (LFD) is available as an option on some isolators.
Dual-channel inputs and all outputs can provide for the use of common
LFD. Some single-channel inputs can provide individual-point LFD.
The common LFD signal is returned on input point 32.
NOTE: You can use a mixture of common and individual LFD.
-
To use common LFD:
1. Set the common LFD jumper (HD18 on Panel A) to “ENABLE”.
This enables common LFD for both Panel A and Panel B.
2. For Panel A, set the appropriate jumper (HD1--HD16) for each
isolator as shown on the panel label or in Figure 6.6.12 or
Figure 6.6.13.
3. For Panel B, set the common LFD jumper for the isolator
(HD17--HD32) to “ENABLE”.
4. Configure input point 32 to receive the common LFD signal.
NOTE: The common LFD signal is delivered on input point 32. No
isolator is required to receive this signal. When common LFD is used,
you cannot install an isolator in position 16 of Panel A.
-
To use individual LFD:
1. Use a single-channel input isolator with LFD in any position of
Panel A.
2. Set the appropriate jumper (HD1--HD16) as shown on the panel
label or in Figure 6.6.12.
3. Configure the odd point as the control signal and the even point
as the LFD signal.
NOTE: Do not use LFD on MTL 4016.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-21
MTL Discrete Isolators
Input isolators can be used only on Panel A.
D
Dual-channel input isolators connect to both the odd- and the
even-numbered point served by the isolator position.
Dual-channel isolators with LFD may use common LFD.
NOTE: Do not use LFD on MTL 4016.
D
Single-channel input isolators connect to the odd-numbered point
and supply the LFD signal on the even-numbered point. The
corresponding even-numbered point on Panel B cannot be used.
Output isolators can be used on either Panel A or Panel B. All output
isolators are single channel.
D
D
D
Output isolators connect to the odd-numbered point when used
on Panel A and to the even-numbered point when used on
Panel B.
Output isolators with LFD may use common LFD.
You can use an output isolator on Panel A to serve the odd point
and another output isolator on Panel B to serve the adjacent
even point.
NOTE: Isolator position 16 (Panel A) cannot be used when common
LFD is enabled.
Table 6.6.8 lists the MTL discrete isolators available for use with RS3.
See the MTL product catalog for details.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-22
Table 6.6.8. MTL Discrete IS Isolators
Input Isolators
MTL P/N
MTL4016
Name
Switch/Proximity Detector Interface,
With LFD
Comment
Dual-channel input -- Use PH-REV to
have field agree with DCS.
Do not use LFD.
Output Isolators
MTL4021
Solenoid/Alarm Driver
Single-channel output -- Serves an
odd-numbered point on Panel A or an
even-numbered point on Panel B (has
switch for phase direction)
MTL4023
Solenoid/Alarm Driver,
With LFD
Single-channel output -- Serves an
odd-numbered point on Panel A or an
even-numbered point on Panel B
(Common LFD is available)
MTL4025
Solenoid/Alarm Driver,
Low Current Output
Single-channel output -- Serves an
odd-numbered point on Panel A or an
even-numbered point on Panel B
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-23
Panel A Jumpers
FIM Address: Set FIM address jumpers (HD17) as for any other MIO
panel. One jumper is set at 1--2 to select address A--D. The jumper at
“F” must be at 1--2.
FIM Redundancy: Set the FIM redundancy jumpers (HD20 and HD21)
to “N” for normal single FIM operation or “R” for redundant FIM
operation.
Line Fault Detection: The common LFD jumper (HD18) must be set to
“ENABLE” if any isolator on either panel uses common LFD. Otherwise,
set it to “DISABLE”.
NOTE: The common LFD signal is available on input point 32. An
isolator serving point 32 is NOT required.
Figure 6.6.12 shows the settings for the per-isolator jumpers (HD1 to
HD16) when the point pair is used for input.
HD1 TO HD16 JUMPER SETTINGS FOR INPUT(S)
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
I
I
I
O
O
O
INPUT(S) WITH
INDIVIDUAL LFD
INPUT(S) WITH
COMMON LFD,
ALSO ENABLE HD18
INPUT(S) WITH
NO LFD
Figure 6.6.12. LFD Jumper Settings for Input Points
Figure 6.6.13 shows the settings for the per-isolator jumpers (HD1 to
HD8) when the point pair is used for output.
1
2
3
HD1 TO HD8 JUMPER SETTINGS FOR OUTPUT(S)
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
OUTPUT(S) WITH
COMMON LFD,
ALSO ENABLE HD18
3
4
I
I
I
O
O
O
OUTPUT(S) WITH
INDIVIDUAL LFD
OUTPUT(S) WITH
NO LFD
Figure 6.6.13. LFD Jumper Settings for Output Points
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-24
Panel B Jumpers
FIM Address: Set the Address jumpers (HD1) to the same address as
used on Panel A. The jumper at “F” must be at 1--2.
Line Fault Detection: The per-isolator common LFD jumpers (HD17 to
HD24) are set to “ENABLE” if the isolator supports common LFD. All
other jumpers are set to “DISABLE”.
NOTE: The common LFD jumper (HD18) on Panel A must be set to
“ENABLE” for per-isolator common LFD jumpers on Panel B to be
effective.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-25
MTL IS Termination Panel for Analog Applications
The MTL Analog IS Termination Panel (10P50340001) is shown in
Figure 6.6.14. It is marked “MAIO-MTLE TERMINATION PANEL” on
the printed wiring assembly. The panel holds 16 isolators and can
handle either 16 input points or 16 output points depending on the FIM
installed.
Two FIMs are available:
D
MAI16
4--20 mA Input
10P54040004 or
10P57700005
D
MAO16
4--20 mA Output
10P54080004
The MAI16 serves 16 input points; the MAO16 serves 16 output points.
MTL provides a number of galvanic isolator barriers to meet different
signal requirements. Hazardous-side field wiring is brought to a
connector at the top of the isolator.
NOTE: See the Site Preparation and Installation Manual (SP: 7--5) for
installation details and Table 6.6.10 of this manual for a list of available
barriers.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-26
7
8
6
9
5
10
4
3
2
11
1
No.
Description
12
No.
Description
1
HD3 Panel (Card Cage) address
(A, B, C, or D)
7
Power Strip (TBD) for panel DC supply using
stranded wire (Allows daisy chaining of DC
power and access to panel chassis ground)
2
Socket for optional redundant FIM B
8
Fuse Blown LED
3
FIM A (required)
9
Fuse -- 3.15 Amp, 250 V, IEC
4
Port B (TBB) -- Even-numbered
communication line for redundant FIM B
10
Isolator and point 16
5
Jumpers HD1--HD2 for FIM redundancy
11
Isolator and point 1
6
Port A (TBA) -- Odd-numbered
communication line for FIM A
12
Address label -- Write the address of the
primary FIM here
An optional label holder spans the length of the panel and provides a place to record the field wiring
connection to each isolator.
Figure 6.6.14. MTL Analog IS Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-27
The MTL Analog IS Termination Panel is connected to an MPC II or
MPC5 Controller in a ControlFile via a communication line as shown in
Figure 6.6.15.
1
3
4
2
5
6
7
8
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
ControlFile
5
Communication Line (shielded twisted pair)
(two lines are required for FIM redundancy)
2
MPC II or MPC5 Controller in the ControlFile
6
DC power for MTL Analog IS Termination
Panel
7
MTL Analog IS Termination Panel
8
IS field wiring (connects to top of isolators)
3
4
Control Cable
(1984--2783--xxxx non-EMC)
(10P56510xxx EMC)
Communication Termination Panel II
Figure 6.6.15. Analog I/O with MTL IS Termination Panel
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-28
DC Power
The MAIO FIM allows loop power between the FIM and the isolator in
the range 22 to 36 VDC. A Remote I/O Power Supply
(1984--4302--0000x) can be used to supply 27 ¦ 1 VDC. The panel
can use a redundant (A/B) DC supply.
Grounding
Grounding is accomplished by mounting the panel to a metal part that is
grounded. When the panel is mounted on a nonconducting wall, a
ground wire must be run to the ground terminal of the power strip.
Communication Wiring
A single FIM requires one communication line attached to Port A.
Redundant FIMs require two communication lines: an odd-numbered
line to Port A and the next even-numbered line to Port B. Use shielded
twisted pair wires such as 1984--4188--xxxx.
Field Wiring
IS field wiring is landed at terminals on top of the isolators.
Hazardous-side wire routing must follow local standards for intrinsic
safety (refer to the first page of this section).
Labels
The panel has a place to record the address of the primary FIM.
Fuses
The panel has a fuse and a “Fuse Blown” LED. The maximum fuse size
allowed is 3.15 Amp, 250 Volt IEC.
Table 6.6.9. MTL Analog IS Termination Panel Fuses
FRSI P/N
Wickman P/N
Littelfuse P/N
Characteristics
G53394--3150--005
19 194
3.15 A
216 3.15
3.15 Amp
5x20 mm Ceramic 250 V IEC
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-29
MTL Analog Isolators
The MTL analog IS isolators that work with RS3 are listed below. See
the MTL catalog for details.
Table 6.6.10. MTL Analog Input and Output Isolators
Input Isolators
MTL P/N
Description
Comment
MTL4041B
Repeater Power supply, 4/20 mA,
for 2- or 3-wire Transmitters
(Smart Devices)
Single-channel input -- Works with 2- or 3-wire
4/20 mA transmitters and smart transmitters
MTL4041P
High-power Repeater Power supply,
4/20 mA, for 2- or 3-wire Transmitters
Single-channel input -- Works with 2- or 3-wire
4/20 mA transmitters and smart transmitters
Output Isolators
MTL4045B
Isolating Driver, 4/20 mA,
for I/P Converters
Single-channel output -- Works with 4/20 mA
current/pressure (I/P) converters
MTL4046P
High-power Isolating Driver,
for HART Valve Positioners
Single-channel output -- Works with 4/20 mA
devices and HART valve positioners
Jumpers
FIM Address: The panel (Card Cage) address is set by jumper HD3.
Only one jumper is allowed at the 1--2 position to specify the address as
A, B, C, or D.
FIM Redundancy: The redundancy jumpers (HD1--HD2) must be at “N”
for single-FIM operation and at “R” for redundant FIM operation.
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
SV: 6-6-30
RS3: Multipoint I/O
Intrinsic Safety (IS)
RS3t
Service Manual
Chapter 7:
PeerWay Interface Devices
Section 1:
System Resource Unit (SRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-1
Section 2:
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1
RS-232C Asynchronous Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 Asynchronous Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 Asynchronous Protocol Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 X.25 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 X.25 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-422 X.25 Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIA Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-3
7-2-6
7-2-8
7-2-9
7-2-11
7-2-12
7-2-13
7-2-14
7-2-15
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-1
HIA Direct Connection of PeerWays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIA Connection of PeerWays Using Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Jumpering for the HIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Jumpering for HIA Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV Memory Jumpering for HIA Connection Using Modems . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checklist for CE Compliant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure HIA Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIA Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-3
7-3-5
7-3-7
7-3-7
7-3-7
7-3-8
7-3-9
7-3-11
VAX/PeerWay Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-1
QBI Hardware Kit for the MicroVAX II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MicroVAX II -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QBI Hardware Kit for the VAX 3xxx and VAX 4xxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX 3xxx/VAX 4xxx -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Marshaling Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Board 1 (CPU Card) Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) Jumpers . . . . . . . . .
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) LEDs . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-3
7-4-4
7-4-5
7-4-6
7-4-7
7-4-8
7-4-10
7-4-13
7-4-15
Section 3:
Section 4:
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Contents
SV: ii
Section 5:
Section 6:
Diogenes Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-1
OI NV Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diogenes Interface Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diogenes Interface TI Communications Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diogenes Communication Convertor Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-4
7-5-5
7-5-6
7-5-7
RS3 Network Interface (RNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-1
RNI PeerWay Node Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RNI System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boot Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Crash Dumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RNI Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RNI LEDs and Reset Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RNI Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RNI Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-3
7-6-4
7-6-6
7-6-6
7-6-6
7-6-7
7-6-8
7-6-9
7-6-10
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Contents
SV: iii
List of Figures
Figure
Page
7.1.1.
SRU (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-1
7.1.2.
SRU (Back) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-2
7.2.1.
Supervisory Computer Interface (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1
7.2.2.
SCI Cabling Connections (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-2
7.2.3.
Possible SCI/Host Computer Communication Configurations:
RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-3
7.2.4.
Standard RS-232C Cable Connector with SCI as a Terminal . . . . . . . .
7-2-5
7.2.5.
Standard RS-232C Cable Connector with SCI as a Modem . . . . . . . . .
7-2-5
7.2.6.
RS-422 Cable Connector: Asynchronous Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-8
7.2.7.
RS-422 X.25 Protocol Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-9
7.2.8.
RS-422 Cable Connector: X.25 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-11
7.3.1.
HIA (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-2
7.3.2.
HIA Cabling (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-3
7.3.3.
PeerWays Connected by HIAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-4
7.3.4.
HIA Modem Connection of PeerWays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-5
7.3.5.
Con HIA Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-9
7.3.6.
HIA Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-11
7.4.1.
VAX QBUS Interface Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-2
7.4.2.
MicroVAX/PeerWay Interface Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-4
7.4.3.
VAX 3000 -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-6
7.4.4.
Circuit Card Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-9
7.4.5.
Board 1 Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-10
7.4.6.
Board 1 Memory Identification Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-11
7.4.7.
Board 1 I/O Space Code Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-12
7.4.8.
Board 2 Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-13
7.4.9.
PeerWay Node Address Jumper Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-14
7.4.10.
Board 2 LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-15
7.5.1.
Diogenes Interface (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-2
7.5.2.
Diogenes Interface (Back) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-2
7.5.3.
Diogenes/RS3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-3
7.5.4.
Diogenes TI Comm Card Jumpering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-6
7.5.5.
Diogenes Communication Converter Box Jumpering
(Current Loop Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5-7
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Contents
SV: iv
7.6.1.
RNI and Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-1
7.6.2.
RNI Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-2
7.6.3.
RNI label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-3
7.6.4.
RNI System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-4
7.6.5.
RNI Fan and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-7
7.6.6.
RNI Logic Board and Ethernet Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-9
7.6.7.
RNI Fuse on Power Supply Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-10
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Contents
SV: v
List of Tables
Table
Page
7.2.1.
Definition of Some RS-232C Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-3
7.2.2.
RS-232C Signals and Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-4
7.2.3.
Definition of Some RS-422 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-6
7.2.4.
RS-422 Pins and Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-7
7.2.5.
X.25 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-10
7.2.6.
CE Compliant Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-12
7.2.7.
X.25 Clocking Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-13
7.2.8.
EIA Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-15
7.3.1.
HIA/Black Box Cable Assembly Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-6
7.3.2.
CE Compliant Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-8
7.3.3.
HIA Status Screen Field Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-12
7.4.1.
MicroVAX/Peerway Interface Marshalling Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-7
7.4.2.
MicroVAX/PeerWay Interface Circuit Card Requirements . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-9
7.4.3.
Board 1 Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-10
7.4.4.
Board 2 LEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4-15
7.6.1.
RNI LEDs
..................................................
7-6-8
7.6.2.
RNI Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-9
7.6.3.
RNI Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6-10
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Contents
SV: vi
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Contents
SV: 7-1-1
Section 1:
System Resource Unit (SRU)
The System Resource Unit (SRU) provides additional computing power
for control of batch processes and for trending. All components of the
SRU are described in Chapter 3, Consoles.
The SRU consists of these components:
D
OI Card Cage
D
OI Power Regulator
D
OI PeerWay Interface
D
OI Printer Interface
D
OI SCSI
D
OI Processor
D
Hard Disks (2)
The Disk Shutdown (DS) command should always be performed before
powering down the SRU. This will purge the cache and prevent
possible loss of data.
Figure 7.1.1 shows the front of the SRU. Figure 7.1.2 shows the
connections on the rear side.
Empty
Power Regulator Slot
PeerWay
Interface
Printer
Interface
SCSI
Card OI Processor
Hard Disk #1
Power Switch and
Cable
Hard Disk #2
Figure 7.1.1. SRU (Front)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
System Resource Unit (SRU)
SV: 7-1-2
PeerWay A
30 Volt
Power
Redundant
30 Volt Power
(Optional)
Connection
for ON/OFF
Switch
12 Volt Disk
Drive Power
Hard Disk Drive
PeerWay B
Fan Power
(Red and Black
Wires)
Figure 7.1.2. SRU (Back)
Hard disk #1 must have the SCSI address set to 5. Hard disk #2 must
have SCSI address 6 and must have the three SCSI bus terminating
resistors removed.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
System Resource Unit (SRU)
SV: 7-2-1
Section 2:
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
The Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI) provides an interface
between the RS3 and host computer systems. The SCI resides as a
node on the PeerWay. The SCI may be connected to the supervisory
computer by:
D
RS-232C Asynchronous Communication Protocol
D
RS-422 Asynchronous Communication Protocol
D
RS-422 X.25 Communication Protocol
All components of the SCI are described in Chapter 3, “Consoles.” The
SCI consists of:
D
OI Card Cage
D
OI Power Regulator
D
OI PeerWay Interface
D
OI NV Memory
D
OI Processor
See the PeerWay Interface Manual (PW) for information on SCI
configuration.
Figure 7.2.1 shows the SCI and components.
3
2
4
1
No.
Description
5
No.
Description
1
Power Switch and Cable
4
OI Processor
2
OI Power Regulator
5
OI NV Memory Board
3
OI PeerWay Interface
Figure 7.2.1. Supervisory Computer Interface (Front)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-2-2
Figure 7.2.2 shows SCI connections.
1
2
3
4
5
6
No.
Connector
Cable
Comments
1
J938
PWRB
1984--0158--1xxx (B Bus)
(optional)
DC power B (optional)
2
J937
PWRA
1984--0158--0xxx (A Bus)
DC Bus to System Device (A Bus)
3
J936
POWER
SWITCH
10P53110001
Power switch and cable
4
J084
PEERWAY A
1984--0473--0xxx
PeerWay A Drop Cable
5
J083
PEERWAY B
1984--0473--0xxx
PeerWay B Drop Cable
6
J939
FAN
1984--5311--0001
Cable, OI Card Cage to DC Fan
Figure 7.2.2. SCI Cabling Connections (Rear View)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-2-3
RS-232C Asynchronous Communications Protocol
The RS-232C port is used to connect the SCI to the remote host
computer when using RS-232C asynchronous protocol. The SCI may
appear as either a terminal or a modem on the RS-232C port.
An RS-232C cable (10P54340xxx) can be used to connect the SCI to
the remote host computer. Figure 7.2.3 shows possible connections
using the RS-232C port.
SCI Port
Appears as
Terminal
SCI
Modem
Modem
Host
SCI Port
Appears as
Modem
SCI
Host
Host Port
Appears as
Terminal
SCI Port
Appears as
Terminal
SCI
Host
Host Port
Appears as
Modem
Host Port
Appears as
Terminal
Figure 7.2.3. Possible SCI/Host Computer Communication Configurations: RS-232C Port
Table 7.2.1 defines some RS-232C terms.
Table 7.2.1. Definition of Some RS-232C Terms
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Signal
Meaning
TXD
Data Transmit
RXD
Data Receive
RTS
Ready-To-Send
CTS
Clear-To-Send
DSR
Data Set Ready
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-2-4
Table 7.2.2 shows the RS-232C connector pin assignments.
Table 7.2.2. RS-232C Signals and Connector Pin Assignments
Pin
Signal
Pin
1
----
14
2
TXD Data transmit
15
3
RXD Data receive
16
4
RTS Ready to send
17
5
CTS Clear to send
18
6
DSR Data set ready
19
-------------------
7
Signal ground
20
DTR Data terminal ready
8
DCD Data carrier detect
21
9
10
11
12
13
----------------
22
23
24
25
Signal
-------------------
NOTE: A standard PC printer cable can be used for the RS-232C
cable.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-2-5
Figure 7.2.4 shows the female plug to be connected to the SCI and
indicates the pin functions when the SCI is to appear as a terminal.
TXD -- Transmits Data to the Host
RXD -- Receives Data from the Host
RTS -- Tied to DTR in the SCI
No connection
DSR -- Pulled to +12 VDC
Signal Ground
CTS -- When asserted by the Host,
SCI transmit is enabled.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
DTR -- Asserted by the SCI
when ready to talk to the Host.
21
22
23
24
Plug
25
Modem
or
Host
Figure 7.2.4. Standard RS-232C Cable Connector with SCI as a Terminal
Figure 7.2.5 shows the female plug to be connected to the SCI and
indicates the pin functions when the SCI is jumpered to appear as a
modem.
RXD -- Receives Data from the Host
TXD -- Sends Data to the Host
No connection
RTS -- Tied to DCD in the SCI
DSR -- Asserted by the SCI when
power is applied. +12 VDC
Signal Ground
DCD -- Asserted by the SCI when
ready to talk to the Host.
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CTS -- When asserted by the
Host, SCI transmit is enabled.
21
22
23
Plug
24
Host
25
Figure 7.2.5. Standard RS-232C Cable Connector with SCI as a Modem
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-2-6
RS-422 Asynchronous Communications Protocol
The RS-422 port on the SCI is used to connect the SCI to the
supervisory computer when using either asynchronous or X.25
protocols. The SCI may be connected to the supervisory computer or
modem by an RS-422 cable with a nonstandard connector on the SCI
end (AMP HDC-20, P/N 205422--1 or equivalent).
The SCI cannot be jumpered to look like a modem or terminal when
using the RS-422 port. Cables from the RS-422 port to the host or
modem must provide the electrical configuration.
Table 7.2.3 gives a definition of some RS-422 terms.
Table 7.2.3. Definition of Some RS-422 Terms
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Signal
Meaning
TXD
Data Transmit
RXD
Data Receive
RTS
Ready-To-Send
CTS
Clear-To-Send
RXC
Receive Data Clock
TXC
Transmit Data Clock
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-2-7
Table 7.2.4 shows the RS-422 pin assignments.
Table 7.2.4. RS-422 Pins and Signals
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
9
-- --
2
-- --- --
10
TXC+ (X.25 only)
3
CTS+ Clear to send
11
TXC-- (X.25 only)
4
CTS-- Clear to send
12
RXC+ (X.25 only)
5
RXD+ Data receive
13
RXC-- (X.25 only)
6
RXD-- Data receive
14
RTS+ Ready to send
7
TXD+ Data transmit
15
RTS-- Ready to send
8
TXD-- Data transmit
1
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-2-8
RS-422 Asynchronous Protocol Cabling
Figure 7.2.6 shows the male plug to be connected to the SCI and
indicates the pin functions for RS-422 asynchronous protocol.
Send data to Host
Receive data from Host
When asserted by the Host,
SCI transmit is enabled.
{
{
{
TXD -TXD +
RXD -RXD +
8
7
6
5
4
3
CTS -CTS +
2
1
15
14
13
12
RTS -RTS +
}
Asserted by the SCI when
it is ready to talk to the Host.
11
10
9
Plug
Host
Figure 7.2.6. RS-422 Cable Connector: Asynchronous Protocol
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-2-9
RS-422 X.25 Protocol
For the X.25 protocol, the SCI is configured both logically and
electrically. The logical configuration of the SCI refers to its function in
the exchange of data packets. Logically, the SCI can be the DCE or the
DTE. The electrical configuration of the SCI refers to whether it
functions as a modem or a terminal. Electrically, the SCI functions as a
modem if it is directly connected to the host and as a terminal if it is
connected to a modem.
Figure 7.2.7 shows various RS-422 X.25 protocol connections.
Modem
Terminal
SCI
Host
DCE
(SCI is logically the DCE and electrically a modem)
DTE
Terminal
SCI
Terminal
M
M
Host
DTE
DCE
(SCI is logically the DCE and electrically a terminal)
Terminal
Terminal
SCI
M
X.25 Network
M
Host
DTE
DTE
(SCI is logically the DTE and electrically a terminal)
Figure 7.2.7. RS-422 X.25 Protocol Connections
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-2-10
The X.25 parameters shown in Table 7.2.5 can be configured as
directed by the installation instructions provided by the vendor of the
host computer.
Table 7.2.5. X.25 Parameters
Parameter
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Description
K
The maximum number of unacknowledged packets at
both the link and network layers (1 to 7).
T1
The link level transmission timeout (10 to 10,000
milliseconds).
N1
The maximum network layer packet size (16 to 1024
bytes).
N2
The maximum number of link level retries (1 to 100
attempts).
T3
The link level idle transmit timeout (0 to 5000
seconds). If zero is selected, the link layer never times
out.
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-2-11
RS-422 X.25 Cabling
For X.25 protocol, the cabling from the SCI to the modem or host
determines whether the SCI is electrically configured as a modem or
terminal. An SCI that implements X.25 protocol is shipped with a
custom cable that electrically configures the SCI as a modem. In X.25
protocol, this cable connects the SCI directly to the host, as in
Figure 7.2.8. The cable and RS-422 connectors carry the RS-422
electrical interface. If you want to configure the SCI electrically as a
terminal, you must design a cable that performs that task.
The clock jumpers on the OI NV Memory must be set for internal clocks
if the SCI is configured as a modem or as external clocks if the SCI is
configured as a terminal.
Send data to Host
Receive data from Host
When asserted by the Host,
SCI transmit is enabled.
{
{
{
TXD -TXD +
RXD -RXD +
RTS -8
7
6
5
4
3
CTS -CTS +
2
1
RTS +
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
RXC -RXC +
TXC -TXC +
}
}
}
Asserted by the SCI
when it is ready to talk
to the Host.
Clocks the data received.
Clocks the Data
transmitted.
Plug
Host
Figure 7.2.8. RS-422 Cable Connector: X.25 Protocol
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-2-12
Checklist for CE Compliant Installation
Follow these rules to ensure CE compliance:
1. Use cables specified in Table 7.2.6 as needed.
2. Install the card cage and mounting bracket in a grounded system
cabinet.
3. Power the cage from a CE-approved power supply.
4. Use a CE-approved modem when a modem is required.
Table 7.2.6. CE Compliant Cable Specifications
Cable
Part Number
Maximum Length
PeerWay Drop Cable
1984--0473--00xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
DC Power Cable, Bus To Product
1984--0158--0xxx
61 meters (200 feet)
DC Power Cable, Power Supply to Product
1984--1083--00xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
Fan Power Cable
1984--1605--9009
Standard
Cable, Highway Interface Adapter (HIA) to HIA
1984--2171--0004
1.2 meters (4 feet)
Shielded RS-232 cable assembly, SCI to PC
10P54340xxx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
Shielded RS-422 cable assembly, X.25/SCI
10P54390xxx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
Shielded RS-422 cable assembly, HIA to Black BoxE
10P54400xxx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-2-13
RS-422 X.25 Clocking
The clock lines of the RS-422 port (TXC and RXC) are for X.25 protocol
only. TXC provides the transmit data clock signal and RXC the receive
data clock signal. The direction of the clock lines is determined by the
synchronous clock jumper settings on the NV Memory. If the SCI is
electrically configured as a modem, the jumpers are set for the internal
clock and the clock lines are driven by the SCI at the configured internal
baud rate. In an SCI electrically configured as a terminal, jumpers are
set for the external clock and clock lines supply clock signals to the SCI.
A synchronous clock may be supplied internally at 300, 1200, 1800,
2400, 3600, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K, and many higher rates. The SCI
also accepts any external clock in the range 300 to 200K baud. At baud
rates above 38.4K, multiple flags may be needed between packets to
assure 500 microseconds between messages.
NOTE: The NV Memory jumpers must match values entered on the
SCI Configuration screen.
Table 7.2.7 shows the X.25 clocking parameters.
Table 7.2.7. X.25 Clocking Parameters
Electrical Configuration
of the SCI
Nonvolatile Memory
Jumper Configuration
Source of Clock
Signals
Direction of Clock Lines
(TXC and RXC)
Modem
Internal Clock
SCI
Output
Terminal
External Clock
Modem
Input
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-2-14
OI NV Memory Card
The SCI uses the OI NV Memory which is described in Chapter 3,
“Consoles.”
Jumpers on the OI NV Memory must be set to match the
communications protocol in use. See the description of the appropriate
OI NV Memory card in Chapter 3 for jumper setting information.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-2-15
EIA Options
The EIA options are selected on the SCI Configuration screen for
asynchronous protocol using the RS-232C or RS-422 ports. The
present implementation of X.25 protocol does not provide EIA options.
The EIA options available are: CTS, MODEM, and NONE.
The CTS option is a hardware means of flow control. Flow control can
also be enabled in software by selecting XON and XOFF control on the
SCI Configuration screen. When the host sends XOFF, the SCI stops
sending messages until it sees XON. XON and XOFF control is not
implemented for X.25.
The EIA options are described in Table 7.2.8.
Table 7.2.8. EIA Options
Description
EIA Option
CTS
SCI configured as a modem:
When DTR (pin 20) is asserted by the host, the SCI
can transmit.
SCI configured as a terminal:
When DCD (pin 8) is asserted by the host, the SCI
can transmit.
SCI configured as a terminal:
The SCI monitors the modem Carrier Detect (CD)
signal to determine when the host has called in.
When DTR (pin 20) is asserted by the SCI, the
modem answers the phone and establishes the
carrier.
When DTR is dropped by the SCI, the modem
hangs up the line.
Unless dropped to hang up the line, this pin remains
asserted once software initialization is complete.
MODEM
DCD (pin 8) is asserted by the modem to inform the
SCI that the data carrier is detected.
NONE
No EIA option is selected.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-2-16
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
SV: 7-3-1
Section 3:
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
The Highway Interface Adapter (HIA) connects two PeerWays. It
resides as a node on one PeerWay and communicates with another HIA
that is a node on the other PeerWay.
The HIA pair is connected to provide PeerWay-to-PeerWay
communications:
D
Directly, for adjacent PeerWays
D
By modem, for geographically separated PeerWays
All HIA components are described in Chapter 3, Consoles. The HIA
consists of:
D
OI Card Cage
D
OI Power Regulator
D
OI PeerWay Interface
D
OI NV Memory
D
OI Processor
Figure 7.3.1 shows the HIA and its components. See the PeerWay
Interfaces Manual (PW) for information on the configuration of HIA
software.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SV: 7-3-2
4
3
5
2
6
1
No.
Description
No.
Description
1
Power Regulator
4
OI NV Memory Board
2
Power Switch and Cable
5
PeerWay Interface
3
Empty Slot
6
OI Processor
Figure 7.3.1. HIA (Front)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SV: 7-3-3
HIA Direct Connection of PeerWays
Two HIAs that providing a direct PeerWay-to-PeerWay connection are
typically contained in a shelf assembly side-by-side with an HIA Link
Cable (1984--2171--00xx) joining the RS-422 connectors.
Figure 7.3.2 shows the rear view of two directly connected HIAs.
1
2
3
7
4
5
6
No.
Connector
1
J938
PWRB
1984--0158--1xxx (Bus B)
(optional)
DC power B (optional)
2
J937
PWRA
1984--0158--0xxx (Bus A)
DC Bus to System Device (Bus A)
3
J936
POWER
SWITCH
10P53110001
Power switch and cable
4
J084
PEERWAY A
1984--0473--0xxx
PeerWay A Drop Cable
5
J083
PEERWAY B
1984--0473--0xxx
PeerWay B Drop Cable
6
J939
FAN
1984--5311--0001
Cable, OI Card Cage to DC Fan
7
RS-422 (J086)
to
RS-422 (J086)
1984--2171--0004
The cable is 1.2 meters (4 feet) long.
Cable
Comments
Figure 7.3.2. HIA Cabling (Rear View)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SV: 7-3-4
FRSI recommends that PeerWays connected by HIAs be configured to
provide alternate communication paths in the event of communication
failure. For example, Figure 7.3.3 shows four PeerWays connected by
HIAs. Dual HIAs may be used as shown at the right side of the figure.
If communications fail between a pair of HIAs, data can still be routed to
the proper destination.
HIA
HIA
HIA
HIA
HIA
HIA
HIA
HIA
HIA
HIA
PeerWay 1
PeerWay 3
PeerWay 2
PeerWay 4
Figure 7.3.3. PeerWays Connected by HIAs
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SV: 7-3-5
HIA Connection of PeerWays Using Modems
Distant PeerWays may be connected by the use of HIAs, Converters,
Modems, and a communication line as shown in Figure 7.3.4. This is
referred to as HIA Modem.
Each HIA modem group consists of:
D
HIA
D
Black BoxÒ Data Converter (Customer furnished)
D
HIA/Black Box Cable Assembly
D
Synchronous Modem (Customer furnished)
The Data Converter used is a Black Box IC454--187 (or equivalent),
which converts between RS-422 and RS-232 formats. Set the Data
Converter to modem operation on the HIA side and to terminal
operation on the modem side.
2
3
4
5
1
No.
Item
1
Cable 10P54400xxx from RS-422
(J086) to Black BoxE
2
Black BoxE Data Converter
3
RS-232C data cable
4
Modem
5
Communications line
Comments
The cable length (xxx) is in decimeters.
Maximum is 15.2 meters (50 feet)
Model IC454--187 (or equivalent)
Must be a shielded cable
Must be CE approved
Runs to a matching set connected to the other PeerWay
Figure 7.3.4. HIA Modem Connection of PeerWays
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SV: 7-3-6
An HIA/Black Box Cable Assembly (1984--2859--00xx) is required
between the HIA and the Data Converter. The cable connects the
15-pin RS-422 connector on the HIA to the 37-pin RS-449 connector on
the Data Converter. Table 7.3.1 shows the cable pin assignments.
The modems must be set to agree with the rest of the equipment.
The OI NV Memory card jumpers and the Configure HIA screen must
be set to agree with the particular connections used.
Table 7.3.1. HIA/Black Box Cable Assembly Pin Assignments
Twisted Pair
Signal
Wire Color
RS-422
Connector (HIA)
RS-449
Connector
(Black Box)
1
RXD -RXD +
Black
Red
6
5
6
24
2
RTS -RTS +
Black
White
15
14
7
25
3
TXC -TXC +
Black
Green
11
10
5
23
4
RXC -RXC +
Black
Blue
13
12
8
26
5
TXD -TXD +
Black
Yellow
8
7
4
22
6
CTS -CTS +
Black
Brown
4
3
9
27
1--6
Drain Wires
Ground
Drain Wires
2
19, 20, 37
Jumper Wire
White
(.25 mm2 24 AWG)
7 TO 12
Jumper Wire
White
(.25 mm2 24 AWG)
25 TO 30
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SV: 7-3-7
OI NV Memory Jumpering for the HIA
The RS-422 Terminal/Modem jumpers on the OI NV Memory Card
determine the source of the HIA clock synchronization. For jumper
locations and settings see the OI NV Memory card description in
Chapter 3, Section 6: “OI Card Cage.”
CAUTION
The Configure HIA screen of each HIA must agree with the
jumper settings on that HIA.
OI NV Memory Jumpering for HIA Direct Connection
One HIA in the pair must be jumpered as a modem (internal clocking).
The other HIA must be jumpered as a terminal (external clocking).
The HIA jumpered as a modem (internal clocking) is the source of the
clock synchronization signal. The Configure HIA screen must agree
with the jumper setting for each HIA.
OI NV Memory Jumpering for HIA Connection Using Modems
Each HIA must be jumpered as a terminal (external clocking).
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SV: 7-3-8
Checklist for CE Compliant Installation
Follow these rules to ensure CE compliance:
1. Use cables specified in Table 7.3.2 as needed.
2. Install the card cage and mounting bracket in a grounded system
cabinet.
3. Power the cage from a CE approved power supply.
4. Use a CE approved modem when a modem is required.
Table 7.3.2. CE Compliant Cable Specifications
Cable
Part Number
Maximum Length
PeerWay Drop Cable
1984--0473--00xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
DC Power Cable, Bus To Product
1984--0158--0xxx
61 meters (200 feet)
DC Power Cable, Power Supply to Product
1984--1083--00xx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
Fan Power Cable
1984--1605--9009
Standard
Cable, HIA to HIA
1984--2171--0004
1.2 meters (4 feet)
Shielded RS-232 cable assembly, SCI to PC
10P54340xxx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
Shielded RS-422 cable assembly, X.25/SCI
10P54390xxx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
Shielded RS-422 cable assembly, HIA to Black BoxE
10P54400xxx
15.2 meters (50 feet)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SV: 7-3-9
Configure HIA Screen
An HIA is configured with the Configure HIA screen, which displays the
information necessary for HIA operation, as shown in Figure 7.3.5.
Each HIA must be configured on the PeerWay to which it is connected.
CONFIGURE HIA
21- mar-94
Node number >10 (10 on PeerWay 1)
Other node
PeerWay number 1
Other PeerWay 2
11:47:12
64 (32 on PeerWay 2)
Node 10 Configuration Information
Program version
xx.xx
Boot version
x.xx
Distance penalty
24
Baud rate
614400
Clock src
CLK_INT
Link passing time
1.0 s
Slot width
30
Time correction
.00 sec/day
Pass time
yes
Volume,Filename for Program xxx,xxxx
Volume,Filename for Config
xxx,xxxx
operation Save HIA configuration to config file
%Press <ENTER> to Begin
CONFIG 1
Figure 7.3.5. Configure HIA Screen
The “Baud rate” field entry must match the baud rate used. For direct
connection this is 614400 baud. The modem connection baud rate is
determined by the modems or the converters used.
The “Clock src” field entry on the Configure HIA screen must match the
clock jumper position for each HIA used. Only “CLK_EXT” and
“CLK_INT” are allowed.
Pressing [PAGE AHEAD] from the Configure HIA screen calls up the
HIA Status screen. The HIA Status screen contains communications
diagnostic information.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SV: 7-3-10
See the PeerWay Interfaces Manual (PW) for a complete description of
this screen and for more information on HIA configuration.
An HIA pair can support up to 40 links over the HIA connection. The
number of available links can be viewed on the PeerWay Node screen
for the HIA.
NOTE: The Configure HIA screen of each HIA must agree with the
jumper settings on that HIA.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SV: 7-3-11
HIA Status Screen
Pressing [EXCHANGE] from the Configure HIA screen calls up the HIA
Status screen. The HIA Status screen contains communications
diagnostic information as shown in Figure 7.3.6. The data shows
4-second averages for the two connected HIAs. Table 7.3.3 gives
definitions of the fields.
HIA Status Display
14- Mar-94 09:20:50
Node number >28 (28 on PeerWay 1)
Other node 62 (62 on PeerWay 2)
Program vers 11.22
Program vers 11.22
Boot vers 8.72
Boot vers 8.72
NRoute
168
CRC
0
NRoute
185
CRC
0
RCount
206
Size
0
RCount
206
Size
0
XCount
204
BCount
0
XCount
206
BCount
0
ICount
410
LRC
Overrun
0
0
ICount
409
LRC
Overrun
0
0
RTic
16
XToss
0
RTic
16
XToss
0
RLink
RDist
16
0
RToss
0
RLink
RDist
16
0
RToss
0
RNode
0
TimeOut
0
RNode
0
TimeOut
0
RPoint
RAck
91
127
TicLost
LnkLost
0
0
RPoint
RAck
99
123
TicLost
LnkLost
0
0
RStat
83
RNack
0
RStat
73
RNack
0
MaxHop
0
RBusy
REng
0
0
MaxHop
0
RBusy
REng
0
0
DupRoute
4
BadSeq
0
DupRout
7
BadSeg
0
NoPath
ReQueue
0
0
XBusy
XEng
0
0
NoPath
ReQueue
0
0
XBusy
XEng
0
0
CONFIG 2
Figure 7.3.6. HIA Status Screen
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SV: 7-3-12
Table 7.3.3. HIA Status Screen Field Definitions
Definition
Item
NRoute
Point-to-point messages routed across this HIA.
RCount
Messages received directly from the partner HIA.
XCount
Messages transmitted.
ICount
Level 3 direct communication interrupts.
RTic
TIC messages received directly from the partner HIA.
RDist
Distance information messages received.
RNode
Node/type information messages received.
RPoint
Point-to-point messages received.
RAck
ACK direct messages received (piggybacked on HIA partner message).
RStat
Partner HIA direct communication status messages received.
MaxHop
Messages discarded for taking more than the maximum number of hops.
DupRout
Duplicate route messages (a message ID with the same, or higher, content has been seen).
NoPath
ReQueue
Messages in which this HIA does not know the current path to the destination node.
Messages requeued for transmission on another path.
CRC
Messages with bad Cyclical Redundancy Check received from partner HIA.
Abort
Direct messages aborted.
Size
Number of messages received with size errors.
BCount
Number of messages received with byte count errors.
Overrun
Number of messages received with overrun errors. (scaled x1)
Number of messages received with gross transmit communications timeouts. (scaled x200)
403 means 2 transmit timeouts and 3 overrun errors.
XToss
Transmit messages toss for debugging.
RToss
Received messages toss for debugging.
TimeOut
Transmit queue timeouts.
TicLost
TIC messages lost (unacknowledged).
LnkLost
LINK messages lost (unacknowledged).
RNack
Not acknowledged responses received from the partner HIA.
RBusy
Buffer busy responses received.
REnq
Status enquiries received from partner HIA.
BadSeq
Bad message sequence number ID for messages between HIAs.
XBusy
Busy responses sent to partner HIA (HIA direct buffers busy).
XEnq
Status enquiries sent to partner HIA.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
SV: 7-4-1
Section 4:
VAX/PeerWay Interface
The VAX QBUS Interface provides a link between an RS3 and a Digital
VAXÒ computer system. The VAX QBUS Interface resides as a node
on the PeerWay and connects to the VAX QBUSÒ.
There are two QBUS to PeerWay Interface (QBI) kits for different types
of VAX.
D
D
QBI Hardware Kit, MicroVAX II Series (1984--2530--0001)
QBI Hardware Kit, MicroVAX 3xxx and VAX 4xxx Series
(1984--2627--0001)
The VAX 3xxx/4xxx kit works with systems with BA213 or BA215
cabinets such as the 3300, 3400, 35xx, 36xx, 3800, 3900, and the VAX
4000.
The kits share the PeerWay Interface board and one short cable. They
differ in the marshaling panel and the long cable.
Figure 7.4.1 shows the VAX QBUS Interface installed in a MicroVAX II
cabinet.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-4-2
VAX Cabinet
VAX QBUS
Marshaling Panel
PeerWay Drop Cables
Special PeerWay A Cable
Special PeerWay B Cable
Figure 7.4.1. VAX QBUS Interface Installation
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-4-3
QBI Hardware Kit for the MicroVAX II
The kit for the MicroVAX II consists of:
D
D
D
D
D
D
MicroVAX II -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel (MicroVAX II)
(1984--2533--0001) marked “QBI” on the front panel
QBUS Board 1 (CPU Card)
(1984--3261--0002 or 1984--2507--0002)
QBUS Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card)
(1984--2510--0001)
Cable, QBUS Board #1 to Board #2 (2” long)
(1984--2504--9002)
Cable, QBUS Boards to MP
(1984--2535--9901)
PeerWay Drop Cables, MicroVAX
(1984--2628--1006 and 1984--2628--2006)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-4-4
MicroVAX II -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel
The MicroVAX/PeerWay Interface Marshaling Panel (1984--2533--000x)
is shown in Figure 7.4.2. One end of the QBus Board to the
MP-MicroVAX II cable (1984--2535--9901) is connected to the connector
located behind the Marshaling Panel, as shown in the side view of
Figure 7.4.2. The Marshaling Panel is installed in a blank panel on the
back of the MicroVAX. The special PeerWay Drop cables
(1984--2628--1006 and 1984--2628--2006) are connected to the front of
the Marshaling Panel.
FAULT
B1
TXA
RXA
Ä
Ä
TXB
A
Front View
FAULT
B2
RXB
............
Ä
Ä
B
.. . . . . . . . . . . .
Side View
Connector
Red ribbon of cable should be at
this end of the connector.
Figure 7.4.2. MicroVAX/PeerWay Interface Marshaling Panel
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-4-5
QBI Hardware Kit for the VAX 3xxx and VAX 4xxx
The kit for the MicroVAX 3xxx or VAX 4xxx consists of:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
MicroVAX II -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel (MicroVAX 3000)
marked “RPQNA” on the front panel
(1984--2622--0001)
Cover Plate, DEC
(1984--2642--0001)
QBUS Board 1 (CPU Card)
(1984--3261--0001)
QBUS Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card)
(1984--2510--0001)
Cable, QBUS Board #1 to Board #2 (2” long)
(1984--2504--9002)
Cable, QBUS Boards to MP
(1984--2535--9901)
PeerWay Drop Cables, MicroVAX
(1984--2628--1006 and 1984--2628--2006)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-4-6
VAX 3xxx/VAX 4xxx -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel
The MicroVAX/PeerWay Interface Marshaling Panel (1984--2622--0001)
and Cover Plate (1984--2624--0001) are shown in Figure 7.4.3. One
end of the QBus Board to MP-MicroVAX II cable (1984--2625--9901) is
connected to the connector located behind the Marshaling Panel. The
Marshalling Panel is installed in the cover plate and then in the back of
the MicroVAX. The special PeerWay Drop cables (1984--2628--1006
and 1984--2626--2006) are connected to the front of the Marshaling
Panel.
FAULT
B2
B1
TXA
RXA
TXB
RXB
A
B
RPQNA
Figure 7.4.3. VAX 3000 -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-4-7
VAX QBUS Interface Marshaling Panel LEDs
LEDs show activity of the interface and indicate board faults.
Figure 7.4.2 and Figure 7.4.3 show the LEDs. Table 7.4.1 gives the
meanings of the LEDs.
If B1 or B2 is ON, the corresponding card is bad.
B1 and B2 will alternate ON and OFF after the Interface is powered up
but not yet booted.
Both B1 and B2 will be ON while the diagnostics are running. If they
stay ON, both cards may be bad.
Table 7.4.1. MicroVAX/Peerway Interface Marshalling Panel LEDs
LED
Description
B1
(RED)
Indicates the condition of the CPU card (board 1).
B2
(RED)
Indicates the condition of the PeerWay Interface card (board 2).
TXA
(YELLOW)
Indicates transmission of data to PeerWay A. Blinks when data is
sent.
TXB
(YELLOW)
Indicates transmission of data to PeerWay B. Blinks when data is
sent.
RXA
(YELLOW)
Indicates reception of data from PeerWay A. Blinks when data is
received.
RXB
(YELLOW)
Indicates reception of data from PeerWay B. Blinks when data is
received.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-4-8
VAX QBUS Interface Circuit Cards
The VAX QBUS Interface contains two circuit cards:
D
D
QBUS Board 1 (CPU card)
1984--3261--0002 marked “QBUS TO PEERWAY INTERFACE I+”
or
1984--2507--000x marked “QBUS TO PEERWAY INTERFACE I”
QBUS Board 2 (PeerWay Interface)
(1984--2510--000x) marked “QBUS TO PEERWAY INTERFACE II”
The circuit cards must be located in the VAX QBUS after the CPU and
memory cards and before any disk and tape controller cards. Two
complete quad slots must be reserved for the VAX QBUS Interface
circuit cards. No gaps can exist between cards in the VAX. If, by
moving the disk and tape controller cards or some other cards, a dual
slot gap exists, a Digital Equipment Corporation Grant Continuity Card
(model M907) must be put into the empty dual slot.
Figure 7.4.4 shows proper installation. Board 1 should be in the right
quad slot. Board 2 should be in the left quad slot. The long cable that
is attached to the Marshaling Panel must be connected to the bottom
connector of Board 2. The short cable (1984--2504--9002) must be
connected from Board 1 to Board 2.
The VAX must also be able to supply enough power to the circuit cards.
The requirements for each card are listed in Table 7.4.2.
NOTE: Be certain that the circuit boards are properly seated in the
VAX. Improper seating may result in hard to trace operating problems.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-4-9
Board 2
1984--2510--000x
Board 1
1984--3261--000x
or
1984--2507--000x
VAX CPU
Short Cable
1984--2504--9002
Long Cable
Cabinet Adaptor
Red ribbon of cable
Figure 7.4.4. Circuit Card Installation
Table 7.4.2. MicroVAX/PeerWay Interface Circuit Card Requirements
Item
Board 1
(CPU Card)
1984--3261--000x
1984--2507--000x
Board 2
(PeerWay Interface Card)
1984--2510--000x
5 VDC current
4A
1.5 A
12 VDC current
------
700 mA
Total Watts
20 W
15.9 W
AC bus loads
1 AC load
0 AC load
DC bus loads
1 DC load
0 DC load
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-4-10
VAX QBUS Interface Board 1 (CPU Card) Jumpers
Board 1 contains the VAX QBUS Interface memory identification
jumpers and the DEC I/O space code jumpers. Figure 7.4.5 shows the
locations of these jumpers, Table 7.4.3 shows settings.
HD2
Memory
Identification
Jumpers
HD1
HD13--HD18
I/O Space Code
Jumpers
HD4--HD8
Figure 7.4.5. Board 1 Jumper Locations
Table 7.4.3. Board 1 Jumper Settings
Jumper
Setting
HD1
2--3
(1984--2507--000x board only)
Factory setting, do not move.
HD2
2--3
Factory setting, do not move.
HD4--HD8
See text for data
I/O Space Code, determines the base
address used.
HD13--HD18
See text for data
Memory Identification, first or second
memory window.
HD29--HD30
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Function
Not used.
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-4-11
Memory Identification Jumpers: A VAX can hold up to two VAX
QBUS Interfaces. Each VAX QBUS Interface is assigned a memory
window by the memory identification jumpers. There are two valid
jumper positions, as shown in Figure 7.4.6. It does not matter which
jumper position is used. However, note the jumper position for entry
into the VAX.
1
2
3
HD18
HD18
HD17
HD17
HD16
HD16
HD15
HD15
HD14
HD14
HD13
HD13
4
Jumper position to use the
first memory window.
1
2
3
4
Jumper position to use the
second memory window.
Figure 7.4.6. Board 1 Memory Identification Jumper Positions
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-4-12
I/O space code jumpers: The I/O space code jumpers determine the
base address used by the VAX QBUS Interface. The jumpers are
originally set for a base address of 766020 octal. If the VAX QBUS
Interface needs to have a base address other than 766020 octal, these
jumpers must be positioned for the correct base address. Figure 7.4.7
describes the I/O space code jumper settings.
Base address 7 6 6 0 2 0
This digit is determined by jumpers HD4
and HD5. HD5 is the most significant
digit.
This digit is determined by jumpers
HD6, HD7, and HD8. HD6 is the least
significant digit and HD8 is the most
significant digit.
The 3--4 jumper position
represents a 0 value.
Never use the 1--2
jumper position.
The 2--3 jumper position
represents a 1 value.
1
2
3
4
HD4
HD5
HD4
HD5
HD6
HD6
HD7
HD7
HD8
HD8
1
2
3
4
1
This is the jumper position of
the shipped board and
represents 766020 octal.
2
3
4
This jumper position represents 766540 octal.
HD4 is in the 0 value position and HD5 is in the 1 value
position; they represent a value of 4 octal.
HD6 and HD8 are in the 1 value position and HD7 is in
the 0 value position; they represent a value of 5 octal.
Figure 7.4.7. Board 1 I/O Space Code Jumper Positions
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-4-13
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) Jumpers
Board 2 (PeerWay Interface) contains the PeerWay node address
jumpers. These jumpers are positioned to provide the PeerWay
address of this node. Figure 7.4.8 shows the location of these jumpers.
Figure 7.4.9 shows how to position these jumpers to indicate the
PeerWay node address.
Node address
jumpers
Figure 7.4.8. Board 2 Jumper Locations
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-4-14
Sum of jumper values
+1
node address
Pin
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5
1--2
1
2
4
8 16
2--3
0
0
0
0
0
Node Address = 15
J1
J3
J5
Sum of jumper values
0 + 2 + 4 + 8 + 0+ 1 = 15
1
2
3
J2
J4
Node Address = 29
Sum of jumper values
0 + 0 + 4 + 8 + 16 + 1 = 29
J1
J3
J5
1
2
3
J2
J4
Figure 7.4.9. PeerWay Node Address Jumper Values
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-4-15
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2 (PeerWay Interface Card) LEDs
Board 2 (PeerWay Interface) has LED indicators, as shown in
Figure 7.4.10 and described in Table 7.4.4.
(Yellow) Communication to VAX
(Yellow) Communication from VAX
(Yellow) Static data update
(Yellow) Dynamic data update
(Yellow) Data scan
(Red) Fuse
(Red) Fuse
(Red) Diagnostics
(Green)
Figure 7.4.10. Board 2 LED Indicators
Table 7.4.4. Board 2 LEDS
Mode
LED Indications
Power on, but not yet booted;
board reset
The bottom two LEDs alternate on and off and the bottom yellow LED
is ON.
Diagnostics
The bottom red LED is ON. The yellow LEDs blink as diagnostics run.
Running
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
The green LED is ON. The yellow LEDs blink as indicated above.
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-4-16
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
VAX/PeerWay Interface
SV: 7-5-1
Section 5:
Diogenes Interface
The Diogenes Interface provides a connection between an RS3 and a
Rosemount Diogenesâ control system. The RS3 Diogenes Interface
resides as a node on the PeerWay and connects to the Diogenes via a
TI Comm Card.
The Diogenes Interface consists of:
D
Operator Interface (OI) Card Cage
D
OI Power Regulator
D
OI PeerWay Interface
D
OI NV Memory
D
OI Processor Card
D
Diogenes TI Communications Card (7900--408--0001)
D
Diogenes Communications Connection Box (Optional)
D
Diogenes Cables
The Console Card Cage, OI PeerWay Buffer, OI Power Regulator, OI
Processor, and OI NV Memory Card are described in Chapter 3,
“Consoles.” The remaining equipment is described in this section.
Figure 7.5.1 shows the Diogenes Interface and its components.
Figure 7.5.2 shows the connections on the Console Card Cage
motherboard.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Diogenes Interface
SV: 7-5-2
Empty Slot
OI PeerWay
Interface
OI NV Memory Board
Empty Slot
OI Processor
OI Power Regulator
Power Switch and
Cable
Figure 7.5.1. Diogenes Interface (Front)
PeerWay A
30 Volt Power Redundant 30 Volt Power
(A Bus)
(Optional B Bus)
Connection
for ON/OFF
Switch
RS-232C
Cable to Diogenes
PeerWay B
Fan Power
(Red and Black Wires)
Figure 7.5.2. Diogenes Interface (Back)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Diogenes Interface
SV: 7-5-3
Figure 7.5.3 shows two methods of connecting the systems.
Diogenes
RS3
Direct RS-232 connection
TI Comm
Card
Max 50 Feet
Cable 7900--0355--0005, --0006, --0007, or --0008
Diogenes
Diogenes
Interface
RS3
Current loop RS-232 connection
TI Comm
Card
Max 1 KM
Cable
7900--0166--000x
Communication
Converter Box
Max 50 Feet
Cable
7900--0164--000x
Diogenes
Interface
Figure 7.5.3. Diogenes/RS3 Connections
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Diogenes Interface
SV: 7-5-4
OI NV Memory Card
The OI NV Memory card must have the terminal/modem jumpers in the
terminal position. See Chapter 3, Consoles, for the location and setting
of the jumpers.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Diogenes Interface
SV: 7-5-5
Diogenes Interface Software
Diogenes Interface Software must be loaded into the OI Processor card
and the PeerWay Interface NV Memory card.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Diogenes Interface
SV: 7-5-6
Diogenes Interface TI Communications Card
The Diogenes Interface requires a TI Communications card
(7900--0408--0001) in one of the Diogenes TI 960B Communications
Register Unit Card Cage Console or SCI interface slots. Refer to the
Diogenes User’s Manual for information about installing TI Comm Cards
in the TI 960B.
Figure 7.5.4 shows the TI Comm Card jumper positions for a RS-232
connection and for a current loop connection.
TI Comm Card (7900--408--0001)
jumpering for RS-232 connection
TI Comm Card (7900--408--0001)
jumpering for current loop connection
Figure 7.5.4. Diogenes TI Comm Card Jumpering
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Diogenes Interface
SV: 7-5-7
Diogenes Communication Convertor Box
The Diogenes Communication Converter Box is only used for the
current loop connection.
It must be properly jumpered for a Diogenes/RS3 current loop
connection. To access the jumpers, unplug the Communication
Converter Box, remove the four cover screws, and take off the cover.
Figure 7.5.5 shows the required jumper positions.
TERMINAL/MODEM
T
M
CONTROL
Y
N
POWER SUPPLY
CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE
Figure 7.5.5. Diogenes Communication Converter Box Jumpering (Current Loop Connection)
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Diogenes Interface
SV: 7-5-8
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Diogenes Interface
SV: 7-6-1
Section 6:
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
The RS3t Network Interface (RNI) (10P53330001) provides a
connection between the PeerWay and an Ethernet Local Area Network.
It is a node on the PeerWay and a host on the Ethernet. Software in the
RNI provides a connection between PeerWay messages and Ethernet
messages. Figure 7.6.1 shows the RNI in the rack-mounting bracket.
See the RNI Programmer’s Reference Manual (RP) for application
programming data and the RNI Release Notes and Installation Guide
(RI) for software installation.
Figure 7.6.1. RNI and Mounting Bracket
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SV: 7-6-2
PW A/B
ERROR
ETHERNET
10 BASE T
HW GOOD
PEERWAY B
PEERWAY A
HW BAD
1
2
No.
3
Item
CONSOLE /
RESET
SERIAL 1
SWITCH
ETHERNET
10 BASE 2
4
5
COMM
6
18 -- 36 VDC
INPUT POWER
TMSTR
7
8
No.
9
Item
1
Ethernet 10BaseT connector
6
LEDs
2
PeerWay B drop cable
7
Console/Serial connector for terminal
communicating with the RNI
3
PeerWay A drop cable
8
Reset switch
4
Write-on label
9
DC power connector
5
Ethernet 10Base2 connector
Figure 7.6.2. RNI Front View
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SV: 7-6-3
RNI PeerWay Node Label
The PeerWay node number, PeerWay number, and Ethernet name
used for the RNI should be written on the label (1984--4438--000x) on
the front of the RNI. The factory fills in the MAC Address of the CPU
board. Figure 7.6.3 shows the label.
PEERWAY NODE
E-NET HOST
MAC ADDRESS
E-NET 10 BASE T
NUMBER
E-NET 10 BASE 2
Figure 7.6.3. RNI label
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SV: 7-6-4
RNI System Cabling
The RNI connects to both an RS3 PeerWay and to an Ethernet Local
Area Network as shown in Figure 7.6.4.
2
1
A
B
4
3
5
7
6
8
8
No.
Item
No.
Item
1
PeerWays A and B
5
DC power cable
2
PeerWay Tap Boxes A and B
6
10BaseT or 10Base2 Ethernet connector
3
PeerWay Drop Cables A and B
7
Ethernet
4
RNI
8
Computers on Ethernet
Figure 7.6.4. RNI System Cabling
DC Power
Use a 1984--0158--00xx cable for bus A power, or a 1984--0158--20xx
cable for A/B power. Use a 10-amp fuse in the DC Distribution Card.
There is no power switch on the RNI.
PeerWay
The RNI is connected to the PeerWay by a set of standard PeerWay
Drop Cables (1984--0473--xxxx).
CAUTION
The RNI cannot supply adequate current to power an
Optical Tap Box or a PeerWay Extender (PX). It can power
a twinax Tap Box.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SV: 7-6-5
Ethernet
The RNI connects to the Ethernet by a 10baseT twisted pair or 10Base2
coaxial cable. Use of other Ethernet media requires an external
converter.
NOTE: The RNI is normally shipped jumpered for use with 10BaseT
twisted pair wiring.
Serial Port Cable
A cable (10P55180007) is supplied to connect your ASCII terminal to
the Console/Serial connector. The cable has a RJ-11 connector on
each end. Two adaptors are provided: a RJ-11 to 9-pin Dsub
(10P55130001) and a RJ-11 to 25-pin Dsub (10P55130002). The
adaptor fastens to the serial port of your PC and then allows the cable
to connect to the RNI. This cable is used in the startup procedure and
for servicing the RNI.
Label
Write the PeerWay Node Number and the Ethernet device name on the
label.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SV: 7-6-6
Serial Port
The serial port, identified as “CONSOLE/SERIAL1” on the front panel,
provides a way to interact with the internal operating system of the RNI.
You can attach any kind of ASCII terminal to the port using the supplied
cable. Use a terminal emulator program in your PC to communicate
with the RNI over the serial port. Set it for RS-232 communication using
9600 Baud, 8 bits, no parity, and no handshaking. The dialogs are
described in the RNI Release Notes and Installation Guide (RI).
Boot Data
You can see the boot data through the serial port. This is often useful in
diagnosing configuration problems.
Crash Dumps
The latest crash dump is available over the serial port. Press the Reset
button to initiate the daialog and request the dump.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SV: 7-6-7
RNI Fan
The RNI Fan assembly (10P53910001) plugs into jack J4 on the RNI
power supply board. The fan runs on DC provided by the power supply
board. The fan is the only field-replaceable component of the RNI.
Fan
Logic Board
J4
Power Supply Board
Figure 7.6.5. RNI Fan and Connections
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SV: 7-6-8
RNI LEDs and Reset Switch
There are six LEDs on the RNI as described in Table 7.6.1.
NOTE: When the red/green pair of LEDs flash alternately, there is a
message on the serial port.
Table 7.6.1. RNI LEDs
LED
Color
Meaning
HW GOOD
Green
The hardware has passed all diagnostic tests and is running normally.
HW BAD
Red
The hardware has failed one or more diagnostic tests. The RNI is not
operating.
COMM
Yellow
Blinks when internal communications occur in normal operation.
PW A/B
Yellow
ON when PeerWay A is active.
OFF when PeerWay B is active.
Indicates failure of a diagnostic test if the red LED is ON and this LED
flashes. The number of flashes indicates the failed test.
ERROR
Yellow
TMSTR
Yellow
Reset Switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CPU
ROM CRC
Memory Controller
Main Memory
68302 Static Memory
Main Memory Size
TRAP Exceptions
TEA Exceptions
Read/Write Latch
Real Time Clock
Watchdog Interrupt
Ethernet Loopback
ON if the RNI is the PeerWay Tick-Master.
Pressing the Reset Switch causes the RNI to reboot and run the startup
diagnostics. You can observe the process by connecting a terminal to
the serial port.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SV: 7-6-9
RNI Jumper
Internal jumper HD1 selects Ethernet format as either 10BaseT or
10Base2. The default type is 10BaseT. The selected Ethernet type is
marked on the label. You can change to 10Base2 by opening the case
and moving the jumper. Be sure to change the marking on the label.
Figure 7.6.6. RNI Logic Board and Ethernet Jumper
Table 7.6.2. RNI Jumper
Jumper
Position
HD1
10BASE2
The 10Base2 Ethernet connector is enabled.
ETHERNET
10BASET
The 10BaseT Ethernet connector is enabled.
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
Effect
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
SV: 7-6-10
RNI Fuse
There is one fuse on the power supply board. Figure 7.6.7 shows the
location of the fuse.
F1
POWER SUPPLY BOARD
Figure 7.6.7. RNI Fuse on Power Supply Board
Table 7.6.3. RNI Fuse
Fuse
FRSI
Part Numer
Littelfuse
Part Numer
Schurter
Part Numer
Characteristics
F1
G50382--0021
273003
MSF 034.4224
2 Amp Plug-in
RS3: PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3 Network Interface (RNI)
RS3t
Service Manual
Chapter 8:
Calibration
Section 1:
Section 2:
Section 3:
Section 4:
Section 5:
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Serial I/O Field Interface Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-1
Serial I/O Analog Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration of Serial I/O Analog Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Serial I/O Analog Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial I/O Analog Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration of Serial I/O Analog Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Serial I/O Analog Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-2
8-1-3
8-1-4
8-1-5
8-1-6
8-1-7
Calibrating Temperature Input FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-1
Temperature Input FIC Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermocouple Sensor Calibration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermocouple Sensor Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-2
8-2-6
8-2-7
Calibrating Pulse Input FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-1
Pulse Input FICs Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-2
Calibrating MUX FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-1
Entering Calibration Constants for Multiplexer FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Voltage Input and Thermocouple FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and Calibrating Voltage Input and Thermocouple FEMs . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating 4--20 mA FEMs
...........................................
Checking and Calibrating the 4--20 mA FEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration of RTD FEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking RTD FEM Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-2
8-4-3
8-4-5
8-4-7
8-4-8
8-4-9
8-4-10
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
..............
8-5-1
Analog I/O Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration of Analog I/O Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Non-Isolated Analog I/O Output Points
....................
Calibrating Isolated Output FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog I/O Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration of Analog I/O Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points Setup Using Current Input . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points Setup Using Voltage Input . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-3
8-5-4
8-5-6
8-5-7
8-5-8
8-5-9
8-5-10
8-5-10
8-5-11
8-5-12
Contents
SV: ii
Section 6:
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) Output and
Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6-1
Checking and Calibrating MAIO Output Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and Calibrating MAIO Input Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6-1
8-6-4
Contents
SV: iii
List of Figures
Figure
RS3: Calibration
Page
8.1.1.
I/O Block Configuration Screen (AOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-2
8.1.2.
Connecting a Meter for Output Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-3
8.1.3.
I/O Block Configuration Screen (AIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-5
8.1.4.
Connecting a Meter for Input Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-6
8.2.1.
Calibrating a Millivolt Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-2
8.3.1.
Pulse Input Field Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-1
8.4.1.
Voltage and Thermocouple FEM Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-3
8.4.2.
4--20 mA FEM Calibration for 1984--0607--0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-7
8.4.3.
RTD FEM Calibration Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-9
8.5.1.
AOB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-3
8.5.2.
FIC Calibration Setup for Current Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-5
8.5.3.
I/O Block Configuration Screen (AIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-8
8.5.4.
Current Input FIC Calibration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-10
8.5.5.
Voltage Input FIC Calibration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-11
8.6.1.
Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator Connection for Output Calibration . .
8-6-1
8.6.2.
Analog Output Block (AOB) Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6-2
8.6.4.
Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator Connections for Input Calibration . . .
8-6-4
Contents
SV: iv
List of Tables
Table
RS3: Calibration
Page
8.1.1.
Serial I/O Field Interface Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-1
8.2.1.
Calibration Resistance for Ohm Sensor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-1
8.2.2.
Calibration Voltage for Millivolt Sensor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-1
8.4.1.
Multiplexer Front End Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-1
8.5.1.
Analog I/O Field Interface Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-1
Contents
SV: 8-1-1
Section 1:
Calibrating Serial I/O Field Interface Cards
This section covers calibration of the serial I/O Field Interface Cards
(FIC) listed in Table 8.1.1. Serial I/O FICs are housed in Analog Card
Cages and are connected to Multipurpose Controller Processors (MPC)
in the ControlFile.
CAUTION
The calibration procedures in this section apply only to the
FICs listed in Table 8.1.1.
Table 8.1.1. Serial I/O Field Interface Cards
Characteristics
FIC
1984--2480--000x
Two input/one output
(4--20 mA) FIC, no redundancy
10P54440002
or
1984--2518--000x
Two input/one output
Three input
(4--20 mA) FIC, standard
(4--20 mA) FIC, standard
10P54440002
or
1984--2519--000x
Two input/one output
(4--20 mA) FIC, with Smart Transmitter Interface
Serial I/O FICs perform all Analog to Digital (A/D) conversions on the
FIC itself. All communications between the FIC and the Controller
Processor Card are by serial digital data stream.
The calibration correction constants for each serial analog input point
and analog output point are stored on the serial I/O Field Interface
Card. With all constants and correction factors stored on the card, the
Field Interface Card can be removed, calibrated at a remote location,
and then moved back to the original location with full accuracy.
NOTE: Field Interface Cards are calibrated at the factory; therefore
calibration in the field should not be necessary. However, to ensure
accuracy, calibration should be checked at 6-month intervals.
Recalibration is not required when a Controller Processor Card is
replaced.
Calibration is done through the operator console I/O BLOCK
CONFIGURATION screens by using a Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator.
Alternatively, a calibrated current source may be used for the inputs and
a high quality multimeter with a milliampere function may be used for
the outputs.
NOTE: All calibration and checking procedures require the use of a
Configuror’s key.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Serial I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-1-2
Serial I/O Analog Output Points
The procedure for checking and calibrating serial I/O analog output
points is given below. An output point includes the FIC and the Analog
Output Block (AOB). Calibration constants are stored on the FIC.
Figure 8.1.1 shows the I/O BLOCK CONFIGURATION screen used in
the calibration procedures.
Address
=1AA103
Block Tag Þ
I/O BLOCK CONFIGURATION
Device Type AOB
25-Jan-90
Block Type ÞAOB
Mode ®MANUAL
Auto Lock Þno
Source Tag Þ
Value .00
Eng Units
Reverse Acting
10:42:34
Actual Value
-.00
Output Value
>.00
.00%
Þno
Calibrate
0% Value.
100% Value
Alarm Priority Þ0
Plant Unit Þ0
Hardware Alarm Code 0
Fail Safe Jumper Hold
Output Card Rev 2.1
®None
4. ma
20. ma
CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.1. I/O Block Configuration Screen (AOB)
WARNING
The following calibration procedures require that the
process measurement or output drive be completely
disconnected from the control system. Any control
scheme using a measurement to be calibrated must be in
MANUAL mode. Any devices connected to an output to be
calibrated must be isolated from the process.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Serial I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-1-3
Checking Calibration of Serial I/O Analog Output Points
-
To check the calibration of serial I/O analog output points:
1. If there is I/O redundancy, remove the redundant Field Interface
Card (FIC) from service.
2. Disconnect the FIC output field wiring at the marshaling panel
and replace it with a Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator (set up as
an ammeter). The connection depends on whether the output
point is jumpered for self power or for system power.
a. For a self powered output point, connect the calibrator as
shown in Figure 8.1.2 and select button 3 on the calibrator.
b. For a system powered output point, reverse the leads shown
in Figure 8.1.2 and select button 1 on the calibrator.
101
A
103
102
B
A
B
A
B
Rosemount
262
Figure 8.1.2. Connecting a Meter for Output Calibration
3. Call up the corresponding I/O Block Configuration screen and set
it to MANUAL mode.
4. Enter 0 (or the Engineering minimum) in the “Output Value” field
of the I/O Block Configuration screen.
5. The meter reading must be 4.000±.016 mA.
6. Enter 100 (or the Engineering maximum) in the “Output Value”
field of the I/O Block Configuration screen.
7. The meter reading must be 20.000±.016 mA. Recalibrate the
analog output point if the values read on the meter are not within
the specified range.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Serial I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-1-4
Calibrating Serial I/O Analog Output Points
NOTE: Before calibrating any point, carefully check the accuracy of the
calibration device.
-
To calibrate a serial I/O analog output point:
1. If there is I/O redundancy, remove the redundant Field Interface
Card (FIC) from service.
2. Disconnect the FIC output field wiring at the marshaling panel
and replace it with a Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator (set up as
an ammeter). The connection depends on whether the output
point is jumpered for self power or for system power.
a. For a self powered output point, connect the calibrator as
shown in Figure 8.1.2 and select button 3 on the calibrator.
b. For a system powered output point, reverse the leads shown
in Figure 8.1.2 and select button 1 on the calibrator.
3. Call up the corresponding I/O Block Configuration screen and set
it to MANUAL mode. Cursor to the “Calibrate” field. Use [NEXT
OPTION] to get “Cal Low” in the “Calibrate” field. Press
[ENTER]. The cursor will jump to the “0% Value” field.
4. Enter the current value read from the Rosemount 262 Field
Calibrator in the “0% Value” field. Press [ENTER]. The
“Calibrate” field will change to “Cal High”.
5. Cursor to the “100% Value” field. Enter the current value read
from from the Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator in the “100%
Value” field. Press [ENTER].
6. The system will begin the Calibrate function. The “Calibrate” field
will change to “Calibrate”. The FIC will generate exactly 4.00 mA
and then exactly 20.00 mA. The internal calibration correction
factors for the feedback resistor will be calculated and
permanently stored in the internal memory of the Controller
Processor Card. Wait for the “Calibrate” field to change to
“None”.
CAUTION
Do not disconnect the meter from the circuit until the word
“None” appears in the “Calibrate” field. If the meter is
disconnected too early, the calibration sequence will not
be completed and improper calibration constants will be
entered into the Controller’s internal memory.
7. Reconnect the field wiring and return the AOB to AUTO.
NOTE: Calibration may be checked using the procedure on the
preceding page.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Serial I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-1-5
Serial I/O Analog Input Points
The procedure for checking and calibrating serial I/O analog input points
is given below. An input point includes the FIC and the Analog Input
Block (AIB). Calibration constants are stored on the FIC.
Figure 8.1.3 shows the I/O Block Configuration screen used in the
calibration procedures.
Address
I/O BLOCK CONFIGURATION
Device Type AIB
=10AD101
Block Tag Þ
Field Value
-15.29
-15.29
25-Jan-90 10:42:34
Block Type ÞAIB
Mode ®MANUAL
Auto Lock Þno
Filt Time Þ None
Block Out
Eng Units
Þ
Sig Char
ÞNone
Eng Zero
Þ.00
Lo Cutoff Þ.00
.00
Calibrate ®None
Nom Out
Eng Max Þ100.00
>None
Inst Bias ®.00
ALARMS
Inst High
®None
Crit High ® None
Adv High ®None
Inst Low
®None
Crit Low ® None
Adv Low
Hardware Alarm Code 0
Priority Þ0
Plant UnitÞ0
®None
Al DdBand Þ1.00
CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.3. I/O Block Configuration Screen (AIB)
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Serial I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-1-6
Checking Calibration of Serial I/O Analog Input Points
-
To check calibration of serial I/O analog input points:
1. If there is I/O redundancy, remove the redundant Field Interface
Card (FIC) from service.
2. Disconnect the FIC input field wiring at the marshaling panel and
replace it with a Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator (set up as a
current source). Select button 4. See Figure 8.1.4.
101
A
102
B
A
103
B
A
B
Rosemount
262
Figure 8.1.4. Connecting a Meter for Input Calibration
3. Call up the corresponding I/O Block Configuration screen and set
it to MANUAL mode.
4. Set the Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator for 4.000 mA output.
5. The “Field Value” of the I/O Block Configuration screen must read
0.000 ±0.10%.
6. Set the Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator for 20.000 mA output.
7. The “Field Value” of the I/O Block Configuration screen must read
100 ±0.10%.
8. Calibrate the analog input point if the values in “Field Value” are
not within the specified range during the checking procedure.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Serial I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-1-7
Calibrating Serial I/O Analog Input Points
NOTE: Before calibration of any point is performed, it is recommended
that the accuracy of the calibration device be checked carefully.
-
To calibrate a serial I/O analog input point:
1. If there is I/O redundancy, remove the redundant Field Interface
Card (FIC) from service.
2. Disconnect the FIC input field wiring at the marshaling panel and
replace it with a Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator (set up as a
current source). Select button 4. See Figure 8.1.4.
3. Call up the corresponding I/O Block Configuration screen and set
it to MANUAL mode.
4. Set the Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator to 4.000 mA.
5. Cursor to the “Calibrate” field and use [NEXT OPTION] to get
“Cal Low” in the “Calibrate” field. Press [ENTER].
6. Use [NEXT OPTION] to get “Cal High” in the “Calibrate” field.
7. Set the Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator to 20.000 mA. Press
[ENTER]. The FIC will go through an internal calibration process.
8. Replace the field wiring and return the block mode to AUTO.
NOTE: Calibration may be checked using the procedure on the
preceding page.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Serial I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-1-8
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Serial I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-2-1
Section 2:
Calibrating Temperature Input FICs
This section covers the calibration and checking of Temperature Input
Field Interface Card (FIC) 1984--2731--000x.
Check the calibration of Temperature Input FICs during periodic
maintenance.
Calibrate a Temperature Input FIC if:
D
The “Default Calibration” alarm is active.
D
A calibration check shows that the input readings are inaccurate.
D
An ohm, Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD), or Cold
Junction Compensator (CJC) FIC is moved from one location to
another.
D
The field wiring is changed.
Each FIC has two independent input channels. Either channel may be
used for millivolt or ohm sensors at either Range 1 or Range 2. Only
the sensor type and range actually used is to be calibrated.
The calibration procedure used for resistive (ohm) sensors corrects for
the effect of field wiring. Recalibrate this type whenever the field wiring
is changed or the FIC is moved to another slot.
Table 8.2.1 and Table 8.2.2 list the calibration values for ohm and
millivolt sensor types.
Table 8.2.1. Calibration Resistance for Ohm Sensor Types
Range
Calibration Value
Resistance
Tolerance
Range 1
Lo
Hi
0.0 Ohm
100 Ohm
-±.01%
Range 2
Lo
Hi
0.0 Ohm
400 Ohm
-±.01%
Table 8.2.2. Calibration Voltage for Millivolt Sensor Types
RS3: Calibration
Range
Calibration
Value
Voltage
Tolerance
Range 1
Lo
Hi
--4 mV
22 mV
.02%
.02%
Range 2
Lo
Hi
--16 mV
88 mV
.02%
.02%
Calibrating Temperature Input FICs
SV: 8-2-2
Temperature Input FIC Calibration Procedure
The following equipment is required to calibrate a Temperature Input
Block (TIB) FIC:
D
D
Decade resistor box or precision resistors of 100, and 400 ohms
±.01%. A piece of wire can be used for 0.0 ohms.
Precision millivolt source capable of --16 to +88 mV with an
accuracy of ±.02%
Figure 8.2.1 shows the TIB I/O Block Configuration screen for
calibrating a millivolt sensor.
When you are calibrating an existing TIB block, the display scaling
values and the CJC link are retained.
Indicates the calibration
sequence configured: “Lo --4 mv”
Sensor TypeÞMV, OHM
Address
I/O BLOCK CONFIGURATION
Device Type TIB
=10AB101
Block Tag Þ
25-Mar-89
10:42:34
Default Calibration
Block Type ÞTIB
Mode ®MANUAL
Auto Lock Þno
Sensor Type ÞMV
Block Out
Eng Units
Temp >C
Range
Eng Zero 0.
Ext. Res 0.
Offset Cal No
Calibrate ÞLo -4 mv
Field Value
-15.29 C
-15.29
Eng Max 100.0
Descriptor Þ
.00
>1
Cal High Value Required
-4.250 to 22.500 mv
ALARMS
Inst High
®None
Crit High ® None
Adv High
® None
Inst Low
®None
Crit Low ® None
Adv Low
® None
Hardware Alarm Code 8
Priority Þ0 Plant UnitÞ0
Al DdBand Þ None
10:40:21 =10AB101 Default Calibration Used
CONFIG 1
Indicates whether a low or high
calibration range is also needed.
Figure 8.2.1. Calibrating a Millivolt Sensor
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Temperature Input FICs
SV: 8-2-3
-
To calibrate a Temperature Input FIC partially:
1. Call up the appropriate I/O Block Configuration screen and set
the Mode to MANUAL.
2. Cursor to the “Cal Mode” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select “Yes”, and then press [ENTER]. The field changes to
“Calibrate”.
3. Cursor away from the field and then back to the “Calibrate” field.
Press [NEXT OPTION] to select the “Lo” calibration option.
4. Input the exact input voltage or resistance to be calibrated (as
displayed below the “Calibrate” field). Wait 10 seconds for the
reading to stabilize, and then press [ENTER].
5. Repeat the process for the “Hi” calibration option.
6. If when calibrating an mV sensor the millivolt generator displays
an unstable reading, disconnect one lead of the device
temporarily until the voltage is established, and then connect the
lead and repeat the step.
7. After performing both the low and high calibration options, the
“Default Calibration“ alarm disappears. If the “Default
Calibration” alarm does not disappear, repeat the calibration
procedure and be sure to use the correct input voltage or
resistance.
8. Cursor to the “Mode” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to select
AUTO, and then press [ENTER].
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Temperature Input FICs
SV: 8-2-4
-
To calibrate an ohm, RTD, or CJC FIC:
NOTE: For best accuracy, we recommend that you field mount the
calibration resistor (if practical), rather than connect it to the Analog
Marshaling Panel. Connect the device as close to the sensor as
practical to ensure that field wiring resistance is corrected during
calibration.
1. Call up the appropriate I/O Block Configuration screen. Set the
mode to MANUAL.
2. For an RTD block, set “Ext. Res” to zero.
3. Remove the FIC being calibrated. This prevents it from detecting
a burnout state when the field wiring is disconnected. Pull it out
far enough to disengage the edge connector on the card.
4. Replace the sensor with the appropriate precision resistor.
Connect the resistor as close to the sensor as possible. The
high value will be calibrated first. This is 100 ohms for Range 1
or 400 ohms for Range 2.
5. Reinsert the FIC.
6. Cursor to the “Cal Mode” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
display “Yes”, and then press [ENTER]. The field changes to
“Calibrate”.
7. Cursor away from the field and then back to the “Calibrate” field.
Press [NEXT OPTION] to select the “Hi” calibration option. Wait
for the “Field Value” field to stabilize at the resistor value. Press
[ENTER] to activate the high end calibration.
NOTE: The field Value may slowly drift up or down to the steady state.
Do not press [ENTER] until the reading is stable.
8. Change the calibration resistor to zero ohms by shorting the
resistor with a piece of wire. Do not open the wiring connections
when shorting the resistor or the FIC will detect a burnout state.
9. Cursor to the “Calibrate” field and use [NEXT OPTION] to select
the “lo” calibration option. Wait for the “Field Value” to stabilize at
zero, then press [ENTER] to activate the low end calibration.
10. Cursor to the “Offset Cal” field and use [NEXT OPTION] to set it
to “Yes”. Wait until the “Field Value” stabilizes before pressing
[ENTER]. The “Offset Cal” field will change back to “No”.
11. Remove the FIC and restore the field wiring. Reinsert the FIC.
12. Cursor to the “Mode” field, use [NEXT OPTION] to select
“AUTO”, and press [ENTER].
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Temperature Input FICs
SV: 8-2-5
-
To calibrate the MV FIC:
NOTE: The millivolt source should be connected at the Analog
Marshaling Panel. Be sure that there is no thermocouple wire in the
circuit during calibration.
1. Call up the appropriate I/O Block Configuration screen. Set the
mode to MANUAL.
2. Remove the FIC being calibrated. This prevents it from detecting
a burnout state when the field wiring is disconnected. Pull it out
far enough to disengage the edge connector on the card.
3. At the Analog Marshaling Panel, disconnect all thermocouple
wire for the point and connect the millivolt source. The high
value will be calibrated first: 22 mV for Range 1 or 88 mV for
Range 2.
4. Reinsert the FIC.
5. Cursor to the “Cal Mode” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
display “Yes” then press [ENTER].
6. Cursor to the “Calibrate” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select the “Hi” calibration option. Wait for the “Field Value” field
to stabilize. Press [ENTER] to activate the high end calibration.
NOTE: The field Value may slowly drift up or down to the steady state.
Do not press [ENTER] until the reading is stable.
7. Change the calibration voltage to the low value: --4 mV for
Range 1 or --16 mV for Range 2. Do not open the wiring
connections or the FIC will detect a burnout state.
8. Cursor to the “Calibrate” field and use [NEXT OPTION] to select
the “Lo” calibration option. Wait for the “Field Value” to stabilize,
and then press [ENTER] to activate the low end calibration.
9. Remove the FIC and restore the field wiring. Reinsert the FIC.
10. Cursor to the “Mode” field, use [NEXT OPTION] to select
“AUTO”, and press [ENTER].
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Temperature Input FICs
SV: 8-2-6
Thermocouple Sensor Calibration Verification
Immediately following the calibration of a thermocouple TIB, the TIB is
evaluated using the cold junction compensation value. To verify
calibration, change the “Cal Mode” to “Yes”. This will disable the cold
junction compensation link and allow for verification of the calibration.
The cold junction compensator link is re-enabled by putting the TIB in
AUTO mode.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Temperature Input FICs
SV: 8-2-7
Thermocouple Sensor Redundancy
Use of other than 1:1 redundancy will result in a slight loss of accuracy
when the redundant FIC is in service. This is due to the Analog
Transfer Card relays and wiring, which are introduced into the circuit
when the redundant FIC is in service.
If you are using software at V15 or lower, calibrate the redundant FIC to
work best with the most critical reading that it backs up.
Software at V16 and higher uses a per-point offset factor stored in the
NV memory. When the backup FIC takes over, it uses the correct offset
factor, which corrects for the field wiring of the point.
If you are going to use a temperature input FIC as a redundant FIC, you
need to calibrate only the low and high ranges that the redundant FIC is
backing up.
NOTE: After calibrating a TIB, be sure to calibrate the corresponding
Redundant Input/Output Block (RIOB) if one exists. An RIOB can be
calibrated by backing up a calibrated TIB, and then performing the
calibration procedure.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Temperature Input FICs
SV: 8-2-8
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Temperature Input FICs
SV: 8-3-1
Section 3:
Calibrating Pulse Input FICs
This section covers the calibration of the Pulse Input Field Interface
Card 1984--1587--000x.
Figure 8.3.1 shows the components of a Pulse Input Field Interface
Card.
ZERO
ADJUST
SPAN
ADJUST
CAL
R40
FREQ SELECT
300
500
NORM
1K
DDS
R41 3K
DS1
10K
20K
DS2
1234
TP1
VOLT SELECT
30V
10V
5V
2V
.5V
.05V
VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
TP2
F3
F2
F1
Figure 8.3.1. Pulse Input Field Interface Card
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Pulse Input FICs
SV: 8-3-2
Pulse Input FICs Calibration Procedure
NOTE: Be sure that the frequency source is accurate and stable over
time.
-
To calibrate a Pulse Input Field Interface Card:
1. Record the position of the FREQ SELECT jumper (HD1--HD7).
Select the full-scale frequency to be used by placing the FREQ
SELECT jumper (HD1--HD7) in the proper position.
2. Record the position of the VOLT SELECT jumper (HD8--HD13).
Set the VOLT SELECT jumper (HD8--HD13) to match the voltage
level produced by the frequency source.
3. Using an analog FIC extender board (part number
1984--1362--000x), insert the pulse input FIC into the card cage
and allow it to warm up for at least one minute.
4. Be sure that the output voltage measured across across TP1 and
TP2 of the pulse input FIC is stable. The output should not vary
by more than .0005 volts. If it varies by more than this amount,
allow it to warm up a few more minutes and try again.
5. Apply the full-scale frequency to the input of the FIC.
6. Hold the switch in the CAL position.
7. Adjust R40 until the voltage across TP1 and TP2 is
approximately 4.00 volts.
8. Release the switch. Adjust R41 until the output voltage is
approximately 5.00 volts.
9. While holding the switch in the CAL position, use the SPAN
ADJUST pot (R22) to adjust the output voltage to 4.0000 volts
(± 0.0001). If R22 bottoms out, use R41 as a coarse adjustment.
NOTE: Accuracy of the pulse input FIC will probably be affected over
time, mostly by the calibration potentiometers R40 and R41. These are
high resistance potentiometers with few turns and will be more sensitive
than R5 and R22. The best way to minimize their effect is to decrease
R40 and R41 and increase R5 and R22 as much as possible when
calibrating the card.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Pulse Input FICs
SV: 8-3-3
10. Release the switch. Use the ZERO ADJUST pot (R5) to adjust
the output to 5.0000 volts (± .0001). If R5 bottoms out use R40
as a course adjustment.
11. Remove the input signal. The output should read 1.0000 volts
(± .0002). If it does, calibration is complete. If not, complete the
remaining steps.
12. Use the ZERO ADJUST pot (R5) to adjust the output to the value
found by using the formula:
V’ = 1+ (1 -- V) / 2
where:
V = present output
V’ = newly adjusted output
13. Apply the full-scale frequency to the input. Use the SPAN
ADJUST pot (R22) to adjust the output to 5.0000 volts (± .0002).
14. Remove the input signal. The output should read 1.0000 volts
(± .0002). If it does, calibration is complete. If not, repeat steps
9 through 11 again.
15. Restore the FREQ SELECT jumper (HD1--HD7) and the VOLT
SELECT jumper (HD8--HD13) to their original positions.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Pulse Input FICs
SV: 8-3-4
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Pulse Input FICs
SV: 8-4-1
Section 4:
Calibrating MUX FEMs
This section covers calibration and checking calibration of voltage,
current, and RTD multiplexer Front End Modules (FEMs). These
calibration procedures apply to the FEMs shown in Table 8.4.1.
Table 8.4.1. Multiplexer Front End Modules
FEM
Characteristics
Range
Calibration
Accuracy
1984--0607--0001
Thermocouple and mV FEM
20 mV
.25%
1984--0607--0003
RTD FEM
80 mV
.13%
1984--0607--0004
Reed Relay FEM, 4--20 mA
400 mV
.11%
1984--0607--0007
Universal Reed Relay FEM
2 Volt
.11%
1984--0607--0009
Reed Relay RTD FEM
4--20 mA
.4%
CAUTION
Always turn the MUX power supply OFF when inserting or
removing FEMs.
Calibration correction constants are calculated and used in the
Multiplexer FlexTerm. Calibration constants are also stored in the
Nonvolatile Memory card for reloading to the FlexTerm after a power
loss.
Calibration constants are normally entered into the Multiplexer
Controller by copying numbers written on the Front End Module (FEM)
label into the Multiplexer Input Block (MIB) during system start up or
after controller configuration is cleared by the Kill Controller or Wipe
Bubble functions.
Calibration constants should also be changed if a FEM is replaced.
This is done by entering the values that are recorded on the label of the
new FEM into the appropriate MIB screen fields. Recalibrating or
re-entering the calibration values is not necessary if the Multiplexer
Controller, FlexTerm Comm card, or Power Supply card is replaced.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating MUX FEMs
SV: 8-4-2
NOTE: The valid ranges for calibration constants are:
0.50000 to 0.65535
and
1.00000 to 1.50000.
Each FEM is calibrated at the factory and the necessary calibration
constants are recorded on a label. Resistance Temperature Detector
(RTD) FEMs, however, require no calibration because they contain a
very precise internal resistor and calibration is constantly checked and
corrections are made for any drift.
Calibration accuracy can be improved, if necessary, by recalibrating at
shorter intervals and using high accuracy equipment.
Entering Calibration Constants for Multiplexer FEMs
1. Call up the Multiplexer Input Block (MIB) screen for any point on
the FEM to be calibrated (preferably a midpoint address). If an
MIB is not configured at that address, configure one.
2. Set the block to manual.
3. Cursor to the “Sig Char” field.
NOTE: Write down the characteristic shown in the “Sig Char”
field of the MIB screen or print the screen so you can reenter the
proper scale upon completion of the calibration of this FEM.
4. Select the scale to calibrate. On a 4--20 FEM, this would be
4--20 mA.
5. Cursor to the Calibrate field, and press [NEXT OPT] until “Enter
Const” appears, and then press [ENTER].
6. Cursor to the Cal Const field, and enter the exact value written
on the FEM label for that scale, and then press [ENTER].
7. If other scales on this FEM will be used, enter the constants for
those scales also. Enter all scales on the same MIB.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating MUX FEMs
SV: 8-4-3
Calibrating Voltage Input and Thermocouple FEMs
All scales on the Voltage Input and Thermocouple FEM
(1984--0607--0001 and 1984--0607--0007) are calibrated using four
voltage scales, 20 millivolts (mV), 80 mV, 400 mV and 2 volts. If these
four ranges are calibrated, all thermocouple and voltage ranges will be
correctly calibrated. Figure 8.4.1 shows the calibration setup for the
Voltage and Thermocouple FEM calibration.
To calibrate the voltage FEMs, a stable voltage source in the 20 millivolt
to 2 volt range is needed along with an accurate 4 1/2 or 5 1/2 digit
digital voltmeter. The better the equipment used, the more accurate the
results will be. A thermocouple calibration device that also has a
voltage scale is an ideal source. If any scale is not normally used in any
particular FEM, that scale does not need to be calibrated.
Each FEM must be checked and calibrated separately, but only one
input of each FEM need be checked or calibrated. Point 10 should be
used if possible because it is in the center of the point range on the
FEM. However, any point that is not in use will work satisfactorily.
Voltage and
Thermocouple
FEM
Calibration
Constants
81 61 41 21 1
100 80 60 40 20
POINT 10
20.000 mV
Digital Voltmeter
5 1/2 Digit
20 mV
80 mV
400 mV
Stable low voltage power
supply or thermocouple
calibration device
2 volts
Figure 8.4.1. Voltage and Thermocouple FEM Calibration
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating MUX FEMs
SV: 8-4-4
It is not necessary to calibrate all scales on a FEM that uses only one
scale. Thermocouples use the 20 and 80 mV ranges and 4--20 mA
uses the 400 mV range. To determine which scale needs to be
calibrated, put the MIB in manual and cursor to the “Calibrate” field.
Press [NEXT OPT] until “Display” appears and then press [ENTER].
The scale that appears just below the “Display” indication is the scale
that would need to be calibrated. Other scales in that FEM can be
checked in a similar manner. Few system installations use the 2 or 20
volt ranges. You may, at your option, choose not to calibrate the 2 volt
range. Any unused ranges left uncalibrated will not affect system
operation nor will they create any alarms.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating MUX FEMs
SV: 8-4-5
Checking and Calibrating Voltage Input and Thermocouple FEMs
-
To check and calibrate Voltage Input and Thermocouple FEMs:
1. Connect a voltage source to an input of the FEM to be calibrated
as shown in Figure 8.4.1. Replace the FEM cover, install it in the
FlexTerm, and fasten the ground lug at the bottom of the FEM.
2. Call up the appropriate I/O Block Configuration (MIB) screen and
set it to MANUAL.
3. Cursor to the “Sig Char” field.
NOTE: Write down the characteristic shown in the “Sig Char” field of
the MIB screen or print the screen so you can reenter the proper scale
at the completion of the calibration of this FEM.
4. Press [NEXT OPT] until the 20 mV scale appears and then press
[ENTER].
5. Verify that the “Default Calibration” indication is not active on the
MIB screen. If it is active, use the following procedure to enter
the constants for this scale. If no calibration value is listed on the
FEM, proceed to step 6.
6. Cursor to the “Calibrate” field and press [NEXT OPT] until “Enter
Const” appears.
a. Enter the exact value written on the FEM label in the “Cal
Const” field for this scale.
b. Adjust the output of the voltage source to exactly 20.000 mV.
The “Field Value” on the MIB screen should read between
19.975 and 20.025 mV. If the calibration is satisfactory,
proceed to step 10.
7. Cursor to the “Calibrate” field and press [NEXT OPT] until “CAL
HIGH” appears.
8. Verify that exactly 20.000 mV is still going into the input of the
FEM and press [ENTER].
9. Write the new value from the “Cal Const” field on the FEM label
for future reference.
NOTE: If any calibration constant is greater than 1.50000 or less than
0.50000, the voltage used in the calibration procedure was incorrect or
the FEM is bad and should be replaced. The valid ranges for calibration
constants are:
0.50000 to 0.65535
and
1.00000 to 1.50000.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating MUX FEMs
SV: 8-4-6
10. Repeat Steps 4 through 9 for the 80 mV, 400 mV, and 2 volt
scales. In steps 4 and 8 use 80.000 mV, 400.00 mV, or 2.0000
volts as required. Calibration specifications for step 6 should be
between: 79.950 to 80.050 mV
399.80 to 400.20 mV
1.9990 to 2.0010 volts.
11. After all scales have been calibrated, correct the “Sig Char” by
changing it back to what it was before you began the procedure.
12. Restore the “Sig Char” field of the MIB screen to the value
recorded in step 3.
13. Put the MIB screen back into AUTO Mode.
“Cal Low” is automatically calibrated within the FEM. This completes
the calibration for this FEM.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating MUX FEMs
SV: 8-4-7
Calibrating 4--20 mA FEMs
Only the 400 millivolt scale of each 4--20 mA FEM needs to be
calibrated. The 1984--0607--0004 FEM has internal 20 ohm resistors.
This FEM type can be calibrated using the Rosemount 262 Field
Calibrator or other suitable current source. Figure 8.4.2 shows the
calibration connections for the 1984--0607--0004 4--20 mA FEM.
4--20 mA FEM
81
61 41 21 1
Point 10
100 80 60 40 20
Calibration
Constants
Rosemount
262
Select #2 on the
262 Calibrator
Figure 8.4.2. 4--20 mA FEM Calibration for 1984--0607--0004
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating MUX FEMs
SV: 8-4-8
Checking and Calibrating the 4--20 mA FEM
-
To check and calibrate a 4--20 mA FEM:
1. Connect a current source to an input of the FEM to be calibrated.
Replace the FEM cover and install it in the FlexTerm and fasten
the ground lug at the bottom of the FEM. See Figure 8.4.2.
2. Call up the appropriate I/O Block Configuration screen (MIB) and
set the Mode to MANUAL.
3. Verify that the Default Calibration indicator is not active on the
MIB screen. If it is, use the following procedure to enter the
constants. If no calibration value is listed on the FEM, proceed to
step 4.
a. Cursor to the “Calibrate” field and press [NEXT OPT] until
“Enter Const” appears.
b. Enter the exact value written on the FEM in the “Cal Const”
field.
4. Adjust the output of the current source to exactly 20 mA. The
lower line of the “Field Value” on the MIB should read between
99.70 and 100.30%. If it does not, proceed to step 5.
5. Cursor to the “Calibrate” field and press [NEXT OPT] until “Cal
High” appears.
6. Verify that exactly 20 mA is still going into the input of the FEM
and press [ENTER].
7. Write the new value in the “Cal Const” field on the FEM label for
future reference.
NOTE: If the calibration constant is greater than 1.50000 or less than
0.50000 the current used in the calibration procedure was incorrect, or
the FEM is bad and should be replaced. The valid ranges for calibration
constants are:
0.50000 to 0.65535
and
1.00000 to 1.50000.
“Cal Low” is automatically calibrated within the FEM. This completes
the calibration for this FEM.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating MUX FEMs
SV: 8-4-9
Checking Calibration of RTD FEMs
The calibration of RTD FEMs should be checked periodically along with
the other FEMs even though RTD FEMs require no calibration. The
procedure below includes both the 1984--0607--0003 Solid State FEMs
and 1984--0607--0009 Reed FEMs. Figure 8.4.3 shows the connections
to be made when calibrating a RTD FEM.
A precision resistor should be used. This resistor should be preferably
a 100 to 200 ohm 0.01% tolerance. A metal film resistor of any value
between 100 and 300 ohms will work if an accurate meter is available to
read its exact value. The resistor to be used is connected to one input
(preferably in the middle of the FEM inputs) of the RTD FEM.
61 41 21
1
RTD FEM
80 60 40 20
4 WIRE
SETUP
POINT 10
V+
I+
V--
I--
3
WIRE
SETUP
POINT 10
V+
I+
V--
I--
PRECISION
RESISTOR OR
RESISTOR OF
KNOWN VALUE
Figure 8.4.3. RTD FEM Calibration Check
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating MUX FEMs
SV: 8-4-10
Checking RTD FEM Calibration
NOTE: It is necessary for the controller to be in NORMAL status
(Overview ControlFile screen). The individual block should be in
MANUAL mode to check calibration.
-
To check RTD FEM calibration:
1. Connect a resistor to an input of the FEM to be calibrated as
shown in Figure 8.4.3. Replace the FEM cover, install it in the
FlexTerm, and fasten the ground lug at the bottom of the FEM.
2. Call up the appropriate I/O Block Configuration (MIB) screen and
set the Mode to MANUAL.
3. Cursor to the “Sig Char” field.
NOTE: Write down the characteristic from the “Sig Char” field or print
the screen so you can reenter the proper scale after calibrating the
FEM.
4. Press [NEXT OPT] until “3 W Ohms” or “4 W Ohms” (depending
on which setup is used) is displayed and press [ENTER].
5. Verify that the “Field Value” reads the correct resistance value. If
it does not, first recheck the value of the resistor, and if it is
correct, replace the FEM. RTD FEMs cannot be recalibrated.
6. After the RTD FEM has been checked, restore “Sig Char” to the
original value.
7. Set the block back to AUTO Mode.
This completes the calibration check for this RTD FEM.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating MUX FEMs
SV: 8-5-1
Section 5:
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
This section covers calibration of the Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
(FICs) listed in Table 8.5.1. Analog I/O Field Interface Cards are
housed in a Multi-Strategy or Single-Strategy FlexTerm and are
connected to a MultiLoop or Single-Strategy Controller Processor in the
ControlFile.
CAUTION
The calibration procedures in this section apply only to the
FICs listed in Table 8.5.1.
Table 8.5.1. Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
FIC
Characteristics
Range
Calibration
Accuracy
1984--1394--000x
Non-Isolated Input FIC
4--20 mA
0.1%
1984--1463--000x
Non-Isolated Input FIC
4--20 mA
0.1%
1984--1325--000x
Isolated Input FIC
4--20 mA
0.2%
1984--1466--000x
Isolated Input FIC
4--20 mA
0.2%
1984--1420--000x
Isolated Voltage Input FIC
1--5 volt
0.2%
1984--1273--000x
Non-Isolated Output FIC
4--20 mA
0.3%
1984--1490--000x
Non-Isolated Output FIC
4--20 mA
0.3%
1984--1334--000x
Isolated Output FIC
4--20 mA
0.5%
1984--1469--000x
Isolated Output FIC
4--20 mA
0.5%
Analog I/O uses analog voltages to communicate data between the
Controller Processor card and the FIC.
An analog input FIC drops the field input 4--20 mA current across a
precision resistor to get a 1--5 volt analog value. This analog value is
transmitted to the ControlFile when the Controller Processor card uses
an Analog/Digital (A/D) converter to digitize the value.
An analog output FIC receives a 1--5 volt analog value from the
Controller Processor card and uses an internal A/D converter to
generate the 4--20 mA field current. The output FIC drops the 4--20 mA
field current across a precision resistor to generate a .5--2.5 volt analog
feedback signal. The analog feedback signal is sent to the Controller
Processor where it is converted to digital form and compared with the
original value.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-5-2
Calibration correction constants for each input and output loop are
stored within the Controller Processor card. The calibration procedure
redefines the calibration correction constants.
Calibration is done through the operator console I/O Block Configuration
screens using Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator. Alternatively, a
calibrated current source may be used for the inputs and a precision
meter may be used for the outputs.
All Controller Processor cards are calibrated at the factory so field
calibration of Controller Processor cards should not be necessary.
Controller A/D converters are checked constantly for drift as part of the
Controller’s normal operating routine. It is very rare that a Controller
Processor A/D converter drifts to any extent. If two or more adjacent
blocks exhibit a large amount of drift, the Controller Processor Card
should be replaced.
The resistor on the FIC may be subject to drift, so calibration of each
input and output point should be should be checked at 6-month
intervals.
Calibration is not required when a FIC is replaced. However, calibration
of inputs may be desirable if highest accuracy is desired.
The procedures described below use a Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator.
This provides 0.1 percent accuracy, which is sufficient for most
purposes.
If higher accuracy is required, a precision resistor can be used in the
output loop and an accurate Digital Volt Meter (DVM) (4--1/2 or 5--1/2
digit display) can be used to read the voltage drop across the resistor.
The current can then be calculated using Ohm’s Law.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-5-3
Analog I/O Output Points
The analog I/O output point includes the Field Interface Card (FIC) and
the Controller Processor card.
Figure 8.5.1 shows the I/O Block Configuration screen for an analog
output point.
CAUTION
The calibration procedure for the AOB will output zero and
full-scale readings from the output FIC. The field device
must be disconnected from the circuit. Using the analog
extender card in the CALIBRATE position will bypass all
current to the test points.
I/O BLOCK CONFIGURATION
Address
=1AA103
25-Jan-90 10:42:34
Device Type AIB or AOB
Block Tag Þ
Block Type ÞAOB
Mode
Auto Lock
Source Þ
® MANUAL
Þ no
Actual Value
Value .00
Reverse Acting Þno
Eng Units
Output Value > .00
.00%
Calibrate
Alarm Priority Þ0
Plant Unit Þ0
Hardware Alarm Code 8
Fail Safe Jumper Hold
-.00
® None
0% Value
4. ma
100% Value
20. ma
Output Card Rev 2.1
CONFIG 1
Figure 8.5.1. AOB Block Configuration Screen
NOTE: Using an Analog Extender card (1984--1362--000x) with the
switch in the CAL position eliminates the need to disconnect the field
wiring to check or recalibrate an output point.
NOTE: Special procedures are required for the 1984--1525--000x
Isolated Output Field Interface Card. These procedures are covered in
this section after the procedures for the other cards.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-5-4
Checking Calibration of Analog I/O Output Points
An analog output Field Interface Card (FIC) is calibrated from an AOB
screen. The current produced from the output FIC at 0% is read on a
meter and the value (in milliamps) is entered in the “0% Value” field.
The output is then set to 100% (full scale) and the meter reading is
entered in the “100% Value” field. The CALIBRATE function is entered
last. The system will output the corrected 4.00 and 20.00 mA current.
The voltage drop across the internal precision resistor is measured by
the Controller Processor A/D converter for both readings. Calibration
constants are calculated and stored on the Controller Processor card.
-
To check analog I/O output point calibration:
1. Place the FIC on an analog extender card and move the switch
to the calibrate position. Connect a Rosemount 262 Field
Calibrator as shown in Figure 8.5.2.
2. Call up the appropriate I/O Block Configuration screen and set
the Mode to MANUAL.
3. Cursor to the “Output Value” field and enter 0 (or the equivalent
minimum scaled value).
4. The meter should read between 3.95 and 4.05 mA for a
non-isolated FIC or 3.92 and 4.08 mA for an isolated FIC.
5. Enter 100 % (or the equivalent maximum scaled value) in the
“Output Value” field.
6. The meter should read between 19.95 and 20.05 mA for a
non-isolated FIC or 19.92 and 20.08 mA for an isolated FIC.
7. Calibrate any point with readings that fall outside the specified
range.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-5-5
Output FIC
Analog Extender Card
CAL
MultiLoop or
SIngle-Strategy
FlexTerm
Rosemount
262
Select #1 on 262
Calibrator for All
Output
Figure 8.5.2. FIC Calibration Setup for Current Output
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-5-6
Calibrating Non-Isolated Analog I/O Output Points
NOTE: Calibration of an analog output point should not change in
normal operation. Before changing calibration on an analog output
point, replace the output FIC with a good card to determine if the
calibration change is caused by a faulty card.
-
To calibrate a non-isolated analog output point:
1. Place the FIC on an analog extender card and move the switch
to the “CALIBRATE” position.
2. Connect a Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator as shown in
Figure 8.6.1. Configure the Field Calibrator as a meter.
3. Call up the appropriate I/O Block Configuration screen and set
the Mode to MANUAL.
4. Move the cursor to just above the “Calibrate” field on the screen.
Press the [NEXT OPT] button until “Cal Low” appears, and then
press [ENTER]. The cursor will move to the “0% Value” field and
the FIC will generate a 4 mA current.
5. Enter the exact current reading from the field calibrator into the
“0% Value” field. (You must use a decimal point.) Press
[ENTER].
6. The cursor will move to the “100% Value” field and the FIC will
generate a 20 mA current.
7. Enter the exact current reading from the field calibrator into the
“100% Value” field. Press [ENTER].
8. The system will begin the Calibrate function. The “Calibrate” field
will change to “Calibrate”. The FIC will generate exactly 4.00 mA
and then exactly 20.00 mA. The internal calibration correction
factors for the feedback resistor will be calculated and
permanently stored in the internal memory of the Controller
Processor Card. Wait for the “Calibrate” field to change to
“None”.
CAUTION
Do not disconnect the meter from the circuit until the word
“None” appears in the “Calibrate” field. If the meter is
disconnected too early, the calibration sequence will not
be completed and improper calibration constants will be
entered into the Controller’s internal memory.
9. Return the FIC to its place in the FlexTerm.
10. Set the I/O block to AUTO mode.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-5-7
Calibrating Isolated Output FICs
NOTE: The calibration procedure for the 0--20 mA Isolated Output Field
Interface Card (1984--1525--000x) must be modified because there is
no live zero and the calibration screen expects a value near 4 mA,
rather than 0 mA.
-
To change Isolated Output calibration:
1. Take the output out of service (i.e., either block the valve or
perform the calibration procedure in an unused slot).
2. Call up the appropriate I/O Block Configuration screen and set it
in MANUAL mode.
3. Cursor to the “Calibrate” field and use [NEXT OPT] to get “Cal
Low” in the calibration field. The cursor will jump to the “0%
Value” field.
4. Measure the loop current with an accurate milliameter.
a. If the current is more than 10 microamperes (.010 mA), enter
the measured value plus 4 milliamperes in the “0% Value”
field. Press [ENTER]. Proceed to step 5.
b. If the measured current is less than 10 microamperes
(.010 mA), enter 3.9 in the “0% Value” field. Press [ENTER].
Proceed to step 5.
5. The “Calibrate” field will change to “Cal High” and the cursor will
jump to the “100% Value” field.
6. Enter the measured current reading into the “100% Value” field.
Press [ENTER].
7. If step 4b was performed, go back to step 3. If the output was
near calibration, only one iteration should be necessary. If the
output was not near calibration, two or three iterations may be
required. If step 4b is performed three times and the loop current
is still less than 10 microamperes, there is a hardware problem.
8. Check the calibration by setting the output current to 1% of span.
Check for an output current sufficiently close to 0.20 mA. Also,
check that the output current at 100% of span is sufficiently close
to 20.00 mA. This procedure should calibrate the end points to
within 0.1% or 20 microamperes of the expected value at 1% and
100%. If the values are out of this range, repeat the calibration
procedure.
9. The Analog Output Block (AOB) can be returned to AUTO mode
and the output can be placed back in service.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-5-8
Analog I/O Input Points
The analog I/O input point includes the Field Interface Card (FIC) and
the associated Controller Processor card.
Figure 8.5.3 shows the I/O Block Configuration screen used for
calibration.
Address
I/O BLOCK CONFIGURATION
Device Type AIB
=10AD101
Block Tag Þ
Field Value
-15.29
-15.29
10:42:34
Block Type ÞAIB
Mode
®MANUAL
Auto Lock Þno
Filt Time Þ None
Block Out
Þ None
Calibrate
®None
Nom Out
>None
Eng Units
Þ
Sig Char
Eng Zero
Þ.00
Lo Cutoff Þ.00
Eng Max
Þ100.00
Descriptor Þ
25-Jan-90
>.00
Inst Bias
®.00
ALARMS
Inst High
®None
Crit High ® None
Adv High
®None
Inst Low
®None
Crit Low ® None
Adv Low
®None
Hardware Alarm Code 8
Priority Þ0
Plant UnitÞ0
Al DdBand Þ1.00
Figure 8.5.3. I/O Block Configuration Screen (AIB)
CAUTION
All measurement requirements from the Analog Input Block
(AIB) should be disconnected from the process. If
calibration is checked with the block in AUTO, do so only
with the process OFF. Zero and full-scale readings could
upset an operating process. With the AIB in MANUAL, the
destination block input link will hold the last value before
the AIB was put in manual.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-5-9
Checking Calibration of Analog I/O Input Points
NOTE: Using an Analog Extender card (1984--1362--000x) with the
switch in the CAL position eliminates the need to disconnect the field
wiring to check or calibrate an input point.
-
To check AIB calibration:
The following procedures apply to both current and voltage input FICs.
1. It is necessary to determine the jumper position on the input FIC
to select the proper lead polarity and to switch the setting on the
Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator.
2. Place the FIC on an Analog Extender card and move the switch
to the CAL position.
3. Turn the field calibrator on and adjust the output for exactly 4.00
mA (0.00%). The switch on the left side of the calibrator can be
moved to the “4 mA” position.
4. Call up the appropriate I/O Block Configuration screen and set
the Mode to MANUAL.
5. Record the value shown in the “Inst Bias” field. Set the value to
.00.
6. The “Field Value” on the I/O Block Configuration screen should
display between --0.10 and +0.10% for non-isolated FICs or
--0.20 and +0.20% for isolated FICs.
7. Change the field calibrator to exactly 20 mA (100.00%). The
switch on the left side of the calibrator can be moved to the “20
mA” position.
8. The “Field Value” should read between 99.90 and 100.10% for
non-isolated FICs or 99.80 and 100.20% for isolated FICs.
9. If the readings are outside these ranges, you may wish to
recalibrate the point. See the calibration procedures below.
10. Restore the value of the “Inst Bias” field to the value recorded in
step 5 and put the AIB Mode back to AUTO.
11. Replace the FIC in its slot.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-5-10
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points
The analog I/O input points can be calibrated with a current input or a
voltage input. The calibration procedure is the same for either input
method. The setup will be shown for current input and for voltage input
and then the calibration procedure will be given.
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points Setup Using Current Input
The RMT 262 Field Calibrator provides 0.1 percent accuracy which is
sufficient for most purposes. For more accuracy a precision resistor
(.01%) can be inserted in the loop and an accurate digital volt meter can
be used to monitor the voltage across the resistor.
Figure 8.5.4 shows a Current Input Field Interface Card calibration
setup.
Calibrate an analog input by providing an accurate zero scale input
(4.00 milliamps) to enter the Cal Low function. A full scale input
(20 mA) is needed to enter the CALIBRATE HIGH function.
The field calibrator must be set up correctly to simulate the appropriate
power conditions for the system/self-powered jumper on the card.
Current Input FIC
Analog Input Card
CAL
Rosemount
262
Select #2 on 262 Calibrator
for System Powered Jumper
Postion on FIC.
MultiLoop or
Single-Strategy
FlexTerm
Select #4 for Self-Powered
and Use Reverse Polarity.
Figure 8.5.4. Current Input FIC Calibration Setup
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-5-11
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points Setup Using Voltage Input
Figure 8.5.5 shows an example of a voltage Input Field Interface Card
setup with a Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator. A Rosemount 262 Field
Calibrator can also be used with a precision 250 ohm resistor (0.01%
tolerance) connected across the input of the field calibrator. This will
provide the appropriate voltage from the circuit to calibrate the voltage
input FIC, but it will not be as accurate. To improve accuracy, an
accurate voltmeter can be used to monitor the input voltage at the
extender card test points.
Calibrate voltage input FICs by using a stable voltage source with 1.000
volts applied for the Cal Low function and 5.000 volts applied for the Cal
High function. Use a variable power supply capable of supplying 1 to 5
volts and an accurate digital voltmeter.
Voltage Input FIC
Analog Extender Card
CAL
Precision 250
Ohm Resistor
0.01% Tolerance
Rosemount
262
MultiLoop or
SIngle-Strategy
FlexTerm
Select #4 for
Voltage Input
FIC
Figure 8.5.5. Voltage Input FIC Calibration Setup
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-5-12
Calibrating Analog I/O Input Points
This calibration procedure applies to both the current and the voltage
input techniques.
NOTE: Calibration of an AIB should not change through normal
operation. Before changing calibration of an AIB, verify the calibration
of the Rosemount 262 (or the device being used) and replace the input
FIC with a known good unit. Calibration may be changed, however, if
more accuracy on the inputs is desired.
CAUTION
All measurement requirements from the AIB should be
disconnected from the process. If calibration is checked
with the block in AUTO, do so only with the process set to
OFF. Zero and full-scale readings could upset an operating
process. With the AIB in MANUAL, the destination block
input link will hold the last value before the AIB was put in
manual.
-
To change the calibration of an analog I/O input point:
1. Place the FIC on an extender card setup for either current or
voltage input.
2. Call up the appropriate I/O Block Configuration screen and set
the Mode to MANUAL.
3. Record the value shown in the “Inst Bias” field and set the field to
.00.
4. Adjust the current from the field calibrator to read exactly
4.00 mA (0.00%) or set the input voltage to 1.000 volts.
5. Cursor to the “Calibrate” field and use [NEXT OP] to get “Cal
Low” in the field. Press [ENTER].
6. Adjust the field calibrator current to read 20.00 mA (100.00%) or
set the input voltage to 5.000 volts.
7. Use [NEXT OP] to get “Cal High” in the “Calibrate” field. Press
[ENTER].
8. Restore the “Inst Bias” field to the value recorded in step 3.
9. Set the AIB block mode to AUTO.
10. Return the FIC to its slot.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Analog I/O Field Interface Cards
SV: 8-6-1
Section 6:
Calibrating Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) Output
and Input Points
This section covers calibrating and checking the calibration of the
Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) output and input points.
Checking and Calibrating MAIO Output Points
-
To check the calibration of an MAIO output point:
1. Remove the redundant Field Interface Module (FIM) from service
by unplugging it (if a redundant FIM is installed). The RS3 will
the generate the alarm “RIOB Hardware: Comm Timeout”.
2. Disconnect the FIM output field wiring at the Termination panel
and replace it with a Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator (set up as
an ammeter). The connection depends on whether the output
point is jumpered for self power or for system power.
a. Self-powered output point -- Connect the Calibrator as shown
in Figure 8.6.1 and select button 1 on the Calibrator.
b. System-powered output point -- Reverse the leads shown in
Figure 8.6.1 and select button 3 on the Calibrator.
TB15
TB16
TB17
TB15
TB16
TB17
+ -- S
+ -- S
+ --
+ -- S
+ -- S
+ --
=10AC516
+
--
Self-Powered
Output Point
=10AC516
+
--
System-Powered
Output Point
Figure 8.6.1. Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator Connection for Output Calibration
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) Output
and Input Points
SV: 8-6-2
3. Call up the corresponding I/O Block Configuration screen and set
it to MANUAL mode.
Figure 8.6.2 shows the I/O Block Configuration screen for an analog
output point.
I/O BLOCK CONFIGURATION
Address
=1AA103
25-Jan-90 10:42:34
Device Type AIB or AOB
Block Tag Þ
Block Type ÞAOB
Source Þ
Mode
Auto Lock
® MANUAL
Þ no
Actual Value
Value .00
Reverse Acting Þno
Eng Units
Output Value > .00
.00%
Calibrate
Alarm Priority Þ0
Plant Unit Þ0
Hardware Alarm Code 8
Fail Safe Jumper Hold
-.00
® None
0% Value
4. ma
100% Value
20. ma
Output Card Rev 2.1
CONFIG 1
Figure 8.6.2. Analog Output Block (AOB) Configuration Screen
4. Cursor to the “Output Value” field and enter 0 (or the equivalent
minimum scaled value).
The meter reading must be 4.000+ .016 mA.
5. Enter 100 % (or the equivalent maximum scaled value) in the
“Output Value” field.
The meter reading must be 20.000+ .016 mA.
6. Recalibrate the analog output points if the values displayed on
the meter do not fall within the 4--20mA range.
NOTE: Before calibration of any point is performed, check the accuracy
of the calibration device.
-
To calibrate an MAIO output point:
1. Remove the redundant Field Interface Module (FIM) from service
(if a redundant FIM is installed).
2. Disconnect the FIM output field wiring at the Termination Panel
and replace it with a Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator (set up as
an ammeter). The connection depends on whether the output
point is jumpered for self power or for system power.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) Output
and Input Points
SV: 8-6-3
a. Self-powered output point -- Connect the Calibrator as shown
in Figure 8.6.1 and select button 3 on the Calibrator.
b. System-powered output point -- Reverse the leads shown in
Figure 8.6.1 and select button 1 on the Calibrator.
3. Call up the corresponding I/O Block Configuration screen and set
it to MANUAL mode.
4. Cursor to the Calibrate field and enter the following by using Next
Option: Cal Low.
The cursor will jump to the 0% Value field.
5. Enter the current value displayed on the Rosemount 262 Field
Calibrator in the 0% Value field.
The Calibrate field will change to Cal High.
6. Cursor to the 100% Value field and enter the current value
displayed on the Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator.
The system begins calibrating when the Calibrate field changes
to “Calibrate.” At that moment, the FIM generates exactly 4.00
mA and then 20.00 mA. The internal calibration correction
factors for the feedback resistor are calculated and permanently
stored in the internal memory of the FIM. Calibration is
completed when the Calibrate field changes to “None.”
CAUTION
Do not disconnect the meter from the circuit until the word
“None” appears in the Calibrate field. If the meter is
disconnected too early, the calibration sequence does not
complete and improper calibration constants are entered
into the FIM’s internal memory.
NOTE: You can check the calibration using the check calibration
procedure on the preceding page.
7. Reconnect the field wiring and return the AOB to AUTO.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) Output
and Input Points
SV: 8-6-4
Checking and Calibrating MAIO Input Points
-
To check the calibration of an MAIO input point:
1. Remove the redundant Field Interface Module (FIM) from service
by unplugging it (if a redundant FIM is installed). The RS3 will
the generate the alarm “RIOB Hardware: Comm Timeout”.
For best accuracy, while calibrating a desired point, the point
below the point to be calibrated (the next address) should be at
50%.
2. Disconnect the FIM input field wiring at the Termination Panel
and replace it with a Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator (set up as a
current source). Refer to Figure 8.6.3.
3. Select button 4 on the Calibrator.
4. Call up the corresponding I/O Block Configuration screen and set
it to MANUAL mode.
5. Set the Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator for 4.000 mA output.
The Field Value field of the I/O Block Configuration screen must
read 0.000 +0.10%.
6. Set the Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator for 20.000 mA output.
The Field Value field of the I/O Block Configuration screen must
read 100 +0.10%.
7. Calibrate the analog input point if the values in Field Value do not
fall within the specified range during this calibration checking
procedure.
TB15
TB16
TB17
+ -- S
+ -- S
+ --
=10AC716
+
--
Figure 8.6.4. Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator Connections for Input Calibration
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) Output
and Input Points
SV: 8-6-5
-
To calibrate an MAIO input point:
1. Remove the redundant Field Interface Module (FIM) from service
(if a redundant FIM is installed).
2. Disconnect the FIM input field wiring at the Termination Panel
and replace it with a Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator (set up as a
current source).
3. Select button 4 on the Calibrator (refer to Figure 8.6.4).
4. Call up the corresponding I/O Block Configuration screen and set
it to MANUAL mode.
5. Set the Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator for 4.000 mA output.
6. Cursor to the Calibrate field and enter the following using NEXT
OPTION: Cal Low.
7. Enter the following in the Calibrate field using NEXT OPTION:
Cal High.
8. Set the Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator for 20.000 mA output.
9. Press Enter.
The FIM will go through an internal calibration process.
NOTE: Check calibration, if desired, using the preceding procedure. If
calibration is outside of desired limits, repeat the procedure until the
calibration is within desired limits.
10. Replace the field wiring and return the I/O block mode to AUTO.
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) Output
and Input Points
SV: 8-6-6
RS3: Calibration
Calibrating Multipoint Analog I/O (MAIO) Output
and Input Points
RS3t
Service Manual
Chapter 9:
Maintenance
Section 1:
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-1
Cleaning Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Floppy Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Console Fan Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Console Fan Filter
......................................
Cleaning Cabinet Filters and Screens
..................................
Cabinet Door Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabinet Fan Screen
..............................................
ControlFile Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI Card Cage, HIA, SCI, and SRU Fan Filter
........................
Cleaning Cabinet Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Active Hardware Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintaining the CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Glare Filter on a Command Console CRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Degaussing a Command Console CRT
.............................
Console Diagnostic Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running Off-Line Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ControlFile Power Regulator Card
..................................
ControlFile Power Regulator Card Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Interface (OI) Power Regulator Card
.......................
System Power Supply Units
.......................................
Checking the AC/DC Power Supply Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the AC/DC Power Supply Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Backup Cards in Redundant Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Redundant Coordinator Processor Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Redundant Controller Processor Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing and Installing Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling Fan (System Power Supply Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-4
9-1-4
9-1-5
9-1-6
9-1-6
9-1-8
9-1-9
9-1-9
9-1-9
9-1-10
9-1-11
9-1-12
9-1-13
9-1-14
9-1-14
9-1-15
9-1-16
9-1-17
9-1-18
9-1-19
9-1-19
9-1-21
9-1-24
9-1-26
9-1-27
9-1-28
9-1-29
9-1-29
9-1-30
9-1-31
9-1-32
9-1-32
9-1-32
Contents
SV: ii
Section 2:
Section 3:
RS3: Maintenance
Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-1
AC/DC Power Supply Battery and Charger Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OI NV RAM Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command and Basic Command Console Parts Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Console Hard Disk Drive Removal
........................
Command Console Keyboard, Tape, or Floppy Disk Removal . . . . . . . . . . .
FlexTerm Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Replacement
................
Contact FlexTerm Replacement
....................................
9-2-2
9-2-4
9-2-5
9-2-6
9-2-9
9-2-11
9-2-11
9-2-13
Recommended Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-1
Hand Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fiber Optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-1
9-3-2
9-3-2
9-3-3
9-3-3
Contents
SV: iii
List of Figures
Figure
RS3: Maintenance
Page
9.1.1.
Command Console Fan Filter Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-7
9.1.2.
Cabinet Filters and Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-8
9.1.3.
Command Console CRT Degaussing and Filter Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-15
9.1.4.
ControlFile Power Regulator Voltage and Current Checks . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-19
9.1.5.
ControlFile Power Regulator Card Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-21
9.1.6.
Power Regulator Card Voltage Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-22
9.1.7.
Console Power Regulator Voltage Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-25
9.1.8.
Power Supply Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-26
9.1.9.
Power Supply BATT Switch and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-27
9.1.10. ControlFile Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-30
9.2.1.
Battery and Battery Charger Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-2
9.2.2.
Battery Charger Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-3
9.2.3.
Basic Command Console and Command Console Card Cage
Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-5
9.2.4.
Command Console Rear View (Back Cover Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-6
9.2.5.
Card Cage Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-7
9.2.6.
Hard Disk Drive (Winchester) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-8
9.2.7.
Keyboard and Tape/Disk Drive Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-9
9.2.8.
Keyboard Interface Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-10
9.2.9.
Side Panel Removal Screw Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-11
9.2.10. MultiLoop FlexTerm Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-12
9.2.11.
9-2-13
Contact FlexTerm Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
SV: iv
List of Tables
Table
RS3: Maintenance
Page
9.1.1.
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-2
9.1.2.
Replacement Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-3
Contents
SV: 9-1-1
Section 1:
Scheduled Maintenance
This section covers scheduled maintenance procedures for RS3
components. Periodic inspections, and adherence to the maintenance
schedule, help to avoid system failures.
Procedures in the Scheduled Maintenance Table are described in detail
in this section.
D
D
Cleaning
—
Tape drives
—
Floppy disk drives
—
Trackball
—
Filters
—
CRT
—
Cards
Checking
—
LEDs
—
Calibration
—
Voltages
—
Batteries
—
Redundancy
—
Fans (System Power Supply Units)
Scheduled maintenance procedures are tasks that must be performed
periodically to keep the system hardware in reliable working condition.
Table 9.1.1 gives the scheduled maintenance for parts of the system.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-2
Table 9.1.1. Scheduled Maintenance
Procedures
Item
Frequency
Cleaning Tape Drives
Magnetic Tape Drives
Weekly
Cleaning Console Fan Filters
MiniConsole Cage Fan Filters
MiniConsole Disk Drive Filters
Basic Command Console Filters
Command Console Cage Filters
Weekly
Cleaning Cabinet Filters
Cabinet Door Filters
ControlFile Fan Filters
Cabinet Fan Screens
Weekly
Checking LEDs
Disk Drives
Consoles and ControlFiles
Power Supplies
Weekly
Checking Active Hardware Alarms
Hardware Alarm List
Weekly
Maintaining the Printer
Change Ribbon
As required
Checking the AC/DC Power Supply
Battery
Battery
6 Months
Replacing the AC/DC Power Supply
Battery
AC/DC Power Supplies
Approximately every
four years
Replacing the System Power Supply
Unit Cooling Fan
Power Supply Cooling Fan
3.5 Years
Maintaining the CRT
Glare Filter on MiniConsole CRT
CC and BCC CRT,
Clean and Degauss
6 Months
Running Off-Line Console Diagnostic
Programs
Off-Line Background Diagnostic
Checks
NOTE: This should be done only by
authorized FRSI personnel.
6 Months
Checking Calibration
Analog Input Blocks (AIB)
Analog Output Blocks (AOB)
Multiplexer Input Blocks (MIB)
6 Months
Checking Voltages
ControlFile Power Regulator
Console Power Regulator
6 Months
Checking Backup Cards in Redundant
Pairs
Coordinator Processor
Controllers
6 Months
Cleaning Cards
Consoles, Printer, ControlFiles &
FlexTerms
12 Months or as
required
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-3
Table 9.1.1 lists part numbers of filters used.
Table 9.1.2. Replacement Filters
Application
Filter
Part Name
MiniConsole Card Cage
G12918--0001
Fan Filter Replacement
MiniConsole Floppy Disk Drive
G12918--0002
Fan Filter Replacement
Multitube EC Cabinet
1984--0359--0006
Fan Filter Replacement
Command Console
G12918--0002
Fan Filter Replacement
Cabinet Door, Series I
1984--0359--0003
Filter Replacement, Door
Cabinet Door, Series 2
1984--0359--0008
Cabinet Filter
ControlFile
1984--0359--0001
Fan Filter Replacement
Operator Interface (OI) Card Cage
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
System Resource Unit (SRU)
1984--0359--0002
Filter Replacement -- HIA, SCI, SRU
Tower Electronics Cabinet
1984--0359--0007
Filter Replacement, Tower Door
7U Hanging Cabinet
10P55500011
Filter Replacement, Bottom of Cabinet
Millennium Cabinet
55P0416X012
Filter Replacement, Door
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-4
Cleaning Tape Drives
Magnetic tape drives should be cleaned once a week or after every 8
hours of tape operation. Clean the drive after 2 hours of operation with
new tape cartridges.
Use a 1984--2154--0001 Tape Drive Head Cleaner Kit. Additional
supplies are available in the 1984--2154--0002 Tape Drive Head Cleaner
Refill Kit.
Follow the directions supplied with the kit.
Cleaning Floppy Disk Drives
Disk drives should be cleaned periodically or when excessive errors
occur.
Use a 1984--2891--0001 Floppy Drive Cleaner Kit for the 3.5-inch drives
and a 1984--2891--0002 Floppy Drive Cleaner Kit for the 5.25-inch drives.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-5
Cleaning the Trackball
Most problems with a trackball can be cured by a thorough cleaning.
Dirt accumulates around the ball itself and in the optical disk readouts
inside the assembly. The trackball itself can be replaced without
replacing the entire assembly.
-
To clean a trackball:
Required tools:
#1 Phillips screwdriver
1/16-inch Allen wrench
Source of dry air under pressure (20 psi max)
Denatured alcohol
1. The Trackball Assembly can be part of the Operator Keyboard
Assembly or be free standing.
a. Operator Keyboard Assembly: Unplug the keyboard cable
from the keyboard interface card. Turn the keyboard
assembly over and remove the four screws that hold the
Trackball Assembly to the Operator Keyboard.
b. Free-standing trackball: Unplug the trackball cable. Remove
the four screws that hold the base in place.
2. Remove the two brackets that hold the black box containing the
trackball. Push the black box out. This may require some force
because the black box is glued to the assembly.
3. Unplug the black box from the trackball electronics.
4. Remove the black box top cover (four Allen screws).
5. Remove and clean the ball and the area around the hole in the
cover.
6. Use dry air to blow dust and dirt out of the optical sensor wheels
and sensors.
7. Clean the bearing that holds the ball tightly against the sensor
wheels.
8. Reassemble the black box.
9. Connect the trackball electronics cable and install the box in the
trackball assembly, being careful to center the ball in the hole in
the keyboard before you tighten the brackets.
10. Replace the base or reinstall in the keyboard assembly.
11. Plug in the cable and test. If the trackball does not work, replace
the black box (1984--1653--000x).
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-6
Cleaning Console Fan Filters
Clean the console fan filters a minimum of once per week (more often in
dusty environments) to allow for adequate cooling and to prevent
failures from overheating.
WARNING
The fan blades are exposed during the fan cleaning
procedure. To avoid injury, keep fingers away from the fan.
-
To clean a console filter:
1. Remove the filter.
2. Carefully vacuum the dust off the face of the filter.
3. If the filter is very dirty, clean it using clean water and a mild
detergent. Dry the filter completely before reinstalling it in the
console.
4. If there is a hole in a filter, replace it. Table 9.1.2 lists
replacement part numbers.
Command Console Fan Filter
The Command Console fan filters are located on the bottom of the
console. Figure 9.1.1 shows the location of the fan filters on a
Command Console.
-
To clean a Command Console filter:
WARNING
The fan blades are exposed during the filter cleaning
procedure. To avoid injury, keep fingers away from the fan.
1. Remove the filters by sliding them out towards the side of the
console.
2. Carefully vacuum the dust from the face of the filter.
3. If the filters are very dirty, clean them using clean water and a
mild detergent. Dry the filters completely before reinstalling them
in the console.
4. If there is a hole in a filter, replace it. Table 9.1.2 lists
replacement part numbers.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-7
WARNING
Fan blades are
exposed when fan
filter is removed.
Keep fingers
away.
Slide filters out toward the side of the console.
Console Fan Filters
Figure 9.1.1. Command Console Fan Filter Removal
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-8
Cleaning Cabinet Filters and Screens
Clean the cabinet filters at least once per week, and more often in a
dusty environment. This allows adequate cooling to prevent equipment
failures due to overheating. Figure 9.1.2 shows the location of the
cabinet filters and cabinet fan screen.
Cabinet Fan
Screen
ControlFile
Fan Filter
Loosen wing
nuts and slide
bracket up
OI Card Cage
Filter
Cabinet
door filters
Figure 9.1.2. Cabinet Filters and Screen
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-9
Cabinet Door Filter
-
To clean the cabinet door filter:
1. Remove the cabinet door filter by loosening the wing nuts and
sliding the bracket up.
2. Carefully vacuum the dust from the face of the filter.
3. If the filters are very dirty, wash them with a mild detergent and
rinse with clean water. Dry the filters completely before
reinstalling them.
4. If there is a hole in a filter, replace it. Table 9.1.2 lists
replacement part numbers.
Cabinet Fan Screen
-
To clean the cabinet fan screens:
1. Check the fan cover screens above and below the cabinet
cooling fans for accumulated dust and contaminants.
2. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove the accumulated dust.
3. If the screens are very dirty, remove them, wash them with a mild
detergent, and rinse with clean water. Dry the screens
completely before reinstalling them.
ControlFile Fan Filter
-
To clean the ControlFile fan filters:
1. Remove the ControlFile fan filters by removing the two screws on
either side of the filter.
2. Carefully vacuum the dust from the face of the filter.
3. If the filters are very dirty, wash them with a mild detergent and
rinse with clean water. Dry the filters completely before
reinstalling them.
4. If there is a hole in a filter, replace it. Table 9.1.2 lists
replacement part numbers.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-10
OI Card Cage, HIA, SCI, and SRU Fan Filter
-
To clean the OI Card Cage fan filter:
1. Remove the filter by removing the two screws on either side of
the filter.
2. Carefully vacuum the dust from the face of the filter.
3. If the filter is very dirty, wash it with a mild detergent and rinse
with clean water. Dry the filter completely before reinstalling it.
4. If there is a hole in a filter, replace it. Table 9.1.2 lists
replacement part numbers.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-11
Cleaning Cabinet Surfaces
Clean the cabinet/enclosure surfaces and the work surfaces with a mild
cleaner, such as a dish soap or other cleaner (e.g., “Simple Green”) and
clean tap water. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for proper use.
Use a damp cloth or sponge to apply the cleaner to loosen the dirt and
to remove the mixture of cleaner and residual dirt. Use a nylon or
natural bristle brush on the more difficult areas. This may not remove
all stains. Do not use a harsh cleaner or an abrasive brush, as this may
reduce the protection offered by painted or coated surfaces.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-12
Checking LEDs
LEDs are used on the front of power supplies, the faceplates of cards,
and on disk drives to indicate status. No red LEDs should be lighted.
Find and repair the cause of any lighted red LEDs before proceeding
with other scheduled maintenance procedures.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-13
Checking Active Hardware Alarms
Each Active Hardware Alarm must be periodically checked and verified
to make sure that it is an active alarm. The problem should be
corrected if possible and any inactive alarms deleted. If the alarms are
no longer active, they can be cleared off the Active Alarm list. Alarms
are cleared off the Active Alarm list by using the console Configuror’s
key, cursoring to each individual alarm, and pressing the “C” key. (Not
CTL--C.)
It is possible for the system to create hardware alarms and not clear
them. For example, if a “No Bubble Board Present” alarm is created by
a Coordinator Processor and that Coordinator Processor is then
restarted, the “No Bubble Board Present” alarm will not be cleared from
the Active Hardware Alarm list at the console because the Coordinator
Processor memory of the alarm was cleared with the Coordinator
Processor restart.
CAUTION
Make certain that all alarms are carefully checked and that
active alarms are not deleted.
Check the Active Hardware Alarm list of each console for alarms and
investigate any active alarms showing. If they are true active Hardware
Alarms they should be dealt with in an appropriate manner.
Refer to the Alarm Messages Manual (AL) for a summary and
description of alarm messages.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-14
Maintaining the CRT
Periodically, CRT glare filters must be cleaned and the CRT screen
must be degaussed.
Cleaning Glare Filter on a Command Console CRT
Clean glare filter on a Command Console to remove accumulated dust
and to prevent blurring of the screen image. Figure 9.1.3 shows the
location of the power and signal cables on the Command Console.
-
To clean a Command Console CRT:
1. Turn off power to console on the rear panel of the Command
Console.
2. Remove AC power cable, three coaxial signal cables, and the
green ground wire on the rear of the CRT.
WARNING
Prevent the CRT from sliding off the table, hold the CRT
pan so that it does not tilt while you are removing the CRT
screws.
3. Remove six screws under the CRT pan holding the CRT in place.
Remove the CRT from the console.
4. Clean the CRT filter and screen using a soft cloth and mild soap
and water.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-15
Degaussing a Command Console CRT
Degauss CRTs periodically to remove stray magnetic fields that build up
and cause loss of color convergencies and blurred colors. Figure 9.1.3
shows the location of the degauss button on the CRT monitor.
-
To degauss a Command Console CRT:
NOTE: The degauss button is accessible on some consoles through a
hole in the side of the CRT cover.
1. Remove the six screws holding the CRT cover in place and lift
the cover off.
2. Press and hold the degauss button on the top of the CRT frame
for 10 seconds. The screen images are distorted while the
degauss button is held down.
Degauss Button
Remove Power
And Signal Cables
Console Power
Switches
Figure 9.1.3. Command Console CRT Degaussing and Filter Cleaning
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-16
Console Diagnostic Programs
Run Console Online and Off-line Diagnostic programs as a routine
maintenance item. This will help identify possible problem areas before
they affect the operation of the console. The Off-line Diagnostics for the
MiniConsole and the Command Console are loaded from a special
console program floppy disk. The Command Console Off-line
Diagnostics are loaded from a special tape.
CAUTION
Running off line diagnostic tests removes the console from
active process operation. Alarms, trending and the
process operation are not active while the off line tests are
being run.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-17
Running Off-Line Diagnostics
NOTE: Only FRSI personnel should run off-line diagnostic programs.
-
To run the off-line diagnostics:
1. For a Command Console, insert the appropriate Off-Line
Diagnostics tape in the console tape drive, turn the console
power off for 30 seconds and then back on. Hold down the
“Hardware Alarm” button during the power up diagnostics until
the console indicates it is “Booting From Streaming Tape”. This
boots the console and brings up the Off-Line Diagnostics Menu.
2. For a MiniConsole or Basic Command Console, insert the
appropriate Off-line Diagnostics disk in either disk drive, turn off
the console power for 30 seconds and then back on. This boots
the console and brings up the Off-line Diagnostics Menu.
3. Check the Power Up Diagnostic screen for any faults.
4. Run the following tests:
—
Processor RAM Test
—
Character/Att Test
—
Floppy Disk Exerciser (MiniConsole and Basic Command
Console)
—
Tape Exerciser (Command Console)
—
Winchester Disk Exerciser (Command Console)
CAUTION
If you are running the hard disk tests, ensure that a “Full
Image Backup to Tape” is done before the test so the
console configuration can be reloaded at the conclusion of
testing.
RS3: Maintenance
—
Processor ROM Test
—
All Keyboard Tests
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-18
Checking Calibration
The 4-20 mA signal used by Analog Input Blocks (AIB) and Analog
Output Blocks (AOB) of MultiLoop cards (MLC) and constants for
Multiplexer Input Blocks (MIB) are referenced to calibration information
stored in ControlFile nonvolatile memory. This reference signal is
calibrated if a check for accuracy is made.
The 4-20 mA signal used by Analog Input Blocks (AIB) and Analog
Output Blocks (AOB) of Field Interface cards (FICs) and Field Interface
modules (FIMs) are referenced to calibration information stored in the
FIC or FIM on-board nonvolatile memory. This reference signal is
calibrated if a check for accuracy is made.
For procedures, see Chapter 8, Calibration.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-19
Checking Voltages
Check the voltages in each ControlFile and Console.
ControlFile Power Regulator Card
Check voltages on the ControlFile to assure proper operation.
Figure 9.1.4 shows the ControlFile test point locations on the top of the
ControlFile.
Power Regulator
Card Test Points
Green
White
Brown
Blue
Yellow
Red
12 I
5I
Gnd
--12
+5
+12
Controller Test
Points
Brown
Yellow
GND
+5
Top View of ControlFile
Multi and Single
Also Included
Nonvolatile
Memory Card
Test Points
Brown
Yellow
Red
Blue
Red
--12
+12
GND
+5
+12
Figure 9.1.4. ControlFile Power Regulator Voltage and Current Checks
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-20
-
To check ControlFile voltages:
1. Pull the ControlFile out on its rails.
2. Open the ControlFile door and remove the shipping screw (if
present) on the upper left corner of the ControlFile.
3. Use a 4 1/2 digit digital voltmeter (19.999 volt range capability) to
check the voltages.
NOTE: If any of the following voltage checks do not appear to be
correct, see the calibration procedure later in this section.
a. Current Share, +12 Volts (Redundant Power Regulators only).
Measure the voltage between the green test points on both
Power Regulator cards in the ControlFile. The voltage should
be less than 100 millivolts (0.100 volt). The polarity does not
matter.
b. Current Share, +5 Volts (Redundant Power Regulators only).
Measure the voltage between the white test points on both
Power Regulator cards in the ControlFile. The voltage should
be less than 200 millivolts (0.200 volt). The polarity does not
matter.
c. Voltage Check (ControlFiles with test points on Controllers).
For 5 Volts: Measure the voltage between the yellow (+) and
brown (--) test points on the Controller Processor card in the
farthest right slot. The voltage should measure between
+4.95 and +5.05 volts.
For +12 Volts: Measure the voltage between the red (+) and
brown (--) test points on the bubble card. The voltage should
measure between +11.95 and +12.10 volts.
d. Voltage Check (ControlFiles without test points on Controllers).
For +5 Volts: Measure the voltage between the yellow (+)
and brown (--) test points on the Power Regulator card. The
voltage should measure between +5.15 and +5.25 volts.
For +12 Volts: Measure the voltage between the red (+) and
brown (--) test points on the Power Regulator card. The
voltage should measure between +12.10 and +12.20 volts.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-21
ControlFile Power Regulator Card Adjustment
NOTE: Voltage adjustments should be made only if the voltage checks
indicate they need to be adjusted. These are factory adjustments and
should not require periodic changing.
Make the series of voltage adjustments on the ControlFile to ensure
proper voltage and current balance between the two redundant Power
Regulators in the ControlFile. The voltage test points to use are on the
top of the ControlFile.
The ControlFile is on rails and can be pulled out. For explanations of
the voltages, see the circuit description of the ControlFile Power
Regulator card in Chapter 4, “ControlFiles”.
Figure 9.1.5 shows the Power Regulator card test points. Figure 9.1.5
shows the voltage adjustment locations on the Power Regulator card.
CAUTION
Voltage checks must be made with all ControlFile card
switches in the DISABLE position.
Power Regulator
Test Points
Green
White
Brown
Blue
Yellow
Red
12 I
5I
Gnd
--12
+5
+12
NOTE: Some
Cards May Not
Have Test Points
Controller Test
Points
Brown
Yellow
TOP VIEW OF ControlFile
Gnd
+5
Multi and Single
Also Include
Blue
Red
--12
+12
Bubble Card Test
Points
Brown
Yellow
Red
Gnd
+5
+12
Figure 9.1.5. ControlFile Power Regulator Card Test Points
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-22
RV 1
5 Volt Adjust
RV 2
12 Volt Adjust
CAUTION
Adjust only RV1 and
RV2 on this card.
Figure 9.1.6. Power Regulator Card Voltage Adjustments
-
To adjust a ControlFile power regulator card:
1. Open the ControlFile door and remove the shipping screw on the
upper left corner of the ControlFile.
2. Check that adequate cable length is available on the rear of the
ControlFile and pull it out on the rails.
3. Remove the right hand Power Regulator card from the
ControlFile if redundant Power Regulators are installed in the
ControlFile. If a single regulator is used, it is easier to adjust if it
is in the left slot. Use a short insulated screwdriver for all
adjustments. To make adjustment easier you may also remove
the redundant Coordinator Processor or if a nonredundant
Coordinator Processor card is used, move it to the right slot.
NOTE: These voltage checks require a 4 1/2 digit digital voltmeter.
(19.999 volt range capability.)
a. ControlFiles with test points on Controller Processor cards:
+5 Volt Adjustment: Measure the voltage between the yellow
(+) and brown (--) test points on the Controller in the farthest
right slot. Adjust the voltage to measure exactly +5.000 volts
by turning RV 1.
+12 Volt Adjustment: Measure the voltage between the red
(+) and brown (--) test points on the Nonvolatile Memory card.
Adjust the voltage to measure exactly +12.000 volts by
turning RV 2.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-23
b. ControlFiles without test points on Controller Processor cards:
+12 Volt Adjustment: Measure the voltage between the red
(+) and brown (--) test points on the Power Regulator card.
Adjust the voltage to measure exactly +12.100 volts by
turning RV 2.
4. If a single Power Regulator is used in the ControlFile, the
procedure is complete. If redundant Power Regulators are used,
go to step 5.
5. Remove the left Power Regulator card and insert the redundant
Power Regulator card in the left slot and repeat steps a or b
above, as appropriate.
6. After both Power Regulators card have been adjusted, insert the
second Power Regulator card into the right slot and make the
following checks.
a. Current Share, +12 Volts. (redundant Power Regulators only)
Measure the voltage between the green test points on both
Power Regulator cards in the ControlFile. The voltage should
be less than 100 millivolts (0.100 volt). The polarity does not
matter.
b. Current Share, +5 Volts. (redundant Power Regulators only)
Measure the voltage between the white test points on both
Power Regulator cards in the ControlFile. The voltage should
be less than 200 millivolts (0.200 volt). The polarity does not
matter.
c. Check the last (farthest right) Controller Processor card in the
ControlFile to make sure the voltage is between 4.95 and
5.05 VDC.
NOTE: If any of the preceding voltage checks do not appear correct,
repeat the procedure. If they are still not correct, contact your local
FRSI Service Representative.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-24
Operator Interface (OI) Power Regulator Card
Make voltage checks on each MiniConsole and Command Console
Power Regulator card to ensure proper operation. The Command
Console will have one of the two power regulators as shown in
Figure 9.1.7 . Determine which is installed in the console and make the
appropriate voltage checks. The console does not need to be powered
down for these voltage checks. The voltage checks require a 4-1/2 digit
digital voltmeter (19.999 volt range capability).
Open a MiniConsole by loosening the captive screws on the disk drive
and pulling the MiniConsole out 2 to 3 inches (5 to 8 cm). Open the
front casting by loosening the two front casting captive screws.
Open a Command Console by removing the four screws securing the
rear door of the console.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-25
G
NOTE: If any console voltage checks do
not appear correct, contact your local FRSI
Service Representative.
G
R
R
R
R
R
R
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Measure between
5.100 and 5.200 Volts
Measure between
5.100 and 5.200
Volts
Measure between
12.100 and 12.200
Volts
Measure between
12.100 and 12.200
Volts
Console Power
Regulator without
Connector
Console Power
Regulator with
Connector
Figure 9.1.7. Console Power Regulator Voltage Checks
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-26
System Power Supply Units
Make voltage checks on each power supply module to ensure proper
operation. Each power supply module converts AC line voltage to the
DC voltage required by the equipment and field instruments. The power
supply module output is rated at 1200 watts. The switching power
supplies have universal AC inputs with power factor correction and can
operate over an input range of 85--264 VAC, 47--63 Hz without
reconfiguration. However, this supply voltage will be passed through
auxiliary output, so AC voltage ranges for auxiliary devices (cabinet
fans) must be properly defined. The power supply module outputs are
provided with overvoltage, overcurrent, and short circuit protection.
A pair of isolated test jacks on the front of each power supply module
enable monitoring of output current (see Figure 9.1.8).
Each power supply module has two front-mounted LEDs:
D
D
The amber LED indicates that the power supply module’s AC
input is energized.
The green LED indicates that the DC output voltage is within
tolerances.
FAN
LED Indicators and
Current Monitor
Test Jacks
DC
AC
-+
1 VDC = 100% LOAD
I
O
P
O
W
E
R
L
O
C
K
Figure 9.1.8. Power Supply Module
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-27
Checking the AC/DC Power Supply Battery
In order to check the AC/DC power supply battery, the Power Supply
NORM indicator (green LED) must be on and the equipment must be
running for at least five minutes. A timer prevents battery testing before
five minutes after power is applied or within five minutes of a previous
battery test.
-
To test the battery:
1. Press the BATT TEST pushbutton (Figure 9.1.9) once.
2. The Power Supply NORM indicator (green LED) will go off for
approximately 5 seconds and then come back on.
3. If the Power Supply FAULT indicator (red LED) comes on, see
Chapter 9 for troubleshooting guidance.
OUTPUT
CURRENT
30
TEST
BATT
BATT TEST Pushbutton
FAULT
NORM
PS
3
FAULT
NORM and FAULT Indicators
BATT
ON
BATT
FAULT
OFF
PS
FAULT
LINE
RTN
NEUT
AC IN
POS
GND
PS OUTPUT
Figure 9.1.9. Power Supply BATT Switch and Indicators
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-28
Replacing the AC/DC Power Supply Battery
The AC/DC power supply batteries should be replaced periodically to
maintain adequate backup power in the event of an AC power failure.
The replacement time of the batteries is dependent on the amount of
use the batteries receive and the ambient temperature. In general.
batteries in ambient temperatures under 30_ C (86_ F) should be
replaced every three years. The procedure for removal and
replacement of power supply batteries is covered in the Parts
Replacement section of this chapter.
NOTE: Always replace batteries in pairs. Do not mix batteries from
different manufacturers.
Chapter 1 of this manual gives a hardware description of the AC/DC
power supply and the battery charger board.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-29
Checking Backup Cards in Redundant Pairs
When redundant Coordinator Processor and Controller Processor cards
are used, the backup cards should be checked for proper operation to
assure complete system integrity. This test is done using a Configuror’s
key on any console that owns the particular node.
NOTE: Switching to the backup cards in the ControlFile will not affect
process operation. However it is recommended that these tests be run
off line to allow troubleshooting when necessary.
Checking Redundant Coordinator Processor Cards
-
To enable redundant Coordinator Processor cards:
1. Make sure there are no Alarm indications on the redundant
Coordinator Processor card. If the word “Alarm” is next to the
Boot Level indication, you must clear a problem on the redundant
Coordinator processor card before proceeding with the test.
2. Bring the cursor down to the redundant Coordinator Processor
indication on the ControlFile Status screen (see Figure 9.1.10).
The cursor will go only to the redundant unit.
3. Press the ENTER button and observe that within a few seconds
the redundant Coordinator Processor card takes over as primary.
The changeover will be indicated by the Program Level, Links,
and Idle Time information moving to the other card. A “CP
Switch Complete” alarm will also be generated. If the backup
card fails for any reason, the original card will take over and an
alarm will be generated indicating the faulty card.
4. Allow the new card to run for several minutes to assure proper
operation. If you choose, the card that was switched in can be
left as primary CP. This will not affect system operation.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for all ControlFiles with redundant
Coordinator Processor cards.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-30
Checking Redundant Controller Processor Cards
-
To enable redundant Controller Processor cards:
1. Make sure there are no Alarm indications on the redundant
Controller card. If the word “Alarm” is on the ControlFile Status
screen, you must clear a problem with the redundant card before
the test can continue.
2. The primary Controller Processor will show all values. The
redundant processor shows which card is primary (“A” in
Figure 9.1.10). Cursor to the primary indication (“A”).
3. Press ENTER and observe that the redundant card takes over as
primary CP within a few seconds. The changeover will be
indicated by operating data moving to the new card. A “Cont
switch Complete” alarm will be generated. If the backup card
fails for any reason, the original card will take over and an alarm
will be generated indicating the faulty card.
4. Allow the new card to run for several minutes to assure proper
operation. If you choose, the card that was switched in can be
left as primary CP. This will not affect system operation.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for all redundant Controller Processor
cards.
CONTROL FILE STATUS
07-Aug-98
15:34:12
Node Address >1
File Status >Stdby
Batch CP
Batch Config NVM 128 K
Left CP: Boot 4.03
Prgm P1.09 Avail Links 39 Idle Time 45. %
Right CP: Boot 4.03
Left Program NVM Free 32. %
BRAM V1.16 Soft Count 0
Additional Images:
1. MPC2+
Config NVM Free 328 K
+--------------- A --- B --- C --- D --- E --- F --- G --- H
Alarm
MPC+
6.05
P1.11
95. %
96. %
76
4600
Alarm
MPC+
6.05
P1.11
47. %
54. %
69
4554
MPC+
6.05
P1.11
86. %
98. %
77
4554
PLC+
6.05
P1.11
97. %
99. %
77
4600
®Norm
®no
®no
®Norm
®no
®no
®Norm
®no
®no
>Stdby
®no
®no
1_7_7
1_7_7
1_7_7
1_7_6
SC Time Out
ÞNone
ÞNone
ÞNone
ÞNone
Scan time
NV Mem Used
Þ1. S
8 K
Þ1. S
32 K
Þ.25 S
8 K
Þ1. S
8 K
Control Type
Boot Rev
Prgm Rev
Idle Time
Free Space
Avail Links
Avl Trnd Spc
Primary
Status
Alarm Inhib
Start Cal
Start Cal
Jumper Code
Figure 9.1.10. ControlFile Status Screen
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-31
Removing and Installing Cards
You must follow these precautions and procedures when removing or
inserting cards in the system. Observe these precautions and
instructions when working on the system. 1
D
D
D
D
Use a grounded wrist strap with a built-in one megohm resistor
for your safety and to prevent damage to static sensitive circuits.
The resistor allows static electricity to drain to ground while
isolating you from direct ground.
Before removing AC and DC power from the system, move all
Nonvolatile Memory card ENABLE/DISABLE switches to the
DISABLE position.
Before removing or inserting any card (except a PeerWay buffer
card) in a ControlFile, first disable the Nonvolatile Memory card,
then disable the secondary Coordinator Processor card, and then
disable the primary Coordinator Processor card by placing the
ENABLE/DISABLE switches to the DISABLE position.
Always power down consoles before removing or installing cards.
NOTE: The Disk Shutdown (DS) command should always be
performed before powering down the console. This will purge
the cache and prevent possible loss of data.
D
Check the jumper positions when you replace a card.
D
Ensure that cards are seated properly.
D
D
D
D
RS3: Maintenance
—
Place your right thumb on the upper plastic card extractor
lever and place your left thumb on the lower extractor.
—
Push evenly and firmly with both thumbs at the same time.
You should feel the card seat.
All circuit cards must be in antistatic bags when outside their card
cage. Use approved antistatic bags when shipping or storing
cards.
Never handle circuit cards by the edge connectors. Small
amounts of oil from your skin can contaminate the edge
connectors, causing problems with intermittent contacts.
Use only approved nonstatic brushes to clean edge connectors.
Never use erasers, abrasive materials, or nylon brushes.
Abrasives can remove the gold flash, and other materials can
cause static electricity damage to onboard components. Follow
the instructions in “Cleaning Cards” in this section.
When powering up the ControlFile, first enable the Nonvolatile
Memory card, then enable the primary Coordinator Processor card,
and then enable the secondary Coordinator Processor card.
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-1-32
Cleaning Cards
Cards should be removed and cleaned once a year (more often in
installations where conductive dust is present). The cards must be
removed and cleaned in an antistatic work area. Use an antistatic mat
on the work surface and an antistatic wrist strap. Clean cards with a
static-protected air hose or vacuum cleaner.
-
To remove dust from cards:
1. Use an air hose to blow the dust off the cards and assemblies.
Use very dry air or an ionizing nozzle on the air hose to prevent
static damage to the cards. Air pressure should be limited to 2.1
Kg/cm2 (30 psi).
or
2. Use a vacuum cleaner. We recommend use of a dust
attachment with a wire wrapped around the brush bristles.
Connect the wire to ground through a 1 megohm resistor to
eliminate static buildup on the brush.
-
To clean edge connectors:
CAUTION
Do not use a rubber eraser to clean edge connectors. A
rubber eraser wears away the thin gold coating on the
connector and will then allow the contacts to corrode.
1. Use a “RUSH BRUSH” or similarly designed edge connector
brush to remove oxidation and contaminants from the gold
coated edge connectors.
2. To remove contaminants, wipe connector contacts with a soft
tissue wetted with denatured alcohol.
Storing Cards
Cards must be stored in a clean area, free of corrosives. Always store
cards in an approved antistatic bag.
Cooling Fan (System Power Supply Units)
The only regular maintenance required for the System Power Supply
Unit is replacing the cooling fans on the power supply modules. The
recommended maintenance interval for replacing the fan is 3.5 years
(42 months). See SV:NO TAG for detailed information on fan
replacement.
RS3: Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
SV: 9-2-1
Section 2:
Parts Replacement
This section gives details on how to replace parts of the RS3.
Procedures are not given for all parts in the system, but for those that
may be complicated. The person performing the maintenance should
have attended an RS3 maintenance class. Proper procedures (as
outlined below) must always be followed when removing or installing
modules in the system. It is also assumed that the technician working
on the system is familiar with the plant process operations and the
consequences of any actions taken. Observe the following precautions
and instructions while working on the RS3:
Parts of devices that are listed as replacement parts are permitted to be
replaced in the field with the stated replacement part as designated in
the user documentation. Any part of a device that is not listed as a
replacement part is not to be replaced in the field, but must be
returned to the factory for repair.
D
Use a grounded wrist strap with a built in one megohm resistor
for your safety and to prevent damage to static sensitive circuits.
The resistor allows static electricity to drain to ground and still
isolates you from direct ground.
D
Always first disable the Nonvolatile Memory and then the primary
and secondary Coordinator Processor cards before removing or
inserting cards in the ControlFile (with the exception of the
PeerWay Buffer cards).
D
Always power down consoles before removing or installing
console cards.
D
D
D
D
NOTE: The Disk Shutdown (DS) command should always be
performed before powering down the console. This will purge
the cache and prevent possible loss of data.
Disable the Nonvolatile Memory card before removing AC and
DC power.
Any circuit card assemblies that are removed from the system
and stored or transported must be put into antistatic bags.
Never handle circuit card assemblies by the edge connectors.
Small amounts of oil from your skin can contaminate the edge
connectors and cause intermittent contacts and problems with
the system.
When powering up the ControlFile, first enable the Nonvolatile
Memory card and then enable the primary and secondary
Coordinator Processor cards.
NOTE: The numbers circled in the figures of this section refer to the
steps in the procedures.
RS3: Maintenance
Parts Replacement
SV: 9-2-2
AC/DC Power Supply Battery and Charger Replacement
It may be possible to turn off one AC/DC Power Supply for maintenance
purposes and not affect the rest of the system operation if the remaining
supplies have sufficient capacity to carry the current. This can be
determined by checking the current meter on each remaining supply.
CAUTION
If the complete system is to be shut down, the switches on
the Nonvolatile Memory cards must be switched off before
turning off the AC and battery power.
Figure 9.2.1 shows the AC/DC Power Supply.
Battery
Charger
Board
AC/DC Power
Supply
Battery Tray
Screws
AC Breaker
AC
Entrance
Panel
Figure 9.2.1. Battery and Battery Charger Replacement
RS3: Maintenance
Parts Replacement
SV: 9-2-3
-
To access the power supply and batteries:
1. Turn off the battery switch on the AC/DC Power Supply.
2. Turn off the breaker on AC entrance panel to the AC/DC Power
Supply.
WARNING
To prevent accidental injury, make certain you have turned
off the correct circuit breaker. The amber light on the front
of the power supply should be off.
3. Remove all cables to the AC/DC Supply.
4. Remove the bracket in front of the supply holding it in place.
WARNING
The AC/DC Power Supply weighs 70 pounds (32 kg). At
least two persons should remove the supply from the
cabinet to prevent injury.
5. Remove the supply from the cabinet.
6. Remove the cover over the batteries and open the battery
charger compartment access door.
7. The batteries or battery charger can be removed.
NOTE: If a replacement battery or battery charger board is not
available, the AC/DC Power Supply can be reinstalled without them and
will supply 30 volts DC to the system as long as AC voltage is available.
8. When replacing the battery charger board, make sure the cables
are installed correctly. See Figure 9.2.2.
Green Wire On Cable Goes Here
White Dot On Cable
Goes Here
Two Wire Cable
J0
J192
Figure 9.2.2. Battery Charger Cable Connections
RS3: Maintenance
Parts Replacement
SV: 9-2-4
OI NV RAM Battery Replacement
If either battery is low, the corresponding red LED lights and an alarm is
generated. Both batteries should be replaced as soon as practical.
See the write-up on the NV RAM card for the battery part number.
NOTE: Replace only one battery at a time so that the other may keep
the RAM refreshed.
-
To replace the batteries:
CAUTION
Use a grounded wrist strap with a built-in one megohm
resistor for your safety and to prevent damage to static
sensitive circuits (such as the RAM).
1. Power down the card cage and remove the OI NV RAM card.
2. Disconnect the battery by setting the jumper (HD1 or HD2) to
“OFF”.
3. Replace the battery and reconnect it by setting the jumper to
“ON”. Mark the date on the Battery Date Code label.
4. Repeat for the other battery.
5. Restore the card to the cage and power up the cage.
RS3: Maintenance
Parts Replacement
SV: 9-2-5
Command and Basic Command Console Parts
Replacement
Figure 9.2.3 shows the cable connections on the rear of the Command
Console.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to components, only the Printer and
PeerWay connections may be changed with power to the
console turned on.
Keyboard
Cable
PeerWay A
Winchester and Tape
Drive on Command
Console or Disk Drive
on Basic Command
Console
Console Alarm
Modules
Printer
PeerWAy
B
30 Volt Power
(A Bus)
Color
CRT
Redundant 30 Volt Power
(Optional B Bus)
Fan Power Disk Drive
Power
Figure 9.2.3. Basic Command Console and Command Console Card Cage Cable Connections
RS3: Maintenance
Parts Replacement
SV: 9-2-6
Command Console Hard Disk Drive Removal
-
To remove the Command Console hard disk drive:
1. Turn off both AC and DC power switches on Command Console.
2. If optional Power Supply is present, turn off battery and AC
power.
WARNING
Disconnect the AC plugs in the support column to prevent
shock when disconnecting the AC power cables on the
supply.
3. Remove optional Power Supply by removing power cables and
loosening captive screws holding the unit to the chassis. (See
Figure 9.2.4.)
4. Loosen the four captive screws holding the card cage in place
from the bottom of the chassis. (See Figure 9.2.4)
Hard Disk Drive
Optional
Power Supply
Card Cage Captive
Screws (4)
Accessible Through
Holes in Underside of
Housing
Power Supply
Captive Screws (4)
Accessible Through Holes in
Underside of Housing
AC
Plugs
Figure 9.2.4. Command Console Rear View (Back Cover Open)
5. Carefully pull the card cage out and put it on a chair for support.
See Figure 9.2.5.
6. Disconnect the power cables on the rear of the disk drive.
7. Remove the four screws holding the hard disk drive in place and
pull drive out just enough to remove flat cable.
RS3: Maintenance
Parts Replacement
SV: 9-2-7
CARD
CAGE
Figure 9.2.5. Card Cage Removal
8. When installing a new hard disk drive, verify that the jumpers are
the same as indicated in Figure 9.2.6.
CAUTION
Make certain that ALL pins on the flat cable are connected
properly to mating pins on the hard drive. It is possible to
install the cable incorrectly and possibly damage the drive
or SCSI Interface Card.
9. When reinstalling the card cage, make sure the CRT connector is
seated properly, see Figure 9.2.6 . Carefully work the cables into
the area in back of the card cage so you do not crimp the cables.
RS3: Maintenance
Parts Replacement
SV: 9-2-8
1
RED TRACE
ON CABLE
GOES HERE
WARNING
USE EXTREME CARE
WHEN CONNECTING
50 PIN CONNECTOR.
ALL PINS MUST BE
CONNECTED PROPERLY.
CORRECT
JUMPER
POSITIONS
50
HARD DISK
DRIVE
POWER
SCSI
CONTROLLER
POWER
Figure 9.2.6. Hard Disk Drive (Winchester)
RS3: Maintenance
Parts Replacement
SV: 9-2-9
Command Console Keyboard, Tape, or Floppy Disk Removal
-
To remove a Command Console keyboard, tape, or floppy disk:
1. Turn off power to Command Console.
2. Remove the nine screws holding keyboard bezel in place.
3. Remove screws holding the keyboard in place. Figure 9.2.7
shows the screws. Figure 9.2.8 shows the cable connections.
NOTE: When removing the Configurer’s keyboard, you must
disconnect the keyswitch cable from the keyboard interface, located
under the Command Entry Keyboard.
4. When replacing disk drives see Chapter 3, Section 4 for jumper
settings on the drive you have.
TAPE/DISK
AND LOOP
CALLUP
Remove Nine
Bezel Screws
COMMAND
ENTRY
KEYBOARD
CONFIG. KEYBOARD
TRACKBALL
KEYBOARD
ROTATING
KEYBOARD
See Note
Figure 9.2.7. Keyboard and Tape/Disk Drive Removal
RS3: Maintenance
Parts Replacement
SV: 9-2-10
Keyboard Shown Spread Out
For Clarity Only
LOOP
CALLUP
KEYBOARD
J344
CONFIG.
KEYBOARD
1984--1921--0001
KEYBOARD INTERFACE
(SHOWN WITH PARTS
FACING DOWN.)
J335
TRACKBALL
KEYBOARD
J336
J333 J339 J338
J334
CABLE INSTALLED
WITH 1/2 TWIST
J337
CARD CAGE
MOTHERBOARD
ROTATING
KEYBOARD
COMMAND
ENTRY
KEYBOARD
Figure 9.2.8. Keyboard Interface Cable Connections
RS3: Maintenance
Parts Replacement
SV: 9-2-11
FlexTerm Replacement
This portion of the section covers:
D
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Replacement
D
Contact FlexTerm Replacement
MultiLoop and Single-Strategy FlexTerm Replacement
-
To replace a MultiLoop or Single-Strategy FlexTerm:
1. Remove side panels from cabinet to gain access to rear of
FlexTerm. There is normally a screw on the front and rear of the
panel near the center. Remove the side by pushing it up from
the bottom. See Figure 9.2.9.
NOTE: Do not remove field wiring from the field termination card when
replacing the FlexTerm.
Side View Of
Cabinet
Side Panel Screw
Locations, Inside
Cabinet
Push Up Along This Edge
Figure 9.2.9. Side Panel Removal Screw Locations
2. Remove DC power cable and both flat cables from the FlexTerm.
See Figure 9.2.10. You may find it necessary to remove the DC
and flat cables of all FlexTerms in that cabinet in order to move
the FlexTerm past the cables of the other FlexTerms.
CAUTION
Power off all field powered transmitters off before
proceeding to prevent damage to components.
RS3: Maintenance
Parts Replacement
SV: 9-2-12
3. Remove all Field Interface cards from the card cage.
4. Remove the tie wraps holding the field wiring to the side bracket
of the FlexTerm card cage.
5. Remove screws holding field termination board in place. (Also
remove screws holding recorder termination on left side of card
cage if present.) Pull termination board from the socket.
6. Remove the six screws holding the motherboard to the side
panels. This must be done from the back side of the FlexTerm.
7. Remove the FlexTerm motherboard by spreading the side panels
slightly and pulling the left side out first.
3
2
5
3
Figure 9.2.10. MultiLoop FlexTerm Replacement
RS3: Maintenance
Parts Replacement
SV: 9-2-13
Contact FlexTerm Replacement
-
To replace a Contact FlexTerm:
1. Remove the DC power connector and flat cables from the top
and bottom on the FlexTerm. See Figure 9.2.11.
WARNING
To prevent injury or damage to components, all field power
to the FlexTerm must be removed before attempting to
remove a Contact FlexTerm.
1
DO NOT
REMOVE THIS
ROW OF
SCREWS
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 9.2.11. Contact FlexTerm Replacement
2. Remove all Field Interface cards from the card cage.
3. Carefully cut the tiewraps holding the field wiring cables to the
motherboard between the two field termination cards.
NOTE: Do not remove field wiring from the field termination card when
replacing the FlexTerm.
4. Loosen the two captive screws on both Contact field termination
cards and pull the field termination cards out of the sockets.
RS3: Maintenance
Parts Replacement
SV: 9-2-14
5. Remove the four screws holding the motherboard to the wire
tray.
6. Remove the four screws holding the left side of the FlexTerm to
the cabinet.
7. Holding the field termination cards out of the way, pull the
FlexTerm out of the cabinet by pulling the left side out first.
RS3: Maintenance
Parts Replacement
SV: 9-3-1
Section 3:
Recommended Tools
This section lists the tools recommended for servicing RS3 equipment.
Hand Tools
1. Screwdrivers:
a. Phillips, 10I minimum blade length, number 1 tip. For Analog
Power Supply adjustment.
b. Phillips, offset head.
c. Common tip (flat), 14I minimum blade length. For removal of
CPU Power Supply.
2. 1/4I drive socket set with sockets from 5/32I to 9/16I, ratchet,
and extensions.
Equivalent to Model B--80224 from:
Marshall Claude Michael
9674 Telstar Ave.
EL Monte, CA 91731
3. Tool Kit
EZE--ZIP2 Catalog #E22ZTX from:
Marshall Claude Michael
9674 Telstar Ave.
EL Monte, CA 91731
Technitool #7715 from:
Technitool 1--800--832--4866
RS3: Maintenance
Recommended Tools
SV: 9-3-2
Electronics
1. 3M Static Pad, Model 8501, FRSI P/N 7983--0039
2. 3M Portable Field Service Static Kit
3. 4 1/2 digit DVM
Fluke Model 8060A with frequency meter for CFM or
equivalent
4. Degaussing Coil
Model 19--2000 from:
Thordarson Meissner Inc.
Electronic Center
Mt Carmel IL 62863
5. High voltage probe for use with CRTs
Fluke #80K--40
Cleaning
1. Rush Brush for cleaning contacts
Brush part number BR4:
refill part number AA0025 (Fine)
Available from:
The Eraser Company
P.O. Box 4961
Syracuse, NY 13221
2. Vacuum Cleaner
Hoover Model 57065060 or equivalent
3. 3.5/5.25 Disk Drive Cleaning Kit
Recommend 3M or Byte Guard
4. Tape Drive Head Cleaning Kit
FRSI P/N 1984--2154--0001
Tape Drive Head Cleaning Kit Refill
FRSI P/N 1984--2154--0002
RS3: Maintenance
Recommended Tools
SV: 9-3-3
PeerWay
1. Twinax PeerWay Field Termination Kit
FRSI P/N 1167--0016--0006.
Fiber Optics
1. Fiber Optic Source and Power Meter.
Stabilized Source
Power Meter
Model 9XT.
Model 17XT
Available from:
Photodyne
1175 Tourmaline Drive
Newbury Park, CA 91320
Phone: (818) 889--8770 or (805) 499--3636
RS3: Maintenance
Recommended Tools
SV: 9-3-4
RS3: Maintenance
Recommended Tools
RS3t
Service Manual
Chapter 10:
Troubleshooting
Section 1:
Troubleshooting the Power System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1-1
Section 2:
Troubleshooting a PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-1
PeerWay Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plant Status Screen
..............................................
PeerWay Performance Screen
....................................
PeerWay Overview Screen
.......................................
PeerWay Node Screen
.......................................
PeerWay Node Screen General Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Interval Controller (TIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIC Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Broadcast Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Point-To-Point Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Field Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Column 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Columns 2 and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Column 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Column 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Node Screen Lower Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample PeerWay Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Fault Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detecting a PeerWay Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the PeerWay Overview Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Fault Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnosing a Console or SCI PeerWay Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnosing a ControlFile PeerWay Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With One ControlFile on the PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With Multiple ControlFiles on the PeerWay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PeerWay Cable Fault Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Twinax PeerWay Cables
...........................
Troubleshooting Fiber Optic PeerWay Cables
........................
10-2-1
10-2-2
10-2-3
10-2-9
10-2-12
10-2-13
10-2-13
10-2-13
10-2-14
10-2-14
10-2-14
10-2-14
10-2-14
10-2-15
10-2-15
10-2-15
10-2-19
10-2-21
10-2-23
10-2-25
10-2-29
10-2-30
10-2-31
10-2-33
10-2-35
10-2-36
10-2-37
10-2-37
10-2-39
10-2-40
10-2-41
10-2-42
RS3: Troubleshooting
Contents
SV: ii
Section 3:
Section 4:
Section 5:
Section 6:
Troubleshooting Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-1
General Console Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Power-Up Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Off-Line Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Controller Memory Dump Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Memory Dump Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory View Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Node Dump Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Confidence Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRT Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting OI Card Cage Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-2
10-3-3
10-3-8
10-3-12
10-3-12
10-3-14
10-3-15
10-3-16
10-3-19
10-3-20
10-3-21
10-3-22
10-3-24
Troubleshooting ControlFiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4-1
ControlFile Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wipe Bubble Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4-7
10-4-9
Troubleshooting Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-1
Restoring Redundant FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Procedures for Serial Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Procedures for Analog Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field I/O Status Screen (FIC Status Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIC Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RBL Controller and Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-2
10-5-3
10-5-8
10-5-13
10-5-18
10-5-21
Troubleshooting PeerWay Interface Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-6-1
OI Bubble Memory Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-6-1
RS3: Troubleshooting
Contents
SV: iii
List of Figures
Figure
Page
10.2.1.
Plant Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-2
10.2.2.
PeerWay Performance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-3
10.2.3.
PeerWay Overview Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-9
10.2.4.
PeerWay Node Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-12
10.2.5.
PeerWay Overview Screen Under Normal Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-29
10.2.6.
PeerWay Overview Screen with Fault Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-30
10.2.7.
Fault Detection on a PeerWay Overview Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-31
10.2.8.
Fault Detection on a PeerWay Node Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-32
10.2.9.
Fault Detection on a Peerway Overview Screen -- Example . . . . . . . . .
10-2-33
10.2.10. Fault Detection on a Peerway Node Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-34
10.2.11. Peerway Overview Screen (PeerWay A Problem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-40
10.2.12. Twinax “T” Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-42
10.3.1.
Console Power Up Diagnostics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-3
10.3.2.
Console Off Line Diagnostic Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-8
10.3.3.
Memory View Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-17
10.3.4.
Node Dump Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-19
10.3.5.
Menu Confidence Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-20
10.3.6.
Video Signal Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-22
10.3.7.
Checking Video Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-23
10.4.1.
ControlFile Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4-8
10.5.1.
Field I/O Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-13
10.5.2.
FIC Detail Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-18
RS3: Troubleshooting
Contents
SV: iv
List of Tables
Table
Page
10.1.1.
AC/DC Power Supply Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1-1
10.2.1.
Peerway Performance Screen Fields -- Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-4
10.2.2.
PeerWay Performance Screen Fields -- Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-7
10.2.3.
PeerWay Performance Screen Fields -- Part 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-8
10.2.4.
PeerWay Overview Screen Field Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-11
10.2.5.
PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Column 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-15
10.2.6.
PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Column 1
...................
10-2-17
10.2.7.
PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Columns 2 and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-19
10.2.8.
PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Column 4
...................
10-2-21
10.2.9.
PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Column 5
...................
10-2-23
10.2.10. PeerWay Node Screen Definitions Lower Part
...................
10-2-25
10.2.11. PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-27
10.3.1.
Console Power Up Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-4
10.3.2.
Console Off Line Diagnostic Menu Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-9
10.3.3.
Memory View Screen Field Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-18
10.4.1.
ControlFile Troubleshooting
...................................
10-4-2
10.5.1.
Serial (MPC) I/O Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-3
10.5.2.
Multiplex I/O Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-5
10.5.3.
RTD and Thermocouple I/O Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-6
10.5.4.
Analog I/O Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-8
10.5.5.
Analog I/O MUX Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-10
10.5.6.
Analog I/O RTD and Thermocouple Troubleshooting
.............
10-5-11
10.5.7.
Field I/O Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-14
10.5.8.
FIC/FIM Status Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-15
10.5.9.
FIC/FIM Detail Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-19
10.5.10. FIC/FIM Status Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-20
RS3: Troubleshooting
Contents
SV: 10-1-1
Section 1:
Troubleshooting the Power System
This section covers troubleshooting the AC and DC power supplies.
Table 10.1.1 contains procedures for troubleshooting an AC/DC power
supply.
Table 10.1.1. AC/DC Power Supply Troubleshooting
Condition
PS FAULT (red LED) on.
PS NORM (green LED) off.
Amber AC IN lamp not on and no AC is present.
Action
1. Turn BATT ON/OFF switch OFF. Disconnect the
DC power plug at supply. Voltage should
measure between 28 and 34 VDC. If not, replace
the power supply.
2. Replace the battery charger board.
BATT TEST FAULT (red LED) on.
1. Wait 60 minutes and press the BATT TEST
pushbutton.
NOTE: The power supply will continue to share the
DC load without the battery or the battery charger
board installed.
2. Open the battery compartment and determine if
the battery connections are OK.
NOTE: If the batteries show any sign of leaking,
such as white corrosion on the battery posts,
replace the batteries.
3. Check the fuse next to the battery compartment
inside the power supply.
4. Replace the battery charger board. Wait for 60
minutes and press the BATT TEST pushbutton.
5. Replace the batteries.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting the Power System
SV: 10-1-2
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting the Power System
SV: 10-2-1
Section 2:
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
This section covers troubleshooting of the PeerWay:
D
PeerWay screens
D
Fault Diagnostics
D
Cable Faults
PeerWay Screens
These display screens give information useful in diagnosing PeerWay
problems:
RS3: Troubleshooting
D
Plant Status screen
D
PeerWay Performance screen
D
PeerWay Overview screen
D
PeerWay Node screen
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-2
Plant Status Screen
The Plant Status screen (Figure 10.2.1 ) identifies the type of device
located at each node on the PeerWay. To access the screen, type PS
and press [ENTER] on the console keyboard.
A backlit node number indicates that the node is “owned” by the console
on which the screen is displayed.
PLANT STATUS
29-Jul-88 07:30:45
First Node Listed> 1
Peerway Number> ALL
Node Type Displayed > OWNED AND EXISTING NODES
Node
1
CTL Norm
2
CTL Norm
4
MTCC
6
MTCC
Node
Node
Node
CONFIG
3
Figure 10.2.1. Plant Status Screen
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-3
PeerWay Performance Screen
The PeerWay Performance screen shows PeerWay loading and
performance. Call up the screen by entering PP - n, where “n” is the
PeerWay number. The screen (and the related PeerWay Overview
screen) can be configured to group the displayed nodes in Tap Box
order. Use PP - 32 to call up a default screen with the nodes shown in
numerical order. Use [SELECT] on a node number to call up the
PeerWay Node screen for that node.
Figure 10.2.2 shows the PeerWay Performance screen. Table 10.2.1
through Table 10.2.3 describes the fields on the screen.
These fields are described in Table 10.2.1
.
Node
# Type
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
SUMpw
Pway>1
If you change the PeerWay or node
numbers, wait at least 5 seconds for
the screen values to update.
PEERWAY PERFORMANCE
25-Feb-91 12:07:37
Msgs_Point_KBit PW_Q_Buffers Links Host+PW&S+PWto PWto+Srvr+Srvr CPU Thk
TxM,RxM TxK,RxK TxQ,RxQ,Free OutIn toPW+Svce+Host Srvr+Svce+toPW Idl Bsy
These fields are described in Table 10.2.2.
xxx,xxx xxx,xxx =Pxx%
xx,xx =Lx%
Data=xx%
xx
IdleM xxx=Txx% SlotW xx Margin xx Qual A xxx B xxx NdErr xx Time xxxx
These fields are described in Table 10.2.3
Figure 10.2.2. PeerWay Performance Screen
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-4
Table 10.2.1. Peerway Performance Screen Fields -- Part 1
Definition
Item
Node
#
The first 16 node numbers are the same node numbers that are on the
PeerWay Overview screen.
If you change a node number here, it also changes on the PeerWay Overview
screen.
The first 16 numbers must be from the same PeerWay.
Duplicate node numbers generate duplicate message counts.
The last 8 node numbers can be any nodes 1-255.
Node
Type
Shows the PeerWay node type.
If the node type is white, the node is on the current PeerWay. The white
nodes are used in the Sumpw load calculations.
If the node type is green, the node is not on the current PeerWay.
An * after the node type indicates the console that you are at.
If the node type shows SLO followed by the first letter of the actual node type,
in yellow, then the node has not responded within 2 seconds (same PeerWay)
or 5 seconds (different PeerWay). The screen will display the last statistics
from that node. These statistics are not used for the PeerWay sums.
If the node type shows SLOW in yellow, then the node has not responded
recently (within 2 seconds on the same PeerWay or 5 seconds on a different
PeerWay) and does not have recent statistics to show.
If the node type shows OLD followed by the first letter of the actual node type,
in red, then the node has disappeared. The screen will display the last
statistics from that node. These statistics are not used for the PeerWay
Msgs_Point
TxM, RxM
TxM Shows the number of point-to-point messages sent by this node in the
last 4 seconds.
RxM Shows the number of point-to-point messages received by this node in
the last 4 seconds.
If the numbers include - or < (for example, 30--115, <93), then the number of
point-to-point messages cannot be gathered for the node. Instead, other
information is provided to give you a range of values that probably includes
the actual number of point-to-point messages sent by the node. The first
value shows twice the number of most of the point-to-point messages sent
and received in the last second. (If the numbers include a <, then the first
number is 0.) The second number shows the total number of all messages
sent in the last 4 seconds.
Point_KBit
TxK, RxK
TxK
Shows the number of Kbits this node has used to send data (including
headers) in the last 4 seconds.
RxK Shows the number of Kbits this node has used to receive data
(including headers) in the last 4 seconds.
PW_Q_Buffers
TxQ, RxQ
TxQ Shows the number of 64-byte unit data highway (UDH) buffers that this
node has queued up to send to the PeerWay in the last 4 seconds.
RxQ Shows the number of 64-byte UDH buffers queued up for this node to
receive from the PeerWay in the last 4 seconds.
PW_Q_Buffers
Free
Shows the number of UDH buffers available for this node to send or receive
on the PeerWay.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-5
Table 10.2.1. Peerway Performance Screen Fields -- Part 1 (continued)
Item
Links
Out In
Definition
Out
Shows the number of controller links requested from this node by other
nodes. This value is the same as the “OutLinks” field on the PeerWay
Node screen.
In
Shows the number of controller links requested by controllers in this
node. This value is the same as the “InLinks” field on the PeerWay
Node screen.
Letters may appear between the Out and In values. Capital letters indicate
the problem is more severe.
Host
to PW
T or P
Indicates problems in transmitting or receiving links.
A, B, or P
May indicate problems in a PeerWay Tap Box connection.
Shows the average time (in msec) that it took over the last second for a
request from this node to be sent on the PeerWay.
Shows the same value as the “Host” field first value on the PeerWay Node
screen.
PW&S
Svce
If preceded by +, shows the approximate average time (in msec) that it took
over the last second for a reply to a request from this node to be received by
this node after the request was sent on the PeerWay.
If preceded by =, shows the same value as the “Host” field second value on
the PeerWay Node screen (Host to PW + PW&S Svce).
PWto
Host
If preceded by +, shows the approximate average time (in msec) that it took
over the last second for a reply received from a destination node to be
serviced by this node after the request was received by this node.
If preceded by =, shows the same value as the “Host” field third value on the
PeerWay Node screen (Host to PW + PW&S Svce + PWto Host).
PWto
Srvr
Shows the average time (in msec) that it took over the last second for this
node as a server to start acting on a request after the node received a
message from the PeerWay.
Shows the same value as the “Server” field first value on the PeerWay Node
screen.
Srvr
Svce
If preceded by +, shows the approximate average time (in msec) that it took
over the last second for a destination node to be ready to send a reply after
the node started acting on a request.
If preceded by =, shows the same value as the “Server” field second value on
the PeerWay Node screen (PWto Srvr + Srvr Svce).
Srvr
to PW
If preceded by +, shows the approximate average time (in msec) that it took
over the last second for the destination node to send the reply on the
PeerWay after the reply was ready to be sent.
If preceded by =, shows the same value as the “Server” field third value on the
PeerWay Node screen (PWto Srvr + Srvr Svce + Srvr to PW).
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-6
Table 10.2.1. Peerway Performance Screen Fields -- Part 1 (continued)
Item
CPU
Idl
Definition
Shows the number of times (in thousands) that the node CPU goes through
an idle loop each second.
Shows the same information (in thousands) as the “Idletime” field on the
PeerWay Node screen.
Thk
Bsy
Shows the number of SentBUSY, GotBUSY, SentTHK, and GotTHK
messages (combined).
Shows a combination of the information in the “SentBUSY”, “GotBUSY”,
“SentTHK”, and “GotTHK” fields on the PeerWay Node screen.
An S after the value indicates that the value is all sends.
A G after the value indicates that the value is all gots.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-7
Table 10.2.2. PeerWay Performance Screen Fields -- Part 2
Item
Definition
SUMpw xxx,xxx
The first number shows the sum of the TxM fields of the white PeerWay nodes
over the last 4 seconds.
The second number shows the sum of the RxM fields of the white PeerWay
nodes over the last 4 seconds.
xxx,xxx
The first number shows the sum of the TxK fields of the white PeerWay nodes
over the last 4 seconds.
The second number shows the sum of the RxK fields of the white PeerWay
nodes over the last 4 seconds.
=Pxx%
xx,xx=Lx%
Shows the percent of PeerWay bandwidth taken by point-to-point transactions
(including slot wait time).
The first number shows the sum of the Links Out fields.
The second number shows the sum of the Links In fields.
The third number shows the percent of PeerWay bandwidth taken by link
messages (including slot wait time).
Data=xx%
This field shows the relative amount of space that actual data occupies in
point and link transactions. Transactions take up slot wait time and header
information in addition to actual data.
This field shows the percent of the PeerWay bandwidth that would be used by
the actual data if all of the idle messages were used by point and link
transactions similar to the current transactions.
xxx
RS3: Troubleshooting
Shows the sum of the Thk Bsy fields over the last 4 seconds.
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-8
Table 10.2.3. PeerWay Performance Screen Fields -- Part 3
Definition
Item
IdleM
Shows the average of the idle messages at the PeerWay nodes over the last 4
seconds.
=Ixx%
Shows the percent of PeerWay bandwidth used by idle transactions.
SlotW
Shows the node slotwidth value. This is the same as the “slotw“ field value on the
PeerWay Node screen.
Margin
Shows the node’s opinion of what the communication balance between the two
PeerWays should be. This is the same as the “Margin” field value on the PeerWay
Node screen.
Qual A xxx B xxx
Shows the node’s opinion of the quality of PeerWay A and PeerWay B. These are the
same as the “Qual A” and “Qual B” field values on the PeerWay Node screen.
NdErr xx
Shows the sum of the internode errors on the PeerWay Overview screen.
Time xxxx
Shows the sum of the PeerWay-to-server response times for the white nodes, in
milliseconds.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-9
PeerWay Overview Screen
The PeerWay Overview screen (Figure 10.2.3) provides status
information on all PeerWay nodes for both A and B PeerWays. It is
intended to be used for diagnosing hardware and communication
problems.
Call up the screen by entering PO - n at the command line, where n is
the number of the desired PeerWay. If the screen has not been
configured you may call up a default screen by entering PP - 32 and
then PO -- n. The default screen will display nodes in numerical order.
PEERWAY OVERVIEW
Pway
®6 ®
>1
6 MTCC .
®4 ®1 ®
®2 ®
®
®
®
®
®
12-Dec-88
10:42:34
> Scroll Left
®
®
®A B
8
.
.
8
363
®
4 MTCC
1 CTL
7
.
9
9
7
.
9
.
6
8
5301 ®
380
®
2 CTL
.
9
.
.
4
380
Force Margin®None
10:40:00
Actual Margin
9
Idle 1186
PeerWay B Problem
26
®
7424
CONFIG 1
Figure 10.2.3. PeerWay Overview Screen
The PeerWay Overview screen can display status information on as
many as 32 nodes, the maximum number of nodes per PeerWay. Since
only 18 nodes can appear on a single screen page, the remaining
nodes can be displayed by scrolling left or right.
Node numbers are displayed across the top of the screen below the
screen title. Each node number in this row is preceded by an entry
prompt, indicating that the nodes can be arranged in any order. The
default condition has the nodes arranged in numerical order.
NOTE: It is advisable to configure the node numbers in groups the
same as they are actually located in the Tap Boxes in the field. This
helps in troubleshooting PeerWay faults.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-10
Node numbers are repeated along the left hand side of the screen in
the same order as they appear in the top row. Each node number in
this column is followed by a code identifying the device
(CTL=ControlFile; MC=MiniConsole; BCC=Basic Command Console;
CC=Command Console; SCI=Supervisory Computer Interface, ...).
Either a dot, a number, or two asterisks will appear at the intersection of
each node’s column and row. A dot indicates no communication errors.
If a number appears, it is the number of errors encountered by the
device while communicating with all other nodes on the system. A pair
of asterisks (**) indicates that more than 99 errors have been received
from other devices.
The A and B columns along the right hand side of the screen contain
the corresponding node’s opinion of each of the two PeerWays (A and
B). The numeral zero indicates a perfect PeerWay; increasing numerals
represent increasingly degraded communications. For example, a
reading of 100 is an advisory signal; a reading of 500 indicates
extremely poor communications. The system will continue to perform
without problems when only one PeerWay is performing badly.
However, some messages may be lost if both PeerWays indicate
readings above 500.
There are also prompts along the right-hand side that allow the user to
disconnect each node from one or both of the PeerWays for diagnostic
purposes. Entering an A will open the local loopback relay at PeerWay
tap A for that node. Entering a B will open the relay at PeerWay tap B.
It is also possible to open both relays at the same time using an entry of
AB.
This feature is useful for diagnostic purposes. It allows the cable to be
functionally disconnected from a node without having to actually remove
the PeerWay drop cable. When AB is entered, the node is
disconnected from the system and will not immediately respond to
clearing (unless the request is made from the console on which the
entry was made). The node will, however, time-out after one minute
and begin communicating. If the AB command still exists in the entry
field, the node will disconnect again. The A, B, and AB commands are
cleared by cursoring to the entry field and depressing [ENTER] with no
entry in the field or by leaving the screen. This clears the field and
returns the node to normal operating status. Any number of nodes can
be disconnected. However, it may be possible to disrupt the link
exchange if an A and a B are entered on any one or two different
nodes.
Five additional fields are located along the bottom of the screen. They
are: “Force Margin”, “Actual Margin”, “Idle”, and two fields containing
error totals. Table 10.2.4 gives definitions of the fields.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-11
Table 10.2.4. PeerWay Overview Screen Field Definitions
Item
Definition
Force Margin
This is an enterable field that is used as an aid in determining the location of a fault.
With this field, the user is able to increase the number of messages handled by either
PeerWay and force the communications balance for the system of the automatic
setting determined by a collective opinion of all the nodes in the system.
Any value from 0 (all communications on PeerWay A) to 1000 (all communications of
PeerWay B) can be entered. Under normal automatic operating conditions, the field
will read “NONE” to indicate that there is no forced communication margin. On an
operating system the Force Margin should not be changed more than 100 away from
the Actual Margin reading.
Actual Margin
The number displayed in this field represents the distribution of messages between
the two cables of the PeerWay. As with the Force Margin field, 0 indicates that all
communication is taking place on PeerWay A; 1000 indicates that all communication is
taking place on PeerWay B.
When both PeerWays are working normally, the system will send messages on
alternating PeerWays so each carries half of the traffic. The display will read 499 or
500.
In case of a failure on one PeerWay, at least one percent of the communication will be
attempted on the bad PeerWay to test to see if the failure has been repaired. Under
fault conditions the “Actual Margin” will read 10 for a bad PeerWay B and 990 for a
bad PeerWay A.
Idle
Numerical Fields
This is the number of idle messages that are being sent on the PeerWay. Idle
messages keep the PeerWay active when no broadcast or point-to-point messages
are being transmitted.
The last two fields on the PeerWay Overview screen contain the total number of
communication errors for each of the PeerWays.
When no Forced Margin is entered and the Actual Margin is not 500,
the bad PeerWay can be identified easily by locating the largest total.
To identify the bad node, enter a value about 50 units closer to 500 than
the current Actual Margin reading. (If the margin is 990, enter 940; if it
is 10, enter 60.) This forces enough errors so that it is easy to identify a
pattern on the node error counters. There should be a clear cross
pattern next to the bad node number. A vertical line of errors indicates
a transmit problem on the node; a horizontal line indicates a receive
problem.
When multiple patterns appear on the screen, it is easier to identify a
single pattern. Any nodes suspected of having errors can be dropped
off the PeerWay system by entering AB next to the prompt in the
right-hand column. This helps to eliminate confusing error counts on
the PeerWay totals for clear identification.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-12
PeerWay Node Screen
The PeerWay Node screen (Figure 10.2.4) is accessed by entering the
PN command and a node number. Once a screen for a particular node
is called up, all other nodes on the PeerWay can be accessed using
[PAGE AHEAD] and [PAGE BACK].
PEERWAY NODE
02-Apr-90
Node
Type
Version
1
CTL
1270
Received 1671
Sent
266
Time
800
Received 0
Sent
0
Time
0
Msg/Sec
8
Overrun
0
Checksum 0
Abort
0
Badstat
0
Source
0
Bytecnt
0
Msgtype
0
Noecho
0
Badecho
0
LostLink 0
NoReply
0
XReply
0
Timeout
0
TooMany
0
Host
Overrun
Checksum
Abort
Badstat
Source
Bytecnt
Msgtype
Noecho
Badecho
LostLink
NoACK
XReply
Timeout
TooMany
InLinks
0
OutLinks 0
Qual A
Qual B
Total A
Total B
Margin
NoReply
GotTIC
Idletime
Idlemsg
Local
0
0
0
0
0
0
16
12127
1452
timer1 700
idelay
Force Margin ® None
250
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Sync
Behind
Adjust
BadLRC
Size
0
0
0
0
0
SentLNRQ 0
GotLNRQ
0
SentREJ
0
GotREJ
0
SentBUSY 0
GotBUSY
0
SentTHK
0
GotTHK
0
NETerr
0
NoLink
0
LinkTime
SlotTime 0
Server
slotw 30
checkw
Node Margin ® NONE
30
10:42:34
DupHOST
DupHACK
DupSERVE
DupSACK
DupNode
AB Swap
Coupler
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
HOSTfailn
SERVfail
Linkfail
INfail
OUTfail
0
0
0
0
0
TRANerr
BadSOC
BadNODE
1 14 31
0
0
0
checkd 0
Disconnect ®
CONFIG 1
Figure 10.2.4. PeerWay Node Screen
The PeerWay Overview screen, which was discussed on the previous
pages, provides an easy method of identifying a faulty node or
PeerWay. The PeerWay Node screen supplies greater detail on a
specific node to help identify more subtle problems.
If a redundant CP is used, the PeerWay Backup Node screen, which is
virtually identical to the PeerWay Node screen, displays the redundant
CP’s analysis of the PeerWay. To toggle between the PeerWay Node
screen and the PeerWay Backup Node screen, press EXCHANGE.
Many of the error counters on the PeerWay Node screen are intended
for use by software development engineers and are of no practical use
to the user. The shaded areas indicate the more important error
counters for fault diagnostics.
The error counters on this screen are time averaging. When an error
occurs, it is logged on the screen. Most counters have a four second
exponential decay and reflect the number of errors occurring during the
last four seconds. If no additional errors occur, the total will eventually
return to zero; if the errors occur at a steady rate, the error counter will
hold at some value.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-13
NOTE: It is important to watch the screen for a period of time to see if
the counters are increasing, decreasing, or holding steady. All of the
error counters should return to zero in approximately one minute if a
fault is corrected.
PeerWay Node Screen General Definitions
The following general concepts apply to the PeerWay Node and
PeerWay Backup Node screens.
Time Interval Controller (TIC)
The Time Interval Controller (TIC) is the quarter second increment on
which all PeerWay communication is based. Each 1/4th second, all
communications between PeerWay nodes are resynchronized to a
common time standard.
TIC Master
The TIC Master is the highest addressed priority active node on the
PeerWay. The TIC Master:
D
Is the synchronizing node for the PeerWay
D
Maintains the PeerWay time
D
Determines when each TIC cycle is to begin
D
Calculates and dictates which PeerWay to use
The TIC Master priority is determined by the:
D
Highest addressed Virtual Address Extension (VAX)
D
Highest addressed Highway Interface Adapter (HIA).
D
Highest addressed Multitube Console
D
Highest addressed Command Console
D
Highest addressed MiniConsole
D
Highest addressed PeerWay Interface (I/F) Node
D
Highest addressed ControlFile
If the current TIC Master node disappears from the PeerWay, the next
node in priority automatically picks up Time Interval Controller (TIC)
Mastership to keep the proper sequence going.
To determine the current TIC Master, look at the PeerWay Interface
cards. The bottom yellow LED will be lit on the TIC Master node.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-14
NOTE: For multiple PeerWays, the highest numbered HIA on the
lowest numbered PeerWay maintains the PeerWay time. The “Time
Pass” field on the Configure HIA screen must be “Yes” for all HIAs.
Host
The Host is the node that makes the original request for data from a
Server node. For instance, a console will be the Host when requesting
values to update the fields on a graphic screen.
Server
The Server is the node that is the destination of the request of a Host
message. When a console requests values for a graphics screen, the
ControlFile acts as a Server to supply the data.
Broadcast Messages
Broadcast Messages are messages that are broadcast to all nodes.
Acknowledge messages are not sent out from each receiving node for
Broadcast Messages. However, if any of the link information is missing,
it will be requested again in the form of a point-to-point message later in
the TIC cycle. All ControlFile links are Broadcast Messages.
Point-To-Point Messages
Point-to-point messages are messages that are sent from a Host node
to a specific Server node in order to request specific information for a
Socket. Any requests for information for a console screen would be in
the form of a point-to-point message.
Socket
A Socket is a task or process within a node that has a specific purpose
in a Server node. For example, when a console has a graphic
displayed, it will request specific values from a ControlFile for the
graphics screen. The Host console will send a message to the
ControlFile, with a specific message ID number, requesting the value.
This request will be sent to a process within the controller (the Socket)
for that data. The controller process will send the information from the
Socket to the console host process with the message ID number
attached for display on the graphic.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-15
Buffer
A Buffer is a specific area of memory that is set aside to hold messages
for temporary storage, until they are processed by a task within the
node.
PeerWay Node Screen Field Definitions
The PeerWay Node and PeerWay Backup Node screens contain five
columns of error counters, a lower portion of average values, and a
bottom row of enterable fields. Each item on the screen is defined
below.
PeerWay Node Screen Column 1
Table 10.2.5 gives definitions of items in column 1.
Table 10.2.5. PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Column 1
Definition
Item
Node
Node number represented by the error counters on screen
Type
Indicates the type of node:
MC
MiniConsole
CTL
ControlFile
MTCC Multitube Console
CC
Command Console
SCI
Supervisory Computer Interface
SRU
System Resource Unit
HIA
Highway Interface Adapter
RFI
Rosemount Factory Interface
DIOG
Diogenes Interface
VAX
RS3 PeerWay QBus Network
Version
PeerWay software level for this node. This version will be the same as the software
level for the device.
Msg/Sec
Total number of point-to-point messages transmitted per second; should be at least
eight (the screen is updated four times per second).
InLinks
Number of controller links requested by controllers in this node. Add this number and
the value in the “OutLinks” field. The result should be the same as the number of links
reported on the ControlFile Status screen for the CP “Avail Links”.
This field, and the “OutLinks” field below, can be used to get a link count of links going
through an HIA (which has a limit of 40 links).
OutLinks
Number of controller links requested by other nodes from this node. Add this number
and the value in the “InLinks” field. The result should be the same as the number of
links reported on the ControlFile Status screen for the CP “Avail Links”.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-16
The following five fields contain quality opinions on the PeerWay. An
indication of 0 represents a perfect PeerWay where 6000 means very
little useful data can be sent or received. If any node’s opinion of either
PeerWay shows errors, communication will move towards the good
PeerWay. If the quality of both highways is showing errors, the
communications will attempt to find a reasonable medium between the
two PeerWays. The actual Quality numbers for each particular node
are derived from a large number of the error indications shown on the
PeerWay Node screen. The Total Quality number for each PeerWay is
calculated by each node from the individual Node Quality readings. The
TIC Master will then dictate, from these numbers, what the “Actual
Margin” should be for PeerWay Communications.
Each node enters its own opinion of what the margin should be based
on its success in talking to the other nodes on the PeerWay.
The Margin for each node can be manually entered for diagnostic
purposes by entering a value (0 to 1000) in the “Node Margin” field at
the bottom of the screen.
The TIC Master determines the “Actual Margin” by comparing the “Node
Margins” of all consoles on the PeerWay. This value is displayed on the
PeerWay Overview screen.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-17
Table 10.2.6. PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Column 1
Item
Definition
Qual A
This node’s opinion of the quality of PeerWay A.
Qual B
This node’s opinion of the quality of PeerWay B.
Total A
Collective quality opinion of PeerWay A from all PeerWay nodes.
Total B
Collective quality opinion of PeerWay B from all PeerWay nodes.
Margin
This node’s opinion of what the communication balance between the two PeerWays
should be. A value of 0 indicates all communications are on PeerWay A. A value of
1000 indicates all communications are on PeerWay B.
The Console with the highest PeerWay address determines the Actual Margin
(displayed on the PeerWay Overview screen). If this Console is lost, the highest
addressed ControlFile will determine the Actual Margin.
GotTIC
Number of TIC messages received over the last 4 seconds (should always be 16)
IdleTime
The number of times that the node processor goes through an idle loop each second.
This value indicates how busy the node processor is. A number in the hundreds
indicates that the processor is very busy. Normal operation is indicated by values of at
least several thousand.
The number can vary greatly, depending on the node type and processor used and the
amount of load on the processor and its use.
For instance, a 68000 Console displaying a Menu Command Console screen will show
an approximate IdleTime of 10,000, whereas a 68020 console with the same screen
will show a value of about 100,000. Either console will normally show an IdleTime of 0
when a busy graphic is displayed. The processor is spending all of its time updating
the graphic. This is normal and expected.
There is no other screen that gives the relative ”processor” idle time reading for many
node types such as the console or PeerWay Interface devices.
For a ControlFile node, depending on the image used, the readings will vary
depending on load. These readings should roughly coincide with the CP Idle time as
displayed on the ControlFile Status screen.
The IdleTime for a CPMax Image with a normal Controller load might be about 15,000
(75% idle time on the ControlFile Status Screen). This number will drop as one or
more consoles or PeerWay Interface devices (such as SCI, QBI, etc.) begin to draw
information from the node.
The IdleTime for a CPBATCH image will drop to near 0 as soon as one or two Batch
tasks are started (at Priority 1000). The CP is using all of its available idle time to
operate the batch tasks. As more console screens and PeerWay nodes request
information from the CP, the batch tasks are updated less often in order to answer the
console requests. This is normal and expected.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-18
Table 10.2.6. PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Column 1 (continued)
Item
Definition
Idlemsg
This is the number of idle messages received on the PeerWay by this node. When all
Link, Broadcast and Point to Point messages (higher priority messages) are
completed the remainder of the 1/4 second TIC cycle is filled with idle messages to
allow for better diagnostics of the PeerWay.
Idle messages are used to maintain diagnostics of the PeerWay and to maintain 100%
PeerWay usage. The added messages allow for more accurate error reporting during
times when no other broadcast or point-to-point messages are being sent.
The Idlemsg reading is a good indication of how much bandwidth is available on the
PeerWay. As more nodes and message loading are added to the PeerWay, the
Idlemsg reading will drop. For a single node PeerWay, such as a single console, the
Idlemsg reading will be about 765. An average 15 node system may run about 400
Idlemsgs. However, a high number of message requests will cause this number to
drop. If 8 Consoles were all accessing busy graphic screens, this number could easily
drop to 300. Other nodes such as QBI or SCI that can also make very large
point-to-point message requests can also drop the Idlemsg to a low number.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-19
PeerWay Node Screen Columns 2 and 3
Columns 2 and 3 contain the same error counters. Column 2 is
representative of PeerWay A and column 3 of PeerWay B. Table 10.2.7
shows definitions of items in columns 2 and 3.
Table 10.2.7. PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Columns 2 and 3
Definition
Item
Received
The number of PeerWay messages received by this node on the PeerWay. The
number of messages on PeerWay A plus PeerWay B is the total number of messages
on the PeerWay.
As the PeerWay Actual Margin changes, the messages received will reflect the
difference in PeerWay access.
Sent
The number of messages sent by this node on PeerWay A (column 2) and PeerWay B
(column 3).
Time
The “Time” number is an indication of the relative amount of time this node spent
listening for messages on PeerWay A (column 2) or PeerWay B (column 3).
Under normal conditions, the ratio of time spent on each PeerWay and the messages
received on each PeerWay should be the same. If the Time number on one PeerWay
is inappropriately large, there may be a problem on that PeerWay.
Overrun
The number of overrun errors detected by the communications chip on the node. An
overrun error is usually caused by a failure of the Direct Memory Access Controller
(DMAC) chip to take in the characters as fast as the communications chip can provide
them, resulting in a message that is too long.
Checksum
The number of Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) errors detected by this node. This
is a standard method used to verify that each message is received at the server node
exactly as it was sent by the host node. Each message that is sent on the PeerWay
has multiple data validity checks, including the CRC. If a message received is
corrupted in any way, the data is requested again from the host node.
These errors could be caused by some form of temporary message collision resulting
in corrupted message to a node.
Abort
A message was aborted due to an improper sequence of closing flag in the message
termination into the Communications chip. The message will be requested again.
Badstat
A bad message status was detected by the Serial Communications Controller in a
message received. The message status may be a framing error or other improper
data detected by the communications controller.
Source
The source node field received in a packet was corrupted.
Bytecnt
The count of the number of bytes is another in a series of data verifications checks.
This error counter is detected by the Communications chip, and indicates that the byte
count field in a packet did not match the packet length.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-20
Table 10.2.7. PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Columns 2 and 3 (continued)
Item
Definition
Msgtype
The message type field received in a packet did not contain a valid message type
value.
Noecho
As each message is transmitted from this node, the node itself will receive the
message and verify it. If the message is not received at all, it is indicated by a
“Noecho” error. This error would normally indicates a problem between the PeerWay
Interface card and the Tap Box of this node.
The PeerWay Overview screen will show errors for this node.
Badecho
As each message is transmitted from this node, the node itself will receive the
message and verify it. If the message is corrupted, it is indicated by the “Badecho”
error. This error would normally indicate a problem between the PeerWay Interface
card and the Tap Box of this node.
The PeerWay Overview screen will show errors for this node.
LostLink
If, by 90% of the way through the TIC, the Link rerequest message (see SentLNRQ)
messages are still not received, the node bumps the LINKLOST counter to indicate
there was a problem.
All nodes keep track of all messages on the PeerWay because it affects the transmit
priority scheme on the PeerWay.
NoReply
This node heard a point-to-point message or an LNRQ message requesting an
immediate reply, but did not hear the reply from the server node.
All nodes keep track of all messages on the PeerWay because it affects the transmit
priority scheme on the PeerWay.
XReply
This node heard a reply to a point-to-point message or an LNRQ message from a
Server node, but did not hear the original request for the message.
All nodes keep track of all messages on the PeerWay because it affects the transmit
priority scheme on the PeerWay.
Timeout
This indicates no messages were heard on this PeerWay for a specific amount of
time.
TooMany
The node processor has received interrupts from the PeerWay too quickly and has
been forced to stop processing some of the interrupts.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-21
PeerWay Node Screen Column 4
Table 10.2.8 gives definitions of items in column 4.
Table 10.2.8. PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Column 4
Definition
Item
Sync
More than five messages in a row were lost and this node cannot tell which node has
permission to transmit. This node will request that the system reset the transmission
priority beginning with node one. Could indicate a PeerWay drop cable is
disconnected from a node.
Behind
The DMAC cannot keep up with the rate of data being received on the PeerWay.
Possibly caused by a processor that is overloaded and does not have enough idle
time to keep up with the PeerWay. This is an error condition generated from the
DMAC.
Adjust
The timing of the software clock of the node was adjusted in order to stay in sync with
the other nodes on the PeerWay. Each node adjusts itself regularly to keep its time in
sync with the TIC Master time adjustment. Displays of a value of 1 or 2 under are
normal and sometimes even higher, depending on the Time Correction entered on the
TIC Master.
Larger numbers may indicate a problem with the synchronous frequency of the node’s
clock. Even with large numbers in this field, there should be no adverse effect on the
PeerWay.
BadLRC
Size
The Linear Redundancy Check (LRC) is a data validation check used when moving
data from the Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC) RAM into the main memory
of the node. The BadLRC indicates that an LRC error has occurred. This may
indicate a bad DMAC or RAM on the node with the largest number of errors in this
field.
Message size of the packet is not consistent with other data in the message packet at
the network level. The message will be automatically requested again.
An apparently correct message was received, but the size of the packet is not
consistent with other data in the packet.
SentLNRQ
The LINK Broadcast message is sent by all nodes between 20% and 60% of the way
through each TIC cycle. All nodes must hear the LINK messages sent by all other
nodes, or they send LNRQ messages to request a retransmission at 60% of the way
through the TIC. It is expected that the message will be transmitted in this TIC cycle.
GotLNRQ
This Server node received a point-to-point message request for a link message that
was not correctly received at the destination node in the link packet. This node is the
destination of the SentLNRQ message.
SentREJ
An LNRQ was received before 20% or after 90% of the way through the TIC Interval.
At this time the LINK message cannot be retransmitted, so this node sent a REJ
message in place of the requested LINK message. The other node will now realize
that there is a clock synchronization problem and hold off asking for the LINK again
until the next TIC.
GotREJ
This node received a REJ message in response to an LNRQ message, indicating that
its clock is desynchronized relative to the clock in the other node.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-22
Table 10.2.8. PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Column 4 (continued)
Item
Definition
SentBUSY
This Server node received the message correctly, but the PeerWay buffer is full so the
message cannot be handled at this time. The Host node will have to send the
message again at a later time when there is room in the PeerWay buffer. This
situation can be caused by an abnormally busy processor.
There will be a Host node (or nodes) somewhere on the PeerWay that indicates
“GotBUSY” messages. This is the node that requested the information.
GotBUSY
This Host node sent a message to a Server node with a full receive buffer. That
Server is the source of a “SentBUSY”, indicating that the message cannot be
answered at this time.
SentTHK
This Server node received a message and passed it off to a Socket (internal process)
within the node to get the requested information, but information has not been
returned from that process. This message acknowledges to the Host node that the
message was received and is being acted upon but has not yet responded by the
Socket.
There will be a Host node on the PeerWay showing “GotTHK” messages. This Host is
the target of the “SentTHK” messages.
GotTHK
This Host node received a message indicating the Server node has requested the
message information from an internal process, but has not yet received the reply.
(See SentTHK.)
NoACK
A requested low level acknowledge to a point-to-point message was not received.
The message must now be retransmitted.
NoLink
A LINK message response to an LNRQ message (see SentLNRQ) was not received.
The Link packet will be sent again until the LINK is received, or it becomes too late in
the TIC interval for the information to be useful (see SentREJ).
LinkTime
This is number of times this node heard a link message in a portion of the TIC cycle
not intended for link messages. It indicates a node may not be synchronized properly.
SlotTime
Each node is allowed a small portion of time (a Slot Width) in the TIC cycle to transmit
information, beginning with node 32 and, in turn, allowing this small period of time for
each node (if the node number exists) to begin transmitting on the PeerWay. All
nodes listen for a specific node number to transmit within each node’s SlotTime. If
this node hears one node transmit in another node’s SlotTime, an error is entered in
this field.
SlotTime errors are typically not a serious problem. They may be due to a processor
clock chip being slightly off frequency. A large number of SlotTime errors may be
caused by a bad tap. To isolate the tap, force the margin and observe the errors. If
the errors go to zero, the problem is on the PeerWay with no traffic.
For an Optical PeerWay, the errors may indicate that the “Slot Width” entry on the
Configure Command Console screen or Configure HIA screen may be too low, not
allowing sufficient time for each node to transmit, especially if there is a large break in
the node numbering (such as node 30 down to node 2). Excessive “Slot Width”
entries will decrease the “Idlemsg” so a reasonable number must be chosen.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-23
PeerWay Node Screen Column 5
Table 10.2.9 gives definitions of items in column 5.
Table 10.2.9. PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Column 5
Definition
Item
DupHOST
The Server has received duplicate Host messages in response to a request. This
may be due to the Host not receiving the Server acknowledge message.
DupHACK
When a Host requests a message from a Server node, the Server node will
acknowledge back to the Host that the message was received. The Host will in turn
acknowledge that it received the Server’s acknowledgement of the request. Errors
indicated here show that duplicate acknowledgements from the Host were received.
DupSERVE
Errors here indicate that a duplicate messages reply from the Server was received by
the Host in response to the Host request.
DupSACK
When a Host requests a message from a Server node, the Server Node will
acknowledge back to the Host that the message was received before the actual
message is returned. Errors indicated here show that duplicate acknowledgements
from the Server were received.
DupNODE
Two separate nodes on the PeerWay are sending messages, using the same node
number. A large number of errors indicates that two nodes are addressed with the
same node number. An alarm “PeerWay Duplicate Node” will also normally
accompany errors in this field.
AB Swap
Indicates the number of PeerWay A messages that were received on PeerWay B or
PeerWay B messages received on PeerWay A.
A large number here indicates A and B twinax cables or optical fiber are swapped.
There will also be a large number of errors indicated on many nodes on the PeerWay
Overview screen.
Coupler
This error indication shows that some hardware error has been detected on the
Coupler Status line coming from the PeerWay Tap Box, PeerWay Interface, or
ControlFile PeerWay Buffer. It will be triggered from a Watchdog Time-out (node tried
to transmit on the PeerWay too long), or a hardware failure that has been detected by
the ControlFile PeerWay Buffer.
There is also a RED LED tied to this line on the ControlFile PeerWay Buffer and
PeerWay Interface (for consoles and all other nodes) that would normally indicate
which PeerWay is at fault.
A large number of errors on this field normally indicates there is a hardware problem
with this node. Possibly a bad tap cable connection to the Tap Box, or bad Tap Box,
PeerWay Buffer or Interface.
HOSTfail
A Server transmitted the data to the Host but no Host acknowledge message was
received after repeated attempts.
Without the Host Acknowledge, the Server keeps sending the message until it gets
the Host Ack message or until the PeerWay time-out expires indicating that that node
has not transmitted on the PeerWay for longer than 4 seconds.
This error may occur when node tries to send a reply to a node that has dropped from
the PeerWay.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-24
Table 10.2.9. PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Column 5 (continued)
Item
Definition
SERVfail
When a Host makes a request for data from a Server node, it expects an
acknowledge message from the Server indicating that the message was received. If
that message is not received after repeated attempts, the Host indicates an error here.
LINKfail
Despite all LNRQ retry attempts, the expected LINK packet from another node was
not received after 90% of the TIC interval.
Any control blocks in the system requiring data in this LINK message will receive an
invalid link indication.
INfail
A ControlFile has requested more than 40 links from other ControlFiles on the
PeerWay(s).
OUTfail
A ControlFile has requests for more than 40 links from other ControlFiles on the
PeerWay(s). This will coincide with the negative links reading for the CP on the
ControlFile Status (CFS) screen and ControlFile Links screen.
NETerr
An error here indicates an error that was detected at the Network level. The Network
levels are the lower layers (last 4 layers) of data applied to the communications
message that applies the Host and Server address, header type, checksums and
which bus to use next. The message will be transmitted again.
TRANerr
Transport level of protocol error was detected. The transport level is the inner level of
data. This is the level where the socket data and message type is put together for
transmission on the PeerWay.
BadSOC
Data sent in a message socket to this node could not be used because there was no
process within the Host node that could use the data.
BadNODE
This node tried to send a message to another node that is not on the active node list.
The active node list contains all nodes that have transmitted on the PeerWay during
the last four seconds. This field may also indicate an error when 50 retries have not
produced an acknowledgement.
Errors will often be seen here for a short period of time after a node disappears from
the PeerWay. If a console node is requesting trend information for a node that does
not exist or some other similar request from an SRU, SCI, VAX, etc.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-25
PeerWay Node Screen Lower Part
The next eight fields are located below the columns of the PeerWay
Node screen. Times are averages for all messages received in the last
second. Table 10.2.10 gives definitions for items in the lower part of the
screen.
Table 10.2.10. PeerWay Node Screen Definitions Lower Part
Definition
Item
Local
Some message requests for information within the same node are done through the
PeerWay subsystem, but the message is never actually transmitted on the PeerWay.
This is the timer for requests being requested from within this node.
Timers begin when the message is sent by Host and seen by the PeerWay
subsystem.
The first of the three numbers indicates how many milliseconds it takes for the
process request message to be received by the Server Process within this node.
The second number is how many milliseconds it takes for the reply from the Server
Process within this node to be queued in the PeerWay subsystem.
The third number is how many milliseconds it takes to get the reply to the Host
process.
NOTE: Times 2 and 3 will not exist for a simplex message and simplex point-to-point
messages such as Alarm messages or trackball movement messages that do not
have a corresponding response. Times 2 and 3 are not updated for these messages.
Host
This is the time it takes for this node as a Host node to make requests of a Server
node.
Timers begin when the message to be send by the Host process to the Server Node is
queued on the PeerWay.
The first of the three numbers indicates how many milliseconds it takes for the
process request message to be transmitted on the PeerWay subsystem.
The second number is how many milliseconds it takes for the Server process to
respond and queue the message in the PeerWay.
The third number is how many milliseconds it takes to receive the reply at the Host
process.
High time indications in:
The first number means PeerWay is loaded, message is not getting out.
The second number means the server is loaded
The third number means the host is loaded
NOTE: Simplex point-to-point messages such as Alarm messages or trackball
movement messages do not have a corresponding response, so times 2 and 3 are not
updated for these messages.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-26
Table 10.2.10. PeerWay Node Screen Definitions Lower Part (continued)
Item
Server
Definition
The node that is answering the request from a host node.
Timer begins when the message is received from the Host and is queued to the
Server process.
The first of the three numbers indicates the time in milliseconds (1000 = one second)
when the queued message was received by the Server process.
The second number is the time in milliseconds for the Server process to reply to the
message and the response to be queued for transmission on the PeerWay.
The third number is the time in milliseconds that it takes to get the reply message
transmitted on the PeerWay.
NOTE: Simplex point-to-point messages such as Alarm messages or trackball
movement messages do not have a corresponding response, so times 2 and 3 are not
updated for these messages.
timer1
The length of the fixed time interval in units of 1/2 microsecond, which is used as a
setup time for sending messages, after the previous node has completed its message.
Nominal value is fixed at 700.
idelay
The number of slot times the TIC Master must wait before it will begin the cycle of
sending idle messages (see Idlemsg). The nominal value is 250 and will vary with the
Slot Width entry.
slotw
This is the slotwidth reading in units of 1/2 microsecond. This value is enterable on
the Configure Command Console screen or Configure HIA screen. The nominal entry
for this value is 30. Entry may be a minimum of 20 (see SlotTime and fields on the
HIA screen).
checkw
This value is used as a back calculation to verify that nodes on the PeerWay are
transmitting within their correct slot time. The checkw value is in units of 1/2
microsecond.
The checkw value will follow the Slot Width entry.
A Slottime error is generated using:
(actual -- expected + checkd) < checkw
checkd
The checkd allows for a propagation delay on the PeerWay. The slot time window
minimum delay value is in units of 1/2 microsecond.
The nominal value is 0.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-27
The last four fields are located along the bottom of the PeerWay Node
screen. Table 10.2.11 gives definitions for items located at the bottom
of the screen.
Table 10.2.11. PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Bottom
Definition
Item
Force Margin
This is an enterable field that allows the user to force this node’s opinion of the
communications quality is for the PeerWays. This is nominally set to “None”.
The TIC Master determines the Actual Margin for the PeerWay, based on the Node
Margin of all existing nodes.
This field may be used as an aid in determining the location of a fault. Any value from
0 (all communication on PeerWay A) to 1000 (all communication on PeerWay B) can
be entered. During normal operation, this field indicates “NONE”. The Force Margin
should not be changed more than 100 away from the Actual Margin setting on an
operating process.
Should one PeerWay have a fault, all but 1% of the communications will be on the
good PeerWay. The 1% on the bad PeerWay will allow the system to detect if the bad
cable is repaired and to allow it to change back to sharing PeerWay communications.
The 1% of messages sent on the bad PeerWay will be requested again on the good
PeerWay.
With a bad PeerWay, it is sometimes hard to distinguish which node is at fault with
only the 1% error rate. A slightly higher value error rate may be entered by changing
the Force Margin, from 10 to 50. By adjusting the Force Margin slightly, the number of
error indications should rise so the pattern is more obvious.
Do not move the Force Margin by large amounts.
Node Margin
This field indicates this node’s opinion of what the automatic setting of the Actual
Margin should be in the system Actual Margin evaluation scheme (see Force Margin)
A value of 500 indicates that this node sees no errors on either highway. A value of 0
indicates that this node cannot get any messages through on PeerWay B and is
requesting all communications on PeerWay A.
A value of 1000 indicates that this node cannot get any messages through on
PeerWay A.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-28
Table 10.2.11. PeerWay Node Screen Definitions: Bottom (continued)
Item
Disconnect
Definition
This field is used to remotely disconnect this node from the PeerWay for diagnostic
purposes. It may be used to try to determine which node might be shorting the
PeerWay cable, or causing the errors seen on the PeerWay Overview screen, without
physically removing the PeerWay drop cables.
It allows the user to disconnect this node from either or both PeerWays for diagnostic
purposes. Entering “A” will open this node’s local loopback relay at PeerWay Tap A.
To disconnect PeerWay B, the operator enters “B”. Entering “AB” disconnects both
PeerWays.
If “AB” is entered for a Console node, the console will be disconnected from both
PeerWays. As soon as the “AB” is removed, the console will again begin
communicating on the PeerWays.
If the “AB” is entered for any node, other than the console itself, the node will time out
after one minute and reconnect with the PeerWay. If the “AB” command still exists on
the screen, the node will again be disconnected. The “AB” command is cleared by
cursoring to the field above the command and pressing [ENTER].
If you change screens, the disconnect (“A”, “B”, or “AB”) is automatically removed from
the field.
This same feature is available on the PeerWay Overview screen for all nodes on the
PeerWay.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-29
Sample PeerWay Problems
Figure 10.2.5 shows an example of how a Peerway Overview screen
should appear when no faults exist on the PeerWay. The matrix should
show all dots, and the A and B column on the right side should be all
zeros, including the total at the bottom. The “Force Margin” should be
“None” and the “Actual Margin“ should be 499 or 500.
Note how the nodes have been grouped together. The nodes have
been configured this way to indicate how they are physically located
along the PeerWay and which nodes are connected together on a
common Tap Box.
Pway
>1
01 CTL
02 CTL
04 CTL
PEERWAY OVERVIEW
®1 ®2 ®4 ®
®10®12®14®32®
®6 ®8 ®
®
02-Apr-90
>Scroll
® ® ®
A
0
0
0
10:42:34
Left
B
0
0
0
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
BCC
CC
CC
MC
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
06 SCI
08 CTL
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
0
10
12
14
32
Force Margin®None
Actual Margin
499
Idle 1186
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
--- --0 0
CONFIG 1
Figure 10.2.5. PeerWay Overview Screen Under Normal Conditions
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-30
PeerWay Fault Conditions
Figure 10.2.6 shows a Peerway Overview screen with three fault
conditions.
1. “PeerWay B Problem” Alarm on the Alarm line.
2. “Actual Margin” at the bottom center of the screen shows a value
other than 499 or 500. A value below 499/500 indicates B
PeerWay is bad and A PeerWay is handling all communications.
A value above 499/500 indicates A PeerWay is bad and B
PeerWay is handling all communication.
3. A and B PeerWay totals at the lower right hand corner of the
screen indicates the bad PeerWay by the larger number.
PEERWAY OVERVIEW
Pway
1 2 4
>1
01 CLT . . .
02 MC . . .
.
.
2 . .
2 . .
. .
. .
8
6
363
380
04 MC
.
. .
.
4 . .
. .
8
380
06
10
12
14
.
1
.
.
. .
.2
. .
. .
.
2 .
. .
.
4 .
.
3 .
6
4
4
2
380
5301
166
200
.
.
. .
. .
.
4
8
380
363
---
---
5
923
CC
CTL
MC
MC
16 CC
32 MC
Force Margin
6 10 12
12:24:06
16 32
.
. .
1 1
1
.
. .
.
. .
3 . .
. 3 . .
None
14
02-Apr-90 12:24:06
>Scroll Left
A
B
1
. .
. .
Actual Margin
8
Idle 1176
PeerWay B Problem
OPER 1
Figure 10.2.6. PeerWay Overview Screen with Fault Conditions
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-31
Detecting a PeerWay Fault
Figure 10.2.7 shows how to determine the node number suspected of
causing a fault.
1. Observe the “= 10 PeerWay Node Problem” Alarm on the Alarm
Line.
2. Error number indications on the screen matrix in a straight
vertical or horizontal pattern or both a vertical and a horizontal
pattern (as shown). If a clear pattern is not distinguishable, the
Margin can be forced. This requires use of a Configuror’s Key.
The margin must not be forced more than 50 away from the
“Actual Margin” reading.
At this point you now know the bad PeerWay (B) and node
number (=10). Proceed to the proper troubleshooting procedure.
Pway
PEERWAY OVERVIEW
1 2 4
6 10 12
14
02-Apr-90 12:23:56
>Scroll Left
A
B
16 32
>1
01 CLT
02 MC
. . .
. . . .
4
4
. .
. .
. .
. .
10
17
04 MC
. . . .
5
. .
. .
12
06 CC
10 CTL
. . . .
3 2 2
5
1
. .
3 2
. .
2 2
17
6
0
1316
12 MC
. . . .
6
. .
. .
10
0
14 MC
. . . .
6
. .
. .
10
0
16 CC
32 MC
. . . .
. . . .
7
5
. .
. .
. .
. .
17
14
0
0
----
----
13
180
Force Margin
12:23:54
None
=10
1
Actual Margin
11
Idle 1220
PeerWay Node Problem
0
0
OPER 1
Figure 10.2.7. Fault Detection on a PeerWay Overview Screen
Figure 10.2.8 shows the ControlFile PeerWay Node screen for the
previous fault example for node 10 (as shown in figure 2--6). Note that
for every message sent on PeerWay B (third column from the left) there
is a “Badecho” count. The “Coupler” status error count is also very
high, which indicates errors coming from the PeerWay Tap box or
PeerWay Buffer card.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-32
PEERWAY NODE
02-Apr-90 8:28:16
Node
Type
Version
10
CTL
1270
Received 2190
Sent
250
Time
1102
Received 0
Sent
12
Time
14
Msg/Sec
13
Overrun
0
Checksum 0
Abort
0
Badstat
0
Source
0
Bytecnt
0
Msgtype
0
Noecho
0
Badecho
0
LostLink 0
NoReply
0
XReply
0
Timeout
1
TooMany
0
Host
Overrun
Checksum
Abort
Badstat
Source
Bytecnt
Msgtype
Noecho
Badecho
NoACK
NoReply
XReply
Timeout
TooMany
InLinks
0
OutLinks 0
Qual A
Qual B
Total A
Total B
Margin
0
6000
0
1402
0
GotTIC
16
Idletime 11976
Idlemsg
1322
Local
timer1 700
idelay
Force Margin ® None
250
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12
12
2
0
0
0
Sync
Behind
Adjust
BadLRC
Size
0
0
0
0
0
SentLNRQ 4
GotLNRQ
2
SentREJ
0
GotREJ
0
SentBUSY 0
GotBUSY
0
SentTHK
0
GotTHK
0
NoReply
0
NoLink
0
LinkTime
SlotTime 0
Server
slotw 30
checkw
Actual Margin ® NONE
30
DupHOST
0
DupHACK
0
DupSERVE 0
DupSACK
0
DupNode
0
AB Swap
0
Coupler 1024
HOSTfailn
SERVfail
Linkfail
INfail
OUTfail
0
0
0
0
0
NETerr
TRANerr
BadSOC
BadNODE
1 14 31
0
0
0
0
checkd 0
Disconnect ®
CONFIG 4
Figure 10.2.8. Fault Detection on a PeerWay Node Screen
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-33
Using the PeerWay Overview Screen
The Peerway Overview screen in Figure 10.2.9 shows that Node 2 is
bad. The “Actual Margin” and “A Totals” fields indicate that PeerWay A
is bad.
Pway
PEERWAY OVERVIEW
02-Apr-90 12:23:56
>Scroll Left
A
B
>1
01 CLT
02 MC
04 MC
1 2 4
6 10 12
14
16 32
. 5 .
1 1 1
. 4 .
. .
1 1
. .
.
3
.
.
3
.
.
1
.
.
1
.
258
6000
303
10
5
3
06
10
12
14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
235
181
179
246
3
3
0
0
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
307
303
0
3
CC
CTL
MC
MC
16 CC
32 MC
3
3
4
2
.
.
.
.
. 5 .
. 4 .
Force Margin
None
13:12:49 =02
Actual Margin
975
Idle 1000
----
----
1180
5
PeerWay Node Problem
OPER 1
Figure 10.2.9. Fault Detection on a Peerway Overview Screen -- Example
Figure 10.2.10 shows the PeerWay Node screen for Node 2 under the
same fault condition. Note that for every message sent on PeerWay A
(second column from the left) there is a “Noecho” error count. This
screen indicator (or “Badecho” counter) can be used for quick reference
during troubleshooting. Note the “Noecho” counts and the “Coupler”
errors.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-34
PEERWAY NODE
02-Apr-90 8:28:16
Node
Type
Version
2
MC
1270
Received 0
Sent
16
Time
15
Received 2186
Sent
214
Time
1010
Msg/Sec
41
Overrun
0
Checksum 0
Abort
0
Badstat
0
Source
0
Bytecnt
0
Msgtype
0
Noecho
16
Badecho
0
LostLink 0
NoReply
0
XReply
0
Timeout
0
TooMany
0
Host
Overrun
Checksum
Abort
Badstat
Source
Bytecnt
Msgtype
Noecho
Badecho
LostLink
NoReply
XReply
Timeout
TooMany
InLinks
0
OutLinks 1
Qual A
Qual B
Total A
Total B
Margin
6000
0
1423
1
1000
GotTIC
16
Idletime 18
Idlemss
1326
Local
timer1 700
idelay
Force Margin ® None
13:12:49 =02
250
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Sync
Behind
Adjust
BadLRC
Size
0
0
0
0
0
SentLNRQ 3
GotLNRQ
2
SentREJ
0
GotREJ
0
SentBUSY 0
GotBUSY
0
SentTHK
0
GotTHK
0
NoACK
0
NoLink
0
LinkTime 0
SlotTime 0
Server
slotw 30
checkw
Node Margin ® NONE
PeerWay Node Problem
30
DupHOST
0
DupHACK
0
DupSERVE 0
DupSACK
0
DupNode
0
AB Swap
0
Coupler 1024
HOSTfailn
SERVfail
Linkfail
INfail
OUTfail
0
0
6
0
0
NETerr
TRANerr
BadSOC
BadNODE
1 14 31
0
0
0
0
checkd 0
Disconnect ®
OPER 1
Figure 10.2.10. Fault Detection on a Peerway Node Screen
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-35
PeerWay Fault Diagnostics
Procedures are given below for troubleshooting PeerWay problems for:
D
Console or SCI PeerWay Problem
D
ControlFile PeerWay Problem:
— With one ControlFile on the PeerWay
— With multiple ControlFiles on the PeerWay
These troubleshooting procedures are designed for a technician who
has attended the RS3 maintenance class. It is assumed that the proper
procedures are always followed when removing or installing modules in
the system. It is also assumed that anyone working on the system is
familiar with the plant process operations and the consequences of any
actions taken.
Observe the following precautions and instructions while working on the
system:
D
Use a grounded wrist strap with a built-in one megohm resistor
for your safety and to prevent damage to static sensitive circuits.
The resistor allows static electricity to drain to ground and still
isolates you from direct ground. Also use a grounded static mat.
D
Before removing or inserting any card (except a PeerWay buffer
card) in a ControlFile, first disable the Nonvolatile Memory and
then the secondary and then the primary Coordinator Processor
cards. Only PeerWay Buffer cards may be changed with the
Nonvolatile Memory and the Coordinator Processor cards active.
D
Turn off the Nonvolatile Memory Card before removing AC and
DC power.
D
Always power down consoles before removing or installing
console cards.
D
NOTE: The Disk Shutdown (DS) command should always be
performed before powering down the console. This will purge
the cache and prevent possible loss of data.
When powering up the ControlFile, first enable the Nonvolatile
Memory card and then enable the primary and then enable the
secondary Coordinator Processor cards.
All procedures assume that all red fault LEDs are corrected before
proceeding to the Troubleshooting Tables.
NOTE: Tap Box number 1984--0488--000x is the “A” PeerWay Tap Box.
Tap Box number 1984--0489--000x is the “B” PeerWay Tap Box. The
upper PeerWay Buffer and the upper connector on the back of the
ControlFile belong to the “A” PeerWay. The lower PeerWay Buffer and
lower connector on the back of the ControlFile belong to the “B”
PeerWay.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-36
Diagnosing a Console or SCI PeerWay Problem
-
To diagnose a Console or SCI PeerWay problem:
1. Move the drop cable from one tap connection to another.
CAUTION
When moving drop cables and PeerWay buffers from a
ControlFile for troubleshooting purposes, make certain
you move only those associated with the suspect PeerWay.
If anything on the good PeerWay is disconnected, the
ControlFile or console could be taken off the PeerWay.
Look at the PeerWay Node screen for this device, and note the
“Noecho” and “Badecho” Fields. If the problem is now cleared,
replace the Tap Box. If all tap connections are used, swap two
drop cables at the Tap Box. Determine if the problem moved to
the node that was swapped. If the problem moved, replace the
Tap Box.
2. Replace the Console PeerWay Interface Card.
3. Replace the Console Power Regulator Card.
4. Replace the drop cable.
5. Command Console and Basic Command Console only: Pull the
console card cage out and connect the drop cable directly to the
back of the motherboard, bypassing the short marshaling panel
cable. Use extreme caution when removing and installing the
console card cage to avoid damaging any cables.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-37
Diagnosing a ControlFile PeerWay Problem
The procedure for checking PeerWay problems differs according to the
number of ControlFiles on the PeerWay.
With One ControlFile on the PeerWay
If there is only one ControlFile on the PeerWay, use the following
procedure.
-
To diagnose a ControlFile PeerWay problem with one
ControlFile on the PeerWay:
1. Move the drop cable from one tap connection to another.
WARNING
When moving drop cables and PeerWay buffers from a
ControlFile for troubleshooting purposes, make certain
you move only those associated with the suspect PeerWay.
If anything on the good PeerWay is disconnected, the
ControlFile or console could be taken off the PeerWay.
Look at the PeerWay Node screen for this device, and note the
“Noecho” and “Badecho” Fields on this screen. If the problem is
now cleared, replace the Tap Box at the earliest convenience. If
all of the tap connections are used, swap two drop cables at the
Tap Box. Determine if the problem moved to the node that was
swapped. If the problem moved, replace the Tap Box.
2. Remove the PeerWay Buffer card from the ControlFile on the
faulty PeerWay. Follow step a or b below depending on the part
number of the card.
a. Part number 1984--1402--0003: The card must be replaced to
determine if it is bad. If no spares are available, the card can
be swapped with the other buffer in this cage. This will take
the node off of the PeerWay.
b. Part number 1984--1502--0001: Remove the card and move
the seven jumpers (HD 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8) on the card to
the TEST position. Install the card and look at the PeerWay
Node screen and determine if the Noecho and Badecho
Fields are at 0. If they are now at 0, the PeerWay Buffer Card
is bad and must be replaced.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-38
WARNING
If the Coordinator Processor Card is disabled on a running
process, all operator process changes, links running
between controllers in that cage, and links to and from that
ControlFile will freeze at the last value received. The
controllers will continue to operate the process under
these conditions. As soon as the Coordinator Processor
Card is restarted all links will be updated.
3. Replace the Coordinator Processor Card.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-39
With Multiple ControlFiles on the PeerWay
If there are several ControlFiles on the PeerWay, use the following
procedure.
-
To diagnose a ControlFile PeerWay problem with multiple
ControlFiles on the PeerWay:
1. Move the drop cable from one tap connection to another.
WARNING
When moving drop cables and PeerWay Buffer Cards from
a ControlFile for troubleshooting purposes, make certain
you move only those cards and cables associated with the
suspect PeerWay. If anything on the good PeerWay is
disconnected, the ControlFile could be taken off the
PeerWay.
2. Look at the PeerWay Node screen from the Tap Box, and note
the “Noecho” and “Badecho” Fields on the screen. If the problem
is now cleared, replace the Tap Box at your earliest convenience.
If all of the tap connections are used, swap two drop cables at
the Tap Box. Determine if the problem moved to the node that
was swapped. If the problem moved, replace the Tap Box.
3. Swap the PeerWay Buffer Card from this node’s bad PeerWay
with a PeerWay Buffer Card from the same PeerWay of another
ControlFile. If the problem moved, replace the PeerWay Buffer
Card.
WARNING
If the Coordinator Processor Card is disabled on a running
process, all operator process changes, links running
between controllers in that cage, and links to and from that
ControlFile will freeze at the last value received. The
controllers will continue to operate the process under
these conditions. As soon as the Coordinator Processor
Card is restarted all links will be updated.
4. If the problem does not move to the other ControlFile in step 3,
replace the Coordinator Processor Card in the suspect card
cage.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-40
PeerWay Cable Fault Diagnostics
The pattern of error counts shown in Figure 10.2.11 is typical of an open
PeerWay twinax cable. Note that the PeerWay Margin has been forced
from 990 to 950 to see the pattern clearly. The Alarm “PeerWay A
Problem,” the large total on PeerWay A, and the “Actual Margin” going
toward 1000 all indicate that PeerWay A is bad.
The pattern of Nodes 1, 2, and 4 is clearly separated from the rest of
the node because these nodes are configured together (to indicate they
are on the same Tap Box). The problem with the cable is on PeerWay
A between the first two Tap Boxes.
Pway
>1
01 CLT
02 MC
04 MC
06
10
12
14
CC
CTL
MC
MC
16 CC
32 MC
PEERWAY OVERVIEW
®1 ®2 ®4
2 6
3 7
1 9
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8
2
6
.
.
.
.
. . .
. . .
®6®10®12®14®
02-Apr-90
11:32:06
>scroll Left
®16®32® ® ® ® ®
A
B
. .
. .
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
715
742
633
0
0
0
®
4
4
2
1
1
5
6
6
6
2
3
5
1
4
5
4
3
4
7
2
799
683
757
761
0
0
0
0
®
3
9
2
2
3 6
5 6
673
787
0
0
4
10
8
4
1 6
3 8
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
--- ---Force Margin ®950
08:06:07
Actual Margin
950
PeerWay A Problem
Idle 1296
786
20
CONFIG
3
Figure 10.2.11. Peerway Overview Screen (PeerWay A Problem)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-41
Troubleshooting Twinax PeerWay Cables
-
To diagnose a twinax PeerWay cable problem:
1. Check all twinax cable connections for proper seating on the Tap
Boxes.
2. Check that both ends of the PeerWay are properly terminated.
3. Check for multiple grounds. Only one Tap Box on each PeerWay
(A and B) can have the jumper in the “SHIELD” position.
4. Check to make sure that all twinax cable connectors are isolated
from ground.
5. Remove the “T” connector from the Tap Box, and keep the two
twinax cables connected to the “T” connector.
NOTE: The “Force Margin” field on the Peerway Overview screen
should show “None”.
Use an ohmmeter to measure the following resistances (see
Figure 10.2.12 ):
a. Between 1 and 2: 50 ohms nominal (acceptable range: 45 to
70 ohms).
b. Between 1 and shield: resistance greater than 1 megohm.
c. Between 2 and shield: resistance greater than 1 megohm.
If the resistance between 1 and 2 is 100 ohms or greater (or
in extended length cable, 124 ohms or greater), there is a
break in one of the twinax cable segments. Disconnect the
two twinax cables from the “T” and measure between 1 and 2
of both cable ends. The reading should be between 100 and
140 ohms. Follow the faulty cable back until the open is
located. Terminations at both ends should read 100 or 124
ohms.
If the resistance between 1 and shield or between 2 and
shield measures less then 1 megohm, this indicates a short
between one of the lines and the shield. Disconnect the two
twinax cables from the “T” connector and measure each cable
to find the faulty end. Continue following the cable segments
until the fault is found.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-2-42
2
SHIELD
1
Figure 10.2.12. Twinax “T” Connector
Troubleshooting Fiber Optic PeerWay Cables
Optical PeerWay troubleshooting is more a technique than a process.
The basic goal of the Fiber Optic Cable is to carry photo energy from
the transmitting point to the receiving point with enough energy left for
the receiver. Every element introduced into the optical path, such as
splices, connectors, attenuators, star couplers, and the length of the
fibers, reduces the amount of photo energy left for the receiver. The
general process is to start from the transmitter and ensure the output is
within acceptable limits (between --3 and --6.9 dbm). From the
transmitter, work towards the receiver, taking measurements at each
point along the way. If at any point a reading is not within the
acceptable limits, take steps to remove the source of the problem.
Possible causes include:
D
Improperly installed or dirty terminations.
D
Bends less than the minimum radius.
D
Cable lengths that exceed specifications.
D
A faulty Star Coupler, Tap Box, or repeater.
As long as there is at least --33 dbm left at the receiver, the system
should work. If it does not, the problem could be the receiver itself.
See the Site Preparation and Installation Manual (SP) for
troubleshooting procedures for fiber optic cables.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a PeerWay
SV: 10-3-1
Section 3:
Troubleshooting Consoles
This section covers troubleshooting problems with consoles, including:
D
General console troubleshooting procedures:
—
Console Power-Up Diagnostics
—
Console Off-Line Diagnostics
—
Console Crash Dump screen
—
Memory Dump
—
Memory View screen
—
Menu Confidence screen
—
Node Dump screen
D
Keyboard problems
D
CRT problems
D
Operator Interface (OI) Card Cage problems
NOTE: Check for proper grounding of the Keyboard Interface Board.
Improper grounding may lead to a variety of hard to trace symptoms.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-2
General Console Troubleshooting Procedures
Use these procedures when a console passes its power-up diagnostics
but will not boot up.
-
To diagnose Command Console problems:
1. Load from boot tape. If the console loads OK, replace the hard
disk drive.
NOTE: Use a tape made from the “Create Boot Tape” function. To load
from tape, insert the boot tape and power-up the console. Hold [HDWR
ALARM] throughout the Hardware Power Up Diagnostics screen until
the console displays ”Loading from the Streaming Tape.” At the Main
Menu, enter [DISK DIRECTORY PEERWAY], cursor to the “TAPE” field,
and press [ENTER]. Run the “Restore Tape Files to Disk” function.
Cycle DC power and try to load using the Winchester disk. If the
console does not boot from disk, replace the disk drive assembly.
NOTE: For the Enhanced or Standard Engineering Keyboard
(1984--1654--000x): Hold the “H” key in place of [HDWR ALARM].
2. If the console will not load from tape, replace the SCSI interface
card.
NOTE: Do not replace a Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) card
with a Disk Interface card.
-
To diagnose MiniConsole problems:
1. Is the disk drive power LED red or off?
2. Is boot disk in drive 1 or 2 and is the disk drive latch closed?
3. Try the boot disk in the other drive.
4. Make sure the flat cable on the back of the motherboard is
seated properly.
5. Try a different boot disk. If the console starts, put the original
disk in the disk drive and press [CTL -- C] to reload the console
configuration.
6. Install the Off Line Diagnostic disk and run the disk drive tests.
7. If the disk will not boot from either drive, replace the Floppy Disk
Interface card.
8. Replace the disk drives.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-3
Console Power-Up Diagnostics
When a console is powered up, the console is put through a series of
comprehensive tests to verify console card operation. Figure 10.3.1
shows a Console Power Up Diagnostics screen.
CC Console <Boot Version x.xx>...........................................PASSED
Instruction Set Test ROM Test
Four Meg RAM Test
Bus/Interrupt Test
Watch Dog Timer
EDAC Test
SR Test
Video Generator..........................................................PASSED
RAM Test
PIT Test DAC Test Color Test
Synch Test
Keyboard.................................................................PASSED
Display Panel 1.4
Trackball 1.4
Keyboard Interface 4.1
Option Panel 1.4
Option Panel 1.4
Option Panel 1.4
Power Supply.............................................................PASSED
+5 +12
A: +30
B: +30
PeerWay..................................................................PASSED
Register Check
RAM Test #1
RAM Test #2
Jabber-Halt
Local Loop Back
Printer..................................................................PASSED
RTC
Periodic Interrupt
NV RAM Test
RTC Battery
Printer Ready
SCSI Board...............................................................PASSED
DMA Registers
RAM Test #1
RAM Test #2
SCSI Master
SCSI Controller
Winchester
Tape Drive
Figure 10.3.1. Console Power Up Diagnostics Screen
If a failure occurs on a console card, the word “PASSED” is replaced
with “FAILED” or “MISSING”. The console finishes the power-up tests,
and puts an alarm at the bottom of the screen saying “CRITICAL
FAULTY OR MISSING”. A card shown as “missing” has failed to the
point that it cannot be detected in the card cage and the console will not
run. If a card shows “FAILED,” the test it failed is backlit in red and the
console may still be able to run, depending on the fault. Pressing [ACK]
on the Loop Control Panel or the [ALARM ACK] button on the Operator
Keyboard will attempt the system boot. Before pressing [ACK], note the
card and the specific test it failed for future reference.
NOTE: For the Enhanced Engineering Keyboard (1984--1654--000x):
The red ACK key is not recognized until the console has finished
booting. Press the “A” key or “F10” to acknowledge the alarm.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-4
NOTE: When a function such as redundant 30 VDC power is not
connected, or a printer is not connected, they will be highlighted in blue.
D
D
D
A blue indication will not prevent a console from booting nor does
it require the ACK keystroke to continue to boot.
If the keyboard is missing, the console can still be booted. This
feature is useful with the CRT function button, where one console
can switch over to control another console.
Blue highlighting indicates that:
a. They did not pass diagnostics.
b. They are not required for proper console operations.
The diagnostic tests of the console cards are not dependent on one
another, except for the Power Supply and Processor. These two cards
are the minimum configuration required for testing. However, the Video
Generator is necessary to get an indication of the keyboard test results.
Table 10.3.1 shows a list of the tests. If a fault is indicated, operation
may be questionable. Depending on the severity of the fault, it may be
advisable to replace the card. Exceptions are indicated in the
definitions of the tests listed in the table.
Table 10.3.1. Console Power Up Tests
Item
Test
Definition
Console
Processor
Boot Version
This number is the software revision of the ROM parts of the processor
card. The ROM holds data to run the power-up diagnostics and the
routine to load the Boot Disk into the console in order to begin operating.
Instruction
Set Test
This tests the microprocessor. It runs an elaborate algorithm using
varied instructions to verify the integrity of the microprocessor. A failure
here means the processor may be bad. Replace the card. Also check
Power regulator voltage.
ROM Test
A test of the integrity of the boot ROMs on the processor card that
instruct the processor to run the power-up diagnostics. If a failure is
indicated here and the acknowledge button starts the console, the failure
will not affect operation of the console once it is running. Boot ROMs are
only used during start up. The online test of the ROM (MCT Screen)
may also mean test failures.
Four Meg
RAM Test
An address and data test is run on the processor card RAM. If a failure
is indicated here the console will probably not run reliably.
NOTE: If a single bit error is detected during the RAM test, the Error
Detection and Correction (EDAC) circuit will correct for a single RAM chip
failure. The EDAC test is bypassed (shown by backlighting the EDAC
test) and the console will not halt on this screen but will start up from disk
in the normal way. A “Console Weak RAM Chip,bit XX” alarm is
generated and put on the Active Alarm List.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-5
Table 10.3.1. Console Power Up Tests (continued)
Item
Test
Definition
Console
(cont.)
Bus/Interrupt
Test
This tests the processor card’s ability to talk to other cards on an interrupt
level. A failure here may mean that the processor card is bad or one of
the other cards in the console may be affecting the test. Turn off the
power to the console and remove all cards but the power supply and
processor. Remove the front panel keyboard cable. Turn on the console
again and, after 30 seconds, the green LED on the processor card should
turn on, indicating the card passed all tests. Add the rest of the cards
one by one until the fault appears and replace that card.
WatchDog
Timer
The watchdog circuit is allowed to time out and reset the microprocessor
to verify its operation. The card will operate if the watchdog circuit is not
functioning. Replace the card as soon as possible or, if a fault appears,
the card may not reset in the case of a bad instruction.
EDAC Test
This tests the Error Detection and Correction circuitry. An error is written
to RAM addresses to verify that the EDAC will correct it. If the card fails
the EDAC test but passes the RAM test, there should be no fault that
would corrupt data. The card should operate for a while but could reset
the console frequently. Replace the processor card.
SR Test
Video
Generator
SRAM test. If a fault is indicated here, replace the card.
RAM Test
Addressing and data test of RAM in the Video Generator. Replace the
card if a fault is shown.
PIT Test
Test of the Parallel Interface Timer, which is used to control interrupts.
Replace the Video Generator card if a fault is shown.
DAC Test
Test of the Digital-to-Analog Converter, which measures voltages on the
RGB output lines to the monitor. An error here can indicate that a video
driver has failed so the card must be replaced. It could also indicate that
the monitor is not properly terminated, the video cables are damaged, the
shields are shorted to ground, or the type of cable is wrong.
Color Test
Tests for shorts between the RGB lines. An error could be a board fault
or a cable fault.
Synch Test
Tests synch signal rates. Replace the Video Generator card if a fault is
shown.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-6
Table 10.3.1. Console Power Up Tests (continued)
Item
Test
Keyboard
Lamps on for
Visual Check
TTY
Keyboard
Display
Panel
Power
Supply
PeerWay
Definition
All LEDs on the Loop Callup Panel are lit to verify they are working.
This indicates that the null character was not received from the keyboard
microprocessor by the console processor. A fault here could indicate a
bad TTY Keyboard, a disconnected keyboard cable or a bad cable
connection on the console motherboard.
NOTE: If the cable between the motherboard and the Loop Callup Panel
is disconnected, the console will show a fault but will still load the disk.
The console screen then locks up showing the date, time, and an alarm
at the bottom of the screen but with no menu.
The panel is asked for the firmware revision number. The response is
checked for correct format and checksum. The firmware level is
displayed on the screen. If there is no response, the panel is assumed
not installed.
Trackball
Same as Display panel.
Keyboard
Interface
Same as Display panel.
Option Panel
Same as Display panel.
+5V and
+12V
A voltage sense circuit is read and if the +5 or +12 volt supply on the
power supply card is not in tolerance, the voltage will be backlit. Replace
the power supply.
A: +30 and
B: +30
The voltage sense on the incoming DC bus is monitored and, if one of
them is below approximately 18 volts, the indication will show a fault.
Many consoles use only one DC bus for power so the card fault will not
indicate “FAILED”.
Register
Check
This is a check of the several chips on the card. If this test indicates a
fault, replace the card.
RAM Test #1
This is a data test of RAM on the card. Replace the card if a fault is
indicated.
RAM Test #2
This is an addressing test of the RAM. Replace the card if a fault is
indicated.
Jabber Halt
A circuit on the card that keeps a faulty node from transmitting too long
on the PeerWay. If this shows a fault, the card may operate, but should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Local Loop
Back
Tests the console’s ability to hear its own echo through the PeerWay. A
failure means that the console is not working on one or both PeerWays.
The Tap Box may be faulty, drop cables may be disconnected, or the
PeerWay Interface card may be bad.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-7
Table 10.3.1. Console Power Up Tests (continued)
Item
Test
Printer
RTC
SCSI Board
(MTCC)
Disk Drive
(MC and
BCC)
Definition
The operation of the Real Time Clock is tested. Replace the card if a
fault is indicated.
Periodic
Interrupt
This is a test of the interrupt system generated off the clock. Replace the
card if a fault is indicated.
NVRAM Test
A checksum is run on the data in NVRAM. If the checksum is incorrect,
the test will indicate a fault. The system will run if this is showing a fault,
but some of the console configuration could be corrupt. Check the online
NVRAM checksum test on the Menu Confidence Test screen.
RTC Battery
This shows the charge on the batteries that back up the Real Time Clock.
If a fault shows, the battery charge is low or the battery jumper switch is
in the off position. The battery status is monitored on the MCT screen.
Printer
Ready
This shows if a printer is present and on line. If no printer is connected, it
does not lock up the diagnostic screen, but backlights the printer
indicator.
Direct
Memory
Access (DMA)
Registers
Tests registers of several of the devices on the card to verify board
operation. If a fault shows here, the console may not boot up from disk.
If it does, operation can be attempted, but replace the card as soon as
possible.
RAM Test #1
This tests RAM on the Disk Interface card. Replace the card if a fault
shows here.
RAM Test #2
This is an addressing test of the RAM on the Disk Interface card.
Replace the card if a fault is indicated.
SCSI Master
This indicates which console is the SCSI master.
SCSI
Controller
Winchester
This test checks the registers of the specialized SCSI interface bus
devices for proper power up conditions.
This test checks for disk ready signal, and verifies the integrity of several
sections of the disk to make sure it works properly.
NOTE: If the cable between the SCSI controller card located on the disk
unit and the disk unit is not connected, both the disk and tape unit will
indicate fault by being backlit in red.
Tape Drive
This test checks for the presence of the tape drive SCSI controller board
and checks for tape ready signal. If no tape is installed the tape
indication will be backlit blue. If a tape is present it will rewind the tape.
NOTE: If the cable between SCSI controller card (located on the tape
unit) and the tape unit is disconnected, this test will not indicate a fault
unless a tape is installed. To verify this, install a tape in the unit.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-8
Console Off-Line Diagnostics
Off-line diagnostics for the console are loaded from tape or floppy disk
depending on the console in use. Tests are the same, with the
exception of the keyboard tests, which are suited to the individual
console.
-
To run the off-line diagnostics:
1. For a Command Console, insert the appropriate Off-Line
Diagnostics tape in the console tape drive, turn the console
power off for 30 seconds and then back on. Hold down the
“Hardware Alarm” button during the power up diagnostics until
the console indicates it is “Booting From Streaming Tape”. This
boots the console and brings up the Off-Line Diagnostic Menu.
For a MiniConsole or Basic Command Console, insert the
appropriate Off-Line Diagnostics disk in either disk drive, turn off
the console power for 30 seconds and then back on. This boots
the console and brings up the Off-Line Diagnostic Menu.
2. Check the Power Up Diagnostic screen for any faults.
3. Run desired tests.
Figure 10.3.2 shows the Off-Line Diagnostic Menu screen. Select the
number of the desired test to execute the test. Table 10.3.2 defines the
console tests.
Revision No. X.xx
OFF LINE DIAGNOSTIC MENU
Processor Card
1.
2.
3.
4.
Printer Interface
Processor RAM Test
Processor ROM Test
Reset System - Power Up Test
Processor SRAM Test
Video Generator
9.
10.
11.
12.
Color
Video
Video
Alarm
Keyboard Assemblies
Palette RAM Test
RAM Test
Convergence Pattern
Contacts Test
SCSI Peripherals
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
5. NVRAM Test
6. Clear NVRAM
7. Printer Port Loopback
8. Printer Barberpole Test
Winchester Disk Exerciser
Winchester Formatter
Tape Tests
Floppy Disk Exerciser
Floppy Formatter
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Command Entry Keyboard Test
TTY/ASCII Keyboard Test
Old TTY Cursor/Numeric Keys Test
New TTY Cursor/Numeric Keys Test
MTO Cursor/Numeric Keys Test
Loop Callup Keyboard Test
Trackball Keyboard Test
Key Switch Test
Panel Light Test
PeerWay Interface Card
27. PeerWay Interface Card Test
Enter Selection:
Figure 10.3.2. Console Off Line Diagnostic Menu
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-9
Table 10.3.2. Console Off Line Diagnostic Menu Definitions
Item
Test
Definition
Revision No.
Processor Card
Printer Interface
This indicates the software revision of the Off line
Diagnostics test disk being used.
1. Processor RAM Test
This is a thorough address and data test of all of the
RAM on the card. The test takes approximately 4
minutes and will run indefinitely unless stopped by
pressing the [CTL] and [C] buttons together (Control C
function) or power to the MiniConsole is shut off.
2. Processor ROM Test
A checksum test is run on the boot ROMs on the
Processor card. The test is run very rapidly and will run
indefinitely unless halted by a Control C function.
3. Reset System -Power-up Test
This function will force the MiniConsole to go through the
power-up test and reboot from disk.
4. Processor RAM Test
This is a thorough address and data test of all of the
SRAM on the card.
5. NVRAM Test
This is a nondestructive test of the nonvolatile RAM on
the Printer Interface card. The test must be allowed to
run up to 8192 before the test is complete. Any write
errors will be reported.
6. Clear NVRAM
This is a destructive test of the nonvolatile RAM on the
Printer Interface card. It will write all zeros to the
NVRAM. Any write errors will be reported. The NVRAM
must be reloaded from the disk Console Configuration
file.
7. Printer Port Loopback
Test
This initiates a test of the circuitry to drive the printer.
Before starting the test the Printer Interface card must
be removed and jumpers HD 7, HD 8, and HD 9 must be
moved to the test position and jumpers HD 1 through 6
should be removed.
NOTE: All tests except the Printer Barber Pole test can
be run with the jumpers in this position.
Video Generator
8. Printer Barber Pole
This test outputs a barber pole printer pattern for testing
the printer. The printer must be set up for 9600 baud.
9. Color Palette RAM Test
This tests the color palette.
10. Video RAM Test
16 pages can be written into the Video RAM. During the
test, patterns are written to each page of the Video
RAM.
11. Video Convergence
Pattern
This generates a test pattern to enable checking the
CRT for alignment and linearity. No test results are
given.
12. Alarm Contacts Test
Tests the alarm contacts.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-10
Table 10.3.2. Console Off Line Diagnostic Menu Definitions (continued)
Item
Keyboard
Assemblies
Test
Definition
13. Command Entry
Keyboard Test
This tests the Main Operator Keyboard Keys. All keys
are pictured on the screen and each key picture will light
when the corresponding key is pushed.
14. TTY/ASCII Keyboard
Test
This tests part of the individual TTY keys. All keys are
pictured on the screen and each key picture will light
when the corresponding key is pushed.
15. Old TTY
Cursor/Numeric
Keys Test
This tests the Cursor/Numeric keys of the old
configuration keyboard.
16. New TTY
Cursor/Numeric
Keys Test
This tests the Cursor/Numeric keys of the new
configuration keyboard.
17. MTO Cursor/Numeric
Keys Test
This tests the Cursor/Numeric keys of the enhanced
keyboard.
18. Loop Callup Keyboard
Test
This tests the individual Loop Callup keys. All keys are
pictured on the screen and each key picture will light
when the corresponding key is pushed.
19. Trackball Keyboard
Test
This tests the trackball.
20. Keyswitch Test
This tests the Key Switch. Each key can be inserted in
the key switch and the key number that is seen by the
system is reported on the screen.
21. Panel Light Test
This test lights all the panel LEDs in single sequence
and then in rows. It is used to verify all LEDs are
working and no shorts exist between lights.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-11
Table 10.3.2. Console Off Line Diagnostic Menu Definitions (continued)
Item
Floppy Utilities
Test
Definition
22. Winchester Disk
Exerciser
This test reads and writes to the hard disk to determine
if there is a hardware problem or a media problem. This
test will destroy all information on the disk.
23. Winchester Formatter
This test destroys all information on the disk and formats
the disk.
24. Tape Tests
This brings up a tape test menu that allows you to
choose between the following tape drive tests:
Retension Tape
Erase Tape
Tester/Exerciser
Disk Copy Compare
Tape Copy
Unload Tape
These tests can be used to test the tape drive.
CAUTION: “Erase Tape” and “Tester/Exerciser” will
destroy all information on the tape.
PeerWay
Interface Card
25. Floppy Disk Exerciser
This test performs reads and writes to the floppy disk
drive to determine if there are any drive problems. This
test will destroy all information on the disk.
26. Floppy Formatter
This test destroys all information on the disk and formats
the disk.
27. PeerWay Interface
Card test
Runs these tests on the PeerWay Interface Card:
RAM Test #1
RAM Test #2
Jabber-Halt
Local Loop Back
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-12
Memory Dump
The memory dump may help you diagnose software problems. A
node’s RAM can be captured and viewed or saved to a file. The
contents of RAM can often help solve difficult software problems. Disk
event messages are generated as the result of memory dump activities.
D
D
D
-
The memory dump can only be performed on consoles and CPs.
The node must be active. If the PeerWay Node screen is
functioning, the node is active.
A memory dump can only be performed on 68020 consoles
running Version 15 or higher.
To make a memory dump of a node:
1. Cursor to the command line. Type:
MD (node #) , (filename) [ENTER]
2. The memory of the specified node is put into the specified file in
the Log Files folder. The file is of the type Memory Dump.
The memory dump is performed in the background and may take
a few minutes to complete. You can perform other tasks while
the dump is occurring.
-
To stop a memory dump before it is finished:
1. Cursor to the command line. Type:
KMD [ENTER]
Automatic Controller Memory Dump Capture
The automatic Controller Memory dump capture works as follows:
D
D
D
Memory Capture: In the event of a controller crash (at the point
of the crash), the existing memory is copied to an unused portion
of memory in the controller.
The controller is rebooted, initializing all functional memory and
variables to a restart state.
You can check to see if there is a current memory dump in the
controller by checking the “Node Dump” screen for the
ControlFile node number and use the “Page Ahead” to view all
dumps, noting the time and date.
The captured memory image in the controller is stored in the upper area
of memory.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-13
This captured memory will remain in the controller until:
1. The controller is rebooted using the front panel switch on the
controller.
<or>
2. Another controller crash or the “Snap Controller Memory”
function overwrites the memory crash dump.
The captured memory image from the controller can be downloaded to
a console by using the standard “Memory Dump” command. This
command is in the form:
Command Keys:
MD=[Node][Controller],[File Name]
For example, to copy the controller captured memory to disk:
Memory Dump: =1a,Dump1A
will copy the capture from controller “=1A” to a file named
“Dump1A”.
Note that the command Memory Dump: =1,Dump1 will transfer
the CP memory to the file. This is compatible with previous
functionality.
All Memory Dump file images will be placed in the “Log” folder of the
console that initiated the Memory Dump command.
The Memory Dump from a controller takes approximately 20 minutes to
complete.
Expected Memory Dump file size for the MPC2+ controller is 400 to 500
Kbytes in the LOG folder.
The Disk Event List will report the Start time and Finish time of the
Memory Dump.
At this point, the memory dump can be viewed by using the Memory
View function. Or you can copy the file to floppy disk or RS3 tape, and
return it to FRSI for evaluation. If possible, please send a printout of the
corresponding Node Dump along with the memory dump file.
The Memory Dump command can be executed by the operator key
level or above.
Redundant controllers will store the Captured Memory, and allow a
Memory Dump, but only if the controller that has captured the memory
is active.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-14
With an A/B pair, for example: if A is running primary, and B is running
secondary; and if the A controller crashes, the B controller will then be
the active controller. (The memory dump is in the A controller, but the B
controller is active.) An attempt at a “Memory Dump” at this point may
show the error message: “No Dump found on this controller” (referring
to the active B controller), or if there is a Memory Capture from a
previous crash (or Memory Snap) in the B controller, then the B
controller capture will be downloaded. To get the memory dump from
the crashed controller, switch the active controller back to A.
Other Commands
There are several other commands that can be used along with the
Memory Dump.
1. Kill Memory Dump (KMD) will abort any Memory Dump functions
that are active for the console. Note that the Disk Event List will
report that the Memory Dump “Finished”. There is no “Abort”
entry given in the Disk Event List. Kill Memory Dump can be
executed by the operator key level or above.
2. Snap Controller Memory command will initiate a manual
controller memory capture. The command to execute this is “SC”
followed by the “Next Option” key. The command is intentionally
obscure to prevent unintentional use.
CAUTION:
The “Snap Controller Memory” command will freeze the
control block and I/O execution for 2 seconds while the
image is copied from the lower memory to the upper
memory.
Any sensitive blocks should be switched to manual. The main
control disturbances will be caused by “derivative bump” on
completion of the 2-second freeze.
This function should be executed with care, while watching the
process carefully.
D
D
Snap Controller Memory command can be executed by the
configuror key level or above.
When the Snap Controller Memory command is entered, the
message:
ENTER again: causes 2-sec CONTROL FREEZE
is displayed as a warning. You must press the Enter key again.
D
When the memory copy is complete the following message is
displayed:
DONE: ready for Memory Dump
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-15
Controller Memory Dump Recommendations
D
D
RS3: Troubleshooting
Should a controller crash occur, the memory dump should be
done as soon as possible after the controller crashed, to save the
image to disk. The file should be named to indicate the node and
controller, and that it was a crash.
If possible (note Caution above), after the controller image has
been saved to disk, the “Snap Controller Memory” function
should be run on the same controller and the subsequent image
saved to disk. This second memory snap should be taken a day
or so after the controller has crashed and recovered, to allow the
internal memory stacks to begin to fill again to normal. (Although
this second dump may be useful, it is not required.) The file
should be named to indicate the node and controller, and that
this is a normal operating image. This second image will be used
by FRSI to compare the controller image for a normal operation.
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-16
Memory View Screen
The Memory View screen allows you to view the contents of a memory
dump file or the current contents of memory. The screen is only
available with 68020 pixel consoles. Figure 10.3.3 shows an example
of a Memory View screen. Table 10.3.3 describes the fields on the
screen.
-
To read current memory data from a node:
1. Call up the Memory View screen.
MV [ENTER]
2. If you want to look at a node other than the one you are at,
change the “Node” field entry.
-
To read memory data from a file:
1. Call up the Memory View screen.
MV [ENTER]
2. Cursor to the “Memory” field and press [ENTER]. The field
changes to “File”.
3. Enter the “Volume”, “File Type”, and “Filename” of the file that
contains the memory data.
4. Cursor to the “Read” field and press [ENTER].
5. To access other screens to see more memory data:
[PAGE AHEAD] and [PAGE BACK]
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-17
-
To call up:
D [M] [V] [ENTER] at the command line
-
To access other screens:
D [PAGE AHEAD] and [PAGE BACK]
to see more memory data
Memory View
23-Oct-90
>Read ÞMemory >Hex
View>byte
Node>4 Addr
000:
010:
020:
030:
040:
050:
060:
070:
080:
090:
0A0:
0B0:
0C0:
0D0:
0E0:
0F0:
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
CC
40
40
40
40
40
00
00
00
00
00
40
40
40
40
40
11:47:12
66
e7
e7
e7
e7
e7
67
67
6F
67
67
e7
e7
e7
e7
e7
>0000000000
66
12
12
12
12
12
1E
A0
56
1E
1E
12
12
12
12
12
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
FF
40
40
40
40
40
00
50
00
00
00
40
40
40
40
40
00
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
67
B5
6F
67
67
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
00
12
12
12
12
12
46
DA
56
1E
1E
12
12
12
12
12
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
40
40
40
40
40
40
00
40
00
00
00
40
40
40
40
40
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
67
E1
67
67
66
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
12
12
12
12
12
12
64
84
1E
1E
EC
12
12
12
12
12
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
40
40
40
40
40
00
40
00
00
00
40
40
40
40
40
66
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
67
E7
67
67
64
E7
E7
E7
E7
E7
F0
12
12
12
12
12
82
12
1E
1E
00
12
12
12
12
12
[email protected].
.@...@...@...@..
.@...@...@...@..
.@...@...@...@..
.@...@...@...@..
.@...@...@...@..
..g...gF..gd..g.
..g..P...@...@.
..oV..oV..g...g.
..g...g...g...g.
..g...g...f...d.
.@...@...@...@..
.@...@...@...@..
.@...@...@...@..
.@...@...@...@..
.@...@...@...@..
CONFIG 4
Figure 10.3.3. Memory View Screen
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-18
Table 10.3.3. Memory View Screen Field Description
Description
Field
Addr
Specifies the starting address of the memory data displayed on the screen.
Decimal/Hex
Specifies that addresses are shown in decimal or hexadecimal.
To change this field, press [ENTER].
File/Memory
Specifies that memory data is being read from a file or directly from the node.
You can change this field by pressing [ENTER].
File Type
Specifies the type of folder that contains the file you want to view. For
memory dumps, the type should be “Log File”.
Filename
Specifies the name of the file that contains the memory data.
Hex/Decimal
See the “Decimal/Hex” field.
Memory/File
See the “File/Memory” field.
Node
Read
Specifies the node number of the source of the memory data.
Reads the current memory data onto the screen, or reads data from a file.
Press [ENTER] to read new data.
The Memory View screen takes a snapshot of memory. This field allows you
to refresh the screen with the current contents of memory.
Specifies how the data is interpreted and displayed.
Byte =2 hex character groups
Char =2 hex character groups
View
Float =Floating point numbers
Link =Link addresses
Long =8 hex character groups
Short =4 hex character groups
Time =System time
Volume
Specifies the name of the volume that contains the memory data file.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-19
Node Dump Screen
The Node Dump screen shows details after a crash of a console or
ControlFile. Enter ND nn where nn is the node number. Figure 10.3.4
shows an example of a node dump. This screen traps software errors,
which may be caused by a faulty processor RAM or other hardware
faults or software problems.
NOTE: When power is removed, all crash node dump data is lost. Print
out all pages of the node dump before cycling power. If you cannot get
a screen printout, copy down all the items highlighted in the figure.
D
Screen Title
D
Time
D
Trap Number....SR Number....PC Number....Line Number
D
All of the lines of the System Stack,
D
All of the lines of the Registers Data
D
All of the lines of the User Stack
It is also important to note which software revision levels are being run
at the time of the crash. If the console locks up repeatedly, run Off-Line
Diagnostics on the processor card ROM, disk or SCSI RAM, and Video
Generator RAM.
CONTROLFILE DUMP
Crash XX-XXX-XX
Trap Number:XXX
17-Apr-92
12:24:06
at XX:XX:XX of XXX XX
Version XX.XX Node =XXX
SR:XXXX PC:XXXXXXXX Line xxxx xx xxxx xxxxxx
System Stack
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Registers
XX:XXXXXXXX XX:XXXXXXXX XX:XXXXXXXX XX:XXXXXXXX XX:XXXXXXXX
XX:XXXXXXXX XX:XXXXXXXX XX:XXXXXXXX XX:XXXXXXXX XX:XXXXXXXX
User Stack
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
Figure 10.3.4. Node Dump Screen
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-20
Menu Confidence Screen
The Menu Confidence screen displays console power status, the status
or results of RAM and ROM tests, and the clock battery status. Enter
MCT to call up the screen. You may boot the console by cursoring to
“Power Up Test” and pressing [SELECT].
If the clock battery is bad or if its jumper is in the Off position, the status
field will display a red “YES.” If the clock battery is good and its jumper
is in the On position, the status field will display a “NO.”
Figure 10.3.5 shows a Menu Confidence screen.
BACKGROUND DIAGNOSTICS
01-Aug-91
Power Supplies
Console Power
Clock Battery
+5v
+12v
Bus A
Bus B
Alarm
GOOD
GOOD
GOOD
BAD/UNUSED
09:25:03
NO
+-------------------Background Test Results-------------------+
Pass
Errors
Processor RAM
>2
0
Processor ROM
>55445
0
Chip Code
Startup Tune: >NONE
>Power Up Test (press SELECT to start)
WARNING: This will Clear Alarm Lists and Reboot the Station
CONFIG 11
Figure 10.3.5. Menu Confidence Screen
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-21
Keyboard Problems
A locked keyboard may be reset by holding down [CTRL], [ALT], and
[INSERT] simultaneously.
The console will report bad keys (shorted or excessive length
keystroke) by the message “Keyboard Error X:XX” where the first X
represents the keyboard number and the XX represents the key.
The numbers for the keyboards keys depend on the type of console.
See Alarm Messages (AL) manual for details.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-22
CRT Problems
Figure 10.3.6 shows routing of the video signals. The Sync signals are
superimposed on the green video signal. If the green cable is
misconnected, there will be no picture.
O/I Motherboard
J082 -- RGB Color Video Output
J081 -- Monochrome Video Output
Video Marshaling Panel
···
···
···
Figure 10.3.6. Video Signal Routing
If there are problems with the CRT, a quick way to test whether it is the
monitor or the video source is to connect another monitor to the video
cables. Another trick is to connect the video cables to another OI Card
Cage. Figure 10.3.7 shows this reconnection technique.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-23
O/I Motherboard
J082 -- RGB Color Video Output
J081 -- Monochrome Video Output
Video Marshaling Panel
···
···
···
Figure 10.3.7. Checking Video Signals
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-24
Troubleshooting OI Card Cage Problems
NOTE: All procedures assume that you have found and corrected all
red fault LEDs before going on to troubleshooting.
The technique is to reduce the Operator Interface to a configuration that
you know works. From that point, add removed components until you
isolate the faulty component.
CAUTION
Remove power from the card cage each time a card is
removed or inserted. Do not touch the gold edge
connectors on any board.
Replace any card that stops the progress of booting when it is installed.
If this process does not find faulty components, contact FRSI for further
assistance.
-
To diagnose a OI Card Cage problem:
1. Remove all Operator Interface card cage circuit boards except
the Power Regulator. Put them on a grounded static mat.
CAUTION
Use a grounded wrist strap with a built-in one megohm
resistor for your safety and to protect static sensitive
circuits. The resistor allows static electricity to drain to
ground and still isolates you from direct ground.
2. If the Power Regulator green LED comes on when power is
applied, the Power Regulator is operational.
3. Install the OI Processor. At power-up, the red LED is on until the
processor completes the self-diagnostics. When the green LED
comes on, the Processor has passed all the power up
diagnostics and is operational.
4. Install the Video Generator. Either the green or the red LED is on
until the processor starts to run diagnostics on this board. While
diagnostics run, the red LED is on. When the diagnostics are
passed, the processor turns on the green LED. As soon as the
Video Generator is installed, you can see the progress of the
diagnostic tests on the screen.
5. Monitor the Console Power-Up screen for error indications.
6. Install the PeerWay Interface. Either the green or the red LED
will be on until the processor starts to run the diagnostics. While
diagnostics run, the red LED will be on. When the diagnostics
are passed, the processor turns on the green LED.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-25
7. Install the Printer Interface. Either the green or the red LED will
be on until the processor starts to run the diagnostics. While
diagnostics run, the red LED is on. When the diagnostics are
passed, the processor turns on the green LED.
8. Install the SCSI Host Adapter. Either the green or the red LED
will be on until the processor starts to run the diagnostics on this
board. While diagnostics are run, the red LED is on. When the
diagnostics are passed, the processor turns on the green LED.
CAUTION
Before you put the console back into service, be sure to
switch all the OI cages off. Switch them back on together
to ensure that the proper cage becomes the SCSI Master.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-3-26
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Consoles
SV: 10-4-1
Section 4:
Troubleshooting ControlFiles
This section covers troubleshooting ControlFiles. All procedures
assume that you have found all red fault LEDs and that they have been
corrected first before proceeding to the troubleshooting process.
The general procedure is to reduce the ControlFile to a configuration
that you know works. From that point you can selectively add removed
components until the faulty component is isolated.
CAUTION
Use a grounded wrist strap with a built-in one megohm
resistor for your safety and the protection of static
sensitive circuits. Do not touch the gold edge connectors
on any board.
Remove all ControlFile circuit boards except the Power Regulator, one
Coordinator Processor, and the Nonvolatile Memory. If the green LED
on the Power Regulator and the Coordinator Processor comes on
when enabled, they should be considered operational. If the
Coordinator Processor does not successfully boot, replace the
Nonvolatile Memory, Coordinator Processor or the Power Regulator.
The goal at this point is to have the ControlFile Coordinator Processor
operating.
Next install the the PeerWay Buffers. At this point you should be able to
see the ControlFile Status on the console.
CAUTION
When performing this procedure care must be taken to
disable the Nonvolatile Memory and then the Coordinator
Processors each time a card is removed or inserted (with
the exception of the PeerWay Buffer cards). Turn off the
Nonvolatile Memory card before removing AC and DC
power.
Continue installing the other Power Regulator, the Coordinator
Processor, and the Controller Processors one at a time until the faulty
component is found. If, at any point, the installation of a circuit card
stops the progress of Booting, that card should be replaced.
NOTE: Any slot that previously contained a PLC, RBLC, or MUX
Controller must have either a WIPE BUBBLE or KILL CONTROLLER
done on it prior to loading an image or configuration. Failure to do so
could cause some strange errors or problems with the controller.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ControlFiles
SV: 10-4-2
Table 10.4.1 shows detailed procedures for troubleshooting
ControlFiles.
Table 10.4.1. ControlFile Troubleshooting
Condition
Controller Processor card will not
pass Power Up Diagnostics.
Action
1. Replace the Controller Processor card.
Green LED does not come on.
Controller Processor card will not
start.
The green LED comes on briefly
with all yellow LEDs on.
1. The yellow LEDs on the Coordinator Processor and Nonvolatile
Memory cards must be flickering, indicating that the cards are
operating properly. NOTE: if no Controller Processor card is
running inside this ControlFile, the Nonvolatile Memory card will
have only a green LED on. If the Coordinator Processor and
Nonvolatile Memory card LEDs are not as indicated, see section
on “Coordinator Processor Will Not Load From Nonvolatile
Memory”.
2. Perform a Wipe Bubble command on the suspect Controller
Processor card. Re-enable the Controller Processor card after
the Wipe Bubble procedure is performed. If the Controller
Processor now starts, the plant Configuration must be reloaded
from disk for that controller. Refer to the Wipe Bubble
Procedure in this section.
3. Using a disk with the same software level as is in the
ControlFile, perform a Disk Load Program command on that
ControlFile. It is normal to have an active hardware alarm
“Program Image Bad” for this node during the Disk Load
Program function. The alarm must clear after the Disk Load
Program is complete. If the Disk Load Program is successful,
try to restart the Controller Processor card.
4. If the Controller Processor card has been jumpered for
additional images, check the jumper positions on the card. See
Chapter 4 of the this manual for jumper positions and locations.
5. Replace the Nonvolatile Memory card if the Disk Load Program
is not successful. Then attempt the Nonvolatile Memory
Recovery Procedure. (1)
6. Replace the Controller Processor card.
7. Replace the Coordinator Processor card. (1)
(1)
If a nonredundant Coordinator Processor card is disabled on a running process, all operator process
changes, links between controllers in that cage, and links to and from that ControlFile will freeze at the
last value received. The controller will continue to operate the process under these conditions. As soon
as the Coordinator Processor is restarted, all links will be updated.
(2)
If a Controller Processor card is disabled on a running process, the analog output Field interface card
and the discrete output module will either hold their last value or go to zero, depending on the position of
the jumper on the Field interface card. If it is necessary to close (go to zero) the output of the field
device that uses the “HOLD” mode after the controller is disabled, the Field Interface card must be
removed.
(3)
If both PeerWay Buffer cards are removed from the ControlFile on a running process, all operator
changes and links to and from this ControlFile will freeze at the last value received. The links within the
ControlFile will continue to update. The Controller Processors will continue to operate under these
conditions.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ControlFiles
SV: 10-4-3
Table 10.4.1. ControlFile Troubleshooting (continued)
Condition
Action
Controller Processor card will not
start with the Coordinator
Processor card in one of the two
Coordinator Processor card slots.
If the Coordinator Processor card
is installed in the other slot, the
controller will run.
1. Replace the Controller Processor card.
2. Replace the Coordinator Processor card.
Controller Processor card will run
alone, but:
1. Will not run as a redundant
pair.
2. Either controller alone will start
and run.
1. Check the Controller Processor cables on the back of the
motherboard and verify that both the upper and lower cable
connections for the two redundant Controller Processor slots
are in place.
2. Ensure that both Controller Processors are seated properly
inside the ControlFile.
3. Check the terminators on the back of the ControlFile
motherboard
4. Replace the terminators.
3. Replace one Controller Processor at a time with a known good
Controller Processor in redundant configuration.
Coordinator Processor will not
pass Power Up Diagnostics. The
green LED does not come on and
the top yellow LED is off.
1. Replace the Coordinator Processor card.
(1)
If a nonredundant Coordinator Processor card is disabled on a running process, all operator process
changes, links between controllers in that cage, and links to and from that ControlFile will freeze at the
last value received. The controller will continue to operate the process under these conditions. As soon
as the Coordinator Processor is restarted, all links will be updated.
(2)
If a Controller Processor card is disabled on a running process, the analog output Field interface card
and the discrete output module will either hold their last value or go to zero, depending on the position of
the jumper on the Field interface card. If it is necessary to close (go to zero) the output of the field
device that uses the “HOLD” mode after the controller is disabled, the Field Interface card must be
removed.
(3)
If both PeerWay Buffer cards are removed from the ControlFile on a running process, all operator
changes and links to and from this ControlFile will freeze at the last value received. The links within the
ControlFile will continue to update. The Controller Processors will continue to operate under these
conditions.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ControlFiles
SV: 10-4-4
Table 10.4.1. ControlFile Troubleshooting (continued)
Condition
Coordinator Processor will not
load from the Nonvolatile Memory
card.
The green LED comes on briefly,
then the red FAULT LED comes
on.
The top yellow LED is on.
Action
1. Check that the Nonvolatile Memory card switch is in the
ENABLE position.
2. Check that the Nonvolatile Memory card is in the proper slot
within the ControlFile. (See diagram on ControlFile door.)
NOTE: If the primary Coordinator Processor is running and the
secondary is not, the primary should NOT be disabled at this
time. An attempt should be made to load the Plant Program
into the nonvolatile memory (Disk Load Program function). If
the function fails the Nonvolatile Memory card must be replaced.
(1)
3. Move the Coordinator Processor card to its redundant slot. If
the Coordinator Processor works in the redundant slot, see the
Troubleshooting section on “Coordinator Processor Will Not
Start In One Of The Two Slots”.
4. Replace the Nonvolatile Memory card.
NOTE: The Nonvolatile Memory Recovery Procedure may help
recover the card if it is bad. The PeerWay Boot Procedure is
also available.
5. Replace the Coordinator Processor card.
6. Check that ControlFile motherboard terminators are installed
correctly.
NOTE: If no Controller Processors were running, the plant
configuration must be reloaded from disk.
(1)
If a nonredundant Coordinator Processor card is disabled on a running process, all operator process
changes, links between controllers in that cage, and links to and from that ControlFile will freeze at the
last value received. The controller will continue to operate the process under these conditions. As soon
as the Coordinator Processor is restarted, all links will be updated.
(2)
If a Controller Processor card is disabled on a running process, the analog output Field interface card
and the discrete output module will either hold their last value or go to zero, depending on the position of
the jumper on the Field interface card. If it is necessary to close (go to zero) the output of the field
device that uses the “HOLD” mode after the controller is disabled, the Field Interface card must be
removed.
(3)
If both PeerWay Buffer cards are removed from the ControlFile on a running process, all operator
changes and links to and from this ControlFile will freeze at the last value received. The links within the
ControlFile will continue to update. The Controller Processors will continue to operate under these
conditions.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ControlFiles
SV: 10-4-5
Table 10.4.1. ControlFile Troubleshooting (continued)
Coordinator Processor starts but
stops after a short period of time.
ControlFile appears on the
ControlFile Status screen and
then disappears.
1. Pull out the two PeerWay Buffer cards in the ControlFile. (3)
2. Reseat the Coordinator Processor and Nonvolatile Memory
cards and try to restart the Coordinator Processor.
3. If the Coordinator Processor now starts and runs, check the
Control Block Directory screens (a configuration key must be
used when viewing the screens) of all other ControlFiles on the
PeerWay for corrupted data. Look for scrambled loop tags and
abnormal block status and dynamic memory sizes.
4. If a suspect controller is located, the Kill Controller function must
be performed on all Controller Processors in that cage.(2)
After the Kill Controller has been performed, the plant
configuration must be reloaded from the disk to the ControlFile.
5. With the PeerWay Buffers cards still removed, disable and
remove all Controller Processor cards within the faulty cage.
(2)
6. Reseat the Coordinator Processor and Nonvolatile Memory
cards and try to start just these two cards. If the Coordinator
Processor will not stay running, replace it.
7. If the Coordinator Processor now starts and runs, begin
installing the Controller Processor cards one at a time. As each
card is installed, restart the Coordinator Processor and
Controller Processor cards (this is done to determine if one of
the Controller Processors is preventing the Coordinator
Processor from running).
8. If a Controller Processor is found that prevents the Coordinator
Processor from running, reseat and start the Coordinator
Processor and Nonvolatile Memory cards with all Controller
Processors set to DISABLE. After the Coordinator Processor is
running, reinstall the PeerWay Buffer cards and perform the
Wipe Bubble command for all Controller Processors in the
ControlFile.
9. Turn all Controller Processors to ENABLE and allow them to
restart. If one of the Controller Processors will not start, or if it
will not allow the Coordinator Processor to start, replace that
Controller Processor card.
10.After the ControlFile is running with all of its Controller
Processors, load the Plant Configuration from disk for that
ControlFile.
(1)
If a nonredundant Coordinator Processor card is disabled on a running process, all operator process
changes, links between controllers in that cage, and links to and from that ControlFile will freeze at the
last value received. The controller will continue to operate the process under these conditions. As soon
as the Coordinator Processor is restarted, all links will be updated.
(2)
If a Controller Processor card is disabled on a running process, the analog output Field interface card
and the discrete output module will either hold their last value or go to zero, depending on the position of
the jumper on the Field interface card. If it is necessary to close (go to zero) the output of the field
device that uses the “HOLD” mode after the controller is disabled, the Field Interface card must be
removed.
(3)
If both PeerWay Buffer cards are removed from the ControlFile on a running process, all operator
changes and links to and from this ControlFile will freeze at the last value received. The links within the
ControlFile will continue to update. The Controller Processors will continue to operate under these
conditions.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ControlFiles
SV: 10-4-6
Table 10.4.1. ControlFile Troubleshooting (continued)
Condition
Action
Coordinator Processor card will
not start in one of the two
Coordinator Processor slots, but
will start and run in the other slot.
1. Remove (1) (2) (3) all cards in the ControlFile except for one
Power Regulator card, one Nonvolatile Memory card, and one
Coordinator Processor card in the faulty slot. Re-enable the
Coordinator Processor and Nonvolatile Memory cards. If the
Coordinator Processor now runs, proceed to step 5.
2. If the Coordinator Processor does not start, replace the
Nonvolatile Memory card.
3. If the Coordinator Processor still does not start, replace the
Power Regulator card.
4. If the Coordinator Processor still will not run in this slot, check
the ControlFile terminators on the back of the ControlFile card
cage.
5. Once the Coordinator Processor is running in this minimum
configuration, install the remaining cards one at a time until the
card is found that prevents the Coordinator Processor from
running. Replace the faulty card.
Coordinator Processors will run
separately, but not as a
redundant pair.
1. Replace the Nonvolatile Memory card.
2. Replace the Coordinator Processor cards one at a time.
3. Check the ControlFile terminators on the back of the ControlFile
card cage.
(1)
If a nonredundant Coordinator Processor card is disabled on a running process, all operator process
changes, links between controllers in that cage, and links to and from that ControlFile will freeze at the
last value received. The controller will continue to operate the process under these conditions. As soon
as the Coordinator Processor is restarted, all links will be updated.
(2)
If a Controller Processor card is disabled on a running process, the analog output Field interface card
and the discrete output module will either hold their last value or go to zero, depending on the position of
the jumper on the Field interface card. If it is necessary to close (go to zero) the output of the field
device that uses the “HOLD” mode after the controller is disabled, the Field Interface card must be
removed.
(3)
If both PeerWay Buffer cards are removed from the ControlFile on a running process, all operator
changes and links to and from this ControlFile will freeze at the last value received. The links within the
ControlFile will continue to update. The Controller Processors will continue to operate under these
conditions.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ControlFiles
SV: 10-4-7
ControlFile Status Screen
Figure 10.4.1 shows the ControlFile Status screen. The ControlFile
Status screen is where you can find out what program type (such as
$$CP, $$CPMax, or $$CPBat) and version level is loaded in the CP
boards. The Coordinator Processor and Controller Processor must be
booted to determine what $$CP program and version is loaded in the
NV Memory.
You can find the Image type and the version level for each controller
card on this screen by reading the “Card Type” Field, and the “Prgm
Rev” fields for each Controller card. Also, you can tell what additional
images are loaded in the NV Memory by the “Additional Images” fields,
but you cannot tell what level of each Image is loaded in the NV
Memory.
The Jumper Code field indicates MPC II or MPC5 functionality and
image selection as determined by jumpers on the card. Displayed as
X_Y_Z where:
X = MPC II HD2 setting:
0 for MPC I functionality
1 for MPC II functionality
Y = combination of HD6, HD7, and HD8 as an octal number
Z = combination of HD4, HD5, and HD9 as an octal number
See the writeup on the CP card for jumper details and the Control Block
Manual (CB) for a complete description of this screen.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ControlFiles
SV: 10-4-8
CONTROL FILE STATUS
07-Aug-98
15:34:12
Node Address >1
File Status >Stdby
Batch CP
Batch Config NVM 128 K
Left CP: Boot 4.03
Prgm P1.09 Avail Links 39 Idle Time 45. %
Right CP: Boot 4.03
Left Program NVM Free 32. %
BRAM V1.16 Soft Count 0
Additional Images:
1. MPC2+
Config NVM Free 328 K
+--------------- A --- B --- C --- D --- E --- F --- G --- H
Alarm
MPC+
6.05
P1.11
95. %
96. %
76
4600
Alarm
MPC+
6.05
P1.11
47. %
54. %
69
4554
MPC+
6.05
P1.11
86. %
98. %
77
4554
PLC+
6.05
P1.11
97. %
99. %
77
4600
®Norm
®no
®no
®Norm
®no
®no
®Norm
®no
®no
>Stdby
®no
®no
1_7_7
1_7_7
1_7_7
1_7_6
SC Time Out
ÞNone
ÞNone
ÞNone
ÞNone
Scan time
NV Mem Used
Þ1. S
8 K
Þ1. S
32 K
Þ.25 S
8 K
Þ1. S
8 K
Control Type
Boot Rev
Prgm Rev
Idle Time
Free Space
Avail Links
Avl Trnd Spc
Primary
Status
Alarm Inhib
Start Cal
Start Cal
Jumper Code
Figure 10.4.1. ControlFile Status Screen
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ControlFiles
SV: 10-4-9
Wipe Bubble Procedure
The following procedure describes how to perform a Wipe Bubble
procedure on the ControlFile Nonvolatile Memory. Wiping rewrites the
header and purges the plant configuration information for the specified
Controller Processor card. The command works on Bubble NV Memory
and RAM NV Memory.
CAUTION
When a Wipe Bubble or a Kill Controller procedure is
performed on an MPC I controller, all *ENTRY and *VALUE
items will be lost. Write down the values BEFORE wiping
the configuration.
When a Wipe Bubble or a Kill Controller procedure is
performed on a MUX configuration the calibration constant
of the FEMs will be lost. The calibration constants should
be written on the FEM.
-
To wipe the NV memory:
1. Toggle the desired Controller Processor card enable/disable
switch to DISABLE.
2. Move the cursor to the command line and press:
WB = [Controller Processor address]
An alarm is generated:
BUBBLE WIPED FOR CONTROLLER=xx
The NV memory is now wiped.
3. Toggle the Controller Processor card enable/disable switch to
ENABLE.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ControlFiles
SV: 10-4-10
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ControlFiles
SV: 10-5-1
Section 5:
Troubleshooting Input/Output
This section covers I/O troubleshooting:
D
General I/O problems
D
Analog Card Cages
D
FlexTerms
D
Field Interface cards
D
Rosemount Basic Language (RBL) controller and cards
These procedures assume that you have found and corrected all red
fault LEDs before you going on to troubleshooting.
CAUTION
Use a grounded wrist strap with a built-in one megohm
resistor for your safety and to protect static-sensitive
circuits. Place all cards on a grounded static mat or in a
static protection envelope.
Potential problem areas include:
D
Bad fuses (in and out -- no indicators)
D
Bad card
D
Bad Controller card
D
Bad cable
D
Bad software
D
Bad firmware
D
Bad I/O Block or ControlBlock configuration
D
Bad field device
CAUTION
Remove power from the Multiplexer FlexTerm before
installing or removing any cards.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-2
Restoring Redundant FICs
When a primary Field Interface Card (FIC) with redundancy fails, the
redundant FIC takes over. The failed FIC lights its red LED or flashes
its green LED. Replace the failed FIC and determine that the new FIC
has its green LED lighted and that the FIC Status screen shows no error
for the FIC. The “Health” field of the primary FIC will still show “Bad”.
Restore the original configuration to make redundancy effective.
WARNING
Do not pull the redundant FIC to force a switch back to the
primary FIC. This introduces a “double hardware failure”
and may result in unexpected operation.
-
To restore FIC redundancy:
1. Call up the Redundant input/Output Block (RIOB) screen.
2. Put the RIOB in MANUAL.
3. Highlight the line:
Reset Backup of Line n (Press [ENTER])
and press [ENTER].
This restores the primary FIC and resets the backup FIC for
backup action. The Health field of the primary FIC will now show
“Good”.
4. Put the RIOB in AUTO.
Normal redundancy operation is restored.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-3
Troubleshooting Procedures for Serial Input/Output
Serial I/O is often called “MPC I/O”. See:
D
Table 10.5.1 for serial I/O
D
Table 10.5.2 for Multiplexer (MUX) I/O
D
Table 10.5.3 for Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) and
Thermocouple I/O
Table 10.5.1. Serial (MPC) I/O Troubleshooting
Condition
Analog Input No
Reading
Inst. Low Alarm
AIB Field Reading -25%
Action
1. Use a VOM to check that the input current is in the range 4--20 mA. If a
transfer card is installed, measure between test points on the card.
Otherwise, measure at the marshaling panel by breaking the loop.
If the current is OK:
Check the FlexTerm to ControlFile cables.
Replace the FIC.
Replace the Controller Processor Card.
If the current is not OK:
Check all fuses on the FIC.
2. Using the RMT 262 Field calibrator (or similar device), input an appropriate
current signal into the marshaling panel.
If the value is wrong on the AIB screen, replace the FIC.
If the value is correct on the AIB screen, check the field wiring and the
transmitter. Be sure to check the system/self-powered jumper on the
FIC.
Analog Input shows
incorrect or unstable
reading.
1. Using the RMT 262 Field Calibrator (or similar device), input an appropriate
current signal into the marshaling panel. Check the Field Reading on the
AIB screen.
If the reading is incorrect:
Calibrate the point.
Replace the FIC.
Replace the Controller Processor Card.
If the reading is correct:
Measure the transmitter current with the RMT 262 (or similar device).
Check the field wiring for shorts and resistance to ground.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-4
Table 10.5.1. Serial (MPC) I/O Troubleshooting (continued)
Condition
Analog output
Feedback check
alarm
Action
1. Remove the field wiring from the marshaling panel for this FIC. Connect a
Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator (or similar device) to the terminals. Put the
AOB in MANUAL and enter an output value of 50.00%. Check the Actual
Value reading on the AOB (it should be 50%) and verify that the Rosemount
262 meter reading is also 50% (12 mA).
2. If the Actual Value Reading and the meter reading are not 50%:
Check all fuses on the output FIC.
Calibrate the point.
Replace the FIC.
Replace the controller.
3. If the Actual Value and meter readings are 50% and the alarm clears off the
Active Hardware Alarm List, the problem is an open circuit in the field wiring
or the field device.
Discrete input
module does not
work. Input FIC
point LED not on.
FIC communications
are OK.
1. Check the mode of the Contact Input Block (CIB); it must be in AUTO or
MANUAL. If the Status Field is blank, this indicates an override condition,
which is illegal for a CIB.
Check if the discrete manual bypass is turned on for this point.
Replace the FIC.
Replace the FlexTerm motherboard.
2. Measure the voltage across the input terminations for the faulty point.
NOTE: If the CIB is configured for Normally Closed (N.C.) operation, the
Field State on the CIB screen will show ON when the module has no voltage
across it and OFF when the module has voltage across it.
3. If no voltage is present across the point:
Check the polarity for the DC module.
Replace the module.
Replace the FIC.
4. If all of the points on this FIC and the card next to it are not working, the FIC
may not be seated properly in its connectors.
It is possible one of the two connector tabs are not seated correctly in the
FlexTerm motherboard connectors.
WARNING
Before proceeding, remove all field voltage from the FIC to prevent
shock or equipment damage.
Loosen the two captive screws holding the FIC in place. Gently move the
card away from the FlexTerm mounting plate and verify that both card
connector tabs are properly plugged into the motherboard connectors.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-5
Table 10.5.2. Multiplex I/O Troubleshooting
Condition
Action
Multiplex input
point(s) bad.
1. Put an appropriate substitute signal into the point. Verify the accuracy to
determine if the problem is system or field related.
CAUTION
Always remove field DC power before working on a 4 -- 20 mA input
Front End Module (FEM).
NOTE: Do not remove or insert FEMs with power on.
If the problem is in the system:
a. For thermocouples, check the configuration of the MIB. Verify that the
“SIG CHAR” field is not configured for millivolts (example: J NBS is
correct; do not use NBS mV).
NOTE:
J = type J thermocouple
NBS = National Bureau of Standards
b. For 4--20 mA inputs with the 10 ohm dropping resistors mounted on the
marshaling panel, remove the field wiring and measure the resistance of
the resistor.
c. Replace the FEM.
2. Remove the input signal from the FEM. Configure the MIB for “Raw
Counts”. The MIB input reading should be about 20000. If it is much lower,
replace the FEM.
MIB I/O Block
configuration shows
FEM type
The FEM may have been inserted with MUX power ON. Turn MUX power OFF
and then ON to force the MUX CPU to reinitialize.
“None Type C”.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-6
Table 10.5.3. RTD and Thermocouple I/O Troubleshooting
Condition
Action
RTD and
thermocouple field
problems.
For RTD and thermocouple field problems, check the following items carefully:
Loose or corroded connections or FEM not securely mounted in MUX. This
can cause all input points to read as negative numbers. For FEM mounting
instructions see SV: 5--3.
Reverse polarity
Wires shorted to case at temperature sensor
Wrong type of thermocouple wire
Noise caused by close proximity to AC wires
High common node voltage. Measure from all device leads to chassis with a
digital voltmeter using both AC and DC meter scales.
Universal Voltage
FEM shows positive
overload on open
circuit.
This appears when Universal Voltage FEM is connected through a remote
communication link and configured as a thermocouple input. The system cannot
differentiate between a thermocouple with a high temperature reading and one with
a broken or open loop.
Check that the MUX CPU PROM is Doric (Beckman) part number 278--7000--03B.
Communication
failure to MUX CPU
and the Coordinator
Processor.
Ensure that TransZorbs CR17 through CR20 are bipolar (PGKE47CA). The
correct units have no polarity marking.
Low thermocouple
reading (or reading at
low value) for
thermocouples
attached to Universal
FEM.
Incorrect RTD
readings with two or
three-wire RTDs.
TC/RTD FIC shows
poor accuracy.
This appears when MIB is configured for TC or mV input.
Replace the FEM.
1. Check for correct wiring at FEM.
2. Check for correct wiring at RTD Marshaling Panel and at FEM.
If the sensor of an 1984--2731--000x TC/RTD FIC is disconnected and
reconnected, the reading will be inaccurate for approximately 10 minutes. The
reading will be within 1% in one minute and will gradually gain accuracy. This is a
characteristic of the circuit.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-7
Table 10.5.3. RTD and Thermocouple I/O Troubleshooting (continued)
Condition
Action
Discrete output
module does not
work. FIC
communications are
OK.
1. Put the COB into MANUAL Status and command the output to ON. Verify
that the output LED for the FIC is on. The proper load must be connected.
2. If the LED is on:
Check the module fuse.
Check the field voltage.
Replace the module.
If the LED is not on:
Replace the module
Replace the FIC
NOTE: Output Modules ODC5A5 and OAC5A5 are Normally Closed (N.C.)
Modules.
3. If all points on this FIC and the FIC next to it are not working, the FIC may
not be seated properly in its connectors. It is possible one of the two
connector tabs is not seated correctly in the FlexTerm motherboard
connectors.
WARNING
Before proceeding, remove all field voltage from the FlexTerm
Termination card to prevent shock or equipment damage.
Loosen the two captive screws holding the FIC in place. Gently move the
card away from the FlexTerm mounting plate and verify that both card
connector tabs are plugged into the motherboard connectors properly.
Discrete output
module does not
work. FIC
communications are
OK.
1. Put the COB into MANUAL Status and command the output to ON. Verify
that the output LED for the FIC is on. The proper load must be connected.
2. If the LED is on:
Check the module fuse.
Check the field voltage.
Replace the module.
If the LED is not on:
Replace the module
Replace the FIC
NOTE: Output Modules ODC5A5 and OAC5A5 are Normally Closed (N.C.)
Modules.
3. If all points on this FIC and the FIC next to it are not working, the FIC may
not be seated properly in its connectors. It is possible one of the two
connector tabs is not seated correctly in the FlexTerm motherboard
connectors.
WARNING
Before proceeding, remove all field voltage from the FlexTerm
Termination card to prevent shock or equipment damage.
Loosen the two captive screws holding the FIC in place. Gently move the
card away from the FlexTerm mounting plate and verify that both card
connector tabs are plugged into the motherboard connectors properly.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-8
Troubleshooting Procedures for Analog Input/Output
The tables below give detailed troubleshooting procedures for analog
I/O. See:
D
Table 10.5.4 for Analog I/O
D
Table 10.5.5 for MUX I/O.
D
Table 10.5.6 for RTD and Thermocouple I/O.
Table 10.5.4. Analog I/O Troubleshooting
Condition
Action
Analog Input No
Reading
1. For each input, measure between test point 1 and 2 for 4 mA current at 1
volt. For 20 mA the voltage should be 5 volts.
a. If the voltage is OK:
Inst. Low Alarm
AIB Field Reading -25%
Check the FlexTerm to ControlFile cables.
Replace the Controller Processor Card.
2. If the voltage is not OK, pull the FIC and check all fuses. Using the RMT
262 Field calibrator (or similar device) input an appropriate current signal into
the Field Termination board.
a. If the signal does not read properly, replace the FIC.
b. If the signal does read properly, check the field wiring and the transmitter.
Be sure to check the system/self-powered jumper on the FIC.
Analog Input shows
incorrect or unstable
reading.
1. Using the RMT 262 Field Calibrator (or similar device), input an appropriate
current signal into the Field Termination board. Check the Field Reading on
the AIB screen.
a. If the reading is incorrect:
Replace the FIC.
Replace the Controller Processor Card.
b. If the reading is correct:
Measure the transmitter current with the RMT 262 (or similar device).
Check the field wiring for shorts and resistance to ground.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-9
Table 10.5.4. Analog I/O Troubleshooting (continued)
Condition
Analog output
Feedback check
alarm
Action
1. Remove the field wiring from the Field Termination Panel for this Field
Interface Card. Connect a Rosemount 262 Field Calibrator (or similar
device) to the terminals. Put the AOB in MANUAL and Enter an output
value of 50.00%. Check the Actual Value reading on the AOB (it should be
50%) and verify that the Rosemount 262 meter reading is also 50% (12 mA).
2. If the Actual Value Reading and the meter reading are not 50%:
a. Check all fuses on the output FIC.
b. Replace the FIC.
c. Replace the controller.
3. If the Actual Value and meter readings are 50% and the alarm clears off the
Active Hardware Alarm List, the problem is an open circuit in the field wiring
or the field device.
Discrete input
module does not
work. Input FIC
point LED not on.
FIC communications
are OK.
1. Check the mode of the CIB; it must be in AUTO or MANUAL. If the Status
Field is blank, this indicates an override condition, which is illegal for a CIB.
a. Check if the discrete manual bypass is turned on for this point.
b. Replace the FIC.
c. Replace the FlexTerm motherboard.
2. Measure the voltage across the input terminations for the faulty point.
NOTE: If the CIB is configured for Normally Closed (N.C.) operation, the
Field State on the CIB screen will show ON when the module has no voltage
across it and OFF when the module has voltage across it.
3. If no voltage is present across the point:
a. Check the polarity for the DC module.
b. Replace the module.
c. Replace the FIC.
4. If all points on this FIC and the card next to it are not working, the Field
Termination card may not be seated properly in its connectors.
It is possible one of the two connector tabs is not seated correctly in the
FlexTerm motherboard connectors.
CAUTION
Before proceeding, remove all field voltage from the FIC to prevent
shock or equipment damage.
Loosen the two captive screws holding the Field Termination Card in place.
Gently move the card away from the FlexTerm mounting plate and verify that
both card connector tabs are plugged into the motherboard connectors
properly.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-10
Table 10.5.5. Analog I/O MUX Troubleshooting
Condition
Action
Multiplex input
point(s) bad.
1. Put an appropriate substitute signal into the point. Verify the accuracy to
determine if the problem is system or field related.
CAUTION
Always remove field DC power before working on a 4 -- 20 mA input
Front End Module (FEM).
NOTE: Do not remove or insert FEMs with power on.
If the problem is in the system:
a. For thermocouples, check the configuration of the MIB. Verify that the
“SIG CHAR” field is not configured for millivolts (example: J NBS is
correct; do not use NBS mV).
b. For 4--20 mA inputs with the 10 ohm dropping resistors mounted on the
marshaling panel, remove the field wiring and measure the resistance of
the resistor.
c. Replace the (FEM).
MIB I/O Block
configuration shows
FEM type
The FEM may have been inserted with MUX power ON. Turn MUX power OFF
and then ON to force the MUX CPU to reinitialize.
“None Type C”.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-11
Table 10.5.6. Analog I/O RTD and Thermocouple Troubleshooting
Condition
Action
RTD and
thermocouple field
problems.
For RTD and thermocouple field problems, check the following items carefully:
1. Loose or corroded connections or FEM not securely mounted in MUX. This
can cause all input points to read as a negative number. For FEM mounting
instructions see SV: 5--3.
2. Reverse polarity
3. Wires shorted to case at temperature sensor
4. Wrong type of thermocouple wire
5. Noise caused by close proximity to AC wires
6. High common node voltage. Measure from all device leads to chassis with a
digital voltmeter using both AC and DC meter scales.
Universal Voltage
FEM shows positive
overload on open
circuit.
This occurs if a Universal Voltage FEM is connected through a remote
communication link and configured as a thermocouple input. The system cannot
differentiate between a thermocouple with a high temperature reading and one with
a broken or open loop.
Check that the MUX CPU PROM is Doric (Beckman) part number 278--7000--03B.
Communication
failure to MUX CPU
and the Coordinator
Processor.
Ensure that TransZorbs CR17 through CR20 are bipolar (PGKE47CA). The
correct components have no polarity marking.
Low thermocouple
reading (or reading at
low value) for
thermocouples
attached to Universal
This appears when MIB is configured for TC or mV input.
Replace the FEM.
FEM.
Incorrect
RTD readings with
two or three-wire
RTDs.
1. Check for correct wiring at FEM.
2. Check for correct wiring at RTD Marshaling Panel and at FEM.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-12
Table 10.5.6. Analog I/O RTD and Thermocouple Troubleshooting (continued)
Condition
Action
TC/RTD FIC shows
poor accuracy.
If the sensor of an 1984--2731--000x TC/RTD FIC is disconnected and
reconnected, the reading will be inaccurate for approximately 10 minutes. The
reading will be within 1% in one minute and will gradually gain accuracy. This is a
characteristic of the circuit.
Discrete output
module does not
work. FIC
communications are
OK.
1. Put the COB into MANUAL Status and command the output to ON. Verify
that the output LED for the FIC is on. The proper load must be connected.
2. If the LED is on:
a. Check the module fuse.
b. Check the field voltage.
c. Replace the module.
If the LED is not on:
d. Replace the module
e. Replace the FIC
NOTE: Output Modules ODC5A5 and OAC5A5 are Normally Closed
Modules.
3. If all points on this FIC and the FIC next to it are not working, the Field
Termination Card may not be seated properly in its connectors. It is possible
one of the two connector tabs is not seated correctly in the FlexTerm
motherboard connectors.
CAUTION
Before proceeding, remove all field voltage from the FlexTerm
Termination card to prevent shock or equipment damage.
Loosen the two captive screws holding the Field Termination Card in place.
Gently move the card away from the FlexTerm mounting plate and verify that
both card connector tabs are plugged into the motherboard connectors
properly.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-13
Field I/O Status Screen (FIC Status Screen)
The Field I/O Status Screen (previously FIC Status screen) displays
information about the Field Interface Cards (FICs) and Field interface
Modules (FIMs) that communicate with a Controller Processor. This
screen is for display purposes only. No screen entries are allowed. To
call up the Field I/O Status screen, type the command FS [=address]
[ENTER] where “address” is the hardware address such as =87F.
NOTE: MultiLoop FlexTerms, some Contact FlexTerms, and Multiplexor
FlexTerms cannot be displayed on this screen.
Figure 10.5.1 shows the Field I/O Status screen. Table 10.5.7
describes the Field I/O Status screen fields. Table 10.5.7 covers the
status bits. Bit 0 of the status field is the rightmost bit, bit 7 is the
leftmost.
Cont =87F
FIELD I/O STATUS
1
2
3
23-May-95
4
5
6
16:01:49
7
8
A Type
F-Rev
S-Rev
Status
AIO-R
1.0
2.0
00000101
AIO-R
AIO-R
AIO-R
AIO-R
AIO-R AIO-R
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
00000101 00000101 NON-BOOT 00000101 00000101 0000010
AIO-R
1.0
2.0
00000101
B Type
F-Rev
S-Rev
Status
AIO-R
1.0
2.0
00000101
AIO-R
AIO-R
AIO-R
AIO-R
AIO-R AIO-R
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
00000101 00000101 NON-BOOT 00000101 00000101 0000010
AIO-R
1.0
2.0
00000101
C Type
None
F-Rev
S-Rev
Status
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
D Type
None
F-Rev
S-Rev
Status
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Figure 10.5.1. Field I/O Status Screen
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-14
Table 10.5.7. Field I/O Status Screen Fields
Description of Displayed Information
Field
Cont
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A, B, C, D
Address of the Controller Processor in the ControlFile.
Communication Line from the Controller. The column below shows what is
connected to the communication line.
Card Cage address.
Configured type of FIC. When the type is changed, this is displayed in the
corresponding alarm color.
AO
AIO
AIO_R
AIO_RS
Type
CIO
DIO
MAI
MAI32--x
MAO
PIOB
SI
TIB
Early analog output card
Analog I/O (2 in 1 out or 3 in FIC with all programs in ROM)
Redundant Analog I/O (2 in 1 out or 3 in FIC with redundancy
and downloadable code in battery backed RAM)
Redundant Analog I/O with Smart daughterboard
(2 in 1 out or 3 in FIC with redundancy, downloadable
code in battery backed RAM, and a Smart daughterboard for
HART communication)
Contact I/O (six points per card)
Discrete I/O (32 point discrete input/output FIM)
Multipoint Analog Input (16 point Input FIM)
Multipoint Analog 32 Point Input. (32 point input FIM)
“x” shows cage address of the “other” 16 points.
Multipoint Analog Output (16 point output FIM)
Pulse input/output FIC
HART input card
Temperature input FIC
F-Rev
Revision level and firmware of the FIC.
S-Rev
Revision level of the FIC software.
Status
Displays the status of the FIC. Refer to the next table for a list and description
of the status bits that may appear.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-15
Table 10.5.8. FIC/FIM Status Bits
Status
for:
Status
Bits
Any
NONBOOT
Analog
FIC Bits:
1xxx
xxxx
7
Lost calibration: Set to 1 if any A/D or D/A calibration constants
become questionable.
x1xx
xxxx
6
A/D converter failure. Set to 1 if any A/D converter does not complete
a conversion within 45 milliseconds.
xx1x
xxxx
5
Smart Transmitter message available. Set to 1 when a message is
available.
xxx1
xxxx
4
Redundancy Jumper. Set to 1 for 1:1 redundancy. Set to 0 for other
redundancy (including none).
xxxx
1xxx
3
Output Bypass Unit status. Set to 1 when the Output Bypass Unit is
active.
xxxx
x1xx
2
Hold/Zero jumper setting. Set to 1 to hold output value if a problem
occurs.
xxxx
xx1x
1
Normal/Inverse acting valve jumper setting. Set to 1 for inverse acting
valves.
xxxx
xxx1
0
Background diagnostics failure. Set to 1 if any background diagnostic
test (except calibration constants) fails.
1xxx
xxxx
7
Indicates the health of the other FIM. Set to 1 if the other FIM is “sick”
or missing.
x1xx
xxxx
6
Set to 1 if this FIM is disconnected from the field.
xx1x
xxxx
5
Indicates the health of this FIM. Set to 1 if this FIM is “sick”.
xxx1
xxxx
4
xxxx
1xxx
3
Not currently used. Always set to 0.
(Early versions reported DC power status with this bit.)
xxxx
x1xx
2
Loop Power Module status bits: 0 for Loop Power Module A.
1 for Loop Power Module B.
xxxx
xx1x
1
Set to 0 when the Loop Power Module is good.
Set to 1 when there is a problem with the Loop Power Module.
xxxx
xxx1
0
Set to 0 when the Loop Power Module is present.
Set to 1 when the Loop Power Module is absent.
Analog
FIM Bits:
Bit
Description
Indicates that the FIC/FIM program needs to be loaded.
Input Data Validity;
Set to 0 if the data is good.
Set to 1 if the data is invalid.
Output Data Validity: This bit is not used for outputs.
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-16
Table 10.5.8. FIC/FIM Status Bits (continued)
Status
for:
Status
Bits
Bit
Contact
Bits:
1xxx
xxxx
7
Setting of the Hold jumper: 1 = Hold, 0 = Off
x1xx
xxxx
6
Diagnostics: 1 = Fault, 0 = OK
xx1x
xxxx
5
Point 6 when the OBU is connected:
1 = Normal, 0 = Override
xxx1
xxxx
4
Point 5 when the OBU is connected
xxxx
1xxx
3
Point 4 when the OBU is connected
xxxx
x1xx
2
Point 3 when the OBU is connected
xxxx
xx1x
1
Point 2 when the OBU is connected
xxxx
xxx1
0
Point 1 when the OBU is connected
1xxx
xxxx
7
RAM test result: Set to 1 if the RAM background test fails.
x1xx
xxxx
6
ROM test result: Set to 1 if the ROM checksum fails.
xx1x
xxxx
5
CPU test result: Set to 1 if the CPU test fails.
xxx1
xxxx
4
Redundancy status: Set to 1 for 1:1 redundancy; set to 0 for any other
redundancy (including none).
3
Not used.
xxxx
x1xx
2
D/A failure: Set to 1 when the D/A has failed three times in a row.
xxxx
xx1x
1
Open loop: Set to 1 if analog output is open circuit.
xxxx
xxx1
0
General diagnostic status: Set to 1 if any diagnostic test fails.
Pulse
Bits:
xxxx
1xxx
Description
(continued on next page)
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-17
Table 10.5.8. FIC/FIM Status Bits (continued)
Status
for:
Status
Bits
Bit
Temp
Bits:
1xxx
xxxx
7
Lost calibration: Set to 1 if any A/D calibration constant becomes
questionable.
x1xx
xxxx
6
A/D Converter failure.
xx1x
xxxx
5
Not used.
xxx1
xxxx
4
Redundancy Jumper setting.
3
Not used.
xxxx
x1xx
2
Not used.
xxxx
xx1x
1
Not used.
xxxx
xxx1
0
General diagnostic status: Set to 1 if any background diagnostic test
fails.
1xxx
xxxx
7
Health of the other FIM: Set to 1 when the other FIM is bad or is not
present.
x1xx
xxxx
6
Disconnect bit: Set to 1 when the other FIM has been disconnected by
this FIM.
xx1x
xxxx
5
Configuration bit: Set to 1 when there is a problem with the
configuration of this FIM.
xxx1
xxxx
4
A/D #4: Set to 1 when there is a problem with A/D group 4 (points
25--32).
xxxx
1xxx
3
A/D #3: Set to 1 when there is a problem with A/D group 4 (points
17--24).
xxxx
x1xx
2
A/D #2: Set to 1 when there is a problem with A/D group 4 (points
9--16).
xxxx
xx1x
1
A/D #1: Set to 1 when there is a problem with A/D group 4 (points
1--8).
xxxx
xxx1
0
Overall test: Set to 1 if any test fails.
xxxx
1xxx
Discrete
I/O FIM
Bits:
RS3: Troubleshooting
Description
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-18
FIC Detail Screen
The FIC Detail screen displays information about the blocks that are
associated with an individual FIC or FIM. This screen is for display
purposes only. To call up the FIC Detail screen, cursor to the desired
FIC or FIM and press [SELECT] from the FIC Status screen.
To view the FIC Detail screen for a FIC or FIM, cursor to the desired
card and press [SELECT]. If any I/O Block is in alarm, the associated
FIC or FIM will be in a corresponding color.
Figure 10.5.2 shows the FIC Detail screen. Table 10.5.9 describes the
FIC Detail screen fields.
FIC DETAIL
Controller
FIC
Type
DIO
Tag/Address
=33CA101
=33CA102
=33CA103
=33CA104
=33CA105
=33CA106
A1
=33C
23-May-95
16:01:49
F-Rev 1.0
S-Rev 2.0
Status ssssssss aaaaaaaa bbbbbbbb
cccccccc dddddddd
Type
SIB
SIB
AOB
DOB
DOB
DOB
.
.
.
Value
00
00
00
Mode
MANUAL
MANUAL
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
Figure 10.5.2. FIC Detail Screen
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-19
Table 10.5.9. FIC/FIM Detail Screen Fields
Field
Description of Displayed Information
Controller
Address of the Controller Processor associated with the particular FICs. None
is displayed if no Controller Processor has been assigned.
Type
Configured type of FIC: analog I/O (AIO), contact I/O (CIO), redundant
analog I/O (AIO-R), redundant AIO with Smart daughterboard (AIO-RS),
discrete I/O (DIO). When the type is changed, this is displayed in the
corresponding alarm color.
FIC
Slot number of the FIC within the Controller Processor.
F-Rev
Revision level and firmware of the FIC.
S-Rev
Revision level of the FIC software.
Status
Displays the status of the FIC.
Tag/Address
Tag or address of the FICs residing in the Controller Processor.
Type
Type of block on the FIC.
Value
Output value of the block.
Mode
Mode of the FIC: AUTO, MANUAL, or SIMULATE.
There are five groups of status bits:
D
ssssssss
Same as the FIC/FIM status bits shown in
Table 10.5.8
D
aaaaaaaa
Status bits for points 1 to 4
D
bbbbbbbb
Status bits for points 5 to 8
D
cccccccc
Status bits for points 9 to 12
D
dddddddd
Status bits for points 12 to 16
Status bits a, b, c, and d apply only to Multipoint Analog and Multipoint
Discrete I/O (MAIO and MDIO). Bit 0 of the status field is the rightmost
bit, bit 7 is the leftmost. Table 10.5.10 shows the meaning of these bits.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-20
Table 10.5.10. FIC/FIM Status Bits
Status
Bits
Bit
1xxx xxxx
7
Not used.
Multipoint
x1xx xxxx
6
Not used.
Discrete
xx1x xxxx
5
Input Latch for points 25--32: Set to 1 if bad.
I/O
xxx1 xxxx
4
Input Latch for points 17--24: Set to 1 if bad.
FIM
xxxx 1xxx
3
Input Latch for points 9--16: Set to 1 if bad.
(MDIO)
xxxx x1xx
2
Input Latch for points 1--8: Set to 1 if bad.
xxxx xx1x
1
Output Latch for points 9--16: Set to 1 if bad.
xxxx xxx1
0
Output Latch for points 1--8: Set to 1 if bad.
1xxx xxxx
7
Overall health of point 4, 8, 12, or 16
Multipoint
x1xx xxxx
6
Calibration Constant condition of point 4, 8, 12, or 16
Analog
xx1x xxxx
5
Overall health of point 3, 7, 11, or 15
Input
xxx1 xxxx
4
Calibration Constant condition for point 3, 7, 11, or 15
FIM
xxxx 1xxx
3
Overall health of point 2, 6, 10, or 14
(MAI)
xxxx x1xx
2
Calibration Constant condition for point 2, 6, 10, or 14
xxxx xx1x
1
Overall health of point 1, 5, 9, or 13
xxxx xxx1
0
Calibration Constant condition for point 1, 5, 9, or 13
1xxx xxxx
7
Feedback check for point 4, 8, 12, or 16
Multipoint
x1xx xxxx
6
Calibration Constant condition for point 4, 8, 12, or 16
Analog
xx1x xxxx
5
Feedback check of the point for point 3, 7, 11, or 15
Output
xxx1 xxxx
4
Calibration Constant condition for point 3, 7, 11, or 15
FIM
xxxx 1xxx
3
Feedback check for point 2, 6, 10, or 14
(MAO)
xxxx x1xx
2
Calibration Constant condition for point 2, 6, 10, or 14
xxxx xx1x
1
Feedback check for point 1, 5, 9, or 13
xxxx xxx1
0
Calibration Constant condition for point 1, 5, 9, or 13
Status
for:
RS3: Troubleshooting
Description
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-21
RBL Controller and Cards
See Chapter 2 of the Rosemount Basic Language Manual (RB) for a
test program that checks the entire RBL Controller and output cards.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-5-22
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Input/Output
SV: 10-6-1
Section 6:
Troubleshooting PeerWay Interface Devices
This section covers troubleshooting of PeerWay Interface devices.
OI Bubble Memory Problems
If an OI Bubble Memory (1984--1167--000x or 1984--1147--000x) loses
the program Image or will not start the OI Processor, the bubble may be
corrupted. The procedure does not apply to an OI RAM NV Memory
card (1984--1547--000x).
Devices covered are:
D
Supervisory Computer Interface (SCI)
D
Highway Interface Adapter (HIA)
D
Diogenes Interface (DIO)
D
Rosemount Factory Interface (RFI)
The program image resides within the PeerWay I/F folder on a console
disk. The device must be able to communicate on the PeerWay in order
to download the program from the disk.
The problem is:
1. The OI Processor must be able to communicate over the
PeerWay in order to download a new program from the disk.
2. The OI Processor must boot from a good OI Bubble NV Memory
card in order to communicate over the PeerWay.
3. The OI Bubble NV Memory card is bad.
The procedure to be used requires having a good OI Bubble NV
Memory card for use. It may be borrowed from another PeerWay
interface device (a card from an HIA may be used in an SRU). The
software levels must be part of the same release: V11.xx is not
compatible with V9.xx. Check with the FRSI Systems Support Group if
you are uncertain about the software levels involved.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting PeerWay Interface Devices
SV: 10-6-2
-
To restore the OI Bubble NV Memory:
1. Turn off the power on the card cage with the problem and
remove the failed OI Bubble NV Memory card.
2. Check to be sure that jumper HD19 (in the upper center portion
of the board) is in the “NORMAL” position. Reinstall the card in
the normal (left hand) slot.
3. Set jumper HD19 of the good board to “DOWNLOAD”. With the
jumper in this position the bubble is a “read-only memory”. Install
the good card in the slot to the right of the bad card.
4. Turn on the card cage power. The OI Processor will perform
self-diagnostics and check the cards in the cage. When it tries to
check the failed OI Bubble NV Memory card the test will fail. The
Processor will then use the second (good) card to load the
program. When this is completed, the device will be an active
node on the PeerWay and will be able to communicate.
5. At a console, use Disk Directory PeerWay (DDP):
a. Select the Disk Volume that contains the PeerWay Interface
program folder.
b. Open the folder and cursor to the required interface program
($$DIOxxx, $$HIAxxx, $$RFIxxx, or $$SCIxxx).
c. Press [ENTER], which calls up the Disk Activity screen.
d. Cursor to the Operation field. Use [NEXT OPTION] and
[ENTER] to select “Disk Load PeerWay I/F Program”.
e. Cursor to the Node field and enter the node number of the
device with the problem.
f. Cursor to “Press <Enter> to begin”, and press [ENTER]. This
loads the program to the bad bubble card. The good bubble
will not be affected since it is in a “read-only” state.
g. Acknowledge the “Bubble Program Image Bad” alarm.
Monitor the Disk Event List to determine the success of the
download operation.
6. Turn off the power on the card cage with the problem and
remove the good OI Bubble NV Memory card. Put jumper HD19
in the “NORMAL” position and return the card to its original
place.
7. Turn on the card cage power. The OI Processor should boot
from the restored OI Bubble Memory card and operate normally.
If it does not do so, try the procedure again. If it still fails, the OI
Bubble Memory card is bad and must be replaced.
RS3: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting PeerWay Interface Devices
RS3t
Service Manual
Appendixes
Appendix A:
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Appendix B:
IEC and ISO Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Appendix C:
Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
RS3: Appendixes
Contents
SV: ii
List of Tables
Table
RS3: Appendixes
Page
A.1
Fuses Used in the RS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
B.1
IEC and ISO Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Contents
SV: A-1
Appendix A:
Fuses
Table A.1 shows the fuses used in RS3. The FRSI part number is given
first along with the equivalent fuse part number from Bussman,
Littelfuse, Schurter, or Wickman.
Table A.1. Fuses Used in the RS3
FRSI
Bussman
Littelfuse
Schurter
Wickman
Characteristics
G09140-0010
AGC 1/4
312.250
1/4 A 250 V Quick Acting
0011
MDQ 1/4
313.250
1/4 A 250 V Slow Blow
0016
AGC 1/2
312.500
.5 A 250 V Quick Acting
0017
MDQ 1/2
-- --
.5 A 250 V Slow Blow
0023
MDQ 1
313001
1 A 250 V Slow Blow
0029
MDQ--1-1/2
31301.5
1.5 A 250 V Slow Blow
0030
AGC 2
312002
2 A 250 V Quick Acting
0032
MDL 2
313002
2 A 250 V Slow Blow
0034
AGC 3
312003
3 A 250 V Regular
0036
MDL 3
313003
3 A 250 V Slow Blow
0037
AGC 4
311004
4 A 32 V Regular
0038
MDL 4
313004
4 A 250V Slow Blow
0039
AGC 5
311005
5 A 32 V Regular
0041
MDL 5
312005
5 A 250 V Regular
0044
AGC 7-1/2
31107.5
7.5 A 32 V Regular
0045
AGC 8
-- --
8 A 250 V Regular
0046
AGC 10
311010
10 A 32 V Regular
0047
AGC 15
311015
15 A 32 V Regular
0060
MTH 4
312004
4 A 250 V Regular
(continued on next page)
RS3: Appendixes
Fuses
SV: A-2
Table A.1. Fuses Used in the RS3 (continued)
FRSI
Bussman
Littelfuse
0061
ABC 20
314020
20 A 250 V Regular
312010
10 A 250 V Quick Acting
0062
Schurter
Wickman
Characteristics
0064
GMC5
G09149-0022
AGC 1
312001
G50382-0009
-- --
273.125
MSF
034.4210
1/8 A 125 V Plug-In
0011
273.250
MSF
034.4213
1/4 A 125 V Plug-In
0014
273.500
MSF
034.4216
1/2 A 125 V Plug-In
0021
273002
MSF
034.4224
2 A 125 V Plug-In
G50527-0004
----
5 A 250 V Regular
1 A 250 V Quick Acting
SLC50
50 A 300 V Time Delay
G53394-0250--5
Series
216
Series
19194
.25 A 125 V (IEC) 127--2
Fast Acting 5x20 mm
1000--1
Series 235
Series
19197
1.0 A 250 V
CSA approved
1000--5
216 001
19 194
1A
1.0 A 250 V (IEC)
Quick action
5x20 mm Ceramic
3000--1
Series 235
Series
19197
3.0 A 250 V
CSA approved
3150--5
216 3.15
19 194
3.15 A
3.15 A 250 V (IEC)
Quick action
5x20 mm Ceramic
G10802-0007
MCR 1
251001
1A 125 V
MST 250
50P0398
0007
RS3: Appendixes
SC-30
19372K
3.15 A, 250 V
Slow Blow, Plug-In
30 A 300 V Time Delay
Fuses
SV: B-1
Appendix B:
IEC and ISO Symbols
Table B.1 describes the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
and International Organization for Standardization (ISO) symbols used
in this manual.
Table B.1. IEC and ISO Symbols
Symbol
l
RS3: Appendixes
Publication
Description
IEC 417, No. 5031
Direct current
IEC 417, No. 5032
Alternating current
IEC 417, No. 5033
Both direct and alternating current
IEC 417, No. 5017
Earth Ground TERMINAL
IEC 417, No. 5019
Protective Conductor TERMINAL
IEC 417, No. 5020
Frame or Chassis TERMINAL
IEC 417, No. 5021
Equipotentiality
IEC 417, No. 5007
On (Supply)
IEC 417, No. 5008
Off (Supply)
IEC 417, No. 5172
Equipment protected throughout by
DOUBLE INSULATION or
REINFORCED INSULATION
ISO 3864, No. B.3.6
Caution:
Risk of electric shock
ISO 3864, No. B.3.1
Caution:
Refer to accompanying documents
IEC 417, No. 5041
Caution:
Hot surface
IEC 27--1, No. 101a
Power Factor
IEC and ISO Symbols
SV: B-2
RS3: Appendixes
IEC and ISO Symbols
SV: C-1
Appendix C:
Acronyms and Abbreviations
A
A
Ampere
AC
Alternating Current
A/D
Analog to Digital
ADLC
Advanced Data Link Controller
AIB
Analog Input Block
AIO
Analog Input/Output
AIO-R
Redundant Analog Input/Output
AIO-RS
Redundant Analog Input/Output with Smart Daughterboard
Amp
Ampere
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
AOB
Analog Output Block
ARB
Arbitration
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
A.S.H.R.A.E. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASIC
Application Specific Integrated Circuit
ASYNC
Asynchronous
AUI
Attachment Unit Interface
AWG
American Wire Gauge
B
BCC
Basic Command Console
BCD
Binary-Coded Decimal
BMI
Buffered Motherboard Interface
BNC
Baby “N” Connector
BRAM
Battery Backed Random Access Memory
BTU
British Thermal Unit
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SV: C-2
C
C
Celcius
CC
Command Console; Contact Controller
CE
Conformité Européenne (Marking that indicates compliance to all applicable
European directives)
CENELEC
European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
CFM
Cubic Feet per Minute
CFS
ControlFile Status (an RS3 command line entry)
CH
Chassis
CIB
Contact Input Block
CIO
Contact Input/Output
CJC
Cold-Junction Compensator
cm
Centimeter(s)
cm3
Cubic Centimeters
CMOS
Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor
COB
Contact Output Block
Com.
Common
CP
Coordinator Processor
cpi
Characters Per Inch
CPLST
Coodinator Processor Line Status
cps
Characters Per Second
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CRC
Cyclical Redundancy Check
CRT
Cathode-Ray Tube
CSA
Canadian Standards Association (Canadian Approval)
CTS
Clear to Send
D
D/A
Digital to Analog
DAC
Digital-to-Analog Converter
dB
Decibel
dBm
Decibels above (or below) 1 Milliwatt
DC
Direct Current
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
DCE
Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment
DCS
Distributed Control System
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SV: C-3
DDP
Disk Directory PeerWay
DEC
Digital Equipment Corporation
DIB
Discrete Input Block
DIN
Deutsche Industrie Normenausschuss (a German national standards
organization)
DIO
Discrete Input/Output
DIP
Dual Inline Package
DMA
Direct Memory Access
DMAC
Direct Memory Access Controller
DNB
Data Terminal Not Busy
DOB
Discrete Output Block
DRAM
Dynamic Random Access Memory
DS
Disk Shutdown (an RS3 command line entry)
DSR
Data Set Ready
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTACK
Data Transfer Acknowledge
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
DUART
Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
DVM
Digital Voltage Meter
E
ECC
Enhanced Command Console
EDAC
Error Detection and Correction
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EEROM
Electrically Erasable Read-Only Memory
EIA
Electronic Industries Association
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatability
EMI
Electromagnetic Interface
EN
European Norm
EPROM
Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
ETS
Electrical Tap Set
F
F
Fahrenheit
FEM
Front End Module
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SV: C-4
FET
Field Effect Transistor
FIC
Field Interface Card
FIM
Field Interface Module
FMS
Flexible Media Stack
FO
Fiber Optic
FRSI
Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.
FSA
Formatter/Sense Amplifier
ft
Feet
G
g
Acceleration of gravity at Earth’s surface
GAK
Gate Array Logic
GND
Ground
H
HARTR
Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
(HARTR is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation)
HCC
Hardened Command Console
HIA
Highway Interface Adapter
HOB
HART Output Block
hr
Hour
HVAC
Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
Hz
Hertz
I
ID
Identification
i.e.
Id Est (that is)
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
I/F
Interface
IGND
Isolated Ground
in.
Inch(es)
I/O
Input/Output
IP
International Protection
IP
Internet Protocol
I/P
Current to Pressure
IS
Intrinsic Safety
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SV: C-5
ISA
Instrument Society of America
ISO
Isolated
IT
Isolation Transformer
J
K
Kb
Kilobit (1024 bits)
KB
Kilobyte (1024 bytes)
KBI
Keyboard Interface Card
kg
Kilogram
kHz
Kilohertz
km
Kilometer
KMD
Kill Memory Dump
kVa
Kilovolt-ampere
KVI
Keyboard/Video Interface
L
LAN
Local Area Network
lb
Pound(s)
lbf
Pounds of Force
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LFD
Line Fault Detection
LLB
Local Loop Back
lpi
Lines Per Inch
LPM
Loop Power Module
LVD
Low Voltage Directive
M
m
Meter(s)
m3
Cubic Meters
mA
Milliampere
MAC
Media Access Control
MAIO
Multipoint Analog Input/Output
MB
Megabyte
MBM
Magnetic Bubble Memory
MC
MiniConsole
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SV: C-6
MDIO
Multipoint Discrete Input/Output
MDIOH
Multipoint Discrete Input/Output -- High-Side Switch FIM
MDIOL
Multipoint Discrete Input/Output -- Low-Side Switch FIM
MEG
Megabyte
MHz
Megahertz
MIB
Multiplexer Input Block
MIO
Multipoint Input/Output
mm
Millimeter
MLC
MultiLoop Card
MMI
Main Memory Interface
MOS
Metal-Oxide Semiconductor
MP
Marshaling Panel
MPC
MultiPurpose Controller
ms
Millisecond
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failure(s)
MTCC
Multitube Command Console
MTL
Measurement Technologies Limited
MTO
Master Terminal Operator
MUX
Multiplexer
mV
Millivolt(s)
mV/m
Milivolt(s) per meter
N
N/A
Not Applicable
NBS
National Bureau of Standards (American) -- This organization is now known
as the National Institute of Science and Technology.
N.C.
Normally Closed
NEC
National Electrical Code
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
nm
Nanometer(s)
NSm
Newton Meter(s)
No.
Number
N.O.
Normally Open
NRTL
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (American)
NRTL/C
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory/Canada (meets American and
Canadian standards)
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SV: C-7
NRZ
Non-Return to Zero
NV
Nonvolatile
NVRAM
Nonvolatile Random Access Memory
O
OBC
Output Bypass Card
OBU
Output Bypass Unit
OEM
Original Equipment Manufacturer
OI
Operator Interface
OSC
Oscillator
OTS
Optical Tap Set
P
PAL
Programmable Array Logic
PIOB
Pulse Input/Output Block
PIT
Parallel Interface Timer
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller
PLCB
Programmable Logic Controller Block
PLD
Programmable Logic Device
P/N
Part Number
ppm
Parts Per Million
psi
Pounds per Square Inch
PTM
Programmable Timer Module
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
PWA
Printed Wiring Assembly
PWB
Printed Wiring Board
PX
PeerWay Extender
Q
QBI
QBUS to PeerWay Interface
R
RAM
Random Access Memory
RBL
Rosemount Basic Language
RBLC
Rosemount Basic Language Controller
RCVR
Receiver
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SV: C-8
RF
Radio Frequency
RFI
Rosemount Factory Interface
RGB
Red-Green-Blue
RGRANT
Redundancy Grant
RIOB
Redundant Input/Output Block
RMON
Remote Monitoring
RMP
RS3 Millennium Package
rms
Root Mean Square
RNI
RS3 Network Interface
ROM
Read Only Memory
ROS
RS3 Operator Station
RREQ
Redundancy Request
RSEL
Redundancy Select
RTC
Real Time Clock
RTD
Resistance Temperature Detector
RTN
Return
RTS
Ready to Send
RX
Receive
RXC
Receive Clock
RXD
Data Receive
S
SAMA
Scientific Apparatus Makers Association
SCI
Supervisory Computer Interface
SCR
Silicon-Controlled Rectifier
SCSI
Small Computer System Interface
SEL
Selector
SELV
Separated Extra-Low Voltage
SH
Shield
SIB
Smart Transmitter Input Block
SMS
System Manager Station
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SRAM
Static Random Access Memory
SRU
System Resource Unit
SSC
Single-Strategy Controller
SSR
Solid State Relay
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SV: C-9
S/W
Software
SYNC
Synchronous
T
TB
Termination Board
TC
Thermocouple
TEA
Transfer Error Acknowledge
TI
Texas Instruments
TIB
Temperature Input Block
TIC
Time Interval Controller
TIL
Technical Information and Library Services
TTL
Transistor to Transistor Logic
TTY
Teletypewriter
TX
Transmit
TXMT
Transmitter
TXC
Transmit Clock
TXD
Data Transmit
U
UART
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
UDH
Unit Data Highway
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply
V
V
Volt(s)
VA
Volts Ampere
VAC
Volt(s) Alternating Current
VAX
Virtual Address Extension (a DEC family of computers)
VDC
Volt(s) Direct Current
VI
Volts Isolated
VIB
Value Input Block
V/m
Volts per meter
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SV: C-10
W
W
Watt(s)
WAN
Wide Area Network
X
XMTR
Transmitter
RS3: Appendixes
Acronyms and Abbreviations
SV: Index-1
RS3t
Service Manual
Index
Numbers
1012 V0 0444 AA, 6-6-11
1022 A0 0242 AA, 6-6-11
1026 A0 0242 AA, 6-6-11
1032 H0 0242 AA, 6-6-11
1034 H0 0242 AA, 6-6-11
1072 D3 0510 AA, 6-6-11
1072 F3 0510 AA, 6-6-11
10P
5037000x, 6-6-14
50400006, 4-3-2
50450001, 3-7-10
5049000x, 6-6-14
50660002, 3-1-27
50840004, 3-1-14, 3-1-16, 3-1-17
50842004, 3-1-14, 3-1-15
5087000x, 4-2-20
50930001, 2-3-2
50960001, 2-3-2
5270 0001, 6-3-1, 6-3-3, 6-3-4
52790001, 2-1-3
5280000x, 3-5-2
52820001, 3-7-7, 3-7-10
5285000x, 3-1-13
52960001, 4-1-1
53190004, 6-4-48
5319000x, 6-4-29
5320000x, 5-4-2
5324000x, 3-1-8
5349000x, 6-4-29
5352 0006, 6-3-1, 6-3-46
53520006, 6-6-7
5355 0006, 6-3-1, 6-3-46
53910001, 7-6-7
54040004, 6-4-44, 6-6-10
5408 0004, 6-4-46
54080004, 6-6-10
5409000x, 1-2-32
54340xxx, 7-2-3
54440002, 5-1-24, 5-1-35
54470002, 5-1-41
54500005, 5-1-35
54530001, 5-1-4
54560001, 5-1-4
5477000x, 6-4-4
RS3: Service Manual
54850001, 5-4-20
5488 0001, 5-4-13
5503000x, 1-2-28
55270010, 3-7-27
55270011, 3-7-27
5590 xxxx, 5-1-4
56120001, 3-1-26
56450002, 1-2-28
5645000x, 1-2-18
5658000x, 1-2-2
5662000x, 1-1-1
5664000x, 1-2-13
5665000x, 3-5-2
56700015, 3-4-7
5685000x, 3-5-23
57070001, 6-4-39
57240002, 5-1-35
57520007, 4-3-2
57560001, 1-2-32
57700005, 6-4-44, 6-6-10
58050001, 3-5-2
58570001, 3-5-2
1166-0505--0021, 3-6-23
0524--0010, 3-1-31
0524--00xx, 3-2-10
1167-0016--0002, 2-1-12
0016--0006, 9-3-3
0016--0007, 2-1-12
0016--000x, 2-1-12
1216/CW--ROS4, 6-6-3
12P, 0373x032, 3-1-26, 3-4-3
1301/PZ, 6-6-3
16--Point Input FIMs, 6-4-44
16--Point Output FIMs, 6-4-46
1822 C0 0030 CC, 6-6-8
1842 C0 0030 CC, 6-6-8
1862 L0 0060 CC, 6-6-8
1872 L0 0060 WW, 6-6-8
1882 L0 0060 UU, 6-6-8
1882 L0 0060 WW, 6-6-8
1984-0023--000x, 4-1-1
0158--00xx, 1-4-9
0158--10xx, 1-4-9
0158--20xx, 1-4-7
Index
SV: Index-2
0283--000x, 1-4-3
0298--000x, 1-2-2
0303--000x, 1-1-1
0317--000x, 3-6-20
0359--000X, 9-1-3
0360--000x, 5-2-22
0361--00xx, 5-2-22
0373--00xx, 1-4-3
0373--xxxx, 1-3-9
0390--000x, 1-2-13
0393--000x, 1-2-23
0484--0002, 2-1-3, 2-3-2
0488--000x, 2-1-3
0489--000x, 2-1-3
0498--0005, 6-3-28
0510--000x, 3-6-16
0514--000x, 2-2-8
0533--000x, 3-6-9
0543--000x, 3-6-6
0605--000x, 5-3-4
0607-0003, 5-3-16
0009, 5-3-16
000x, 5-3-14, 8-4-9
0620--000x, 5-3-2
0628--000x, 5-3-5
0657--000x, 3-2-5
0660--000x, 3-7-7, 3-7-14
0672--000x, 3-3-11
0744--000x, 3-7-5
1002--000x, 3-3-7
1011--000x, 3-7-46
1017--000x, 3-7-20
1045--000x, 3-7-15
1046--000x, 1-2-20
1050--000x, 3-3-14
1053--000x, 3-3-12
1064--000x, 3-7-42
1089--000x, 1-2-26
1129--000x, 5-5-34
1137--000x, 3-7-20
1140--000x, 3-7-52
1144--000x, 1-4-3
1147--000x, 3-7-60, 3-7-62
1161--000x, 3-7-30
1167--000x, 3-7-60, 3-7-62
1175--000x, 5-2-2, 5-2-7
1176--000x, 5-5-2
1189--0001, 2-2-13
1191--0001, 2-2-3
1192--0001, 2-2-3
1193--0002, 2-2-6
1194--0002, 2-2-6
1195--000x, 2-2-7
1195--xxxx, 2-2-5
1196--000x, 2-2-7
1196--xxxx, 2-2-5
1198--000x, 2-2-9
1224--000x, 4-2-39
1231--0001, 4-1-7
1240--000x, 4-2-20
RS3: Service Manual
1243--0001,
1249--000x,
1273--000x,
1274--000x,
1283--000x,
1288--000x,
1300--000x,
1304--000x,
1321--000x,
1325--000x,
1334--000x,
1336--000x,
1356--000x,
1362--000x,
1364--000x,
1371--000x,
1374--000x,
1394--000x,
1402--000x,
1432--000x,
1439--000x,
1442--000x,
1445--000x,
1448--000x,
1460--000x,
1463--000x,
1469--000x,
1483--000x,
1490--000x,
1494--000x,
1502--000x,
1505--000x,
1525--000x,
1540--000x,
1543--000x,
1547--000x,
1587--000x,
1594--000x,
1598--000x,
1631--000x,
1632--000x,
1634--000x,
1651--0006,
1651--0013,
1651--0027,
1651--00xx,
1653--000x,
1654--000x,
1693--000x,
1694--000x,
1695--000x,
1731--000x,
1754--000x,
1776--000x,
1779--000x,
1782--000x,
1803--000x,
1825--000x,
1872--000x,
1915--000x,
1921--000x,
4-1-7
4-3-20
5-5-21
1-4-5
1-2-9
5-2-13
5-5-4
5-2-23
5-2-12
5-5-15
5-5-27
5-2-2
5-5-5
5-5-33
5-2-28
4-3-25
4-3-28
5-5-8
4-2-2
4-2-13
4-3-20
4-3-25
4-3-28
4-2-20
5-2-23
5-5-8
5-5-27
4-2-39
5-5-21
4-3-30
4-2-2
4-2-13
5-5-27
3-7-30
5-1-57
3-7-60, 3-7-69
8-3-1
4-2-20
4-2-39
3-1-8
3-1-9
3-1-6
3-1-30
3-1-30
3-1-30
3-1-31
3-1-8, 9-1-5
3-1-6
3-1-8
3-1-9
3-1-7
3-2-4
3-5-18
3-2-4
3-2-4
3-2-6
3-5-18
3-2-5
3-2-8
3-2-4
3-2-6
Index
SV: Index-3
1927--000x,
1928--000x,
1934--000x,
1970--000x,
1975--000x,
1978--0004,
1978--000x,
1981--000x,
1989--000x,
2154--000x,
2171--000x,
2231--0001,
2307--000x,
2321--000x,
2347--00xx,
2350--000x,
2372--000x,
2386--000x,
2402--000x,
2409--000x,
2412--000x,
2415--0001,
2441--000x,
2448--000x,
2456--000x,
2457--000x,
2458--000x,
2459--000x,
2461--000x,
2462--0001,
2466--000x,
2483--000x,
2491--000x,
2494--0001,
2497--000x,
2500--000x,
2503--000x,
2504--9002,
2507--0002,
2507--000x,
2510--0001,
2510--000x,
2512--000x,
2518--000x,
2519--000x,
2526--000x,
2530--0001,
2533--0001,
2533--000x,
2535--9901,
2543--000x,
2546--000x,
2551--000x,
2552--000x,
2576--000x,
2597--000x,
2616--000x,
2618--000x,
2622--0001,
2624--0001,
2627--0001,
3-5-23
3-5-2, 3-5-15
3-2-4
3-1-12
3-1-13
3-1-19
3-1-14, 3-1-16
3-1-13
3-5-23
9-1-4, 9-3-2
7-3-3
2-2-3, 2-3-2
3-5-2, 3-5-13
3-1-10
4-2-39
2-2-8
3-1-6
3-1-6
5-4-13
5-4-2
5-5-13
5-1-54
5-4-20
5-1-54
5-3-10
5-3-7
5-3-9
5-2-16
5-1-53
7-4-5
5-3-10
5-1-35
5-1-4
5-1-13
5-1-2
4-3-2
3-7-39
7-4-3, 7-4-5
7-4-3
7-4-8
7-4-3, 7-4-5
7-4-8
5-1-54
5-1-24
5-1-35
5-1-2
7-4-1
7-4-3
7-4-4
7-4-3, 7-4-5
5-1-4
5-1-41
5-1-18
6-2-2, 6-2-9
5-2-2, 5-2-4
5-1-2
5-1-57
5-1-57
7-4-5, 7-4-6
7-4-6
7-4-1
RS3: Service Manual
2628--x006,
2633--000x,
2662--000x,
2731--000x,
2780--000x,
2783--9045,
2837--000x,
2844--000x,
2859--00xx,
2871--000x,
2889--0004,
2889--1004,
2891--000x,
3004--000x,
3005--9030,
3017--000x,
3023--000x,
3028--000x,
3038--000x,
3040--000x,
3062--00xx,
3065--00xx,
3067--xxxx,
3100--000x,
3202--0010,
3211--0001,
3211--0002,
3214--0002,
3222--0004,
3222--1004,
3222--2004,
3223--xxxx,
3245--0001,
3246--000x,
3261--0002,
3267--xxxx,
3270--0001,
3278--000x,
3286--000x,
3287--9500,
3289--000x,
3301--000x,
3318--000x,
3389--000x,
3442--0003,
3500--000x,
3505--000x,
4064--000x,
4068--000x,
4080--000x,
4121--000x,
4124--000x,
4127--000x,
4164--000x,
4167--000x,
4186--00xx,
4195--000x,
4195--00xx,
4196--0001,
4196--000x,
4205--000x,
7-4-3, 7-4-5
3-1-27
3-1-13
5-1-46, 8-2-1
3-5-2, 3-5-11
5-1-4
3-5-16
3-1-10
7-3-6
3-1-12
3-1-14, 3-1-16, 3-1-18, 3-1-21
3-1-14, 3-1-22
9-1-4
1-2-18
3-1-27
3-1-6
1-2-18
4-1-1
3-1-11
3-1-11
5-3-3
3-1-35
3-1-22
3-5-2, 3-5-10
3-7-27
2-2-3
2-2-6
2-2-6
3-1-14, 3-1-16, 3-1-17
3-1-14, 3-1-20
3-1-14, 3-1-15
3-1-17
3-1-27
3-1-27
7-4-3, 7-4-5, 7-4-8
3-1-20
4-1-5
6-2-11
3-1-27
3-1-27
3-5-23
3-7-52
3-6-2
3-5-23
1-2-14
3-5-2
4-2-7
4-2-20
4-3-2
6-3-1, 6-3-46, 6-6-7
6-3-1, 6-3-28
6-3-1, 6-3-28
6-3-1, 6-3-3, 6-3-14
4-2-20
6-3-1, 6-3-41
6-3-28
6-3-18, 6-3-33
6-4-25
6-3-18
6-3-33
6-2-2, 6-2-6
Index
SV: Index-4
4282--000x, 6-3-1, 6-3-23
4302--000x, 1-2-28
4309--0004, 1-2-28
4329--000x, 1-2-28
4344--000x, 6-3-1, 6-5-2
4350--000x, 1-2-28
4383--000x, 6-4-17
4398--000x, 6-4-39
4409--000x, 6-2-2, 6-2-9
4414--000x, 6-4-44
4418--000x, 6-4-46
4433--000x, 1-2-28
4438--000x, 7-6-3
3.5--inch floppy disk drive, 3-5-16
32--Point Input FIM, 6-4-48
3M Static Pad, 9-3-2
4--20 mA ANALOG INPUT FIELD INTERFACE
MODULE, 6-4-44, 6-4-46
4--20 MA FEM, calibrating, 8-4-7
4--20 MUX MARSHALLING PANEL, 5-3-9
5 1/4--inch floppy disk drive, 3-5-18
50P, 0589 0103, 6-2-6, 6-2-15
551 Barco CRT, 3-1-35
55P
0144x022, 3-1-26, 3-4-3
0416X012, 9-1-3
601077, 6-6-3
68020 OI Processor, 3-7-30
68040 OI Processor, 3-7-27
70983--, 0039, 9-3-2
7122 Conrac CRT, 3-1-30
7211 Conrac CRT, 3-2-8
7241 Conrac CRT, 3-1-30
7900-0317--0023, 3-2-8
408--0001, 7-5-6
A
A Bus DC Power Distribution Cable, 1-4-9
AC Distribution Block, 1-2-28
fuse, 1-2-37
AC distribution switch assembly, 1-2-18
AC Entrance Panel, 1-1-1
dual feed, 1-1-4
single feed, 1-1-3
AC input, 1-1-1
AC/DC Power Supply, 1-3-1
(with battery backup), 1-2-2
fuses, 1-2-8
LEDs, 1-2-7
(without battery backup), 1-2-13
measuring output current, 1-2-15
battery and charger replacement, 9-2-2
checking battery, 9-1-27
installing, 1-3-1
with battery backup, alarm contacts, 1-2-6
without battery backup
alarm contacts, 1-2-16
RS3: Service Manual
LEDs, 1-2-16
AC/DC Power Supply to DC Bus Cable, 1-4-3
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply, 1-2-26
fuses, 1-2-27
active hardware alarms, checking, 9-1-13
alarm contacts, AC/DC Power Supply
with battery backup, 1-2-6
without battery backup, 1-2-16
Alarm Output Board, 3-7-5
Alarm Output Panel, 3-7-5
alphanumeric keyboard, 3-1-6
Pedestal Command Console, 3-2-5
Analog Card Cage, 5-1-2
address label, 5-1-3
FICs, 5-1-23
hardware, 5-1-1
Analog Extender Card, 5-1-53
Analog FIC, 5-1-24
fuses, 5-1-34
jumpers, 5-1-31
LEDs, 5-1-30
redundancy, 5-1-28
Analog FIC Extender Card, 5-5-33
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard,
5-1-35
fuses, 5-1-37
jumpers, 5-1-37
LEDs, 5-1-36
Analog I/O, troubleshooting procedures, 10-5-8
ANALOG I/O CAGE MOTHERBOARD, 5-1-2
Analog I/O FIC, calibrating, 8-5-1
Analog Input FIC, 5-5-7
ANALOG INPUT NON--ISOLATED, 5-5-8
ANALOG MARSHALING PANEL, 5-3-7
Analog Marshaling Panel, 5-1-54
ANALOG MARSHALLING PANEL, 5-1-54
Analog Output FIC, 5-5-20
ANALOG OUTPUT ISOLATED, 5-5-27
ANALOG TRANSFER, 5-1-13
Analog Transfer Card, 5-1-13
fuse, 5-1-17
LEDs and test points, 5-1-16
Analog FIM, redundancy, 6-4-43
automatic, memory dump, 10-3-12
Auxiliary Terminal Block, 5-1-57
B
B Bus DC Power Distribution Cable, 1-4-9
Balance Mode, 5-1-19
Barco CD 551
Service Manual, 3-1-35
User Manual, 3-1-35
Basic Command Console, 3-2-1, 3-2-2
parts replacement, 9-2-5
BATTERY CHARGER AND DISPLAY
DRIVER/ALARM, 1-2-9
Battery Charger Card, 1-2-9
fuse, 1-2-12
jumpers and test points, 1-2-11
Index
SV: Index-5
Battery Replacement, battery charger card, 1-2-12
battery replacement
AC/DC Power Supply, 9-2-2
OI NV RAM, 3-7-81
OI NV RAM Card, 9-2-4
RAM NV Memory, 4-2-49
Black Box
Cable Assembly, 7-3-5
Data Converter, 7-3-5
BLOCK CONFIGURATOR SWITCH MATRIX, 3-2-4
broadcast messages, 10-2-14
bubble. See NV Memory
Bubble Nonvolatile Memory. See NV Memory,
bubble
Bubble NV Memory. See NV Memory, bubble
Bus A/B DC Power Distribution Cable, 1-4-7
Bypass Mode, 5-1-19
C
C
12243, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
1285, 2-1-12
12918, 9-1-3
52932--0002, 4-2-49
C--1404S, 3-1-27
C52932, --0002, 3-7-81
C53394--, 0250--0005, 5-1-55
cabinet, electronics, 3-7-2
cabinet door filter, cleaning, 9-1-9
cabinet fan screen, cleaning, 9-1-9
cabinet filter, cleaning, 9-1-8
cabinet surface, cleaning, 9-1-11
cable
A Bus DC Power Distribution, 1-4-9
AC/DC Power Supply to DC Bus, 1-4-3
B Bus DC Power Distribution, 1-4-9
Bus A/B DC Power Distribution, 1-4-7
DC Bus to DC Bus, 1-4-3
DC Bus to DC Bus Jumper, 1-3-9
fiber optic, 2-2-13
Keyboard Interface to Dual Keyswitch, 3-1-17
Keyboard Interface to Keyswitch, 3-1-21
Keyboard Interface to Remote Keylock, 3-1-20,
3-1-22
Opto/Electric, 2-2-7
QBUS Board 1 to Board 2, 7-4-3, 7-4-5
QBUS Boards to MP, 7-4-3, 7-4-5
twinax PeerWay, 2-1-9
calibrating
4--20 MA FEM, 8-4-7
Analog I/O FIC, 8-5-1
Input Points, 8-5-8
Isolated Output Points, 8-5-7
Non--Isolated Output Points, 8-5-6
Output Points, 8-5-3, 8-6-1, 8-6-4
Multiplexer FEMs, 8-4-2
MUX FEM, 8-4-1
Pulse Input FIC, 8-3-1
RS3: Service Manual
Serial I/O FIC, 8-1-1
Analog Input Points, 8-1-5
Analog Output Points, 8-1-2
Temperature Input FIC, 8-2-1
Thermocouple FEM, 8-4-3
Voltage Input FEM, 8-4-3
calibration, checking, 9-1-18
CC, 4-3-28
LEDs, 4-3-33
fuse, 4-3-29
CF TERMINATOR II, 4-1-5
Character Graphics Video Generator, 3-7-42
fuse, 3-7-45
LEDs, 3-7-44
checking
4--20 MA FEM, 8-4-8
AC/DC Power Supply battery, 9-1-27
active hardware alarms, 9-1-13
Analog I/O FIC
Input Points, 8-5-9
Output Points, 8-5-4
Console Power Regulator Card voltages, 9-1-24
I/O calibration, 9-1-18
LEDs, 9-1-12
RTD FEM calibration, 8-4-9
Serial I/O FIC
Analog Input Points, 8-1-6
Analog Output Points, 8-1-3
System Power Supply voltages, 9-1-26
Temperature Input FIC, 8-2-6
Thermocouple FEM, 8-4-5
Thermocouple Sensor calibration, 8-2-6
Voltage Input FEM, 8-4-5
voltages, 9-1-19
cleaner kit, tape drive, 9-1-4
cleaning
cabinet door filter, 9-1-9
cabinet fan screen, 9-1-9
cabinet filters and screens, 9-1-8
cabinet surfaces, 9-1-11
Command Console Fan filter, 9-1-6
Command Console glare filter, 9-1-14
console fan filter, 9-1-6
ControlFile Fan Filter, 9-1-9
floppy disk drives, 9-1-4
OI Card Cage filter, 9-1-10
tape drives, 9-1-4
trackball, 9-1-5
Cold Junction Compensator, 5-1-57
color codes, DC wiring, 1-4-10
COMM TERM PNL II, 6-2-2
COMM TERMINATION PNL, 6-2-2
Command Console
cleaning CRT, 9-1-14
degaussing CRT, 9-1-15
fan filter, 9-1-6
hard disk drive removal, 9-2-6
keyboard, tape, or floppy disk removal, 9-2-9
parts replacement, 9-2-5
Command Entry Keyboard, Pedestal Command
Console, 3-2-4
Index
SV: Index-6
COMMAND ENTRY SWITCH MATRIX, 3-2-4
Communication Card, MUX, 5-3-5
communication wiring, Multipoint I/O, 6-1-10
Communications Connect Card, 5-1-4
Communications Connect Card II, 5-1-4, 5-1-10
jumpers, 5-1-10
Communications Connect Card III, 5-1-4
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V, 5-1-6
communication wiring, 5-1-7
jumpers, 5-1-8
Communications Connect Card IV, 5-1-4
Communications Connect Card V, 5-1-4
COMMUNICATIONS CONNECT III, 5-1-4
COMMUNICATIONS CONNECT IV, 5-1-4
COMMUNICATIONS CONNECT V, 5-1-4
Communications FlexTerm, 5-4-2
Communications Register Unit, 7-5-6
Communications Termination Panel, 6-2-2
Configuration Keyboard, 3-1-6
Pedestal Command Console, 3-2-4
Configure HIA Screen, 7-3-9
connector
fiber optic PeerWay, 2-2-13
twinaxial PeerWay, 2-1-12
Connector Crimp Tool, 2-1-12
Conrac 7122, 3-1-30
Conrac 7211
maintenance manual, 3-2-8
spare parts, 3-2-10
Conrac 7241, 3-1-30
components, 3-1-31
Installation and Operation Manual, 3-1-30
User Guide, 3-1-30
Conrac 7241 CRT
black video or black bars, 3-1-34
power--up diagnostics failures, 3-1-34
Scan Board adjustments, 3-1-33
Scan Board failures, 3-1-32
Console, CRT, 3-1-26
console
Basic Command, 3-2-1
diagnostic programs, 9-1-16
Hardened Command, 3-1-1
Memory Dump screen, 10-3-12
Multitube, 3-1-1
Off--Line Diagnostic screen, 10-3-8
off--line diagnostics, 9-1-17, 10-3-8
Pedestal, 3-2-1
power--up diagnostics, 10-3-3
troubleshooting procedures, 10-3-1
Console Card Cage. See OI Card Cage
console node address, 3-7-18
Console Off--Line Diagnostics screen, 10-3-8
Contact Card Cage, 5-2-1, 5-2-2, 5-2-4
FIC addressing, 5-2-5
fuse, 5-2-12
jumpers, 5-2-10
wiring, 5-2-6
Contact Card Cage Extender Card, 5-2-28
Contact Controller Processor. See CC
Contact FIC, 5-2-23
RS3: Service Manual
fuses, 5-2-27
jumpers, 5-2-26
LEDs, 5-2-25
Contact Field Interface Card, 5-2-23
CONTACT FIELD TERMINATION, 5-2-13
Contact FlexTerm, 5-2-2, 5-2-7
FIC addressing, 5-2-8
fuse, 5-2-12
jumpers, 5-2-10
Motherboard, 5-2-7
replacement, 9-2-13
wiring, 5-2-8
Contact FlexTerm Extender Card, 5-2-28
Contact FlexTerm II, 5-2-7
CONTACT FLEXTERM MOTHERBOARD, 5-2-7
CONTACT FLEXTERM MOTHERBOARD II, 5-2-7
Contact I/O, 5-2-23
CONTACT I/O PROCESSOR, 4-3-28
Contact Marshaling Panel, 5-2-16
fuse, 5-2-19
wiring, 5-2-17
CONTACT PROCESSOR, 4-3-28
Contact Termination Board, 5-2-13
fuse, 5-2-15
wiring, 5-2-14
Contact Termination Panel, 5-5-5
fuses, 5-5-6
ControlFile, 4-2-1
5 V DC Only Power Regulator, 4-2-7
fuse, 4-2-12
jumpers, 4-2-11
LEDs and test points, 4-2-9
Card Cage, 4-1-1
jumpers, 4-1-3
Motherboard, Data Bus Terminators, 4-1-5
Power Regulator 5 and 12 V DC, 4-2-13
fuses, 4-2-19
jumpers, 4-2-18
LEDs and test points, 4-2-16
Support Section, 4-2-1
troubleshooting, 10-4-1
ControlFile fan filter, cleaning, 9-1-9
CONTROLFILE POWER REGULATOR, 4-2-13
CONTROLFILE POWER REGULATOR 5V ONLY,
4-2-7
ControlFile Power Regulator Card
adjustment, 9-1-21
checking voltages, 9-1-19
ControlFile Status screen, 10-4-7
ControlFile Terminator Board, 4-1-7
ControlFile Terminator II, 4-1-5
Controller Processor, 4-3-1
Contact, 4-3-28
Enable/Disable Switch, 4-3-36
jumpers, 4-3-37
LED sequence on power up, 4-3-32
LEDs, 4-3-32
Multi--Loop, 4-3-20
MultiPurpose, 4-3-2
Single--Strategy, 4-3-25
MPC, 4-3-2
Index
SV: Index-7
Multiplexer, 4-3-30
Programmable Logic Controller, 4-3-30
redundancy, 4-3-39
COORDINATOR PROCESSOR, 4-2-20
Coordinator Processor. See CP
COORDINATOR PROCESSOR EXTENDER,
5-2-28
COORDINATOR PROCESSOR II, 4-2-20
COORDINATOR PROCESSOR IV, 4-2-20
COORDINATOR PROCESSOR IV+, 4-2-20
Cover Plate, DEC, 7-4-5
CP, 4-2-20
enable/disable switch, 4-2-29
fuses, 4-2-38
jumpers, 4-2-34
LED sequences, 4-2-31
LEDs, 4-2-29
redundancy, 4-2-27
test points, 4-2-29
CPI, 4-2-20
II, 4-2-20
IV, 4-2-20
IV+, 4-2-20
CP-I, 4-2-20
circuit description, 4-2-24
CP-II, 4-2-20
circuit description, 4-2-24
CP-IV, 4-2-20
circuit description, 4-2-21
CP-IV+, 4-2-20
CPD-1304, 3-1-27
1304S, 3-1-27
1430, 3-1-27
CPU Card, QBI, 7-4-3, 7-4-5
Crimp Tool Kit, 2-1-12
CRT
Barco 20”, 3-1-35
Conrac 19”, 3-1-30
Console, 3-1-26
Hitachi 21”, 3-1-26
Iiama Vision Master 17”, 3-1-26
Mag Innovision 15”, 3-1-27
maintaining, 9-1-14
problems, 10-3-22
Sony 14”, 3-1-27
ViewSonic 17”, 3-1-26
Current MUX Marshaling Panel, 5-3-9
D
Data Bus Terminators, 4-1-5
DATAWAY TAP A, 2-1-3
DATAWAY TAP B, 2-1-3
daughterboard, 5-1-36
DC
color codes, 1-4-10
distribution cabling, 1-4-7
RS3: Service Manual
output card, 1-4-5
power distribution, 1-4-1
power distribution bus, 1-4-3
DC Bus to DC Bus Jumper Cable, 1-4-3
DC Distribution Block, 1-2-28
fuse, 1-2-37
DC OUTPUT, 1-4-5
DC Output Card, 1-4-5
fuses, 1-4-6
DC Power Distribution Bus, 1-4-3
DC/DC Power Supply, 1-2-23
fuses, 1-2-25
degaussing, Command Console CRT, 9-1-15
Degaussing Coil, 9-3-2
diagnosing
Console PeerWay problem, 10-2-36
ControlFile PeerWay problem, 10-2-37
multiple ControlFiles, 10-2-39
one ControlFile, 10-2-37
SCI PeerWay problem, 10-2-36
diagnostic programs, console, 9-1-16
Diogenes
Communication Converter Box, 7-5-7
Interface, 7-5-1
Interface Software, 7-5-5
TI Communications Card, 7-5-6
Direct Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-1, 6-3-3,
6-3-14
field wiring, 6-3-16
fuses, 6-3-22
input points, 6-3-20
installation, 6-3-16
jumpers, 6-3-21
labels, 6-3-18
output points, 6-3-20
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II, 6-3-1, 6-3-3,
6-3-4
field wiring, 6-3-9
fuse, 6-3-13
installation, 6-3-8
jumpers, 6-3-10
DIRECT DISCRETE TERMINATION PNL, 6-3-14
DISCRETE FIELD INTERFACE MODULE, 6-3-46
Discrete Field Interface Module (FIM), 6-3-1,
6-3-46
DISCRETE FIELD INTERFACE MODULE: HIGH
SIDE SWITCH, 6-3-46
DISCRETE FIELD INTERFACE MODULE: LOW
SIDE SWITCH, 6-3-46
Discrete FIM
LED patterns, 6-3-51
LEDs, 6-3-50
online replacement, 6-3-48
precision, 6-3-49
redundancy, 6-3-48
Discrete I/O, 6-3-1, 6-3-2
Discrete Switch Panel, 5-2-22
Discrete Termination Panel
Direct, 6-3-14
Direct II, 6-3-4
High Density Isolated, 6-3-41
Index
SV: Index-8
Isolated, 6-3-28
Multi--FIM, 6-3-23
disk--only SCSI, 3-7-52, 3-7-57
distribution block
AC, 1-2-28
DC, 1-2-28
Distribution Blocks, 1-2-37
Dual Feed AC Entrance Panel, 1-1-4
fuses, 1-1-5
dump
memory, 10-3-12
automatic, 10-3-12
viewing, 10-3-16
DVM, 9-3-2
E
EIA Options, SCI, 7-2-15
EIGHT LINE COMM CONNECT, 5-1-4
Elcon Intrinsically Safe Termination Panel, 6-6-3
Analog Applications, 6-6-9
Discrete Applications, 6-6-6
electrical PeerWay, 2-1-1
grounding, 2-1-7
termination, 2-1-11
Electrical Tap Box, 2-2-6
Electronics Cabinet, 3-7-2
Engineering Keyboard, 3-1-6
Enhanced Engineering Keyboard, 3-1-6
Ethernet
cable, 3-4-8
hubs, 3-4-11
Extender Card
Analog, 5-1-53
Analog FIC, 5-5-33
Contact Card Cage, 5-2-28
Contact FlexTerm, 5-2-28
MPC, 5-1-53
SIO, 5-1-53
F
FEM, 5-3-14
Thermocouple, 5-3-16
Universal Voltage, 5-3-16
Voltage, 5-3-16
fiber optic
cable and accessories, 2-2-13
Cable Tie Panel Assembly, 2-2-3
connector kit, 2-2-13
I/O Converter, 6-2-11
installing connectors, 2-2-13
Fiber Optic Cable Tie Panel Assembly, 2-2-3
Fiber Optic I/O Converter, 6-2-11
fiber optic PeerWay, troubleshooting cables,
10-2-42
Fiber Optic Power Meter, 9-3-3
RS3: Service Manual
FIBER OPTIC REPEATER, 2-2-8
Fiber Optic Source meter, 9-3-3
FIC, 5-1-23, 5-5-1
4--20 MA, 5-1-24
4--20 mA W/Smart Daughterboard, 5-1-35
Analog, 5-1-24
Analog Input, 5-5-7
Analog Output, 5-5-20
Detail screen, 10-5-18
Field I/O Status screen, 10-5-13
Isolated Analog Input, 5-5-15
Isolated Analog Output, 5-5-27
Non--Isolated Analog Input, 5-5-8
Non--Isolated Analog Output, 5-5-21
Pulse I/O, 5-1-41
restoring redundant, 10-5-2
RTD/TC, 5-1-46
Smart Transmitter, 5-5-13
Status screen, 10-5-13
TC/RTD, 5-1-46
Temperature Input, 5-1-46
FIC 2--IN 1--OUT/COMM EXTENDER BD, 5-1-53
FIC 4--20 MA, 5-1-24
FIC Detail screen, 10-5-18
field definitions, 10-5-18
FIC NON--ISOLATED INPUT, 5-5-8
Field I/O Status screen, 10-5-13
Field Interface Card. See FIC
Field Interface cards, 5-1-23
field wiring
Direct Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-16
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination
Panel, 6-3-43
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-31
Remote Communications Termination Panel I,
6-2-9
Remote Communications Termination Panel II,
6-2-6
filter
console fan, 9-1-6
replacement, 9-1-3
FIM, Discrete, 6-3-46
FIM Detail screen, 10-5-18
FIM Status screen, 10-5-13
FlexTerm
MUX, 5-3-2
replacement, 9-2-11
floppy disk drive, 3-5-16
3 1/2 inch, 3-5-16
5 1/4--inch, 3-5-18
cleaning, 9-1-4
Floppy Disk Power Supply, 3-3-14
fuses, 3-3-16
Floppy Drive Cleaner Kit, 9-1-4
FMS II Hubs, 3-4-12
Front End Modules (FEMs), 5-3-14
Fujitsu
DL2600, 3-6-9
DL3800, 3-6-2
DL4600, 3-6-6
DPL24C, 3-6-16
Index
SV: Index-9
fuse
CC, 4-3-29
MLC, 4-3-24
MPCI, 4-3-19
PLC, 4-3-31
SSC, 4-3-27
AC Distribution Block, 1-2-37
AC input, 1-1-5
AC/DC Unregulated Power Supply, 1-2-27
Analog FIC, 5-1-34
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard,
5-1-37
Analog Transfer Card, 5-1-17
Battery Charger Card, 1-2-12
Character Graphics Video Generator, 3-7-45
Contact Card Cage, 5-2-12
Contact FIC, 5-2-27
Contact FlexTerm, 5-2-12
Contact Marshaling Panel, 5-2-19
Contact Termination Board, 5-2-15
Contact Termination Panel, 5-5-6
ControlFile
5 V DC Only Power Regulator, 4-2-12
Power Regulator 5 and 12 V DC, 4-2-19
CP, 4-2-38
DC Distribution Block, 1-2-37
DC Output Card, 1-4-6
DC/DC Power Supply, 1-2-25
Direct Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-22
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II, 6-3-13
Floppy Disk Power Supply, 3-3-16
Isolated Analog Input FIC, 5-5-18
Isolated Analog Output FIC, 5-5-32
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-40
Keyboard Interface, 3-1-25
MARK 1 Remote Power Supply, 1-2-31, 1-2-34
Monochrome Video Generator, 3-3-10
MPC, 4-3-19
MPCII, 4-3-19
MTCC Remote Power Supply, 1-2-19
MUX, 4-3-31
Non--Isolated Analog Input FIC, 5-5-12
Non--Isolated Analog Output FIC, 5-5-26
NV Memory
bubble, 4-2-53
RAM, 4-2-49
OI Power Supply, 3-7-24
OI Processor 68000, 3-7-38
OI Processor 68020, 3-7-33
OI Processor 68040, 3-7-29
OI Remote Power Supply, 1-2-20
Output Bypass Card, 5-1-22
PeerWay Buffer, 4-2-6
PeerWay Tap, 2-1-6
Pulse I/O FIC, 5-1-45
PX, 2-3-9
RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card, 5-4-19
RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card, 5-4-24
Smart Transmitter FIC, 5-5-14
Temperature Input FIC, 5-1-53
fuse label, Remote I/O Power Supply, 1-2-28
RS3: Service Manual
fuses
AC/DC Power Supply, (with battery backup),
1-2-8
used in RS3 (list), A-1
G
G, 53373--0103, 6-2-6, 6-2-15
Grant Continuity Card, 7-4-8
grounding
electrical PeerWay, 2-1-7
Optical PeerWay, 2-2-10
tape drive, 3-5-24
H
hard disk, hardware, 3-5-2
Hardened Command Console, 3-1-1
HIA
Configure HIA Screen, 7-3-9
direct connection of PeerWays, 7-3-3
hardware, 7-3-1
HIA/Black Box Cable Assembly, 7-3-5
Link Cable, 7-3-3
modem, 7-3-5
OI NV Memory jumpering, 7-3-7
Status screen, 7-3-11
HIA Bubble Memory, 3-7-60
HIA Link Cable, 7-3-3
HIA Modem, 7-3-5
HIA Status screen, 7-3-11
HIA/Black Box Cable Assembly, 7-3-6
HIGH DENSITY ISOLATED DISCRETE
TERMINATION PANEL, 6-3-41
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination Panel,
6-3-1, 6-3-41
field wiring, 6-3-43
jumpers, 6-3-44
label, 6-3-43
solid state relays, 6-3-45
Highway Interface Adapter. See HIA
host, 10-2-14
hubs, 3-4-11
Hybrid PeerWay, 2-3-1, 2-3-2
I
IAC5, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
IAC5A, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
IBM Deskstar, 3-5-2
IC454--187, 7-3-5
IDC5, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
IDC5-B, 6-3-38
F, 6-3-38
IDC5B, 5-2-20
Index
SV: Index-10
Controller Processor, 4-3-37
CP, 4-2-34
Direct Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-21
Direct Discrete Termination Panel II, 6-3-10
floppy disk drive 3.5--inch, 3-5-16
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination
Panel, 6-3-44
Isolated Analog Input FIC, 5-5-17
Isolated Analog Output FIC, 5-5-30
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-39
Keyboard Electronics Board, 3-1-12
Keyboard Interface, 3-1-24
MiniConsole 5 1/4 inch floppy disk drive, 3-5-20
MPCII, 4-3-12, 4-3-15
MTCC Remote Power Supply, 1-2-18
Multi--FIM Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-26
Non--Isolated Analog Input FIC, 5-5-11
Non--Isolated Analog Output FIC, 5-5-25
NV Memory
bubble, 4-2-53
RAM, 4-2-48
OI Bubble Memory, 3-7-67
OI NV RAM, 3-7-78
OI Power Supply, 3-7-23
OI Processor 68000, 3-7-37
OI Processor 68020, 3-7-33
OI Processor 68040, 3-7-29
Optical Repeater/Attenuator, 2-2-8
PeerWay Buffer, 4-2-5
PeerWay Interface, 3-7-18
PLC FlexTerm, 5-4-8
Printer Interface, 3-7-51
Pulse I/O FIC, 5-1-44
Remote Communications Termination Panel I,
6-2-10
Remote Communications Termination Panel II,
6-2-8
RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card, 5-4-17
RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card, 5-4-23
SCSI, 3-7-56
Smart Transmitter FIC, 5-5-14
tape drive, 3-5-25
Temperature Input FIC, 5-1-52
VAX QBUS Interface Board 1, 7-4-10
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2, 7-4-13
IDC5F, 5-2-20
IDC5G, 6-3-38
IDC5N, 6-3-38
installing
AC/DC Power Supply, 1-3-1
Remote Communications Terminal Panel II,
6-2-6
Remote Communications Termination Panel I,
6-2-9
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard, 5-1-37
INTERFACE RS422--RS232, 5-4-13
INTERFACE RS422--RS422, 5-4-20
Intrinsic Safety, 6-6-1, 6-6-2
Elcon IS Termination Panel, 6-6-3
MTL IS Termination Panels, 6-6-14, 6-6-25
IS. See Intrinsic Safety
Isolated Analog Input FIC, 5-5-15
fuses, 5-5-18
jumpers, 5-5-17
LEDs and test points, 5-5-16
Isolated Analog Output FIC, 5-5-27, 5-5-30
fuses, 5-5-32
LEDs and Test Points, 5-5-29
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-1, 6-3-28
field wiring, 6-3-31
fuses, 6-3-40
input points, 6-3-37
jumpers, 6-3-39
labels, 6-3-33
output points, 6-3-36
solid state relays, 6-3-38
ISOLATED DISCRETE TERMINATION PANEL A,
6-3-28
ISOLATED DISCRETE TERMINATION PANEL B,
6-3-28
ISOLATED INPUT, 5-5-15
ISOLATED OUTPUT FIC, 5-5-27
ISOLATED OUTPUT FIC 0--20 MA, 5-5-27
J
Joystick, 3-1-11
Upgrade Kit, 3-1-11
JU475-2AEG, 3-5-18
3AEG, 3-5-18
4AEG, 3-5-18
jumpers
Analog FIC, 5-1-31
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard,
5-1-37
Battery Charger Card, 1-2-11
Communications Connect Card III / IV / V, 5-1-8
Contact Card Cage, 5-2-10
Contact FIC, 5-2-26
Contact FlexTerm, 5-2-10
ControlFile, 4-1-3
5 V DC Only Power Regulator, 4-2-11
Power Regulator 5 and 12 V DC, 4-2-18
RS3: Service Manual
K
KEYBD INT./ VIDEO ISOLATOR, 3-1-15
KEYBD INTERFACE/VIDEO ISOLATOR, 3-1-15
keyboard, problems, 10-3-21
KEYBOARD ELECTRONICS, 3-1-12
Keyboard Electronics Board, 3-1-12
jumpers, 3-1-12
Touchpad, 3-1-13
trackball, 3-1-13
Keyboard Interface
access, 3-1-23
fuses, 3-1-25
jumper, 3-1-24
Index
SV: Index-11
LEDs, 3-1-24
Multitube Command Console, 3-1-14
Pedestal Command Console, 3-2-6
Keycap Puller, 3-1-6
Keyswitch Assembly, Pedestal Command Console,
3-2-5
L
LEDs
Controller Processor, 4-3-32
MPC, 4-3-33
MUX, 4-3-33
PLC, 4-3-33
AC/DC Power Supply
(with battery backup), 1-2-7
without battery backup, 1-2-16
Analog FIC, 5-1-30
Analog FIC W/Smart Transmitter Daughterboard,
5-1-36
Analog Transfer Card, 5-1-16
CC, 4-3-33
Character Graphics Video Generator, 3-7-44
checking, 9-1-12
Contact FIC, 5-2-25
ControlFile 5 and 12 V DC Power Regulator,
4-2-16
ControlFile 5V DC Power Regulator, 4-2-9
CP, 4-2-29
DC Output Card, 1-4-5
Discrete FIM, 6-3-50
Fiber Optic I/O Converter, 6-2-16
Isolated Analog Input FIC, 5-5-16
Isolated Analog Output FIC, 5-5-29
Keyboard Interface, 3-1-24
LPM, 6-4-41
MAIO FIM, 6-4-49
Mark 1 Remote Power Supply, 1-2-31, 1-2-34
MiniConsole Floppy Interface, 3-3-13
MLC, 4-3-35
Monochrome Video Generator, 3-3-9
MUX Power Regulator, 5-3-5
Non--Isolated Analog Input FIC, 5-5-10
Non--Isolated Analog Output FIC, 5-5-24
NV Memory
bubble, 4-2-52
RAM, 4-2-44
OI Bubble Memory, 3-7-65
OI NV RAM, 3-7-74
OI Power supply, 3-7-22
OI Processor 68000, 3-7-36
OI Processor 68020, 3-7-32
OI Processor 68040, 3-7-29
Optical Repeater/Attenuator, 2-2-8
Output Bypass Card, 5-1-21
PeerWay Buffer, 4-2-4
Pixel Graphics Video Generator, 3-7-41
Printer Interface, 3-7-49
Pulse I/O FIC, 5-1-43
RS3: Service Manual
PX, 2-3-7
RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card, 5-4-16
RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card, 5-4-22
SCSI, 3-7-55
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard, 5-1-40
Smart Transmitter FIC, 5-5-13
SSC, 4-3-35
Temperature Input FIC, 5-1-51
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2, 7-4-15
VAX QBUS Interface Marshaling Panel, 7-4-7
LFD. See Line Fault Detection
Line Fault Detection, 6-6-20
Local Field Termination Board, 5-2-13
LOOP CALLUP (32 SWITCHES), 3-2-4
Loop Callup Keyboard, Pedestal Command
Console, 3-2-4
Loop Power Module. See LPM
LPM, 6-4-39
fuses, 6-4-41
LEDs, 6-4-41
LPS 105S, 3-5-2
LPS 170S, 3-5-2
LPS 270S, 3-5-2
M
M9047, 7-4-8
Mag Innovision CRT, 3-1-27
magnetic tape drive, 3-5-23
cleaner kit, 9-1-4
MAI32 Termination Panel, 6-4-29
Main Keyboard, 3-1-7
jumpers, 3-1-7
Replacement Subassembly, 3-1-7
Main Keyboard/Trackball, 3-1-6
Main Keyboard/Trackball/Option, 3-1-6
maintaining, CRT, 9-1-14
maintenance, scheduled, 9-1-1
MAIO, 6-4-1
FIM LEDs, 6-4-49
FIMs, 6-4-42
termination panels, 6-4-2
MAIO TERMINATION PANEL, 6-4-17
MAIO Termination Panel, 6-4-17
MAIO16 TERMINATION PANEL, 6-4-4
MAIO16 Termination Panel, 6-4-4
MARK 1 Remote Power Supply, fuses, 1-2-31,
1-2-34
Marshaling Panel
Analog, 5-1-54
Contact, 5-2-16
Current MUX, 5-3-9
MicroVAX/PeerWay Interface, 7-4-4
MPC, 5-1-54
RTD MUX, 5-3-10
Serial, 5-1-54
VAX 3xxx/VAX4xxx PeerWay, 7-4-6
Voltage MUX, 5-3-7
Marshaling Panel Auxiliary Terminal Block, 5-1-57
MC PEERWAY, 3-7-15
Index
SV: Index-12
MC VIDEO GENERATOR, 3-3-7
MDIO, 6-3-1, 6-3-46
MDIO MTL IS Termination Panel, 6-6-14
MDIO--MTL I.S. ISOLATOR BARRIERS
TERMINATION PANEL A, 6-6-14
MDIO--MTL I.S.. ISOLATOR BARRIERS
TERMINATION PANEL B, 6-6-14
MDIOH, 6-3-1, 6-3-46
MDIOL, 6-3-1, 6-3-46
memory, dump, 10-3-12
automatic, 10-3-12
Memory Dump screen, 10-3-12
Memory View screen, 10-3-16
field definitions, 10-3-16
Menu Confidence screen, 10-3-20
messages
broadcast, 10-2-14
point--to--point, 10-2-14
MicroVAX II, QBI Hardware Kit, 7-4-3
MicroVAX II -- PeerWay Marshaling Panel, 7-4-3
MicroVAX/PeerWay Interface Marshaling Panel,
7-4-4, 7-4-6
mini--floppy interface card, 3-5-18
MINICON POWER REGULATOR, 3-7-20
MiniConsole, 3-3-1
CRT, 3-3-11
Floppy Disk Drive, 3-3-11
floppy disk drive, jumpers, 3-5-20
Floppy Interface (SCSI), 3-3-12
keyboards, 3-3-4
OI Processor Card, 3-3-6
PeerWay Interface Card, 3-3-6
Power Regulator Card, 3-3-6
Printer Interface, 3-3-11
Remote Power Supply, 3-3-16
MINICONSOLE PRINTER INTERFACE, 3-7-46
MLC, 4-3-20
function, 4-3-21
LEDs, 4-3-32
fuses, 4-3-24
LEDs, 4-3-35
MODE Pushbutton, 5-1-19
Monochrome Video Generator, 3-3-7
fuse, 3-3-10
LEDs, 3-3-9
Raster Test Button, 3-3-9
MPC, 4-3-2
fuses, 4-3-19
LEDs, 4-3-33
MPC Analog Card Cage, 5-1-2
MPC Analog FIC, 5-1-24
MPC Contact Card Cage, 5-2-2
MPC Contact FlexTerm, 5-2-2
MPC CONTACT FLEXTERM MOTHERBOARD,
5-2-4
MPC Marshaling Panel, 5-1-54
MPC5, 4-3-2
MPCI, 4-3-2
function, 4-3-10
MPCII, 4-3-2
function, 4-3-5, 4-3-7
RS3: Service Manual
jumpers, 4-3-12, 4-3-15
MTCC Remote Power Supply, 1-2-18
fuse, 1-2-19
jumper, 1-2-18
MTL
4014, 6-6-22
4021, 6-6-22
4023, 6-6-22
4025, 6-6-22
4041B, 6-6-29
4041P, 6-6-29
4045B, 6-6-29
4046P, 6-6-29
MTL IS Termination Panels, 6-6-14, 6-6-25
MULTI LOOP PROCESSOR, 4-3-20
MULTI STRATEGY PROCESSOR, 4-3-20
Multi--FIM Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-1,
6-3-23
jumpers, 6-3-26
label, 6-3-25
MULTI--FIM TERMINATION PANEL, 6-3-23
Multi--Loop Controller Processor. See MLC
Multi--Loop FlexTerm, 5-5-1
replacement, 9-2-11
MULTI--PURPOSE CONTROLLER II, 4-3-2
MULTI--STRATEGY MARSHALLING PANEL,
5-1-54, 5-3-10
MultiLoop FlexTerm, 5-5-2
Multiplexer Controller Processor. See MUX
Multiplexer FEM, calibrating, 8-4-2
Multiplexer FlexTerm Hardware, 5-3-1
MULTIPLEXER PROCESSOR, 4-3-30
Multipoint Analog I/O. See MAIO
Multipoint Discrete I/O. See MDIO
Multipoint I/O
address jumpers, 6-1-4
addressing, 6-1-4
communication wiring, 6-1-10
grounding, 6-1-8
installation, 6-1-1, 6-1-8
online replacement, 6-1-6
power wiring, 6-1-8
redundancy, 6-1-6
scanning rate, 6-1-5
system cabling, 6-1-1
MultiPurpose Controller Processor. See MPC
MultiPurpose Controller Processor II, 4-3-2
Multitube Command Console, 3-1-1
CRT
Barco CD 551 and ICD 551, 3-1-35
Hitachi 21”, 3-1-26
Iiyama 17”, 3-1-26
Mag Innovision, 3-1-27
Sony, 3-1-27
ViewSonic 17”, 3-1-26
keyboard assembly, 3-1-4
keyboard electronics, 3-1-12
keyboard error reporting, 3-1-5
Keyboard Interface, 3-1-14
Multitube Electronics Cabinet, 3-7-2
MUX, 4-3-30
Index
SV: Index-13
Communication Card, 5-3-5
fuse, 4-3-31
LEDs, 4-3-33
Power Regulator, 5-3-4
MUX Cable Assembly, 200 Points, 5-3-3
MUX FEM, calibrating, 8-4-1
MUX FlexTerm, 5-3-2
MUX Front End Modules (FEMs), 5-3-14
MUX MARSH PANEL, 5-3-9
MUX Marshaling Panels, 5-3-7
MUX Power Regulator, 5-3-4
LEDs, 5-3-5
N
node address, 3-7-18
Node Dump screen, 10-3-19
NON--ISO & ISO ANALOG OUTPUT/INPUT CARD
EXTENDER, 5-5-33
NON--ISO ANALOG OUTPUT, 5-5-21
Non--Isolated Analog Input FIC, 5-5-8
fuses, 5-5-12
jumpers, 5-5-11
LEDs and test points, 5-5-10
Non--Isolated Analog Output FIC, 5-5-21
fuses, 5-5-26
jumpers, 5-5-25
LEDs and test points, 5-5-24
NON--ISOLATED OUTPUT, 5-5-21
Nonvolatile Memory. See NV Memory
NV BUBBLE MEMORY, 4-2-39
NV MEMORY, 4-2-39
NV Memory, 4-2-39
bubble, 3-7-62, 4-2-50
fuses, 4-2-53
jumpers, 4-2-53
LEDs, 4-2-52
problems, 10-6-1
test points, 4-2-52
RAM, 3-7-69, 4-2-41
battery replacement, 4-2-49
fuse, 4-2-49
jumpers, 4-2-48
LED sequences, 4-2-46
LEDs, 4-2-44
test points, 4-2-44
NV RAM, OI, 3-7-69
O
OAC5, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
OAC5-1, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
A, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
OAC5A5, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
OBC, 5-1-18
OBU, 5-5-34
RS3: Service Manual
ODC5, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
ODC5A, 5-2-20, 6-3-38
ODC5RM , 6-3-38
OI BUBBLE MEMORY, 3-7-60, 3-7-62
OI Bubble Memory, 3-7-62
jumpers, 3-7-67
LED Sequences, 3-7-66
LEDs, 3-7-65
OI BUBBLE MEMORY SC, 3-7-60, 3-7-62
OI Card Cage, 3-7-1, 3-7-7, 3-7-14
cleaning filter, 9-1-10
EMC Compliant, 3-7-7, 3-7-10
troubleshooting, 10-3-24
OI COLOR VIDEO, 3-7-42
OI GRAPHICS VIDEO GEN, 3-7-39
OI KEYBOARD INTERFACE, 3-2-6
OI MINI FLOPPY DISK CONTROLLER, 3-3-12
OI Nonvolatile Memory, 3-7-60
OI NV RAM, 3-7-60, 3-7-69, 3-7-74
battery replacement, 3-7-81, 9-2-4
jumpers, 3-7-78
LED Sequences, 3-7-77
OI POWER SUPPLY, 3-7-20
OI Power Supply, 3-7-20
fuses, 3-7-24
jumpers, 3-7-23
LEDs and test points, 3-7-22
OI Processor, 3-7-25
OI Processor 68000, 3-7-34
fuses, 3-7-38
jumpers, 3-7-37
LEDs, 3-7-36
OI PROCESSOR 68020, 3-7-30
OI Processor 68020, 3-7-30
fuses, 3-7-33
jumpers, 3-7-33
LEDs, 3-7-32
OI PROCESSOR 68020 W/ASIC, 3-7-30
OI Processor 68040, 3-7-27
fuses, 3-7-29
jumpers, 3-7-29
LEDs, 3-7-29
OI PROCESSOR V, 3-7-27
OI Remote Power Supply, 1-2-20
fuse, 1-2-22
OI SCSI HOST ADAPTER, 3-7-52
online replacement
Discrete FIM, 6-3-48
Multipoint I/O, 6-1-6
Operator Interface Card Cage. See OI Card Cage
operator keyboard, 3-1-6
jumpers, 3-1-7
Optical Isolator Module
Contact I/O, 5-2-20
Discrete I/O, 6-3-38
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination
Panel, 6-3-45
Optical PeerWay, 2-2-1, 2-2-2
grounding, 2-2-10
Optical Repeater/Attenuator, 2-2-8
jumpers and LEDs, 2-2-8
Index
SV: Index-14
Optical Tap Box, 2-2-3
connecting cables, 2-2-5
Option Keyboard, 3-1-9
jumpers, 3-1-9
Replacement Subassembly, 3-1-9
OPTO Isolator, 5-2-20
Opto/Electric cable, 2-2-5– 2-2-7
ORR5--1, 6-3-38
OS KEYBOARD INTERFACE, 3-2-6
Output Bypass Card, 5-1-18, 5-1-19
fuses, 5-1-22
LEDs, 5-1-21
operating instructions, 5-1-21
Output Bypass Unit, 5-5-34
P
Pansonic
JU474--2AEG, 3-5-18
JU475--3AEG, 3-5-18
JU475--4AEG, 3-5-18
parts replacement, 9-2-1
Password Keyboard Interface , 3-1-15
PC compatible keyboard, 3-1-6
Pedestal Command Console, 3-2-1
Alphanumeric Keyboard (Rotating), 3-2-5
Command Entry Keyboard, 3-2-4
Configuration Keyboard, 3-2-4
CRT, 3-2-8
Disk Interface Card (SCSI), 3-2-11
Keyboard Interface, 3-2-6
keyboards, 3-2-3
Keyswitch Assembly, 3-2-5
Loop Callup Keyboard, 3-2-4
Power Supply, 3-2-11
Printer Interface Card, 3-2-11
Trackball Keyboard, 3-2-4
PeerWay
Backup Node screen, 10-2-12
cable fault diagnostics, 10-2-40
electrical, 2-1-1
fault conditions, 10-2-30
fault detection, 10-2-31
fault diagnostics, 10-2-35
hybrid, 2-3-1, 2-3-2
Node screen, 10-2-12
optical, 2-2-1
Overview screen, 10-2-9
Performance screen, 10-2-3
sample problems, 10-2-29
screens, 10-2-1
twinax, 2-1-1
PeerWay Backup Node screen, 10-2-12
field definitions, 10-2-12
PeerWay Buffer, 4-2-2
fuse, 4-2-6
jumpers, 4-2-5
LEDs and test points, 4-2-4
PeerWay Drop Cables, MicroVAX, 7-4-3, 7-4-5
RS3: Service Manual
PeerWay Extender. See PX
PeerWay Field Termination Kit, 9-3-3
PeerWay Interface, 3-7-15
jumpers, 3-7-18
LEDs and test points, 3-7-17
PeerWay Interface Card, QBI, 7-4-3, 7-4-5
PeerWay Interface Devices, troubleshooting, 10-6-1
PeerWay Node screen, 10-2-12
field definitions, 10-2-12
PeerWay Overview screen, 10-2-9
field definitions, 10-2-9
use in fault detection, 10-2-33
PeerWay Performance screen, 10-2-3
field definitions, 10-2-3
PeerWay Tap
fuses, 2-1-6
test points, 2-1-6
Peripheral Devices, disk drives, 3-5-1
Pixel Graphics Video Generator, 3-7-39
LEDs, 3-7-41
Plant Status screen, 10-2-2
PLC, 4-3-30, 5-4-1
Fuse, 4-3-31
FlexTerm, 5-4-2
hardware, 5-4-1
Port I/O Card Redundancy, 5-4-11
redundancy, 5-4-9
PLC FlexTerm, 5-4-2
jumpers, 5-4-8
point--to--point messages, 10-2-14
Port I/O Card, 5-4-13
redundancy, 5-4-11
RS422/RS232, 5-4-13
RS422/RS422, 5-4-20
power, redundancy, 1-5-1
power regulator
MUX, 5-3-4
OI, 3-7-20
Power Regulator Card
5 and 12 Volt DC, 4-2-13
5V DC Only, 4-2-7
checking voltages, 9-1-24
ControlFile, checking voltages, 9-1-19
Inserting, 4-2-7, 4-2-13
power supplies, 1-2-1
POWER SUPPLY DISPLAY III, 1-2-14
power wiring, Multipoint I/O, 6-1-8
printer, 3-6-1
DL2600 (Fujitsu), 3-6-9
DL3800 (Fujitsu), 3-6-2
DL4600 (Fujitsu), 3-6-6
DPL24C (Fujitsu), 3-6-16
TI 810, 3-6-20
printer interface, 3-7-46
jumpers, 3-7-51
LEDs, 3-7-49
ProDrive. See Quantum
Programmable Logic Controller. See PLC
PULSE I/O, 5-1-41
Pulse I/O FIC
fuses, 5-1-45
Index
SV: Index-15
jumpers, 5-1-44
LEDs, 5-1-43
Pulse Input FIC, calibrating, 8-3-1
PX, 2-3-2
Q
QBI, 7-4-1, 7-4-2, 7-4-3
Hardware Kit, 7-4-1
QBUS Board 1, 7-4-3, 7-4-5, 7-4-8
QBUS Board 2, 7-4-3, 7-4-5, 7-4-8
QBUS TO PEERWAY INTERFACE I, 7-4-8
QBUS TO PEERWAY INTERFACE I+, 7-4-8
QBUS TO PEERWAY INTERFACE II, 7-4-8
Quantum
80S, 3-5-2, 3-5-11
LPS 105S, 3-5-10
Q250, 3-5-2
Q280, 3-5-2, 3-5-13
Q540, 3-5-15
Quantum QM32100, 3-5-2
Quantum Thunderbolt, 3-5-2
R
RAM Nonvolatile Memory. See NV Memory, RAM
RAM NV Memory. See NV Memory, RAM
Raster Test Button, Monochrome Video Generator,
3-3-9
RBLC FlexTerm, 5-4-2
reactivity coupon, use, 1-3-5, 1-3-16, 1-3-18,
1-3-19, 1-3-20, 1-3-21
Recommended Resistance, 6-3-4
redundancy
Analog FIC, 5-1-28
Analog FIM, 6-4-43
Controller Processor, 4-3-39
CP, 4-2-27
Discrete FIM, 6-3-48
Multipoint I/O, 6-1-6
PLC, 5-4-9
PLC Port I/O Card, 5-4-11
power, 1-5-1
Thermocouple Sensor, 8-2-7
Remote Communications Termination Panel, 6-2-2
Remote Communications Termination Panel I,
6-2-2, 6-2-9
installing, 6-2-9
jumpers, 6-2-10
Remote Communications Termination Panel II,
6-2-2– 6-2-4
field wiring, 6-2-6
installing, 6-2-6
jumpers, 6-2-8
Remote I/O Power Supply, 1-2-28
Remote Keyswitch, 3-1-20
Remote Power Supply, 1-2-32
RS3: Service Manual
remote power supply
I/O, 1-2-28
MTCC, 1-2-18
OI, 1-2-20
remote termination panel, standard, 6-5-2
Repeater/Attenuator, optical, 2-2-8
Resistance Temperature Detector, 5-3-16
restore operations, redundant FICs, 10-5-2
RNI, 3-4-9, 7-6-1, 7-6-2
Fan Assembly, 7-6-7
PeerWay Node Label, 7-6-3
ROS CRT
Hitachi 21”, 3-4-3
Iiama Vision Master 17”, 3-4-3
ROS Hardware, 3-4-1
Rotating (Alphanumeric) Keyboard, Pedestal
Command Console, 3-2-5
router, 3-4-15
RPQNA, 7-4-5
RS--232C
pin assignments, 7-2-4
SCI cabling, 7-2-3
signal names, 7-2-3
RS--422
pin assignments, 7-2-7
SCI
cabling, 7-2-6
X.25 cabling, 7-2-11
X.25 clocking, 7-2-13
X.25 protocol, 7-2-9
signal names, 7-2-6
RS3
Network Interface (RNI), 3-4-9
Operator Station, 3-4-2
RS3 Network Interface, 7-6-1, 7-6-2
RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card, 5-4-13
fuse, 5-4-19
jumpers, 5-4-17
LEDs, 5-4-16
RS232 pin assignments, 5-4-15
RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card
fuse, 5-4-24
jumpers, 5-4-23
LEDs, 5-4-22
RS422 pin assignments, 5-4-22
RTD, 5-3-16
RTD FEM, checking calibration, 8-4-9
RTD MUX MARSHALLING PANEL, 5-3-10
Rush Brush, 9-3-2
S
scheduled maintenance, 9-1-1
SCI (Supervisory Computer Interface)
EIA options, 7-2-15
hardware, 7-2-1
SCI Bubble Memory, 3-7-60
Scorpion
5945C, 3-5-23
5945S, 3-5-23
Index
SV: Index-16
Scratchpad, 3-1-10
screen
Configure HIA, 7-3-9
ControlFile Status, 10-4-7
FIC Detail, 10-5-18
FIC Status, 10-5-13
Field I/O Status, 10-5-13
FIM Detail, 10-5-18
FIM Status, 10-5-13
HIA Status, 7-3-11
Memory Dump, 10-3-12
Memory View, 10-3-16
Menu Confidence, 10-3-20
Node Dump, 10-3-19
Off--Line Diagnostics, 10-3-8
PeerWay Backup Node, 10-2-12
PeerWay Node, 10-2-12
PeerWay Overview, 10-2-9
PeerWay Performance, 10-2-3
Plant Status, 10-2-2
Screwdrivers, 9-3-1
SCSI, 3-7-52
jumpers, 3-7-56
LEDs, 3-7-55
SCSI BOARD 2, 3-7-52
Serial I/O, troubleshooting procedures, 10-5-3
Serial I/O FIC, calibrating, 8-1-1
SERIAL MARSHALLING PANEL, 5-1-54
SERIAL PROCESSOR, 4-3-2
Server, 10-2-14
Single Feed AC Entrance Panel, 1-1-3
SINGLE STRATEGY PROCESSOR, 4-3-25
Single--Strategy Controller Processor. See SSC
Single--Strategy FlexTerm, 5-5-1, 5-5-4
analog wiring, 5-5-5
contact wiring, 5-5-5
replacement, 9-2-11
SIO, RTD/TC, 5-1-46
Small Computer System Interface. See SCSI
Smart Transmitter Daughterboard
Analog FIC, 5-1-35
installation, 5-1-38
Kit, 5-1-37
LEDs, 5-1-40
Smart Transmitter FIC, 5-5-13
fuses, 5-5-14
jumpers, 5-5-14
LEDs and test points, 5-5-13
SMART TRANSMITTER OPTION, 5-1-37
SMART XMTR FIC, 5-5-13
Socket, 10-2-14
solid state relay
High Density Isolated Discrete Termination
Panel, 6-3-45
Isolated Discrete Termination Panel, 6-3-38
Sony 14” CRT, 3-1-27
SRU, hardware, 7-1-1
SSC, 4-3-25
fuses, 4-3-27
LEDs, 4-3-35
Standard Keyswitch Keyboard Interface , 3-1-16
RS3: Service Manual
STANDARD REMOTE TERMINATION PANEL,
6-5-2
Standard Remote Termination Panel, 6-3-1, 6-5-2
Star Coupler, 2-2-9
static pad, 9-3-2
status bits
analog, 10-5-13
contact, 10-5-13
discrete I/O, 10-5-13, 10-5-18
pulse, 10-5-13
Supervisory Computer Interface. See SCI
System Manager Station, 3-1-1
electronics cabinet, 3-7-4
System Power Supply, checking voltages, 9-1-26
System Resource Unit. See SRU
T
Tandberg, 5623, 3-5-23
tape drive, 3-5-1, 3-5-23
cleaning, 9-1-4
grounding, 3-5-24
jumpers, 3-5-25
switches, 3-5-25
Tape Drive Head Cleaner, Refill Kit, 9-1-4
Tape Drive Head Cleaning Kit, 9-3-2
TC/RTD FIC, 5-1-46
Temperature Input FIC, 5-1-46
calibrating, 8-2-1
fuse, 5-1-53
jumpers, 5-1-52
LEDs, 5-1-51
Terminal Block, Marshaling Panel Auxiliary, 5-1-57
termination panel
Direct Discrete, 6-3-14
Direct Discrete II, 6-3-4
Discrete High Density Isolated, 6-3-41
Discrete Multi--FIM, 6-3-23
Isolated Discrete, 6-3-28
Standard Remote, 6-5-2
TERMINATOR CONTROLFILE BOTTOM, 4-1-7
test points
Analog Transfer Card, 5-1-16
Battery Charger Card, 1-2-11
ControlFile
5 and 12 V DC Power Regulator, 4-2-16
5 V DC Only Power Regulator, 4-2-9
CP, 4-2-29
Isolated Analog Input FIC, 5-5-16
Isolated Analog Output, 5-5-29
Non--Isolated Analog Input FIC, 5-5-10
Non--Isolated Analog Output FIC, 5-5-24
NV Memory
bubble, 4-2-52
RAM, 4-2-44– 4-2-46
OI NV RAM, 3-7-74
PeerWay Buffer, 4-2-4
Smart Transmitter FIC, 5-5-13
Thermocouple and Voltage FEM, 5-3-16
Thermocouple FEM, calibrating, 8-4-3
Index
SV: Index-17
thermocouple sensor, redundancy, 8-2-7
TI 810 printer, 3-6-20
TI 960B, 7-5-6
TI Communications Card, 7-5-6
TIC, definition, 10-2-13
TIC Master, 10-2-13
Time Interval Controller. See TIC
tool kit, 9-3-1
tools, recommended, 9-3-1
TOUCH PANEL, 3-1-10
Touchpad, 3-1-10
TOUCHPAD KEYBOARD, 3-1-13
Touchpad Keyboard Electronics Board, 3-1-13
tower electronics cabinet, 3-7-2
TP/8 Hub, 3-4-11
TRACKBALL 68HC05, 3-1-13
Trackball Assembly, 3-1-8
TRACKBALL KEYBOARD, 3-1-13
Trackball Keyboard, 3-1-8
Assembly, 3-1-8
cleaning, 9-1-5
Pedestal Command Console, 3-2-4
replacement subassembly, 3-1-8
replacing trackball, 9-1-5
Trackball Keyboard Electronics Board, 3-1-13
TRACKBALL SW MATRIX, 3-2-4
troubleshooting
Analog I/O, 10-5-8
consoles, 10-3-1
ControlFiles, 10-4-1
fiber optic PeerWay cables, 10-2-42
Input/Output, 10-5-1
OI Card Cage problems, 10-3-24
PeerWay, 10-2-1
PeerWay Interface Devices, 10-6-1
power system, 10-1-1
Serial I/O, 10-5-3
Twinax PeerWay cables, 10-2-41
Twinax PeerWay, 2-1-1
cable, 2-1-9
termination, 2-1-11
troubleshooting cables, 10-2-41
Twinax PeerWay Tap Boxes, 2-1-3
twinaxial connector
crimp type, 2-1-12
solder type, 2-1-12
Universal Voltage FEM, 5-3-16
UPS, 3-4-16
V
Vacuum Cleaner, 9-3-2
VAX QBUS Interface, 7-4-1
VAX QBUS Interface Board 1, jumpers, 7-4-10
VAX QBUS Interface Board 2
jumpers, 7-4-13
LEDs, 7-4-15
VAX QBUS Interface Marshalling Panel, LEDs,
7-4-7
Video Generator
Character Graphics, 3-7-42
Monochrome, 3-3-7
Pixel Graphics, 3-7-39
Viper
2060S, 3-5-23
2150S, 3-5-23
Voltage Input FEM, calibrating, 8-4-3
Voltage MUX Marshaling Panel, 5-3-7
VOLTAGE MUX MARSHALLING PANEL, 5-3-7
W
Winchester disk drive. See hard disk drive
Wipe Bubble procedure, 10-4-9
wiring color codes, 1-4-10
X
X.25 protocol, 7-2-9
SCI, 7-2-9
cabling, 7-2-11
clocking, 7-2-13
U
Y
uninterruptible power supply, 3-4-16
Y cable, 5-3-3
RS3: Service Manual
Index
SV: Index-18
RS3: Service Manual
Index